Home

User Guide

1. 00065 166 Online survey 00 000 eee eee eee 127 Paper survey 126 Search for SurveyS 436 Survey details 0 000 eee eee 108 Survey period 2 00 000 eee ee eee 39 Survey procedures 99 Survey details 108 DUNGY ID geet Er et a 8 eo eee eo 118 Survey view 194 Surveys Non anonymous surveys 25050005 67 System El recreen riere salon ee een aA 28 Password 29 System cleaning 0000 00 ee eee 452 System cleaning 452 System information 443 System management 000 433 System Security CAPTCHA EEN 29 System security 26 System settings 433 System start up 0 0 0 ee ee eee 26 System summary 433 T Table configuration 339 Template Defining a template by the administrator 420 Defining general templates 420 DOCUMENT EE 32 PDF templates 0 002 ee eee 471 Template for letterin PDF reports 461 Templates for email messages 458 TEXT ati ena e ENEE 32 Text templates nunnana aaa 456 Use of templates in instructor accounts 421 Text template 456 Text templates 32 RE die EE 120 RE 120 Delete surveyS A ue SN EE ts been 126 Display SurveyS 123 Generate SurveyS 124 Type Of Course 2 ee 40 U Update Notification 000 29 506 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite User Searching for users 00000 eee 434 User acc
2. 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 135 Your Evaluation Process The Phase ZA Language Sets fen E le rie Model K Ambis thin Actwyit a LNE PU mate cies 10 res votum_ls de_edu inc php Deutsch Hochschulen D View 12 res votum_ls de_com inc php Deutsch Seminaranbieter D View 11 res votum_ls en_edu inc php English Higher Education D View 13 res votum_ls en_com inc php English Seminar Providers D View 9 data online lanquagesets lang_ set_9 inc php Bahasa Indonesia 3 data online lanquagesets lang_set_3 inc php Espa ol D view amp Delete 4 data online langquagesets lang_set_4 inc php Francais D View amp Delete 7T data online languagesets lang_set_ inc php Magyar view amp Delete 8 data online languagesets lang_set_8 inc php Nederlands View amp Delete 5 data online lanquagesets lang_set_5 inc php Svenska gt View I Delete 6 data online languagesets lang_set_6 inc_php pir View amp Delete Figure 133 Overview of the Language Sets EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite To view an existing language set click in the column Activities in the line of the respective language set on View An overview of the language messages with the current translation will be displayed In the following example you can see the transla tion from the system language English into Spanish Language set View Abstention alice Almacenar temporalmente Save temporarily j Siguiente gt
3. Table 9 VividForms Placeholders Click one of the placeholder fields in the questionnaire s header in order to select the placeholders which you wish to insert 174 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys The following figure shows an example questionnaire header In the left hand side the text Participant has been inserted as well as variables for the first name and sur name Bec Paper Course AUTHOR ISURVEY COURSEID Mark as shown omgog E MARK Correction DEORAO CORRECTION Figure 187 Customization of a Questionnaire Here through the Name in the Header In the case of a survey data of specific participants is inserted here so that during implementation it is clearly visible which questionnaire was distributed to whom Implementing a Non anonymous Paper Survey When you create a survey with a customized questionnaire for a course for which par ticipant data was imported EvaSys assumes that it is a non anonymous survey Therefore for paper surveys each questionnaire has to be personalized for example the participants name has to appear in header This is why the cover sheet proce dure is not suitable for non anonymous surveys However you can also use the function Print Cover sheets Forms in batch proce dures so as to produce personalized PDF questionnaires for all survey participants To do this select in the
4. 415 418 Requirement Implementation of specific design requirements Vivid Forms PIUS s sei aaa s ii n K or a E 428 Response Rate 113 Rules for scanning 189 S Sample Files 13 Scaled question eler UE e Alle oe peat seca hers top em Ge wh alg Beck wp ann ww 382 Dual scale a 2 wiih are arene Bor ace awed aa aoe hw 380 MINMONNG 6 2 4 22 8442444 200600 eeeua0e0e4 380 Scan station 188 Backing up the original image files from scan station 35 Scan station software 188 2011 Electric Paper GmbH Scanning Important rules for scanning 189 Scanning the forms 188 SOJO ige ee neces dan eeu bad awa es aad 433 Search for courses 435 Search for deliveries 436 Search for surveyS 436 Search function e 433 Searching for users 0000 00 ee 434 Searchmask 0000 eee eee eee 433 Search configuration 339 Secondary Administrator 200 54 Section Central Evaluation 489 Section Color Settings 491 Section Course User Data Fields 485 Section Email Functions amp Accounts 490 Section Functions a a aoaaa aaa aeaaea 486 Section General 2 2 0 ee ee 477 Section Instructor Accounts Decentral Eval 492 Section Maintenance 005 497 Section Network Settings 493 Section Survey Online 481 484 Section Survey 2 0 0 ee ee 479 Section Vivid
5. WARNING The surveys will be deleted irrevocably Figure 113 Deleting Surveys This function allows you to delete large numbers of surveys As with all other dialogs you have an intelligent option which only displays the valid options 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 119 EvaSys YV Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Select 1 One or more subunits 2 One or more survey periods 3 One or more course types 4 One or more questionnaires 5 One or more courses After clicking on Delete the data will be deleted from the system The deletion process may take between a couple of seconds and a few minutes depending on the amount and size of the surveys selected 3 2 5 Tree Structure In the menu Tree Structure it is possible to view the structure of subunits instructors and classes built in the system in a hierarchical tree structure Also hidden layers such as the program of study or the user defined fields of a course can be made visible and used for survey administration Furthermore the features of display creation and deletion of surveys as described in previous sections can be undertaken directly via the tree structure Displaying the organizational structure is enabled in the system by default If neces sary this display can be switched in the system settings System Settings EvaSys Settings Functions Open Tree Structure The arrangement and number of levels
6. Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Guetta Sule e Evaluation period Continuous which means that the course can be surveyed more than one time or a specific period e g WS11 12 e Location Optional information e Number of participants The number of students participants in a class can be used to create the appropriate number of PSWDs for online surveys or question naires Apart from this up to five so called user defined course fields are available which can be defined at will in the example below language and location Furthermore further report recipients resp secondary instructors trainers can be assigned to each course Edit course of Dr Richelle White Course Introduction into Sociology name Program of social Sciences Sociology study Course ID 02 P1246 Evaluation continuous bai period Course Type Lecture e Location R P 061 Enrollment 80 Participants Anonymous survey participants data Non anonymous survey participants panel Language english v Further repor recipients secondary instructors d existing Department Training Donna Harwood v Add Department Training Donna Harwood Remove SSC Figure 43 Create Course 62 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys YV Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period Adding Editing and Deleting Courses Manually To access the course list of an instructor trainer open the user li
7. Above the Arrow back and Arrow forward buttons you can undo editing steps 374 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Geen Auidmatiin Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor Dy Question group Wizard New question group Page 1 Title B IU La S General Questions Presentation Slide Text Indicator No indicator Font Size 13pt Text Element F am Figure 487 Create a Question Group Presentation slide text This text appears on the presentation slide in the PDF report in order to explain an indicator Please note This option is only available when the creation of a presentation tem plate is activated in the PDF report settings System Settings Report Settings Config uration Indicator Select a scale for the questions that are to be combined to an average Indicator No indicator ze Font Size No indicator Se a Scaled questions with 2 options Text Element Scaled questions with 3 options Scaled questions with 4 options Scaled questions with 5 options Scaled questions with 6 options Scaled questions with 7 options Scaled questions with 8 options Scaled questions with 9 options scaled questions with 10 options Scaled questions with 11 options Figure 488 Indicator Selection of a Question Group The possibility of highlighting the question groups is activated in the menu Form Properties in the VividForms Editor 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 375
8. Calculation of a tolerance range for lower threshold 40 upper threshold 60 e e g 4 point scale Distance of three whole units between 1 and 4 Lower threshold e 40 0 4 of the three units 3 0 4 1 2 e Add the value of 1 2 to the starting value of the scale 1 as there has to be ticked at least the value 1 equals 2 2 Upper threshold e 60 0 6 of the three units 3 0 6 1 8 e Add the value of 1 8 to the starting value of the scale 1 equals 2 8 1 2 3 4 Figure 427 Quality Guideslines Three whole Units Beginning at 1 Upper l Lower Thre Threshold Resulting Quality Type of Scale SE shold 40 60 Guideline 4 point scale Higher values are better gt 2 2 2 8 Table 16 Threshold Values Example of a 4 Point Scale 330 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey AutomationSute SO OF Heatly Management After you have chosen all settings click on Convert these indicators in order to cre ate the quality guidelines Afterwards quality indices for all surveys that were con ducted with this questionnaire are computed automatically As usual a green circle symbolizes a quality guideline that has been fully met and a red circle one that has not been met with several stages in between White crosses on red background denote that there are no results available for this survey yet Figure 428 Quality Guideslines Re Calculation of Quality Indices I
9. Using place holders defines this message type as follows SALUTATION TITLE SURNAME You will receive as attachment to this email the report to the survey SURVEY Your EvaSys Administrator E 464 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Configuration Settings Here is a list of all permitted placeholders for email texts as well as PDF letters SALUTATION TITLE GENDER FIRSTNAME SURNAME SURVEY SURVEY LIST FORMCOUNT PERIOD_NAME QUESTIONARY DIMENSIONS SUBUNIT ADDRESS COURSENAME COURSEID PROGRAMOFSTUDY COURSEROOM COURSEENROLLMENT COURSETYPE CUSTOMFIELD X CURRENTDATE SURVEYCREATIONDATE 2011 Electric Paper GmbH Form of Address e g Dear Mr or Dear Me Title e g Prof Gender male or female First name Surname Name of survey List of all surveys important when sending the PDF reports collected in one email batch events Number of returns for survey Name of the Survey Period Name of the questionnaire Name of the dimensions question groups Name of subunit User s address Course name Course identification Course s program of studies Course s room location Number of course participants Course type Course s user defined fields X 1 bis 5 Current date Date of survey creation 465 System Settings and Management LASTCAPTUREDATE SEC TITLE_X ISEC_FIRSTNAME_ Xj
10. 201 Data expo 6 56 4 aoe wo aes wads So idini 434 Data export to Excel 000005 309 Data export to Sphinx 309 Data export to SPSS 0005 309 Data import to ane Raw Ge oo me oS ee ee we 484 Database Backing up the database 34 Dean Report forthe dean 000005 299 Dean of studies Report for the dean of studies 299 Decentral evaluation Instructor accounts 492 Defining Defining a template by the administrator 420 Defining general templates 420 Delete Delete compilations and subgroup reports 453 Delete survey 119 Deleting Deleting a group from the library 415 Deleting a question from the library 414 Deletion og 451 RE 438 452 Search for deliveries 436 501 Design Designing an individually configured letter for sending reports Individually designed reports 230 Design requirement Implementation of specific design requirements Vivid Forms PluS 220 24edeeuc 86h 0006506 es 428 Desktop Sharing 16 Details of Survey 108 Dispatch of comparative profile lines 288 Display survey os 2ccn0k5e2e neeeo e eae 104 Document vs REEL EI IEN wh ee we wt A 32 Documentation 12 Documents 470 Download of reports 233 Dual scale 0 0 eee ee 380 E Editing Editing on questionnaires 423 Editing Participant Data
11. 66 Editing participant data 0 170 Editor Editor Control a et 8 EN NNN EEN 360 Editor Control 0 0 0 eee ee ee 360 Element Adding graphical elements 400 Email HTML format 467 Writing email 437 email addresses Import of course participants email addresses Email attachments 471 Email messages 0 000 eee ene 458 Sub WEEN 456 Entries inthe log book 452 Entry Manual entry of handwritten comments 201 Error Analysis of errors 453 Evaluation Central evaluation 22 103 Evaluation contra 22 Evaluation of scanned questionnaires 191 Evaluation workflow 37 Linking of questionnaires to course types 343 Module evaluation 342 Process of evaluation 37 The phase model 37 Evaluation periods 0 000 cues 40 Evaluation process 0000 eee aee 37 Evaluation statistics SEN Evasys Administrator Manual 0005 24 Basic terminology 24 Configuration 30 EvaSys Website 14 Structure of the EvaSys system 17 The EvaSys user types 50 EvaSys settings Configuration 475 502 EvaSys v Survey Automation Suite Export Batch export 4 haa on brace bee os baw et oe 439 Data export 484 Data Export to Excel 309 Export of VividForms questionnaires 425 F Feedback Capture feedback 188 Instant feedback
12. Create complete sets of questionnaires based on number of participants 25 Default value if enrollment information is missing Figure 166 Batch Events Producing Questionnaires with Page Numbering Click Request to begin the procedure You will now be redirected to a page display ing an overview of the courses you have selected Each of the columns in the table show the name of the course the questionnaire used the number of questionnaires already printed the number of participants of the course and the number of question naires still to be printed 160 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys The number of copies is equal to the number of participants of the course If in an earlier process questionnaires for a course were created using the batch printing function this is considered in the number of copies made The number of copies can be altered retrospectively so that larger or smaller quantities can be printed In the footer the total number of pages to be printed is stated whereby the page number of the PDF file can be checked gt Questionnaire batch print amp Professional Development Philipp Belmore 5 ss11 Name Form Already printed No of Participants Copies Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle NA_1 Quest_01 0 T 7 Management Strategies NA_2 7 train_en 0 5 5 amp Professional Development Carlos Hernande
13. Details of the participants Details of the participants Course Introduction into Sociology Title First Name Last name Email joe doe example com Address Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Cancel Save Figure 53 Entering the Email Address of Anonymous Participants All other existing fields here for example forename and surname are deactivated because this survey is anonymous Although you can t see this in the graphic If ina similar constellation you try to enter something into EvaSys you will realize that this is not possible Editing the email address in the area Details of the participants is no longer possible If you have entered an email address incorrectly you can klick Cancel here and delete it After this you can enter it into the system again of course If your entry is correct click on Save to insert this email address into the course 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 69 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Administrate participants Participants of Introduction into Sociology joe doe example com g Add Delete al Figure 54 Email of a Participant was Added In the case of erroneous input or a changed email address you can also delete the email address here To do this click in the relevant column on the red cross As already mentioned you also have the possibility of importing the email addresses of your anon
14. Fully agree Fully agree Fully agree Fully agree Figure 226 Verification Filling Degrees in PDF View For an empirical analysis of the degrees of shading measured the values can also be recalled from a CSV export This feature is by default disabled and can only be acti vated by the administrator via the configuration option Maintenance CSV export of filling degrees in the Verifier The CSV file is structured in the following way SHEET FORM PAGE QUESTION TYPE ROWINDEX F1 F2 F3 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 199 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model A B L D E F G H 1 SHEET FORM PAGE QUESTION TYPE ROWINDEX F1 F2 F3 2 d 293 1 3590 Single Choice 0 0 38 3 2 293 1 3591 Single Choice 0 42 72 0 4 2 293 1 3591 Single Choice 0 0 0 Figure 227 Verification CSV Export of Blackening Degrees Each line in the CSV file equals one line of the questionnaire The table contains the following information from left to right SHEET Number of scanned page in the page FORM Internal form ID PAGE Page number of a questionnaire QUESTION Internal question ID TYPE Question type e g Single Choice Matrix Field Scaled Question ROWINDEX Indicates the line of a question normally the rowindex 0 each further question will be numerated in ascending order 1 2 Open questions always have a rowindex 0 even if they have more than one line F1
15. Geen Ame matiin Sule Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys A B Cc D 1 Survey PSWD Email Participated 2 Organization and Management L4XVZ s pabriel example com No 3 Organization and Management 4768P m green example com Yes 4 Organization and Management VW4J2E f hernandez example com No 5 Organization and Management 4DQLZ p townsend example com Yes 6 Organization and Management 54UGY l portman example com Yes 7 Organization and Management T6x amp 8P s miller example com Yes amp Organization and Management X6GTX r stevenson example com No 9 Organization and Management HAJ95 t c bowman example com No 10 Organization and Management RVJSE b smith example com Yes 11 Organization and Management JTZEF s rutherford example com Yes Figure 132 Example CSV File of Participation Tracking As soon as you call up the participation tracking for online surveys for which you dis tributed PSWD cards instead of sending the PSWDs per email the email column remains empty Online Surveys Customization of the Language Used If additional languages for system messages are to be made available to online sur vey participants you can integrate them in EvaSys For online surveys this refers to short messages such as Continue Send and Save temporarily but also to longer texts such as The red marked multiple choice questions have more options selected than allowed Please reduce the number of selected options accordingly Please note here we ar
16. Import instructors from CSV File CSV file contains a column with information whether the course has secondary instructors Figure 61 CSV Import of Structural Data 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 15 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model After clicking the Import button a synchronisation view will be displayed CSV import d i Create new user or course Accept the changes in the CSV file Delete user or course Deleting a course means deleting all surveys too ah Archive user The user gets a new status and new results cannot be added to their surveys Change the evaluation period for all courses continuous e d 2 AS a Instructor Mr Prof Dr Adam Smith user example com d Course Introduction to Economics ECS001 Lecture d l Economics Engineering 25 Evaluation period continuous Undefined values in course user data fields d 2 RS Instructor Mrs Dr Erica Miller user example com d Course Legal Environments ECS002 Lecture E Economics 25 Evaluation period continuous Undefined values in course user data fields Figure 62 CSV Import Synchronization Overview When a new CSV import with updated data is made in a survey period the user can decide how to proceed in the case of doubling or changes a The user account or course is not in the database and is now added Default The user data have changed for example the email address or title The
17. In EvaSys there are four types of online survey templates e Predefined standard templates The predefined standard templates are firmly integrated in EvaSys and are used as the default for online surveys e Customized online survey templates The customized online survey templates can be created in EvaSys without any previous technical knowledge or knowledge of programming The colors of these online survey templates can be adapted to your wishes your corporate design In addition an individual logo can be integrated too 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 139 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite You can create any number of customized online survey templates and use them for each subunit individually Also subunit administrators can define their own cus tomized online survey templates e CSS Editing Use CSS editing to modify colors positions and rendering of each element of your online survey requires advanced knowledge in CSS edition e Advanced Template Editing Use the whole set of files to change absolutely anything in the layout of your online survey requires advanced object oriented PHP programming and extended knowl edge of accessibility requirements When using standard templates or a customized online template based upon the stan dard template the size of the template is automatically optimized for the screen reso lution of the client that is as well as PC s mobile dev
18. In this way for example all deactivated tasks in the section Finish survey can be edited immediately Or all open task can be immediately performed or deactivated 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 133 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Online Surveys Sending PSWDs In online surveys the EvaSys administrator either sends the PSWDs by batch email to the survey participants or sends emails with PDF files containing the PSWDs to the instructors trainers so that they can distribute the PSWDs to the participants directly Instead of sending the PSWD and the server address for the online evaluation you can use the placeholder DIRECT ONLINE LINK This placeholder adds a link to the online survey that contains the server address as well as the PSWD password Simply clicking the link therefore shows the online questionnaire e Batch emails e The PSWDs are sent to the survey participants using an email address list This dispatch is carried out by the EvaSys server e Using the reminder function you can send an email at a later time to all PSWD recipients who have not yet taken part in the survey e PSWD cards e The PSWDs are produced as a PDF document These PSWD cards have an entry code the Internet address as well as the name of the survey These PSWD docu ments can be either opened by the administrator or sent to the instructor trainer per email The possibilties of distributing
19. Sender part 3 as well as Sender above recipient address PSWD cards for online surveys For online surveys you mostly need a number of so called PSWDs transaction authorization code A PSWD is a number character combination that serves for the unique identification and the login of the students participants When generating an online survey a PDF file with the necessary number of PSWD is created The PDF contains the PSWDs as cards that can be cut out and distrib uted to the students participants On the cards you will find an explanation text that can be changed at System Settings EvaSys Settings page Survey Online There you will find the option Instruction text for PSWD cards The default text is This PSWD allows you to participate in an online survey Please use a web browser to open the following web address PSWD documents can now be generated in four different formats 3x8 PSWDs per page A4 2x PSWDs per page A4 3x PSWDs per page A4 3x6 PSWDs per page Letter The standard setting is the original format of 3x8 PSWDs A4 The format of the PSWD document can be selected in the configuration System Settings EvaSys Settings Survey Online Format PSWD document 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 31 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Preparation and General Notes e Cover Sheets When conducting paper cover sheet surveys in addition to the questionnaire a cover s
20. Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys The batch events are located in the menue Subunits Batch Events They offer vari ous process automation possibilities connected to the distribution of survey forms and survey reports Please observe that when selecting subunits survey periods course types and courses multiple selections can be made by pressing and holding down the Ctrl key The following processes may be selected in batch mode Print Cover Sheets Forms For a selection of surveys the personalized cover sheets or questionnaires will be generated as a single PDF file It is possible to generate either a master copy or com plete sets of questionnaires based on enrolment figures You can define the maximum number of pages in a batch event under System Settings EvaSys Settings Vivid Forms Maximum amount of pages that can be printed through batch printing of forms The batch printing function enables you to create a large number of personalized cover sheets or questionnaires as PDF files Select 1 the subunit 2 the survey period 3 the course type 4 the questionnaire as well as 5 a multiple choice of courses press Ctrl key Batch Events a Print Cover Sheets Forms Print PDF reports Send Cover Sheets Forms Send PDF reports Archive PDF reports and CSV raw data Send PDF reports as instructor profiles Send PSW Ds to Instructors Hide surveys with documents which have already been
21. Survey Automation Suite Request preferred compilation Your choice Compilation name train_en train_en_1 Questionnaire train_en train_en_1 No of Surveys 24 No of completed questionnaires 304 The report creation may take a moment Please wail until an actnowledgment has been sent bach from the server Create Choice train_en train_en_1 Differences 5 Which gender do you belong to Which gender do you belong to male female male female F What is your age What is your age 18 29 30 39 40 49 50 59 60 69 Older than 69 18 29 30 39 40 49 50 59 60 69 Older than 69 5 What ts your age What is your age 18 99 18 99 E What is the grade of your last school graduation What is the grade of your last school graduation How many terms have you been studying so far How many terms have you been studying so far 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 More than 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 More than 11 Figure 302 Report Creator Automatic Questionnaire Comparison Overview On the bottom of the page you can change the basis questionnaire Furthermore you can specify by how many characters the questions and or the modality text texts describing the check mark boxes can vary Change base form train_en train_en_1 search limit Maximum amount of different characters in the question text 10 Maximum amount of different characters in the modality text 5 Apply Changes Figure 303
22. Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Geer J Subunit details Subunit Name Professional Development Dept No 15 Logo File system logo Phone Fax Street Address ZIP Code City Email Online survey template My new Template Peter Brown ste a for online surveys of this 5 492 168 245 129 evasys_01 online Subunit visibility Unrestricted we IV Show the subunit in the context menu Subunits Assign user licenses Iv unlimited Handling of handwritten texts Direct display default setting Display after manual collection note customizable threshold System settings EvaSys Settings Surveys O Never display Figure 229 Activation of Manual Entry of Handwritten Comments Create a user account of the type Data Entry Assistant and log in with the login data or aS an administrator Subunit Administrator change to the role of Data Entry Assis tant A list of all surveys containing images is displayed Data collection with anonymous handwriting comments Folder Hernandez WS10 11 Professional Development j wie Wane ey Fa es ee eh iv j z nk aia ge ID j name P ateei A DEE been ts Ae Le ee ee l WW GA rer KR 45538 Organization and Management 6 0 12 5 2011 11 59 Figure 230 Data Entry Assistant Survey Overview After clicking on the corresponding survey ID the first image will be displayed The contents can be entered into the text window below the picture
23. Actions click on the option Convert survey to password based survey 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 153 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Show PSWDs in browser _ Receive PSWDs by email C Send PSWDs by email to respondents J Download PSWDs in CSV File Generate more PSWDs 0 Number of participants for calculating response rate 9 Accept Preview online survey Scheduled Tasks Finish Data Collection Close Survey id Edit Show notes Figure 157 Convert survey to password based survey The PSWD based online survey will now be converted into a password based online survey You will see a warning message that this operation cannot be undone Con firm the message with Yes Sir Change Are you sure you want to convert this survey to a password based survey This command cannot be undone Figure 158 Confirm warning message By default the password is the first PSWD of the original PSWD based survey To change the password click on the option Change password This opens a dialog where you can enter the new password Change password A Send password via email Q Preview online survey Number of participants fo rate 9 P Finish Data Collection C amp Delete Survey fa Assign survey to substitute instructor H Edit Show notes Change password Password SCZLJ Figure 159 Change pass
24. English Higher Education v Please note that VividF orms only supports multiple languages for online sumeys Figure 77 Languages Define Attributes Translate Questionnaire After a click on Save you will see the complete contents of the questionnaire Le question groups question texts pole labels and answer options On top of the entry boxes the texts of the main language are displayed in the text boxes you can now enter the translations see picture above The translations are saved automatically by EvaSys Under the button Save at the end of the page you can see at any time when your translation was last automatically saved by EvaSys 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 93 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Auncmation Sul Question Text The instructor is always well prepared Left Right Der Die Lehrende ist immer gut vorbereitet The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way Der Die Lehrende erkl rt auch schwierige Sachverhalte verst ndlich The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc without any problems Der Die Lehrende bedient die technische Ausstattung Beamer etc ohne Probleme Please grade the instructor for this course poor very good abst Bitte geben Sie dem der Lehrenden fir diesen mangelhaft sehr gut k A Kurs eine Gesamtnote Figure 78 Languages DefiningTexts You can also make changes in language texts and in the
25. Letter PDF Report Evaluation to Instructor 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 209 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model When comparing the sample PDF letter with the text template in the figure above you will notice that the texts are identical apart from those areas written in capitals and set in angular brackets This text template is automatically used as the text in the letter The words that are written in capitals and marked through angular brackets serve as placeholders and will in the case of an actual letter be replaced by the respective val ues SALUTATION is replaced by Dear Ms Dear Mr or similar TITLE is replaced by Prof Dr Dr if existent SURNAME e g by Harwood A list of all available placeholders can be found in chapter D The Layout of the Letter You design the letter using a PDF template which you can upload in Documents in the main menu System Settings EvaSys e Subunits Questionnaires y Aor on Lamm System Information e814 iV E Documents useable as email attachments x Description File name Size Type Preview Delete Peter Brown e Description File name Brosse Save E T Ve Report Sefings Drine Ter SA Gatpdadez SR PDF templates Configuration EvaSys Settings Description File name Size Preview Delete Define Tree Structure Sample Letter Custom Cover Letter
26. Managpemeni ZSbaieaes NA 2 Managing and maintaining a healivy ifestyie MA 1 3 gt oj Display Surv va Kl Delete Survey instructor s Options Carfos Hen Sg 8 GE Ca Human Resource Management 02 P1237 Proceed inimii Leadership Development 02 P1234 i b Batch Events Organization and Management 02 P1236 GE Display Courses Data impor Get Lt y ER amp EA E bi Eh Si va a Figure 161 Activate Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions Activate Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions Administrator Account After the creation of surveys the administrator can activate the Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions System Settings EvaSys Settings Survey Instructor s Trainer s Optional Questions activation status which offers access to a website On this webpage instructors trainers can enter their questions The EvaSys item library can be made use of as it offers a collection of valid items System Settings EvaSys Settings Survey Instructor s Trainer s Optional Questions question library gt activated Changes to the course data can be either authorized or blocked System Settings EvaSys Settings Survey Instructor s Trainer s Optional Questions modify course data gt Activated This procedure offers the opportunity to send instructors trainers the personalized PDF questionnaire for printing once they have completed the Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions Alternativel
27. OW ba ck around color Examples which illustrate explanations marked with a light blue background All paths concerning the database are related to an installation with a MySQL data base If you use an MS SQL database please ask your database administrator for the appropriate path All paths concerning the EvaSys root folder are related to an installation using an Apache web server If you use an IIS Internet Information Server instead the stan dard path is C inetoub wwwroot evasys 1 1 Manuals and Documentation In the following you receive an overview on the manuals and example files available for EvaSys and its special components 1 1 1 User Guide You now have the User Guide at hand There are several options of opening reading it e AsaPDF document you will find it in the administrator s access in the main menu System Information on the left side in the area Documentation Manuals Here a listing all EvaSys manuals is shown e You will find the manual again in PDF format in the index of the Apache folder on the EvaSys server index Apache htdocs evasys doc there you will find the docu ment Administrator Manual en EL However you cannot usually access it directly from the file system rather you should type the path into the browser for example http localhost evasys doc Administrator Manual en_E pdf The path component localhost should be replaced by your server name In relatio
28. Prof Develop ment in WS10 11 is displayed with the profile lines of the comparative report Prof Development WS10 11 defined above Carlos Hemandez Organization and Management Profile Subunit Professional Development T Name of the instructor Carlos Hemandez Name of the course Organization and Management l Name of the survey Comparative line Prof Development WS10 11 18 The instructor is always well prepared SO 0 ii S av 3 7 n 48 ge The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way Se Al t 4 1 A Ce 3 D A av 3 0 n 4 d nei The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc Sal SI av 4 4 without any problems Le av 3 7 n 45 j naig Please grade the instructor for this course el very good av 33 i a dv mes CAE The lead time of the course is adequate Strongly ind t Strongly agree a agree Dw avd pd Figure 397 Profile Line Comparison PDF Report with the Profile Line of the Report for Com parison 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 307 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Auncmation Sul In the questionnaire details you can define as many comparative reports as you may require In doing so please note that you can only define one comparative report per survey period and subunit This means that you cannot define any more comparative reports for the subunit Prof Development in WS10 11 if you alr
29. These types of single reports are also known as filtering The survey does not have to be closed when the subgroup reports are created mean ing that more data can yet be captured In this case the subgroup reports of an active instructor trainer can be updated automatically unlike those of the report creator An active instructor trainer can decide whether he wants to create a dynamic subgroup Dynamic subgroup reports are updated automatically upon receipt of new data This way repeating the creation of subgroups is prevented This function is particularly interesting when long term surveys are running and if over the course of the survey one wishes to follow up on reports filtered according to subgroups Because you can save the reports as PDF files at any time and thus keep them available even after an update The dynamic subgroup reports are only available through active instructor trainer accounts meaning that report creators cannot use this function Open the details of a survey and in the area survey data click on Evaluate subgroup Subgroup name Create Note Data compilation may take a moment Please click the button only once Figure 208 Creating a Dynamic Subgroup Should this option not appear please download the HTML or PDF analysis first and then click on Update Below the name of the subgroup the automated update can be specified by means of the check mark box Automatically recalculate
30. This means that the administrator as the central body can create active users or use those already in place These subsequently require their user name and pass word and can log on to the system through the usual EvaSys registration screen Via their user accounts these users can then depending on their type of authoriza tion implement all evaluation steps themselves This applies to e creating questionnaires The administrator assigns the right to create question naires per user Hence some users can create surveys however they can only use those questionnaires that are preset by the administrator Others can edit these central questionnaires but cannot create new ones etc e the implementation of paper and online surveys With existing questionnaires active interviewers can create new surveys as they see fit e the processing of a survey After evaluating the data an active instructor trainer automatically receives the survey s result which can be edited for example by summarizing it with other reports establishing subgroups based on specific criteria such as age gender etc and so on e the export as CSV file and into statistics tools such as SPSS and Sphinx Also active instructors trainers can of course edit the results of their surveys further in other programs Just like the administrator active instructors trainers access EvaSys via a web browser This means that they can theoretically access the system
31. Up and Down in the menu Move you can move entire chapters up or down To move a chapter one page forwards or backwards use the Copy Ctrl C 2 6 Adding and Editing Questions Should you wish to add a question to your questionnaire choose the option Add question in the Editor Control Please note You cannot add questions without first having created a question group and Paste Ctrl V e function in the menu Clipboard In a question group single questions can be moved up or down by using either the arrow symbols P and H in the menu Move or by drag and drop Le by right click ing on the question and dragging it to the desired position To move a question to another question group you may either use drag and drop or the cut gt e and paste i gt function in the menu Move 376 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor 2 6 1 Overview on the Question Types Scaled Questions Linear scales have up to 11 options In addition to the question text there are two texts at the scale poles Scaled questions can be grouped and averaged to indicators Scaled questions are also available for generating cross tabulations When needed a no opinion field can be added s DS D 0 1 7 55 0 33 3 The instructor explains even complex topics in a P e 8 SCH comprehensible way S ein dew
32. Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite 356 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Access to the VividForms Editor C Creating Questionnaires with VividForms With the VividForms Editor Electric Paper has introduced a form creation tool that is easy and quick to use allows you to extend or redesign existing questionnaires or design new questionnaires as desired directly over the web interface The content in VividForms questionnaires can be modified as desired Keep in mind that for ques tionnaires which already have surveys registered to them there is a edit lock As well as this the administrator can define his questionnaires as templates and make them available to active users instructors trainers for further processing 1 Access to the VividForms Editor Using the VividForms Editor is possible not only for the administrator subunit adminis trator but also for active users active instructors trainers Whereas administrator subunit administrators always have full access to the editor access rights for active users can be defined in the user properties The administrator can make the following settings for each user of an active account 2 Change the user rights QM Views Only own surveys additional subunits for QM views Unrestricted access VividForms Editor Unrestricted access Extension of templates only No access
33. can be additionally selected If you authorize the viewing of results the online survey participants have access to the HTML report as soon as the survey has been closed Each participant can use his 150 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys PSWD to again log on to the same page on which the questionnaire was previously available Instead of the questionnaire now the HTML report is accessible Tom M Reporting Options M Online Design Activated Mirrored scale values 4 Show the header of the survey dl Allow Summary Reports Enable temporary save M Survey Type Show print option ALL Design Complete V Allow result access Certificate of None m Arocedure Display answers to open participation ALL questions Advanced Edit dit configuration j Figure 152 Result for Online Survey Participants Authorization in the Questionnaire Important Only those participants who were logged in during the survey can now log in again to download the report The system verifies that the PSWD has already been used for this This ensures that nobody can log on who has received a PSWD but has not yet participated in the survey The information on the accessibility of results can be communicated to the partici pants via email once the survey has been closed It is however not a condition for accessing the results using the PSWD The email on
34. e The fill value of the response field is borderline e More than one checkbox has been checked for this question e The fill value of the checkbox field exceeds the upper fill value cancel checkmark Below the header you can see the original image box and below that the correction view In the correction view you can see the solution VividForms Reader suggests A click on the image box enlarges it in a separate window 196 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback Reader errors and warnings D Filling degree of checkbox is marginal 4 Filling deg i gi aoe Scanned Question You are T male E iale Revision single Choice You are male 5 female Invalid Figure 222 Verification Correction of a Scaled Question In the figure above you can see a scaled question with a fill value that is not above the threshold for positively identified checkmarks The checkmark was then displayed for verification As no other box was recognized as having a significant fill value the Vivid Forms verifier recommended to accept the left box as checked You can now correct this recommendation by selecting a different box or marking the answer to this ques tion as invalid By clicking on Next at the bottom of the view the correction is adopted and you are taken automatically to the next question By clicking on Back you can move backwards within a verificati
35. um Documents useable as email attachments Description File name Size Type Preview Delete Description File name Browse InNsiUMents Save BS Tex SCH H Documergs ve Report Settings Lie Template e i PDF templates Configuration GP EvaSys Settings Description File name Size Preview Delete S Define Tree Structure Sample Letter Custom Cover Letter Sample nd 72 KB A a W Course Types sample POF Letter Sample POF Letter paf 63 KB cl Z o Periods z aen Description File name Process Detog Browse Browse H Web Service Settings E i a Language Sets Save Figure 624 Document Administration The secure storage of documents in the EvaSys database means that they will be there when you need them e g email delivery Uploading documents Please enter the following information in order to upload documents Description Description of the document File name path to the document on your local system With a click on Save you can upload the document to the server In the table you can now see more information about the document columns 3 4 Size Size of the uploaded document in bytes Type File type of the document mime type 470 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Configuration Settings Updating documents Changes to documents must be first be done locally on a workplace computer Then upload the modified document again to the server Displayi
36. 0 7 Figure 489 Analysis of Scaled Questions Open Questions Responses to open questions are automatically recognized as answered during pro cessing and are integrated in the report document as image files If the responses have been manually anonymized or are part of an online survey then the responses are in machine print and can be exported together with the raw data Please give us your feedback about the instructor as well as suggestions for improvement Udy mwe and Hitadly H Lo o Ke Catch er ak d Ch ACs A C Skons m Flease give us your feedback about the instructor as well as suggestions for improvement E Very nice and friendly E We had enough time to ask questions Figure 490 a Illustration of a Result of an Open Question as Image File as well as b in Machine Print Form Grade Values Survey participants check a value paper survey or give directly a grade value online survey What is the grade of your last school graduation i RS SCENE Be dev 0 4 Figure 491 Illustration of a Question with Grade Value Single Choice 1 of n A single choice question has multiple answer options of which only one can be selected e g age gender etc Generally you can define as many answer options as necessary as long as there is enough room left on the page Nevertheless there are differences within this question type resulting from the number of answer options provided 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 377 Eva
37. 1 GG ae Ae JE v Economics SSi Quest_01 Course Type Re WS10 11 train_01 v Central Campus Su Zeen ALL m iv Philipp Belmore WS train WB ei WS06 07 erate y v Carlos Hernandez eng v A Media amp lnformation Center S05 Show v Philipp Belmore v Carlos Hernandez i sl Engineering ani x _ Computer Sciences Iv Show instructors 1777 Data Entry Demo Subunit Philipp Belmore 17 Verifier Demo Subunit 73 Human Resource Management 63 Management Strategies 62 Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle Hemandez GC 1de 46 Human Resource Management 66 Leadership Development 47 Organization and Management WARNING The surveys will be deleted irrevocably f Delete Surveys Figure 123 Tree Structure Deleting Surveys Select the desired course whose surveys are to be deleted and click on Delete Sur veys The surveys are now irrevocably deleted from the system 3 2 6 Conducting a Paper Survey Production of Questionnaires When using the cover sheet procedure questionnaires are given to a printing com pany for production and are then used as needed for surveys The cover sheets can 126 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Geen Ame matiin Sule Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys be centrally produced and distributed to the instructors trainers Alternatively the cover sheets can be sent to the instructor t
38. 202 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback Se Display the entire questionnaire page Picture No 2 of 6 from survey No 45538 Question Please give us your feedback about the instructor as well as suggestions for improvement one F Lay s L E Mad C at Hor ef sf Save Accept entered text The image snippet will be replaced by the text An empty text field will delete the image snippet Placeholder RePdce Replace automatically This Text is shown when validating handwritten fields Save sorted by frequency in the table Cancel P Very nice and friendly 1 Mention i Figure 231 Data Entry Assistant Detail View After each text has been entered the next image will appear and a table of comments will be built up Next to each comment there is the response frequency lf a comment is essentially repeated then instead of entering it again it can be high lighted which will increase the response frequency If a text has been entered with a typing error then each line can be corrected by click ing on green pencil With the help of the option Display the entire questionnaire page in the upper right corner of the screen the data entry assistant can if necessary display the entire questionnaire page containing the image In this way texts can be fully acquired even if the participant has
39. Dear Mr Prol Dr Bemor This emall contains evabualion results for Human Resource Management Iran en The global indicators are fisted first foflawed by the individual average values comeisting of the following scales 2 Questions about the instructor 3 Questions about the course 4 Questions about the teaching material 5 Questions about the studying conditions in fhe Second part of the analysis ihe average values of all individual questions are listed Note Adobe Acrobal Reader mus be installed on your computer in order to view the files Your Evasys Adminstrator laz urmana ian Mirman ks Whistance Aas Muppen EvaSys Administrater Eva5ys Admumstrater Figure 270 Designing an Individually Configured Letter for Sending Reports This special letter can either be used for all reports or defined only for special ques tionnaires You can limit it to a single questionnaire if you click on Text Templates in questionnaire details Questionnaires Questionnaire List Details 4 5 5 Download and Sending of Reports Manual Download of Evaluation Reports When the reports are not to be sent to the instructors trainers by email EvaSys Set tings Email Functions amp Accounts Attach PDF Report you can configure EvaSys so that instructors trainers can login to the system and then manually download their PDF reports from the Central Evaluation e Passive instructors trainers Passive instructors
40. EvaSys V Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Siva Anmain Suite Font Size Select the font size for the heading text from 7pt up to 20pt default resulting from the chosen default font size in the menu System Settings EvaSys Settings VividForms Default Font Size Note The maximum font size of the question group depends on the size of the line height defined for the questionnaire Thus to set a bigger font size for the question group it can be necessary to first enlarge the line height in the menu Form Properties Text Element If you check this box then the question group will be changed into a text element This is only possible when adding a new question group Please Note When changed into a text element the question group loses its original function and becomes mere text You can no longer add items such as questions or design elements to this redefined group Having made your settings and clicking on Apply the chapter title will appear in the preview You can open the properties of the question group again with a double click in the preview window or by using the symbol 23 in the Editor Control menu Edit and the menu Edit Question Group Attention Clicking on the symbol S or on the text Delete Del in the menu Clip board will delete the entire highlighted chapter as well as all of the questions in it without any warning or confirmation Using the arrow symbols
41. Figure 622 Result after Modifying the Text Template by Inserting a Line Of course other placeholders can also be used In the following you will find a listing of the available formatting Underlined Maximum 50 DM lt font size 14 gt Font Minimum 1 No Font size lt font size xx gt ize 14 lt font size gt Font size 12 singleordelble quotes Figure 623 List of available formatting lt u gt Underlined lt u gt Underlined NN The header of the PDF report generated by the report creator has its own text tem plate PDF REPORT Report Header report creator This makes it possible to dis play the instructors name in the standard PDF report but at the same time not having to display the name of the report creator in the PDF Report of the report cre ator 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 469 EvaSys iw System Settings and Management imav Alnomation Suis 2 2 Documents Documents can be saved in EvaSys for a number of purposes As documents for attachments to emails created in EvaSys or as documents for PDF letters The administration of documents and files is done centrally in the menu item docu ments The following functions are available e Uploading files to the EvaSys server e Displaying documents e Updating documents e Deleting documents from the EvaSys server EvaSys IV DH Subunits Questionnaires shoe s Carey Avatar Cal fe System information Search 3511 V e
42. Just a little reminder A program of study differs from the usual structure of the sub units and interviewer and or instructors trainers Because it is positioned perpendicu lar to the subunits and allows you to assign courses that are created in a subunit additionally to a program of study So you could for example assign courses of the departments of chemistry and physics additional to the program of study nuclear physics To create a program of study report choose the option Program of Study from the drop down list and click the button Next Create reports Summarized i Reports Program of Study MM Next bS Comparisons Batch Profile Lines Next Figure 315 Report Creator Creating a Program of Study Report Choose the program of study the period the course type as well as the questionnaire in the window that appears Also the usual options questionnaire comparison dis play of open questions creation of an unweighted report are available to you Create Program of Study Report 1 Program of Study 2 Survey Period 3 Type 4 Questionnaire Computer Sciences S511 A Non_Anonym Seminar Quest_01 Engineering 5510 Han en Social Sciences WS0o 10 train_en_1 Psychology 3507 WS06 07 5506 s505 Template forms Description Economics WS10 11 Question mapping of different questionnaires Automatic with text compa
43. NA_1 Hemandez Organization and Management 02 P1235 or train_01 train_en train_en train_en train_en_1 train_en Belmore WS 10 11 train_en mm Bimi ii _ Figure 367 Report Creator Profile Line Emails Selection of Criteria You can mark several courses reports in the list of courses Additionally you have the option to select the profile lines that every event should be compared with under First Comparison Line and as required Second Comparison Line Instead of a report the option Survey of same course in period XY can also be selected This selection adds the line of an earlier survey to the profile line of a selected course if available If you make such a selection and then download the profile lines a profile line is cre ated for each selected course report except for those of the two comparative lines In addition the first profile line and if selected the second profile line are laid over each other You thus receive a document which bears at least as many pages as selected courses 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 289 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Geen First Comparison Line Deactivated Please Choose a Selection Deactivated Please Choose a Selection D Second Comparison Line Survey of same course in period 5505 Survey of same course in period WS05 06 Survey of same course in period 5506 Compare selected cc Survey of same course in
44. Number of recognized forms e In progress shows whether other users are already processing the batch e To verify Number of corrections e Cover Sheet Display cover sheets e NonForms Delete all NonForms Display NonForms e Verification Process batch Verify automatically Delete batch 194 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback wo Current surveys in Verifier EE ee aoe mw ethno See reed WEE Survey Form Sheets e Coversheet NonForms Verification survey Form hee progress verify ver shee EE EE Technical Skills Tech 01 6 3 5 2 P EI Verifier Sample Survey train 01 7 8 E IS Oo 2 SI AS Selection for automatic verification Se SEL for new bat ches No valid checkbox found invalid One checkmark and correction s found Figure 219 Verification Survey View 4 3 3 Form View The form view gives you an overview of the questions that remain to be corrected at the form level A form is normally made up of a number of surveys which are scanned in a number of batches The table has the following columns e Form Short name of the form e Description Title of the form e Pages Number of pages of the form e Sheets Number of recognized forms e In progress shows whether other users are already processing the batch e To verify Number of corrections e Cover Sheet Display cover sheets e Verification Process batch Verify automatically De
45. Passive instructor trainer Login for report request Passive instructors trainers can log in to EvaSys and request existing reports for their courses Active instructors trainers Access to reports from central evaluation In the menu of the active instructor trainer account there is a link which allows access to the course reports from the central evaluation Module Evaluation Activates the possibility to evaluate modules 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 489 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management Visibility of active instructor trainer surveys in the QM views Here you can choose whether you want to see the surveys of active instructors train ers in addition to the surveys of the central evaluation in the QM Views By default this option is deactivated Display of course ID in the list of surveys Display of the course ID behind the name of the course Here you can choose if you want to display the course ID in the list of the surveys and in the header of the PDF report If activated the name of the survey consists not only of the name of the course but also of the course ID following the name in brackets Additionally the course ID is displayed in the header of the PDF report again after the course name 2 5 8 Section Email Functions amp Accounts Attach PDF report Attach PDF report to the report email Attach CSV file Attach CSV export to the report email Limit for file names in
46. Print Version Bat Survey Type Recipient Address Way Sent Pe ven Managing and maintaining a PSWD to Ti 05 16 2011 healthy lifestyle respondents m hernandez example com m hernandez example com _ W at 10 21 28 a Form train_en Course type Seminar Managing and maintaining a PSWD to 05 16 2011 healthy lifestyle respondents p taylor example com p taylor example com at 10 21 28 EI Form Wain en Course type Seminar Figure 594 Search Query under Delivery With the button rint Version a printer friendly version will be displayed 1 4 Batch Export With the batch export Subunits Batch Export you can download the entire raw data from all surveys of different subunits The name of this menu point was formerly known as Archiving Select the export format Then select the subunit s the survey period the question naire and the course s survey s in order to limit the data to be exported from Eva Sys 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 439 EvaSys V F System Settings and Management Goen Auncmation Sukk Questionnaires System Settings System Information sgil V SS Batch Export Peter Brown Administrator E 1 Subunit 2 Survey Pernod 3 Course Type 4 Questionnaire Subunits rc iss e Lecture Pal irano a Professional Development WII Se ED Overview S510 Working Group lt i irain W I bi Computer Scienc a W Economcs Iw Engineering V Professional
47. Select a type of survey and if necessary the additional options and click the button Create Survey The survey is created and you will be automatically redirected to the survey list Professional Development Philipp Belmore f ssi F i Show i A Management Strategies NA_2 in Progress C E Han en a ln i Professional Development Carlos Hernandez lesen 8 A Leadership Development 02 P1234 in Progress _ Dain en Sie Jx Questionnaire Figure 122 Tree Structure Redirection to the Survey List 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 125 C i EvaSys v Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Deleting Surveys To delete surveys using the tree structure select the option Delete Surveys in the actions panel On the left select the levels in which you wish to delete surveys Then on the right select the desired survey periods and the questionnaires If necessary you can also filter according to course type by activating the option Course Type By clicking on the button Show the courses are displayed in the list If required the name of the instructor can be displayed by selecting Show instructors 1 Actions Display Surveys Generate Surveys Delete Surveys WW A 2 Subunit Program of Study gt Location Instructor m FA Subunits 3 Filters 0 Engineering Ges Survey Period Questionnaire m M Professional Development PALL
48. T12 3 MORE LOO EE 456 2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ou cccccccccccssecesseecessecensecensecesseeecnseceauesensesesseeseuseseasesesesenstessunesentesensesens 456 PEA WEL PEW IPA We EE 456 2 1 1 VIEWING EMAIL TEXTS AND TEXT TEMPLATES ccccccecsccessecceseeceseecenseseseseneeeseanesentesenees 456 2 1 2 TEMPLATES FOR EMAIL MESSAGES sssisssieeeieieiieieeritttkttktstinttin ttk ntirtatinerreerrnerr neren n 458 2 1 3 TEMPLATE FOR LETTER IN PDF REPORTS cecsccsssecessescesesesseecessescnseseseesensesensesenseesenes 461 2 1 4 PLACEHOLDER FOR TEXTS ou cccccsssccessescssecensesesesceseesensesessesesaeeseusesesesesnessenesensetenneenees 464 2 1 5 HTML FORMAT FOR EMAIL TEXTS cccccccccccssccesceceeseceseceseeeceueeseseesenseseseesensneseresentesenees 467 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 9 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Weg EE ee 468 ER Ree DE d EE 470 2 2 1 EMAIL PAV TAC HIMENT EE 471 22 2 PDF TEMPLATES ee 471 2 9 PROCESS DEFAULTS E 474 SE EE Ee 475 2 5 EVASYS SETTINGS CONFIGURATION cccecsecccsetsetsosccutsenesaeccseccercesecsetenesenecartentsueensatenenaes 475 220 My SECTION GENERAL sccccaansteudehannntoseneriansise yeas aa ANAE EES AEA SEANAR ENEA rani 477 EE EE Ee 479 2 9 3 SECTION SURVEY ONLINE sccicscsnciastntusnivehancduaneandecnosseasanxenenshunssinniacader ther duiassanedaeniacdendsas 481 2 5 4 SECTION DATA IMPORT AND EXPORT cccscsseccscccsetenccusccartantcuseaeetanccutecastarscuteueenaees 48
49. The calendar is used for selecting the date and time for a planned operation al June 2011 x Koll he Today EN wk Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 22 d 2 3 23 6e 7 8 S w 1 E 24 43 4 15 de dy 18 49 25 20 21 2 23 24 25 26 26 27 28 29 30 Time 23 00 Select date Figure 129 Calendar 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 131 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Auncmation Sukk All changes in the calendar are adopted by the enter templates behind the calen dar The calendar does not need a save button as it can be closed by x after selecting the date and time With a click on a help function for the calendar is displayed Using the arrow you can change the year and month Then select a day and in the line beneath a time The time is increased by 1 hour minute with each mouse click By pressing Shift and making a click the time is decreased by 1 hour minute For a faster selection press and hold the mouse button and move the mouse to the left decreasing time or to the right increasing time e Overview of time scheduled online surveys Scheduled Tasks 1 Subunit 2 Survey Period 3 Questionnaire Engineering ii ES aa Cr Professional Development wS09 10 Show S507 Leadership Development 06 23 2011 at 23 10 00 PSWD to respondents Open p Cd Le Carlos Hernandez 06 30 2011 at 14 48 00 Online survey reminder Open 7
50. a average dev standard deviation duly mg ONAE into all T SEN paper sg software components avg 3 49 TE de 72 Calculate threshold values Lower fiveshold 3 49 Upper threshold 3 49 got access to the technical resources computer centre etc very quickly avg 3 57 dev 1 7 gt Calculate threshold values Lower threshold 3 57 Upper threshold 3 57 Figure 432 Quality Guidelines Setting of Threshold Values Threshold values can be changed with the drop down list in the header area by setting the granularity It should be noted that the granularity of the negative threshold needs to be equal to or larger than that of the positive threshold Pressing the button Convert this norm generates the quality guidelines and the qual ity indices of the relevant surveys are recalculated automatically Of course once the quality guidelines have been generated automatically they can be further edited and adapted Example Calculation when Higher Values Are Better For a questionnaire where higher values are better the granularity set for the negative threshold affects the calculation of the lower threshold value negative threshold val ue The following formula is used for this Lower threshold value norm base mean value avg granularity of the negative threshold norm base standard deviation Hence for the example pictured below the calculation is as follows 1 lower threshold value 3 49 1 1
51. e Scan Type Duplex simultaneous scanning of both sides of the sheet scanner configuration can differ in detail depending on the model and manufacturer For more information please consult the documentation supplied with your document scanner 4 1 2 Important Rules for Scanning Before beginning the scanning operation make sure that the following conditions have been fulfilled Make sure that only those questionnaires from a given survey are to be scanned in a scanning operation The returns from one survey are called a batch If there are more forms than can fit in the feeder then after scanning the first partial batch the next batch is inserted and the scanning operation is continued Insert the paper as shown in the illustration 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 189 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Figure 213 Correct insertion of questionnaires Figure 214 Correct insertion of a questionnaire The survey ID the double seven digit number on the cover sheet or on the first page of the questionnaire must be on the first page of the batch In the cover sheet procedure the cover sheet must be scanned first If the questionnaires have more than one page the questionnaire sets should be if possible scanned in a sorted sequence If multiple page questionnaires are mixed up then processing is still possible and the final results will be accurate but an analysis of subgroups
52. into the form management Figure 199 Copying a Template in the Own Form Management An active instructor trainer can find the form management in the left hand menu when clicking Questionnaires When clicking this option the list of own questionnaires opens i Information Aform was added to your form management view e Form Management R Actions ebbreviation CS Pages Date Recognition Settings Copy Delete Edit Preview Export Evaluation Questionnaire 2011 05 16 T eg Quest_4 Template 1 ane ZS KD M B Figure 200 Copied Template in the Own Form Management The questionnaire that has been copied from the list of templates is contained as a template here You can recognize the copy by the modified Abbreviation it is counted up Sampl1 instead of Sample Besides the Abbreviation and the Title you can see the number of pages here you can see if the questionnaire is already contained in the recognition set of the Vivid Forms Reader and when the questionnaire was copied 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 181 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Furthermore the active instructor trainer has the possibility to carry out the following actions e Add filters required questions validation and cross tabulations and define the dis play mode of the online survey complete per page per chapter Please read the relevant chapters of this manual for this purpose e Copy t
53. to be found above the address field are specified by you right below it Sender above recipient address The Text in the Letter You can edit the text in the letter under the option Text templates in the main menu System Settings When changing to this page a window appears offering numerous text templates for you to choose from These can be customized according to your needs One of those is the one used in the letter Letter Results for instructors train ers Editing of text templates Action PDF template EMAIL FornvPSWDs to the instructor Instructor s Optional Questions EvaSys Welcome text for the first login of instructors Es LETTER Form count below minimum No PDF template defined LETTER Regulatory information LETTER Report for the president LETTER Results for instructors _ LETTER Summarized results for deans LETTER Summarized results for study deans Attach Language English Higher Education Sample Letter OK Reference Result of a survey Mail text SALUTATION TITLE SURNAME D This email contains evaluation results for SURVEY QUESTIONARY mM The global indicators are listed first followed by the individual average values consisting of the following scales DIMENSIONS In the second part of the analysis the average values of all individual questions are listed T Figure 239 PDF Letter Text Template
54. 1 MB After another click on Next a summary of your message will appear Some pieces of information about your EvaSys will be included such as the version number Then click on Send email to send the email 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 15 EvaSys iw Preparation and General Notes Guetta Sule 1 2 3 Remote Maintenance Netviewer Ad hoc Desktop Sharing In most cases support queries can be dealt quickly by telephone or email In more complicated cases this method can turn out to be lengthy and ineffective We recom mend setting up a remote maintenance connection Remote maintenance allows EvaSys developers to be virtually with you working on your EvaSys server analyzing and solving your problem This connection can also be used to install updates Remote maintenance is done with your permission and involves remote control for a limited period of time The netviewer works without installing software Just start a 1 5 MB large client appli cation Netviewer can be started directly via the Electric Paper Website http www electricpaper biz In the menu Customer Service click on Support via Net viewer Here click the Netviewer icon to start the download In the download dialog select the option Execute The program will then ask you for a session number which your EvaSys support consultant will have given to you Electric Paper pGieilreesat powered by Nebviewer Participant login Plea
55. 2 0 to 2 5 For the other side of the scale right of the middle you have to choose the question once again Now you can say that results bigger than the upper threshold will also cause a deduction of quality e g the upper threshold may be 6 again with a chosen range of tolerance In this way you ensure the level questions are interpreted in a meaningful way in regard to the quality guideline 326 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 5 Quality Management If you integrate level questions into the quality guidelines the total quality percentage of all scaled questions can exceed 100 because each of the level questions needs to be included twice Note Please note After choosing a question once it will be marked by an asterisk in the list Thus you will be informed that it is already in use in the quality guideline Frequency Based Quality Guidelines As an alternative to the averaged based quality guidelines discussed above you can set so called frequency based quality guidelines In this case the decisive criterion is not a mean value which is equally influenced by all respondents but a specified fre quency of responses within a particular range of response values Setting Frequency Based Quality Guidelines Based on frequencies The course focuses on the current professional E Delete discussion 25 w e 80 Figure 422 Frequency Based Quality Guideline
56. 2046 choose pat report CSV SPHINX Figure 322 Report Creator Instructor Trainer Profile in the Report List Any Compilation The option Any Compilation is completely flexible you can freely select which ele ments you wish to combine Unlike the other report types it is therefore possible to make a multiple choice in the individual selection fields such as subunit period etc 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 265 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model You could for example summarize the reports for two courses that are held by two different instructors trainers for example for Donna Harwood the lecture on Web Design and for Carlos Hernandez on the New Economy Of course the courses can also belong to completely different subunits Or you summarize everything that you have ever evaluated in order to receive an overview of the assessment of your university or your company Or you summarize the reports of all courses assigned to the course type Excursion in order to receive an overview of the assessment of the study excursions These are only a few possibilities as previously mentioned in the central evaluation you can freely combine options For technical reasons surveys of active users cannot be summarized by means of Any Compilation To create a report which combines freely definable elements choose the option Any Compilation from the drop down lis
57. 3 3 Generating and Editing Questionnaires If an instructor trainer wants to create questionnaires he works with the VividForms Editor resp if licensed with the VividForms Designer just as the administrator does For this purpose he clicks Create Questionnaire in the left context menu and selects the option VividForms Editor or VividForms Designer To become acquainted with the VividForms Editor the corresponding manual Creating Question naires with the VividForms Editor is available in the active user s account area Infor mation The VividForms Designer Manual can be accessed via the interface of the VividForms Designer If the active instructor trainer wants to add questions to an existing template he has to copy this questionnaire in his own form management For this purpose click Tem plates in the left menu A new page opens listing all the existing templates of the administrator and the corresponding subunit administrator Click the icon in the col umn Template and the questionnaire automatically is copied in the form manage ment of the active instructor trainer i e Form Templates Abbreviation Title Pages Date Template Preview Quest_01 Evaluation Questionnaire 1 2009 05 05 10 52 06 Quest_3 Evaluation Questionnaire 1 2011 05 12 15 16 54 Note Please bear in mind that required questions cross tabulations and online survey designs cannot be copied when copying the template
58. 5 4 1 4 2 4 5 6 5 12 3 75 If one adds the three averages and divides them by the number of averages which does not correspond to the calculation of the indicator one receives another value 3 60 2 75 5 33 3 3 89 SS Only through taking into account several indicators you receive an overview of the entire survey The summary of several indicators produces an index In EvaSys all indicators of the questionnaire meaning this index for the total questionnaire are cal culated into the so called overall indicator that thus forms a type of grade for the total survey The overall indicator is not formed unlike the individual indicators from the individ ual results The overall indicator is calculated by adding the individual indicators and dividing them by the number of indicators On your questionnaire there are three question groups which contain scaled ques tions Question group Instructor Question group Course Question group General assessment The answers show for the first question group an indicator of 3 75 for the second question group one of 3 7 for the third group one of 2 9 The scale consists as mentioned of six response options with the positive values on the right The overall indicator for this questionnaire is made up from the addition of the three indicators mentioned as well as from the division by three number of indicators 238 2011 Electric Paper G
59. 69 How many terms have you been studying so far SE O2 a3 4 U5 g Figure 536 Line Space in the Editor Preview The line space can be selected moved and modified using the clipboard functions Put FE Copy and T Paste 2 9 2 Separator The separator allows the optical separation of questionnaire content and can be added freely inside question groups Open the menu Add in the Editor control and select L Separator A horizontal line will be added below the active object Please grade the instructor for this course poor OO 0 0 O UI ven ooog O abst Please give us your feedback about the instructor as well as suggestions for improvement Figure 537 Separator in the Editor Preview The separator can be selected moved and modified using the clipboard functions gt Cut ei Copy and Zz Paste 2 9 3 Text To add a text area open the menu Add and select JS Text Box A dialog box appears which contains a text box Type in the desired text or paste content from another text editing tool into this edit box Alignment options are available to align the text box content to the left right center or as justified text Click on Apply to create the text area 400 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor Please give us your feedback about the instructor as well as suggestions for improvement WE Note Please do no
60. 72 1 77 2 lower threshold value 3 57 1 1 7 1 87 334 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys VY Legend avg average dev standard pensation Positive threshold 0 duly got introductions into all the n necessary hardware and SSES components Calculate threshold values got access to the technical resources computer centre etc very quickly Calculate threshold values Figure 433 Quality Guidelines Example Calculation when Higher Values Are Better E Example calculation when Lower Values Are Better For a questionnaire where lower values are better the granularity set for the negative threshold negative threshold value affects the calculation of the upper threshold value negative threshold value The following formula is used for this Upper threshold value norm base mean value avg granularity of the negative threshold norm base standard deviation Hence for the example below the calculation is as follows 1 upper threshold value 3 49 1 1 72 5 21 2 upper threshold value 3 57 1 1 7 5 27 Base norm Seegen X Legend i Ga Ge introductions ae all the BESSE hardware eg software components Calculate threshold values got access to the technical resources computer centre etc very quickly Calculate threshold values Figure 434 Quality Guidelines Example Calculation when Lower Values Are Better 2011
61. Cancel Figure 468 Access Rights for the VividForms Editor e Unrestricted access The user can create his own questionnaires or work with existing templates e Extension of templates only The user can extend templates with his own ques tions but cannot create his own questionnaires e No access The user is not authorized to user the Web editor to modify or create questionnaires In the administrator s and subunit administrator s account you can access to the Viv idForms Editor in the menu Questionnaires To create a new questionnaire click on the option Create Questionnaire in the left context menu In the main window two 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 357 EvaSys wv Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Green dog Sule tools now appear for creating questionnaires the VividForms Editor left and the Viv idForms Designer right EvaSys iV Subunits System Settings System Information IV Ei Create Questionnaire Please choose between the VmdF orms Editor and the VividF orms Designer wa wm WK 5 RE r p Peter Brown Administrator E VividForms Editor _ VividForms Designer Web based questionnaire editor for quick and easy design A professional questionnaire designer offering multiple of questionnaires with limited layout options layout options When first executed the application will be transferred to your local system This may take a few minutes Should your browse
62. Carlos Hemandez Instructor 05 25 2011 at 09 43 03 Number of participants in online surveys of the last 5 minutes d Figure 611 Detailed Information of all Active Users You can sort the active users according to name user type and last action by clicking on the relevant column head 1 9 3 Display of Online Surveys To optimize system performance it is recommended that the display of online surveys especially for questionnaires with several chapters question groups is set to Com plete In this way for a questionnaire of 35 chapters with regard to page views in online surveys the system load can be reduced in the range of 97 This option is set as default for all questionnaires To change the display of online sur veys in the menu Questionnaires Questionnaire List select Details in the drop down menu As these settings are stored in the details of a questionnaire it is possi ble to set an individual display setting for every questionnaire 1 9 4 More Tips for Avoiding System Overload Dispatching email If you send your email invitations to online surveys spread over a few days instead of all at once the feedback phase is also spread over a wider period This distribution in the feedback phase leads to continuous system utilization and 450 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Management and Summary helps to reduce one off access peaks In this way even at peak
63. Cd G Quest_01 SS11 07 07 2011 at 14 48 00 Finish survey Open 7 Cd Le Human Resource Management PSWD to respondents Deactivated d CO Cp Philipp Belmore Online survey reminder Deactivated d OG Ca 2 Quest_01 SS11 Finish survey Deactivated 2 GG Management Strategies 06 23 2011 at 23 10 00 PSWD to respondents Open 7 Cd Lg Philipp Belmore 06 30 2011 at 14 48 00 Online survey reminder Open Cd GX Quest_01 SS11 07 07 2011 at 14 48 00 Finish survey Opn 272 0G Action For all with status Task Run Open PSWD to respondents Proceed Figure 130 Scheduled Tasks Overview The display of subunits survey periods and questionnaires can be restricted For each survey each of the three tasks are displayed in one line In the column Sta tus the status of the task is evident The following status messages are displayed Open The task is activated and not yet carried out Running The task is now running emails are being sent 132 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Deactivated The task is deactivated Executed The task has been successfully completed Executed with error The task was completed with error Executed with warning The task was completed but with a warning e g report could not be created as data was not available Not completed with error The task is not correctly defined and the settings
64. Choice Question Regarding a Respondent s Age Ce In order to produce a subgroup report click in the details of a report on Evaluate sub group the last option on the bottom right Report data tay Results in HTML format Results in PDF format EvaSys PDF report x English x Show Email i Raw data in SPHINX format amp Raw data in SPSS format A E Raw data in CSV format is Profile Line Automatic Manual B Kiviat diagram Merge evaluations 2 Evaluate subgroup Figure 338 Report Creator Report Details Evaluate Subgroup In turn another window opens that presents you with all possible types of questions on which you can evaluate subgroups Evaluate the report according to the following criterion To the selection of several criteria for subgroup reports 2 A B 1 Questions about you H Which gender do you belong te What is your aga 1 1829 How many tens have you been studying so far 1 1 T Main subject 1 Angistics x Do you already have a university degree or a degree of another institute in tertiary education yes e C 2 Questions about the instructor The instructor is always well prepared TCO s Figure 339 Report Creator Evaluate Subgroup Selection of a Criterion 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 275 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model In order to create a subgroup report here you choose a cr
65. Close the window of the course details by clicking on the button OK This course is now saved as non anonymous In the list of the course in the column Participants it is marked as non anonymous by the index card symbol Nuber Course name Program of study Cours Dee Tome Location Participants Language Location VC Actions Managing and 62 maintaining a ee NA_1 continuous Seminar Sem 03 english Central Campus Sa healthy lifestyle i 63 Geet Economics Engineering NA_2 continuous Seminar Sem 02 5 deutsch Central Campus va ZS Human i T3 Resource Ti a ca 02 P1237 continuous Seminar R P 412 20 english es F a Management ciences enter Figure 183 Anonymous and Non anonymous Courses 172 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V VadyS Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Survey Automation Suite If you create a survey for a non anonymous course here Web Design XHTML it will be indicated as such in the survey details that this survey is taking place with non anonymous participants Survey Details gt Survey Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle amp Instructor Philipp Belmore J Course Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle Survey Period 3911 Type Online survey using PSWDs a No of PSWDs T of 7 PSWODs are still available Questionnaire train_en O Status In progress ready for data Survey Created on 05 12 2011 at 16 42 41 Figure 184 Reference of Non anonymous
66. De v _Deta Entry Dem SES 3 Systemiogins Select program of study iw _Nerifier Demo 5 Course s Central Evaluation Prof Dr Ph gt Beh S Tree Structure Human Resource Management 02 P1237 5 Generate Surveys Management Sirateges NA 2 ff Display Surveys Human Resource Management 02 P123 Kl Delete Surveys GE Request _ H structor s Optional Questions nireducbon into Sociology 02 P124 Ce Batch Events ao Ate ACTED if Display Courses Scheduled Tasks ei 1 DW Participahon Tracking Figure 595 Batch Export For the batch export three export formats are available CSV A text file with the raw data of all selected surveys is exported including the course data Sphinx A ZIP file with the questionnaire contents the raw data of all selected sur veys including the course data as well optional an evaluation template is exported SPSS A SAV file with the questionnaire contents as well as the raw data of all selected surveys including the course data is exported In the case of Sphinx and SPSS a special feature offers the ability to export across several questionnaires In this way survey projects consisting of several question naire types such as 360 Feedbacks can be easily exported in a single large file and processed with the Sphinx Statistic Workbench or SPSS CSV Sphinx SPSS Figure 596 Batch Export of Several Questionnaires Sphinx and SPSS 440 2011 Elect
67. Deleting a question from the library 414 Question library 0 0 0 0 00 ee eee 95 Undoing the connection between a question and the li DIAN a4 coed Bete ees e ee Kee Sees ae es 412 License User licenses ciskos ae we be wade a 445 License administration 008 444 License management 444 Line Dispatch of comparative profile lines 288 Log book 453 Entries in the log book 46 452 LOG FIG peaten cheer aade tac daaeeda wats 456 Log onthe system 2 Log in as active instructor 180 Beete DEET 92 LOGO TEE 47 Logs Mailservice Log 455 M Mailservice Log 455 Manual 12 13 Manual entry of handwritten comments 201 Matrices 0000 eee eee ee 415 419 Matrix field 2 o darg gus Gack ah orate a 46 2 tanta bs 378 Message Templates for email messages 458 Mirrored scaled questions 380 2011 Electric Paper GmbH Module Creation of module courses 346 Module evaluation 342 Assign module questionnaires 343 Create COUrSES 2 1 es 348 Create module account 5 346 Create module questionnaires 343 Further settings 353 Generate module surveys 350 Instant feedback 2000 e eee 352 SEW sicenes mee eee heoe ok oes hee owes 342 Module questionnaire Characteristics a 27 cas aww NNN ae aw N 345 Multiple languages 92 N Netvie
68. Details 4 Hits in this Table Course Search Details Si Frooram of stua Organization and Management Economics Engineering 02 P1236 Seminar Human Resource Management Economics Engineering 02 P1237 Seminar Management Strategies Economics Engineering Seminar Human Resource Management Economics Engineering Computer Sciences 2 P1 Seminar lt lt Otod gt gt gt Figure 590 Search for courses In the example a search has been made for the term mathematics The columns of the results table can also be sorted in ascending or descending order By clicking on a course you will be taken directly to the course details Searches are carried out in the databases program of study course name location type and ID The following data fields are displayed e Name Name of the course at the same time a reference to the course data e Program of study 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 435 EvaSys iw System Settings and Management imav Alnomation Suis e ID e Type 1 1 3 Search for Surveys This search allows you to find surveys The search takes place in the survey data fields creation data processing date survey name survey ID and number of returns Search Result Table Hits Max Details Surveys 2 Hits in this Table 25 Details Survey Search Details gt Name SurveyID Status Type Form Created Processed Formcount Introduction into 45676 Data available Quest 01 05 13 2011 05
69. Development 177 Data Entry Demo Subunit _ O enfer Demo Subunit 70 Engineering Economics as Technical School C Subunits 1 Media amp information 6 Engineering _ El Engineering 3 Economics 2 Technical School Peter Huddle Figure 118 Tree Structure Opening and Closing Levels 122 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Anomalon Suik Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Display Surveys To display surveys in the tree structure select the option Display Surveys in the actions panel On the left side select the levels to be displayed in the view of the sur veys you require by checking the appropriate boxes Then select the desired survey periods and questionnaires on the right If necessary these can also be filtered according to course type by activating the option Course Type The display can be refined by different types of surveys and status by using the drop down menus 3 Filters Survey Period __ Course Type Additional filters Seminar Course Type WSA 510 ALL wSog 10 Lwsneun7 gt igi den Y Questionnaire geg Show Quest_01 train_01 train_en Show instructors 48 Human Resource Management 73 Human Resource Management 63 Management Strategies 62 Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle 47 Organization and Management Figure 119 Tree Structure Select Cou
70. Dr Philipp Belmore Name of the Course Management Strategies Name of the survey Comparative line Carlos Hernandez Name of the course Organization and Management a Name of the survey j Overall average of Management Strategies Organization and Management The lead time of the course is adequate Strongly dis Strongly agree av 3 5 agree Sr The course focuses on the current professional discussion Strongly dis Strongly agree n D agree i The course perfectly prepares me for my professional life Strongly dis Strongly agree av 3 8 agree a 33 Please grade the course altogether failure very good ge 2 R GA d I Figure 377 Report Creator Profile Line Emails Options Overall average 294 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Comparative Lines This option is activated as default Because it ensures that all comparative lines are displayed If you deactivate the Comparison lines the graphic only contains the profile line of the selected course report all others are not displayed So that you can use this function meaningfully in its deactivated form you should bear in mind the following two points e lf this option is deactivated you must select either Minimum Maximum Values or Overall Average instead or of course both Since through the deactivated function you do not display anything but the current course a comparison i
71. EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Gini Ainsmetion Sui Request preferred compilation Your choice Compilation name Report of Train_en Questionnaire train_en No of Surveys 19 No of completed questionnaires 241 The report ceation may take a moment Please wait until an accnowledgment has been sent back from the server Create e Choice train_en Which gender do you belong to male female Figure 326 Report Creator Any Compilation Overview over the Selection made and the Ques tionnaire Click on Create or first assign the questions correctly Also this report then appears in the list Type Name Status Form Created Forms Del Report Export a Prof Development WS10 11 Data available E trainen 05 18 2011 2046 2 choose os CSV SPHINX HTML Economics WS10 11 Data available trainen 05 18 2011 J046 A cchoosepdt report CSV SPHINX HTML wi Belmore WS 10 11 Data available Y train en 05 18 2011 21067 choose pdf report we CSV SPHINX Figure 327 Report Creator Any Compilation in the Report List In addition to the selection criteria described so far you have the possibility in Any Compilation to filter according to the courses properties Meaning you could for example have displayed all courses with less than 15 partici pants and draw your selection from that Or you filter according to the room Or according to the Course ID A
72. F Giay der Suki Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor relevant and irrelevant areas of a survey therefore aiding target oriented decision making It is also a useful function for testing new items In the following example a scaled question was first inserted on the quality of the technical equipment Then a second scaled question was inserted on the importance of the technical equipment By activating the option Combine to dual scale with previ ous question both of these scaled questions are linked to each other Question Wizard Define Options Abstention deactivated w Checkboxes D Op Op0 V Individualize a labels Type of Diagram Histogram E Use these TR as default for scaled questions F Apply Settings to all ake scaled questions Define settings Figure 498 Combining Scaled Questions with each other Dual Scale In the VividForms Editor the activation of the dual scale that is the linking of a quality to an importance scaled question is marked by a yellow bracket The technical equipment is excellent OD O OF O O O poor The technical equipment is important O 0 0 0 O O notimportant Figure 499 The marking of Scaled Questions in the VividForms Editor Dual Scale 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 381 EvaSys iw Creating Questionnaires with VividForms G vey Anomalon Suki Please note moving cutting out or deleting the scaled questions c
73. F2 F3 Indicates the blackening degree within checkboxes in a line from left to right checkboxes without blackening show the value 0 for boxes with a blackening the percentaged blackening degree is shown Consequently the figure above can be interpreted as follows The first single choice question 3590 is a question with two answer options The second box has been checked and shows a blackening degree of 38 The second single choice question is a question whose answer options spread over two lines In the first line the first box was checked with a blackening degree of 42 the second with a degree of 72 The following figure shows the corresponding section in the PDF file You are male female What is your age P 18 29 30 39 CT 40 49 O 50 59 C 60 69 a Older than Figure 228 Verification Filling degrees in the PDF file Note Please note that the flexible layout of VividForms Designer questionnaires can lead to displacements in the CSV file For further information concerning the control and adjustment of OMR thresholds please refer to the Scanstation Manual 200 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback 4 3 7 Responses to Open Questions Responses to open questions are only displayed in the WebVerifier when the option Handwriting recognition was activated on creating the open question for information on handwriting recognition in op
74. For creating questionnaires please consult chapter C C Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Pa Generate Surveys 1 Subunit Engineering 2 Survey Period weu 3 Course Type 4 Questionnaire Ouest Di D Seminar Quest_3 Working Group Han Di train_02 Ham W I VF_DemoP i Lecture o Professional Development Select program of study Paper survey Hard Copy Procedure Cover Sheet Procedure Denna Harwood Web Verification EvaSys Exercises 02 P1735 5 Course s SE li re Management Strategies NA_2 _ Managing and maintaining a heathy lifestyle NA_1 EvaSys User Types 02 P1236 introduction into EvaSys Leadership Development 02 P1234 Organization and Management 02 P1236 Dr Richelle White Introduction inte Sociology 02 P1246 hh E EE EH Online Online Survey Use Time Control Generate Surveys Figure 86 Generating Surveys The setting which questionnaire can be used for which course is done at Question naires Questionnaire List Details You can define here which questionnaire should be used for which course type and subunit After clicking on generate survey the screen on the above will appear Now you must in succession in each field select one or a number of options Depend ing on what you have chosen and the resulting restrictions you will then see only the valid selection option
75. Guidelines Quality guidelines are set in the questionnaire details Choose the option Quality Guidelines in the drop down menu Advanced Settings and click on Edit Any quality guidelines or their question groups respectively that have been already defined appear in the list These are one or more questions that have individual weights attached as well as a group weighting for the quality guideline Existing quality guidelines can be edited or deleted One way to set up new quality guidelines is to set them up manually via the button New Course Evaluation Questionnaire Re calculate all Surveys Figure 417 Button New to Set Up New Quality Guidelines Manually 320 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 5 Quality Management In the view that opens a name and description have to be entered and a weight has to be assigned in relation to the overall quality index The weight defines the maximal possible deduction in percent that this guideline can have on the overall quality index Edit quality guideline Figure 418 Edit Quality Guidelines The quality guideline is saved with Save and subsequently questions can be added to it Usually questions on one topic area are combined in a quality guideline Figure 419 Definition of the Quality Guideline Adding Questions You can set up quality guidelines based on averages or based on frequency Both types of
76. I bh Survey evaluation statistic English muy Results in HTML format _ Comparison Survey 2 Sor None selected D ___ Number of participants for calculating response Show cover sheet form in browser Figure 598 Survey evaluation statistics Therein the header data of all scanned batches from a survey are displayed in a table This data allows you to see the time and size of the scanning operation Survey evaluation statistics 05 18 2011 Figure 599 Details of survey evaluation statistics The specifications e Name of Scanstation which captured the batch e Number of Pages of the batch For Duplex scanners 1 sheet 2 pages e Number of non recognized pages NonForms these can also be empty pages e Number of False Forms forms that recognized as EvaSys forms but did not belong to the scanned survey e Marking whether the batch was part of a Multi batch only with VividForms forms e Scan Date of the batch 442 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Anomalon Suik System Management and Summary 1 7 System Information This is where you will receive an overview of the number of surveys in the system as well as in the all subunits Click System Information System Summary EvaSys iV SS Subunits Questionnaires System Settings Search esi IV Esou Suey Autonmacon Seater i OH System Summary SE EvaSys Acad ny 9 l y Peter Brown Street address and house n
77. ISEC_SURNAME_X ENROLLMENT RESPONSE RATE ISURVEY_QUALITYINDEX EvaSys v Survey Automation Suite Last capture date paper Scan date Online last return Title first and surname of secondary instructor X must be an integer percental response on the basis of the study course participants Overall quality of a survey as stated in the QM Views e g 77 Special placeholders for online surveys SERVER DIR DIRECT ONLINE LINK SURVEY IPSWD SERVER TIMESTAMP PARTICIPANT_EMAIL PSWD_COUNT DISTRIBUTED PSWD_ COUNT 466 User entry point e g http evasys demo univer sity com Adds a link to the online survey that contains the server address as well as the PSWD password Sim ply clicking the link shows the online questionnaire Name of survey e g Introduction to Example Sci ence A PSWD for online survey participants e g XSFU3 URL for online survey participants e g http eva sys example com evasys online Time of submission of an online survey e g 22 15 34 15 03 2011 Email address of an online survey Participant e g user O5 example com Number of all PSWDs Number of PSWDs dispatched 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Config uration Setti ngs DISTRIBUTED_RESPONSE_ percental response rate on the basis of the dis RATE patched PSWDs OVERALL_RESPONSE_ percental response rate on the basis of the total
78. In this example there is a scaled question with 6 response options higher values are better in this case The aim of the guideline is to apply a deduction of 25 if 20 or more of the responses are for the negative response options 1 or 2 This means in turn that in order to meet the defined requirements more than 80 of the responses need to be for the remaining options 3 4 5 and 6 Therefore the condi tion is defined that more than 80 of the respondents need to have chosen an option higher than 2 for the quality guideline to be met Advantages and Drawbacks of Frequency Based Quality Guidelines The advantage of frequency based quality guidelines is that a certain critical mass in this case 20 can have the effect that a quality guideline is not met independent of the opinion of the remaining respondents As a drawback it has to be noted that contrary to average based quality guidelines there is no tolerance region and therefore when the targeted value is not reached the full deduction comes to effect immediately Example calculation when higher values are better In the following example for the scaled question The instructor is always well pre pared with 6 response options it was defined that at least 36 of respondents must have chosen response options 5 or 6 At the same time it was set that high values are better 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 327 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automat
79. KH m i Result of a survey Dear Mr Prof Dr Belmore This email contains evaluation results for Human Resource Management train_en_1 The global indicators are listed first followed by the individual average values consisting of the following scales 2 Questions about the instructor 3 Questions about the course 4 Questions about the teaching material 5 Questions about the studying conditions In the second part of the analysis the average values of all individual questions are listed Note Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on your computer in order to view the files Your EvaSys Administrator Max Mustermann EvaSys Adnunistrator Figure 626 Example of PDF Template 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 473 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management subject This field ts filled with a heading or the subject line of the letter The subject line can be defined in the EvaSys menu item Text Template see Section 6 7 text This field contains the personalized text of the letter for the PDF report The text can be defined in the EvaSys menu item Text Template see Section 7 In Adobe Acrobat the templates must be saved by Save As so that the internal PDF structure is clean 2 3 Process Defaults In the menu System Settings Process Defaults you can set the defaults for the configuration of user accounts The configuration of EvaSys user ac
80. LDAP login is automatically enabled for all users Now when a user logs into EvaSys an authentification takes place in the LDAP system In order to prevent accidental lockout from the system administrator access is by default excluded from the LDAP login If desired however the login for this account can also be enabled in the EvaSys settings under System Settings EvaSys Settings Network Settings LDAP Registration also for the Administrator If you activate LDAP in the setting at EvaSys Settings Network Settings LDAP Host anytime a user logs in to EvaSys an authentification will take place The authentifica tion is made only of users of the type Instructor trainer The settings for your LDAP server are at EvaSys Settings Network Settings LDAP Host and for your Basis Dis tinguished Name at EvaSys Settings Network Settings LDAP Base DN The user account of the instructors trainers must be in both LDAP as well as in Eva Sys You can use the XML import interface in order to synchronize this user data with EvasSys For further information please consult the special XML manual If desired the LDAP connection can be encrypted in the configuration LDAPS Sys tem Settings EvaSys Settings Network Settings LDAP secure connection 60 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period 2 Change the attributes of the user Mr TF Title First n
81. Lower Values are Better Q overall The values in the top half of the table shaded yellow are the values of the quality guideline that you set individually when creating the guideline For each quality guide line you define the weighting in relation to the overall quality index QG 1 25 Any number of scaled questions can then be assigned to this quality guideline QG 1 2 questions For each of these questions you define a lower and upper threshold as well as the percentage it counts towards the quality guideline question 1 lower threshold value 3 upper threshold value 4 proportion of quality guideline 1 of this question 25 In the bottom half of the table shaded green you can see the results of your ques tions Question 1 for example has a mean value of 1 5 The absolute quality is calculated according to the following formula 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 325 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model upper threshold value obServed mean upper threshold value lower threshold val ue In this example for question 1 4 1 5 4 3 2 5 For the quality in the following applies If the absolute quality is gt 1 then 100 is reached If the absolute quality is lt 0 this corresponds to 0 For all values between 0 and 1 the quality in absolute quality 100 In this example for question 1 2 5 gt 1 100 In order to calculate the quality index for the whole
82. Overview LJ ous WS06 07 Fam en ALL e ER 8 v CC Media amp information Center mn peal Philipp Belmore Iv SA Carlos Hemandez Show v Professional De d Engineering v Data Eniry Dem 0 Computer Sciences i Ea _Systemiogins D sl Data Entry Demo Subunit SS bw _ Verifier Demo amp _Verifier Demo Subunit Show instructors 48 Human Resource Management Central Evaluation 73 Human Resource Management 86 Leadership Development 2 Generate Surveys Figure 116 Tree Structure in the menu Subunits In the header of the menu three different actions are available Display Surveys Gen erate Surveys and Delete Surveys In the left menu area the tree structure of the organization is displayed By clicking on the name of an element or the button the respective underlying level can be opened up Use the selection boxes next to the relevant entries to define which sur veys or courses should be displayed in the right window When an element of a higher level is selected all elements on the levels below are automatically selected too Ei Professional Development v A Economics v E Central Campus v Philipp Belmore Carlos Hemandez v e Media amp information Center _ E Engineering Figure 117 Tree Structure Selecting the Levels By clicking on the level name in the header of the list all elements of a level can be displayed or hidden Professional
83. Participants With non anonymous online surveys you also have the possibility of indicating the sta tus of anonymity in the footnote of the email For this you can use existing standard texts from System Settings Text Templates Editing of text templates Action E MAIL Batch printed form for instructor hybrid survey A E MAIL Certificate of participation for online surveys E MAIL Cover sheet for instructor E MAIL Data entry for instructor A Footnote for anonymous online surveys E MAIL Footnote for non anonymous online surveys E MAIL Form for instructor E MAIL Information about result access to participants Language English Higher Education Mail text Note This email has been created automatically The password indicated in this E MAIL cannot be traced to you Your vote is anonymous Figure 185 Reference for Anonymous or Non anonymous Online Surveys Text Templates In addition to this you can always render a non anonymous survey anonymous by removing the participants data from the survey details You must confirm this action by clicking on OK In doing so all information on the participants in the raw data exports for SPSS and Sphinx as well as in the CSV export are deleted After clicking on OK a message window indicates the removal of the information to you At this point you still have the option of aborting the proce
84. RATE existing PSWDs 2 1 5 HTML Format for Email Texts Emails are sent as pure text messages per default If desired they can be sent in HTML format For this the option Emails in HTML Format in the Email Functions amp Accounts section of the system configuration must be activated Formatting with the help of HTML tags can now be done in the text templates links can also be added The following HTML tags are available Italics lt i gt Italics lt i gt Underlined lt u gt Underlined lt u gt Centered lt center gt lt center gt Center lt center gt lt a href http www example com gt http www example com lt a gt The HTML command lt br gt for the line break does not necessarily have to be used All normal line breaks in the text templates are automatically converted into HTML line breaks before sending Links 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 467 EvaSys V System Settings and Management Goen Auncmation Sul 2 1 6 The PDF Report Header The contents of the PDF report header can also be defined in the text templates Editing of text templates Action Norming PDF report Letter a PODF REPORT Format of the instructor name PDF REPORT Header line right upper corner POF Report Header PDF Report Text for too little response profile line POF Report Text for too little response scaled questions POF Certificate of participation for online surveys POF Repor
85. Report Creator Define Base Questionnaire Number of Different Characters Please note Additional questions are of course not included in the total report because they cannot be compared to questions from the comparative question naire e You should opt for manual assignment when the questionnaires differ greatly so that a string comparison cannot turn out any similarities as in the second exam ple 256 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting If you choose this option the questions on the manual assignment are pre sented to you in the following screen The drop down menu of each question presents you with the possible questions which you could select as an appropri ate counterpart Request preferred compilation Your choice Compilation name train_01 train_en Questionnaire train_01 train_en No of Surveys 38 No of completed questionnaires 631 The report geation may take a moment Please wait until an eccnowledgment has been sent back from the server Create Choice Question Form Which gender do you belong to train en Fl male female train Di What is your age Sr Fd 18 29 30 39 40 49 50 59 60 69 Older than 69 train 01 Figure 304 Report Creator Manual Questionnaire Comparison Here you can also define a base questionnaire at the end of the page 5 2 2 Creating Summary Reports The report creator has sever
86. Selection Now you can watch our developers at work or occupy yourself with something else As soon as the maintenance is finished the program will be automatically terminated You can find out more about security issues on the netviewer website 2 The Basics For orientation purposes and as a glossary this chapter outlines the most important terminology and concepts which are used repeatedly throughout the EvaSys Manual Initially you can learn how EvaSys is structured and which components you will be working with Then as central evaluation and the de central evaluation stem from two fundamentally different concepts these concepts are also introduced At the end of the chapter you will be acquainted with some basic terminology used in EvaSys 2 1 Structure of the EvaSys System Evasys consists of four resp five with the VividForms Designer components e the web server e the data base e the scanstation or several scanstations and e the VividForms Reader e optionally the form creation software VividForms Designer The following graphic gives you an overview of the interaction of the components mentioned 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 17 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Preparation and General Notes One or more Scan Stations ViviadForms Reader Document Capture WW Vvidrorms Pre processing Raw Data Web Server Interface e Data Processing Online survey Figure 6 Interaction of the Com
87. Service Log After each administrator s log in EvaSys checks if any errors have occurred If new errors have been noted a message appears in the menu Subunits with a reference to the mail service log where the error message can be confirmed Ze Mail Service Log Ze There are 99 Log entries available All entries e Show Entries per page 15 Show Page K i Show gt A Log ID Object Description Type Message Date Confirm error 99 Mail Service started 20 05 2011 at 13 50 11 98 Mail Service started 17 05 2011 at 09 47 45 97 Mail Service started 16 05 2011 at 16 24 29 16 05 2011 at 16 20 59 16 05 2011 at 13 58 32 16 05 2011 at 13 54 59 16 05 2011 at 13 53 24 16 05 2011 at 13 49 44 96 Mail Service stopped 95 Mail Service started 94 Mail Service stopped 93 Mail Service started GGG GGG 92 Mail Service stopped Figure 615 Mail Service Log 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 455 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management If the EvaSys server is temporarily switched off after the new login a message appears reporting that the mail service does not seem to be functioning When the mail service notifies EvaSys that it is active again the message no longer appears upon login Mail Service requires at least Version 2 0 of the Net Framework on the server Setup checks at installation and reports if preconditions are not fulfilled In the service administration of Window
88. Settings EvaSys Settings Surveys Module evaluation Delivery of module sections with no instructor By default the option is activated i e the report is sent to all recipients automatically Module evaluation Delivery of module sections with no instructor If this function is activated reports from module sections courses which are not assigned to an instructor are sent to all instructors for that module These module sections are in this case viewed as general polls Activated e about the module If this function is deactivated each instructor for a module section receives only their own report This option only affects the automatic delivery of reports directly after scanning and the delivery of reports using scheduled tasks f 9 n L e a LI j lza fhe zaiten mvaa kalen fe NS eet JL sdrentranebecalen ges d MEARE DNS OOF aVallaoie 0 SUQUNT AQTNIIISTators E D Se Ee Figure 460 Module Evaluation Delivery of Module Sections without Instructor 7 9 Further Settings By default on a module questionnaire the names of the module courses will be dis played below the title of the first question group of the corresponding questionnaire part SO as your survey participants know which course has to be evaluated If you want the name of the corresponding instructor trainer to be displayed as well there are two possibilities e You can integrate the name of the instructor trainer in the course name for ex
89. Settings in the VividForms part the option Allow editing HTML source code in VividForms Editor The button Source code appears in the dialogue for text entry and formatting in the VividForms Editor This affects for example the assistant for the creation of question groups as well as ques tions Text Wizard Edit Text Left Right Center Adjusted BIU amp SB Thanks for attending the survey and helping us improve the course lt br gt lt span style font style italic gt Your Evaluation Commissioner lt span gt Figure 541 Show the Source Code in the VividForms Editor Click on the button Source code to view and change the text s HTML formatting This way you can insert line breaks with the aid of the tag lt br gt list formatting or table formatting All HTML elements inserted here are then available for online surveys 2 10 Adding Pictures to a Questionnaire 2 10 1 Upload Pictures to the Picture Library To add pictures to a questionnaire you have to first upload them Please note You can integrate pictures in the image formats JPEG and PNG in the VividForms Editor The JPEG format is especially suitable for photographs Because of losses resulting from compression it is not recommended for text and graphics 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 403 EvaSys V Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Green cet Suita The advantage of the PNG format is the compre
90. Show deactivated questionnaires at the end of the listing including module questionnaires S Me ER pang yi Peter Browr 259 Quest_01 Evaluation Questionnaire VF Editor QSO M select 261 Quest_3 STEE 04 29 2009 VF Editor P Select v er ne A e Printi r is AU SIT 05 05 2009 Copy EE 06 04 2009 VF Editor 4 Select 2AA irain 02 cane eee 05 05 2009 VF Editor 4 Select v 246 ranon EE 08 28 2007 VF Editor ON 3 Sect 25 ran WB eee Na aton 05 05 2009 VF Editor 8 3 Select v 249 VF_Demop P perbased VivdForms 05 05 2009 VF Editor S Select 253 Workshop Workshop VividForms 11 08 2007 VF Editor Qf Select v H ar B e j Browse I VividForms As new form op Activates D Activated with restrictions see details Deactivated Questionnaire is not in use and can be edited 4 The questionnaire is in use and allows e The form contains versions created by instructors restricted editing only Instructor s Optional Questions forms Figure 64 Menu Questionnaires List of all Questionnaires The list of questionnaires is located in the main menu Questionnaires there in the submenu Questionnaire List First you will see a list of all questionnaires The abbreviated name 5 to 10 charac ters the description and the status of activation are depicted The Administrator can if required allow all the questionnaires of the Subunit
91. Status Open Status Closed Report sent Report not sent Figure 88 Additional Filters in the Survey Display After clicking on Show the surveys are displayed in an overview according to the choices made Additional filters 1 amp 2 Engineering SS Philipp Beimore Status Data available _Data Entry Demo Subunit Donna Harwood ALL _ Verifier Demo Subunit Carios Hernandez E Show Professional Development Philipp Belmore 5 wenn A Management Strategies NA_2 available 6013 05 12 2011 O train en Jae E e e e m Managing and maintaining a healthy Daa pm E anan ONT D lifestyle NA 1 available 1018 05 12 201 _ train enD E e v amp Professional Development Carlos Hernandez f WS10 11 AET AE af M aire d d leefs shy SC 017 05 12 2011 17 trainen tat e H JIR Aco ect ee 3 Human Resource Management 02 P1237 Figure 89 Display the Selected Surveys 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 105 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Aua mati n Suki Alternatively the survey list of an instructor trainer can be opened directly via the con tent view of a subunit In this overview a column with the heading Surveys is dis played This includes two numbers for each instructor trainer separated by a forward slash e g 1 3 This corresponds to number of surveys processed number of sur veys created CR Users in
92. Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Tree Structure A Se a or et E ty m Subunits Engineering m Professional Development Additional filters v 1 Economics iv Course Type v A Central Campus Prof Dr Philipp Belmore vw Carlos Hernandez A Mediaglinformation Center Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Carlos Hemandez Engineering Computer Sciences Social Sciences f Psychology Dr Philipp Belmore a _Data Entry Demo Subunit 73 Human Resource Management 63 Management Strategies Questionnaire 62 Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle 43 Human Resource Management 66 Leadership Development 47 Organization and Management Description Prof Dev Economics Overall F Question mapping of different questionnaires Include answers to open questions o Automatic with C Combine surveys unweighted text comparison Please note The mean values of individual i l surveys are averaged in this type of report Manual Figure 331 Report Creator Any Compilation Tree Structure Select Surveys Choose the desired elements from the tree and use the additional filters to select the evaluation periods course types and questionnaires Then click the button Show Now in the survey list below the surveys will be displayed which correspond to the fil ter settings Choose the desired surveys from the list Then ent
93. T Janguageselector lang a background color freplace colors background _questicn_odd DEESEA azimuth De danquageselector lang a display block Bloe l e lenguageselector lang a l Cat 8 hee cue before e begal prad item even static aven Hirion T3 bogenfiormecevtainer clear Both pause e Jeginformeontaner Bse background color f replace colors background _questicn_even teefifa DEE Affer Bu Joginformenrtaner emot display block pause belyre Le Kedomoetagwer input j wth de mantabiebadiground pibchsnange I gt manyoptens inputarea A manyopbos queshontent ROR i Sg P Gg jax color replece colors_text_surveyheader 666666 nehness se eee font size lips d Da m ble pagination a com GE L tze Ty mobie pagination a current ic lord SE mm ES speak header 7 e mobie pagination a ourr panuding H ANER 10px 10px speak emer mobie pagination ane l peak unc tusbon Le moble pagination apart speechitate Te mobie pagination aun fsurveyheader div Fress T mibi pagnaton ahower 7 width 330px7 EI voice family ge inoblackberry Item span Elgar left volume E y noblackberry Jiem soar a e noblackberry item span dew both 8 noblakberry Je span pagination j Emagin 000 Iar L notdarkherry item fitere margin O 0 D 20px E padding e Te Pdlackbeerg item Atere padding o noblackberry item fitere cliesr both ne noblackberry Aen fitere fif naviga
94. The part with open questions can take up a great num ber of pages Comments Report Please give us your feedback about the instructor as well as suggestions for improvement Udy Mire And deit dar l Coe od CQHENY lame Le ash QAUESKONS Ky Hernendet way Very Lett din anel balek Please give US your feedback about the course as well as suggestions for improvement Let daun hae dhanns a lof Ee KL Si S Sse l ow NNN CO aw 1 enjoyed dea Corte a lot Figure 260 PDF Report Responses to Open Questions Notes of a Survey You can display the notes of a survey in the PDF report by activating the option Show notes in the PDF report under System Settings Report Settings Configura tion This option is deactivated by default All notes of the surve Peter Brown 05 12 2011 at 11 21 52 The room was far too small for all particpants Internet was extremely slow Figure 261 PDF Report Display Notes of the Survey Additional information on adding editing and displaying notes can be found in chapter B 3 2 3 Survey Details Editing displaying notes 220 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback General Configuration The PDF report settings in the menu System Settings Report Settings have to be configured for each PDF report In the details of the questionnaires you can define a default PDF report for each questionnai
95. Upload Uploading copies the logo automatically in the logo directory C apache htdocs evasys data images logos subunit on the EvaSys server Logos for subunits Default Logo f d system logo e custom logo 2 amp File Durchsuchen Upload Back Figure 29 Manage Logo Files In the table in the window you can see all the logos in the system You can use the pencil symbol to change the name or the cross symbol to delete the logo from the sys tem In the first column you can select a logo as default logo and it will be automati cally used whenever a new subunit is set up Click on return to get back to the subunit details The logo graphic will be displayed in the interface as an illustration of the active sub unit Even when the instructor trainer logs in with an active user account this logo will appear in the upper right hand corner of the screen In addition the logo will appear in the heading of the PDF report document generated by EvaSys We recommend using the JPG format even though GIF is better as a rule for depicting logos The reason is that for legal reasons relating to licenses some printer drivers cannot encrypt the compression of the GIF format In this case the reports could not be printed Changing Subunit Data After a mouse click on the symbol A in column Edit of the subunit window you can work with the address and configuration data of the subunit 48 2011 Electri
96. V Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Green dog Suite o o S g 5S Ss c a 990 9 si YY P E o OO m w m Lgi o D m M 0 Lai it complements the learning matter ap ErO UD itis well structured oo oO Oo It benefits from the technical possibilities internet Pio Eo ZOE videotaping blogging etc Figure 530 Vertical Pole Labels in the Editor Preview Please note that those labels between the two poles are not linked to the scaled ques tion and will not be visible in the PDF report or exports 2 8 3 Inclined Pole Labels In addition to horizontal and vertical pole labels you can also use inclined pole texts for paper surveys You can define the degree of inclination under Extended Pole labels Wu Extended Pole Labels Extended Pole Labels Option Strongly Agree Agree Rather Agree Rather Disagree Disagree Strongly Disagree Abstention Degree of inclination Piease notice that the inclination of the ang ke wil not be shown in the preview of the VividForms d to technical reasons 55 Apply 1 and software components Thanks for attending the s z yetping us improv ace EH ee oe Figure 531 Inclined Pole Labels Degree of Inclination As you can see in the above graphic you have eleven different degrees of inclination to choose from 398 2011 Electric Paper GmbH MF EvaSys Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor Survey Automation Suite Th
97. V Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting 2 Change the attributes of the user Ha e Title First name Maria Last name Report Phone Email report01 training evasys com Address Language Default language Login name rc New password nd TTT Confirm new password LDAP registration Deactivated w Figure 291 Creating a Report Creator Step 2 In the third step you define the data access of your report creator By default the report creator only has access subunit wide To change the standard setting choose at this point system level 1 2 3 2 Change the user rights Data access own subunit Assign additional subunits Computer Sciences Economics Engineering Professional Development Scanstation Demo Subunit _Data Entry Demo Subunit Merter Demo Subunit _VividForms Demos Cancel Figure 292 Creating a Report Creator Step 3 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 249 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model As soon as you confirm your input by clicking on Save the report creator appears in the user list GR Users in subunit Economics amp Maria Report Report Creator 070 06 18 2011 2 O amp O Select all L Move selected to Computer Sciences Figure 293 Report Creator in the List of all Users Give the login name and password to the person acting as the report creator They can then log in Of cou
98. What dig ru Bie inihi care VWpsneedn br Tht cour hud helped r greng my opsnice 1 EI E 1 E Pings Oe ui yo Gonna poggio aS eee gg to the leche Thi course ban helped trap tp aah tor clarticamen whan hava che eet This purs hat helped re speak in A way that other can understand Oh DH D ER CO ER o This osure has haipad me peak more meccsel Baaj m m E This gours hues haipad ma improse De wary modemie drecussions EI 0 OD E 2 Ce JIL Figure 585 VividForms Plus Questionnaire HEsaC Dr Edith Braun 432 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw PE deer Suite System Management and Summary D System Settings and Management 1 System Management and Summary 1 1 Search With the search function you can search for users courses surveys as well as deliv eries either individually or in combination The search function can be found on all menu pages in the upper right hand corner Enter your search term and click on Search All four categories are searched and you are directed straight to the search result pages Subunits Questionnaires system Settings system Information Search Sein V Cp List of all Subunits 2 Subunit s not visible Subunit User Edit Delete Subunit administrators Peter Brown Administrator Ba vV Computer Sciences a3 A A Figure 586 Search Function You can find the same results by opening the EvaSys searchmask at System Infor mation Search and making no restrict
99. a month with leading zeros M A short textual representation of a month three letters Y A full numeric representation of a year 4 digits y A two digit representation of a year Time Format Here you can define the format for time h Hour 12 hour format beginning with zero H Hour 24 hour format beginning with zero i Minutes beginning with zero s Seconds beginning with zero a Lower case ante meridian and post Meriden A Upper case ante meridian and post meridian Display of menu images By default this option is active which means that menu images are displayed in the upper left corner throughout the entire system If this option is deactivated menu images are hidden throughout the entire system Number of images for menu The number of images that can be displayed alternatively in the screen Please note that the images must be named and in the subfolder Bilder The image name begins with customer and ends with a number The file ending must be jpg The first image is named customer0 jpg and the last image customerxx jpg with xx being the number given in this setting Questionnaire list Display questionnaire status The status column in the questionnaire list can be hidden or displayed With a larger number of questionnaires it is recommended to hide the status column so as to achieve a faster page loading 478 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automati
100. a pre established general password for all participants As opposed to the PSWD based online survey not every participant receives their own password This method is a comparably unsafe one because participants cannot be prevented from voting more than once in a survey with the same password On the other hand the password based process allows a survey to be conducted without precise knowledge of the group of participants Le without being able to invite participants personally The standard method for online surveys in central evaluation is by default the PSWD based method In order to perform a password based online survey this function must first be activated in the EvaSys settings menu System Settings EvaSys Settings Sur vey Online Allow password based online surveys Central Evaluation Once acti vated standard PSWD based online surveys can be converted in password based ones To create a password based online survey see chapter B 3 2 7 Effective Man agement and Conduction of Online Surveys 102 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Anomalon Suis Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys 3 2 Central Evaluation In the chapter below you will learn about the generation and the handling of surveys in the central evaluation 3 2 1 With this function you can generate any number of surveys You must only make sure that the questionnaires you need exist have been tested and are set for use Generating Surveys
101. access times system performance is optimally utilized Archiving Your existing PDF reports and CSV raw data can be archived by sending them to the email address defined in the configuration In this way legacy data can be exported with a complete audit trail and subsequently deleted from EvaSys increas ing and maintaining clarity and performance of the system Please note that EvaSys is a productive system and should not be used as an archiving system see also chapter B 3 2 9 Batch Events system cleaning Please delete all reports compilations subgroup reports PSWDs deliveries and log book entries that you do no longer need via the system cleaning menu System Information Thus the clarity and performance of the system increases see also chapter D 1 11 System Cleaning 1 10 Deletion Log The deletion log tracks all data deletion events in the system It is not possible to delete from the deletion log The following deletion processes are logged in this protocol e Subunits e Users e Courses e Surveys e PSWDs e Questionnaires e Study Folders Active Accounts Each deletion log record will contain the following information e User Who has deleted the data e Object Type and Description What was deleted e Date When was the data deleted e ID of triggering activity Which deletion event chain has caused the deletion of this element The top section allows the selection of object types to be dis
102. administration a green ball with a white arrow appears in the questionnaire list Evaluation e TE H 259 Ouest 01 GH 05 05 2009 VF Editor Q 3 Select v Figure 568 Template Questionnaire Complemented by an Active User By clicking on the name or description of a questionnaire in the form list you can open a detail view of the questionnaire You can even choose under action the command details In the detail view you can define how the questionnaire will be used 420 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Defining General Templates Ei Details for questionnaire Sample_01 Sample_01 Sample Questionnaire s VividForms Editor s PDF Sample Show In the recognition set of the VividForms Reader Add G Copy and open the questionnaire in the VividForms Designer W PDF paper survey Show Preview online survey Advanced settings Questionnaire EditFom Delete Text Templates e Edit EditFom Expor Form Reporting Options Online Design Activated Mirrored scale values 7 Show the header of the survey JI Allow Summary Reports Enable temporary save Survey Type Show print option Allow result access Certificate of None E Procedure Display answers to open participation ALL questions Advanced Sn configuration 1 Ed Subunits Course Type Period a E AL i ALL al Lecture S
103. an entire question group the so called indicator The indicator in EvaSys thus forms a question group average 236 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting D D OR Da SS II The instructor is always well prepared An Gem em Tee i 20 a ES d 4 G 5 0 O mm 11 9 550 93 3 The instructor explains even complex topics in a A0 comprehensible way The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc without any problems Elo dev 0 a Please grade the instructor for this course dev 0 3 Figure 274 Evaluation of Scaled Questions of an Entire Question Group Generally indicators can be regarded as kind of identification numbers which make a statement about the summarized items In EvaSys for example one question would correspond to one item This way the questioned values for example quality of the course are measurable and comparable Of course an indicator can only give an accurate overall statement when the single questions can actually make a contribution to the statement For the calculation of the indicator in EvaSys all results of the scaled questions are added The sum of them is divided by the number of responses Thus the already calculated averages of the single questions are not used for this This means that questions with a smaller number of valid responses for example with abstentions or invalid responses have a smaller
104. by the user in EvaSys the stored IP address is compared with the transmitted new one If they do not match the session is termi nated and the login screen appears The security check prevents a valid session ID being guessed and hinders the associated access to EvaSys by third parties How ever guessing a valid and usable session ID even with the function deactivated is quite unlikely 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 495 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management If users with the same IP address are accessing EvaSys network related and the storage of the IP address is activated only a limited check can be undertaken lf EvaSys is accessed from a network communicating with changing IP addresses the storing of the IP address must be switched off Otherwise the login screen with the error message will appear continuously whilst working with EvaSys because EvaSys cannot determine whether the session is still with the same user but the IP address has changed or an unauthorized user is attempting to continue working in the session 2 5 13 Section System Security Use CAPTCHAS This function protects EvaSys against automated attacks CAPTCHAs are pictures where characters numbers or letters are displayed in a way only recognisable by humans They are used to distinguish betweeen humans and machines If CAPT CHAs are activated the user will be prompted to type in a CAPTCHA after several failed login
105. changes are made in the existing user profile The identity is determined using first and last name combination since a personal number code is unknown Course names are assigned using an ID number If there is already a course with the same ID number then all the data fields of the CSV file are adopted 8 The course or the user account is no longer found in the new CSV file The orphaned entries in the database are deleted along with all surveys and their data related to the course or the user account th The user account is no longer in the new CSV file but should be kept so that data related to the surveys is not deleted and remains in the system The user account is given the status archived and can no longer be reactivated The courses contained in the CSV import file must be assigned to an survey period Select a corresponding period from the selection list above Here you are also offered the option Continuous instead of an individual period In addition to the general determination of an survey period for all courses contained in the CSV import files you can individually assign a deviating period to each course However please bear in mind that by selecting the comprehensive definition of peri ods all period settings of individual courses will be overwritten 76 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period At the bottom of the list click on Continu
106. character that you define in System Settings EvaSys Settings Data Import and Export Separators CSV import and export serves as a separator Use the SE data structure for EE CSV based gier participant data Table 8 Data Structure for Importing CSV based Participant Data Here the text file would appear as follows DEMO12 hardy example com Hardy Amy Mrs DEMO12 smith example com Smith Dr Mary Mr DEM0O12 Harrison example com Harrison Paul Mr The field Course ID forms the link to the courses existing in EvaSys One import file may contain participant data for any number of courses If on a large scale survey participant data is to be imported into EvaSys it makes sense to create and import the CSV import file for survey participant data and CSV XML files for subunits user accounts and courses simultaneously There is also the possibility for you to import participant data in the details of a course To do this click on the green pencil in the course list 168 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw PECH deer Suits Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Lf Courses of Philipp Belmore Number Course Pro fst Course mp Evaluation Course ation Participants L C oeaan Secondary n EH Dese Program of study Course ID period ype Location Participants Language Location instructors Drog Managing Economics Engineering Computer 62 maintaining Sci NA 1 continuous Seminar Sem 03 TK english Central
107. displayed is preset in the menu System Set tings Define Tree Structure As a framework here the two levels Subunit and Course are displayed If necessary additional levels such as program of study instructor etc can be inserted In the drop down menu below the structure list apart from the instructor all levels which are linked with the course Le program of study room and the five user defin able data fields in this example only two are used namely language and location are available 120 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite _ EvaSys v e Subunits Questionnaires System Settings System Information Gerten Survey Automaton Suie L Define Tree Structure e Position Element Action 1 Subunit 2 Course Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Peter Brown Administrator Program of Study Program of Study Course Location Instruments E Text Templates Language E R Location Documents e Vocuments Course User Data Field No 3 4 Report Settings Course User Data Fieid No 4 Course User Data Field No Online Templates Instructor Configuration ay EvaSys Settings WG Define Tree Structure Course Types Figure 114 Setting up the Tree Structure To add a level to the tree structure select the appropriate level from the drop down list and determine its position Afterwards click Add The sele
108. email attachments The amount of maximum characters for the file names in email attachments The value 0 deactivates the cutting of characters Subject Replace special characters If activated in the subject of every email special characters will be replaced to antici pate problems with some email clients Delivery method PSWDs central evaluation 1 PSWDs sent as batch mail by administrator 2 PDF lists of PSWDs is sent for printing and distribution to instructors trainers Conditional email report dispatch send email report after scanning depending on the settings of the e admin settings of the administrator at Process Defaults e dep admin settings of the subunit administrator at Process Defaults e user configuration of the respective user e survey according to the information on the cover sheet Instructor Trainer s optional questions group address Group address to which the questionnaires personalized with the Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions are to be sent 490 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Configuration Settings Sender name for all system emails Sender name that is used for all emails sent by EvaSys Sender email address for all system emails Sender address that is used for all emails sent by EvaSys Email address of the support department This address will be used when sending emails to the support department Dean manager s copy evaluation When send
109. end of an survey period summary reports for deans managers of studies can be submitted and the collected raw data can be transferred for the implementation of further analyses in statistics programs such as SPSS Excel or Sphinx This means that the system is managed and organized by a central entity this entity being the administrator in interaction with some other user roles for example the 22 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite The Basics report creator An EvaSys administrator creates the structure as well as the ques tionnaires implements the survey and passes on the questionnaires and reports This principle is illustrated in the following graphic Figure 11 Central Evaluation Model The central entity the EvaSys administrator top circle colored teal is in charge of the evaluation s flow and ensures that the survey s questionnaires are passed on to the instructors trainers bottom row of circles of various sub units middle row Of course several people may share a user role so that for example two or three staff members of quality assurance can share the administrator s log in However it still remains ONE log in so that the staff have to cooperate with one another 2 3 2 Active Instructors Trainers Accounts In addition to this central control of the evaluation it is possible to authorize particular users to carry out their own processing independently
110. five different areas Action In the action box on the left you can select an email type or a letter text Language Below the box Action you can select the language for the text The default language is the system language 456 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Config uration Setti ngs Editing of text templates Action Automatic email attachment list E MAIL Batch printed form for instructor hybrid survey a E MAIL Certificate of participation for online surveys No amail attachment defined E MAIL Cover sheet for instructor E MAIL Data entry for instructor E MAIL Footnote for anonymous online surveys E MAIL Footnote for non anonymous online surveys E MAIL Form for instructor E MAIL information about result access to participants Attach Language English Higher Education OK Reference Mail text SALUTATION TITLE SURNAME This email contains the personalised questionnaires from your survey SURVEY see the attachment You can print the questionnaires now and distribute it to Students To be able to display questionnaires Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on your computer Notice every single questionnaire is unique because of the PSWD With the PSWD is it also possbile to vote online Save Figure 616 Editing of Text Templates PDF template or email attachment If you selected in the Action box a PD
111. for their size any differences in comparison with the description of the standard histograms You can activate the creation of this part of the analysis at System Settings Report Settings Configuration Create maxi histogram The instructor is always well prepared The instructor explains even complex topics in a The instructor handles the technical equipment comprehensible way video projector etc without any problems Figure 255 PDF Report Maxi histograms Cross Tabulations Scaled as well as single choice 1 of n questions can be correlated and put into cross tabulations The creation of cross tabulations can be activated in the Editor Control of a questionnaire under Form Properties Filters Validation Cross Tabulations Re quired Questions In order to activate the creation of cross tabulations use the function System Settings Report Settings Configuration Create cross tabulation 0 0 16 7 50 33 3 100 x What is your age y The technical equipment of the university is excellent 1 18 29 2 30 39 3 40 49 1 strongly disagree 3 4 50 59 ER 5 GR SC 60 69 6 Older than 69 strongly agree Figure 256 PDF Report Cross Tabulations Profile Line The profile line is a dashed line along the averages of scaled questions The average will also be displayed as a numerical value At the end of a survey period two further lines can be drawn for comparative pur pose
112. from any PC that 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 23 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Preparation and General Notes has internet access unless the administrator applies certain restrictions for security reasons As is the case with administrator s access security is accorded through a log in only accessible with a password as well as the option to use SSL encryption With paper surveys the questionnaires are collected via de centralized Scanstations which are operated by the instructors trainers themselves Carrying out the scanning process is so simple that no training is required The active instructor trainer accounts are useful in the following types of surveys and for the following users e An instructor trainer of psychology or sociology wishes to collect data during a research project using EvaSys This way you can give the instructor trainer the opportunity to generate empirical data e Students postgraduates often base their work on empirical surveys The EvaSys administrator can assign an active account in EvaSys to the respective tutor pro fessor In turn the tutor can grant his students postgraduates access to his account e Departments faculties have a requirement for surveys that are carried out outside of the centrally managed course evaluation These may for example be surveys carried out in refectories canteens and libraries but may also be surveys carried out among graduates and which can also be managed thr
113. gt Next gt gt lt lt Previo lt lt Previous Submit SSES Los datos introducides van a aer Your entnes are now being saved To almacenados Para recuperarios debe submit your inputs you will need to login acceder otra vez con la misma CONTRASENA again with the same PSWD and submit aceptar el cuestionario despu s de the questionnaire after completion completarlo Por favor confirme pulsando Please confirm with OK or select Cancel OK o selecciones Cancel para volver al to return to the questionnaire E sech La A KAZEN lee l Figure 134 Language Set here Spanish in Detail The listing contains the text elements that appear in online surveys along with their respective translations 136 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Click on the bottom of the screen on Back to return to the start menu To create a new language set click on New below the list of existing language sets Name the language set and then translate all elements Language set Add Name of language set italiano In the system language Translation Astensione Abstention Save temporarily Figure 135 Defining a Language Set Note The language set can only be saved when all elements have been translated Once saved the language set appears in the list of existing language sets Unlike lan guage sets linked with system languages here you have the possibility of editi
114. hand side the preview Clicking on Delete picture removes the marked picture from the list Please note The system does not ask you to confirm the deletion When you click on the button the picture will irrevocably be removed from the list 2 10 2 Integrating Pictures in a Questionnaire As soon as you have uploaded pictures into the picture library you can integrate them into the questionnaire You can find the option Picture in the menu Add As with the other items you can only add a picture to a question group As long as you do not define a question group you cannot select the option Picture When you have created a question group you can integrate pictures the option can be selected Add Add Question Group Add Question Pole Labels Extended Pole Labels H E S F Line Space Separator Text Box SC Page Break Figure 544 Option Picture in the Menu Add Activated left and Deactivated right i ef OD y iy When clicking on Picture the picture assistant opens in a new window Picture Assistant m Insert picture Please select a picture file Smiley e Alignment left aligned o centered i right aligned Scaling in of page width 10 Apply Cancel Figure 545 Picture Assistant 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 405 EvaSys iw Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Geen Autsmation Suita You can select a picture from a list the
115. have already been distributed elsewhere 1 8 3 How to Use a Volume License The license model Volume license allows you to create as many users as desired Instead there is a limitation in the amount of forms you can capture i e in a deter mined period of time generally one year you can only capture a specific number of datasets in paper or online form Also in case of a volume license the license key has already been entered during installation and the volume file has been uploaded to the system In case of a change in your license data you will receive a new license key which you can add in the menu 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 447 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management System Information License If only the volume changes you will receive a new vol ume file which contains the following information e The volume for each period of time This data tells the system how many datas ets you can use i e how many paper or online questionnaires you may read in e Period of validity i e wnen does the cycle start resp end e Number of cycles Normally a volume license has an indefinite number of cycles with a duration of one year each As soon as one cycle has expired the license is renewed automatically and a new cycle starts If you click on the button Details to the right of the line Volume license in the win dow License Management you can see a new window with de
116. have to ensure three things e The instructor trainer with sensible log in data must exist in the structure which you as the administrator have created By creating instructors trainers you decide on the rights which an active instructor trainer is granted Of course you can change these rights again at any time ls an active instructor trainer authorized to create new questionnaires edit the administrator s templates or can he only use central templates with which to cre ate his surveys For this purpose you set the respective rights in the mask for Creation Modify user data option VividForms Editor You have the options of Unrestricted access Extension of templates only No access VividForms Editor Unrestricted access l Unrestricted access Cancel Extension of templates only No access Figure 193 A User s Access to the VividForms Editor The names are relevant and describe the above mentioned rights ls an active instructor trainer upon completion of processing authorized to view to which degree his surveys meet the quality guidelines or even those of his subunit possibly those of additional subunits or even those of the entire sys tem You also grant these rights in the mask that serves to create and change user data The following options can be chosen from No QM views Only own sur veys Only own subunit Unrestricted access If you wish to authorize access to one s
117. have when being used as a template by other users If the property Template is inactive the number of pages will be limited internally to 99 pages 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 359 EvaSys iw Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Survey Aincmnation Sule e Max Items Defines the maximum number of questions allowed on the questionnaire This enables control over the number of questions which may be added when decentral users take this template to add personal questions This limitation is inactive when the form is not a template 2 2 The Editor Control You can access all functions pertaining to questionnaire creation in the menu panel on the left The following table gives you an overview of each individual menu and its functions By clicking on a menu name it can be opened and closed By clicking on the padlock icon the anchoring of the editor control panel to the top of the page is released so that if required it can scroll down with the questionnaire Add Editor Control 3 Question Opens the dialog to create a new question 4 Add Question Group Add Question Pole Labels Extended Pole Labels Opens the dialog to add vertical pole labels i Extended Pole Labels Line Space Question group Opens the dialog to create a new question group Pole Labels Adds the pole labels defined under form properties Line Space Adds an empty line z separator Separator Adds a horizontal separator af Text Box Text Box Op
118. here In the following figure you can recognize for example that besides the EvaSys PDF report a user defined report was produced automatically for the computer center It contains for example only the questions which are important to the employees of the computer center Report data tg Results in HTML format Results in PDF format EvaSys PDF report e KH Standard EvaSys PDF report PDF Reports Short Version Eat R Evasys POF report a individual Report ES E Textual Report Raw data in CSV format A Profile Line T Ki show Figure 361 Report Creator Detailed View Downloading User defined PDF Reports If your questionnaire was translated you can decide here on the language in which to download the standard or the user defined report Here a selection is possible between English and German Report data tax Results in HTML format Results in PDF format EvaSys PDF report K English el Cen Figure 362 Report Creator Detailed View Downloading Multilingual Reports So in this example you could download four different reports e the English standard report e the German standard report e the English report for the quality of teaching and 286 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting e the German report for the quality of teaching Below these options you have the possibility to export the raw data into the formats of SPHINX SPS
119. in order to display the respective question in the HTML report If the value is set to 0 all questions of the reports will be displayed HTML report Minimum percentage for display absolute Defines the minimum absolute response frequency to a question required in order to display the question in the HTML report Please also consider the setting Show notice for suppressed report HTML report Separate closed open questions When activated the results for open and closed questions in the HTML reports are dis played separately This results in better readability particularly of those reports cre ated with a mix of open and closed questions HTML report Listing of open questions Listing and counting of comments in the report Create distribution for the report for the dean of studies program manager This function shows the distribution of results from all reports and is only available for reports to the dean manager the dean of studies program manager and the presi dent There is a distribution graph for each active indicator of a questionnaire Open tree structure If this option is activated the open tree structure configured parallel to the standard structure will be activated Subunit administrator View the original recognized forms If this option is activated then subunit administrators can view recognized forms as PDF files Subunit administrator View survey results If this function is deactivated then
120. internal mail OR e Download of the report documents by the instructor trainer Phase 4 Expanded Reports e Create summary reports e Filter and combine reports e Mass dispatch of comparative profile lines e Compare various questionnaire versions 38 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period e Export raw data to Excel SPSS or Sphinx e Archive raw data Phase 5 Quality Management e possibly definition of norms and or quality guidelines e Enable QM Screens giving deans managers an insight into the evaluation results of a department e Generate new norm values for the following evaluation period some steps need to be performed only once or at least very rarely for example cre ating questionnaires others must be performed for each period for example the cre ation and implementation of surveys Some steps may not yet be relevant to you for example the creation of norms for which you should already possess evaluation data Other steps are necessary in each evaluation such as again the creation and implementation of surveys TO give you an overview of how EvaSys can support you in your evaluation the indi vidual phases are accurately outlined in the following This way you can best decide which elements you wish to use and how you design them 2 Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period The preparation of a survey period includes e The sele
121. is collected in the properties of courses e User defined course fields Data fields to be entered in the administrator interface at EvaSys Settings Course User Data Fields can be automatically imported Insert data columns following the sequence first additional field second additional field and so on to the CSV files which then contain key words which you have also defined at EvaSys Set tings Course User Data Fields Please follow the sequence first secondary instructor trainer then user defined course fields An example for a CSV data line along with these additional fields Instructor Mr Prof Dr Michael White m white example com Math II 10574 v 02 104 Economics 1 20 0 Ger man Theory In this example the line was filled in with a 0 no secondary instructors trainers as well as German and Theory for user defined course fields for language of instruc tion and theory practice orientation E CSV Import Procedure To carry out a CSV import for structural data go to the user list of a subunit Via the button Browse in the section Import instructors from CSV File you can select a CSV file which contains all instructors trainers and courses you wish to import Click the button Import to upload the file GSusers in subunit Economics A Name CO Surveys Created Actions Select all LI Move selected to Computer Sciences Ke Create New User C Documents and Settings Adr
122. onion gvaic le fo sub m Background color external DEE3E4 ei This setting determines the background color of the external area Figure 10 Color Setting of the EvaSys Interface For further information please contact our support team 2 3 Central Evaluation and Active Instructor Trainer Accounts Within EvaSys you have two options for governing responsibilities for surveys The option usually used for regular evaluation processes is the so called central eval uation option Hereby a central evaluation office takes care of the evaluation s coor dination In addition to this central evaluation you may authorize individual instructors trainers to create and conduct their own questionnaires and surveys This is what is called active instructor trainer accounts 2 3 1 Central Evaluation A Central Office controls the Evaluation The central evaluation is tailored to a service and competence center by which the entire course evaluation is handled The instructors trainers will only have indirect contact with EvaSys insofar as that after completion of a survey an email will be sent to them outlining their evaluation results Through further feedback options instructors trainers can receive comparative reports comparing their own course to others in the course of studies and or the faculty or prior to a survey they can add their individual questions to the predetermined ques tionnaires At the
123. option The current group will be added as a new group in the library and the highlighted question will be added to this group The administrator also has the possibility of denying subunit administrators this right To do this he activates the option Public items disabled in the user profile of the sub unit administrator The subunit administrator can then no longer add public questions to the library All groups and questions are then as with the instructors trainers only visible to him 1 2 3 4 _ Please define the user rights QM Views No QM Views additional subunits for QM views Computer Sciences Engineering Professional Development Scanstation Demo Subunit _Data Entry Demo Subunit _Systemiogins _ Verifier Demo Subunit _VividForms Demos Online Survey Defined by Administrator No access Templates Assign additional Computer Sciences subunits Professional Development Scanstation Demo Subunit _Data Entry Demo Subunit _Systemlogins Gei Figure 559 Question Library Definition of the User Rights for Public Items in the User Profile of a Subunit Administrator 4 4 Deleting a Question from the Library With a click on Z you can delete the highlighted question from the library 414 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Filter Settings Validation Required Questions and Cross Tabulations 4 5 Adding a Group to the Library With a click o
124. participants The default value of course participants is used for batch printing when no such information is given This value can however be changed when batch Figure 629 Option Activated for Subunit Administrator With this function activated the subunit administrators are able to implement settings which deviate from central settings If any particular released configuration options are to be removed from control by sub unit administrators the marking can be removed The page at http localhost says ed Removing authorization will remove all existing settings made by Subunit Administrators For this option Figure 630 Warning when Deactivating the Subunit Administrator Release 2 5 1 Section General Title login window Text of the title line on the start page System language Sets the default language of the EvaSys interface as well as all generated report doc uments Users instructors trainers report creators etc can change the language in their settings Options German Higher Education 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 477 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management German Seminar Providers English Higher Education English Seminar Providers Date Format Here you can define the date format The following characters are recognized notice upper and lower case d Day of the month 2 digits with leading zeros m Numeric representation of
125. protect mode 000 eee eee 423 X KML IMPO vg ENNEN 8 wee REN EN RENE ww Tf Import of the whole organizational structure 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 507 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite 508 2011 Electric Paper GmbH
126. questionnaire 8 3 Information about a VividForms Plus Ques tionnaire When you click on Edit in the list of the questionnaires or on Edit Form in the win dow Details for questionnaire you get to a window with further information about the VividForms Plus questionnaire The metadata will provide you with general information about the form the name the description etc The filter settings define specific rules for filling in the form see chapter Filter Set tings The required questions only affect the online surveys You can define all those ques tions as required questions which must have been filled in by the interviewees In the crosstabs Cross Tabulations you can see coherences between questions If you have defined some you can see them in the evaluation reports Below the crosstabs you gain an overview of the questions on the form For this reason we do not recommend changing the form here The dependency between the form used for a paper survey and the one used for an online survey as well as the correlation of the surveys to the evaluation report would be blurred or possibly completely obscured by changing the questions here 430 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Ge e Implementation of Specific Design Requirements VividForms Plus Metadata ID 311 File Name HEsac_vip paf Evaluation in Higher Education self assessment of competence Description Filter settings No si
127. rather they provide details Furthermore they may possibly lead to very long reports e Selection between weighted and unweighted compilation By default the reports are summarized weighted meaning that the calculation is effected according to the number of returns This means for example If you summarize a survey with 100 return question naires and one with 10 the survey with 100 questionnaires counts for more than the one with 10 Mathematically expressed All individual results are each summed up for each question each single value that was ticked off and divided by the total number of results in this example 110 You explicitly have to decide on an unweighted compilation whilst creating a report It is to be noted that this type of calculation removes the possibility to adequately undertake further processing in statistics programs Because with weighted compilations each survey counts as 1 regardless of how many questionnaires have been processed for it Mathematically expressed You add the respective averages of the questions and divide these by the number of the surveys reports that you are summarizing in the example above therefore by 2 Since the questionnaire comparison represents a very important option whose possi bilities can facilitate your work this is outlined more precisely in the following Options during Report Creation Questionnaire Comparison There are often cases in which it bec
128. requirements If you do not need an accompanying letter you can switch it off For this purpose just deactivate the option Generate Letter in the configuration of the corresponding PDF report in the menu System Settings Report Settings Configuration PDF Report Header The evaluation report is introduced by the header of the PDF report The head con tains some identification data on the current survey 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 213 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite The contents of the PDF report header can be adapted individually under System Settings Text Templates PDF Report Header Philipp Belmore V Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle NA_1 No of responses 15 Figure 246 PDF Report Report Header Indicators The indicators are an average made up out of the averages of scaled questions belonging to the indicator As an aggregate value an overall indicator for all indicators is Supplied Global Index z devs 1 2 3 4 s 6 2 Questions about the instructor 0 e OU m D 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 Questions about the course _ ef SE a l 4 2 3 4 5 amp A Questions about the teaching material BR EC mene i W on 2 3 4 5 6 5 Questions about the studying conditions C EFE avae Figure 247 PDF Report Indicators The calculation of the indicators is activated or deactivated at System Settings Report Settings Configuratio
129. results you can combine later in the Report Creator In the section Questionnaire the following options are available Edit form Opens the questionnaire to edit The Editor or the Designer can be opened in this way depending on the Engine With VividForms Plus questionnaires the window to the questionnaire settings is opened Here you can change the wording of the ques tions and formats as well as making analysis specifications for indicators Export Creates a file from the questionnaire which can be saved and imported into a different EvaSys system Delete form Deletes the questionnaire and the survey data from the database Therefore Take care with ongoing surveys In the section Usage you can define the use of the questionnaire Form Activated or deactivated The latter is the soft solution Existing surveys can still be analyzed and displayed but you will not be able to create any new surveys Survey Type Either ALL or Paper Surveys or only Online Surveys 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 87 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Form Reporting Options Online Design Activated X Mirrored scale values Show the header of the survey Allow Summary Reports Enable temporary save SESSE Show print option we Gorete Design Complete Allow result access Certificate of None ee Display answers to open pe baa A
130. sent 1 Subunit 2 Survey Period 3 Course Type d Questionnaire Professional Development a Lecture S Quest 01 WS10 11 Seminar train_en l Select program of study 5 Course s Philipp rs o Print only master versions of cover sheets and Management Strategies NA_2 questionnaires Lary d Au he Ma An r Managing and E a heathy lifestyle HA _1 gt Create complete sets of questionnaires based on Human Resource Management 02 P1237 number of participants Default value if enrollment information is missing Leadership Develooment 02 P1234 Add senal number for automatic sorting Request Figure 165 Batch Events Selecting Courses for Printing Cover Sheets Forms 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 159 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Then decide if you want to request one copy of each cover sheet questionnaire or if you want to print questionnaires according to enrollment figures i e according to the number of participants assigned to a course By default the PDF document of a cover sheet survey only contains the cover sheet and not the questionnaire If you want the questionnaire to be produced as well acti vate the option Batch printing form printing when using the cover sheet procedure in the menu System Settings EvaSys Settings Functions Please be aware that this setting is only valid for print
131. set ID variable 1 vari able n Data from surveys whose questionnaires were created in batch printing with serial numbering additionally receive the batch print ID SPSS Format SPSS is a common tool for statistical analysis and solutions Exporting from EvaSys creates a SAV file which contains the format of the sheet and all the raw data of the survey report Sphinx Format Sphinx is a professional statistics solution from France for which EvaSys has an inter face After the download you will receive a ZIP file which contains a directory as well as three single files SURVEYNAME QUE Sphinx questionnaire SURVEYNAME OUV responses to open questions SURVEYNAME REP responses to closed questions SURVEYNAME HYP Report template if available SURVEYNAME BAT Link to direct display of the Sphinx evaluation report if report template is available In order to use these files you will need to install Sphinx Survey V4 5 or higher on your PC Double click on SURVEYNAME OUV file in order to start the operation You can learn more about using Sphinx with EvaSys in the relevant chapter Export of Online Surveys For online surveys the export data includes a time stamp showing the completion time of every record 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 309 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite 5 4 Definition of the Export Values and Names for Variables In export EvaSys assigns t
132. subgroup report Dynamic subgroups are marked with the symbol A normal subgroups with the sym bol L 186 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys HTML Subgroup Female from Data ZE CSV 2l Graduate Survey 2011 available E Iran en 05 16 2011 05 16 2011 003 BB choose pdt report SPHINX LEE Bane P 05 16 2011 05 16 2011 002 23 BB choose apr wl E L Graduate Survey 2011 available train_en SPHINX Figure 209 Dynamic and Normal Subgroups in the Survey List When new data is collected during the main survey the example showing TestSurvey1 the subgroups are automatically updated when the study folder is downloaded again Re calculation of dynamic subgroups Subgroup Subgroup Female from Graduate Survey 2011 is being re calculated 50 Cancel Figure 210 Updating Subgroups When recalculations are completed the updated reports are available immediately When a survey is to be deleted for which dynamic subgroups exist an inquiry appears as to what should happen to the subgroups The options are to either delete these reports or alternatively to retain these reports under lack of their dynamic characteris tics 8 x Delete Survey Survey to delete Graduate Survey 2011 The function Delete in two steps is activated in your system Only the survey results will be deleted in the system Note One ore more dynamic su
133. such as data entry verification or creating reports without having to log into the system as a new user Later the administrator can switch between the different user roles via a drop down menu in the top left corner of the screen All changes must be confirmed by entering the old password The entries are applied by clicking on the OK button 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 53 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Guetta Sukk EvaSys Iw Subunits Questionnaires Che Survey Automaton Suta System Information i 2 User profile of administrator Peter Brown Administrator Form of Address Hr e Title Instruments First name Peter E Text Templates SD Document Last name Brown Le LOUIS tA Report Settings Phone Online Templates er O Email administrator example com Configuration Language Default language e W EvaSys Settings z aS Define Tree Structure Login name iech W Course Types Password CH Periods gS Custom Thies Process Defaults New password Confirm new password LO Web Service Settings a Report creator Additional roles X Data Entry Assistant Verifier Language Sets Profiles amp Uu Profile Ai Administrators ok Jl Cancel E a Organization Figure 34 Administrator Profile The administrator can where necessary define further secondary administrators e g for
134. t av 5 2 5 Questions about the studying conditi a E aaia SE COCO SH Figure 275 Indicators Display in the PDF Report Without Overall Indicator 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 239 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Auncmation Sul The option Calculate indicators from the configuration refers only to this calculation of the indicators at the beginning of the questionnaire The other display options which are presented in the following are not affected by it Here in the EvaSys Settings you can also find some further settings which influence the display of the indicators in the PDF report e The setting Create profile Line for indicators some lines above Calculate indica tors subsequently adds to the usual profile line for individual questions a profile line for the indicators defined in the questionnaire 2 Questions about the instructor e ite A 2u sb 3 Questions about the course _ 4 L a52 4 Questions about the teaching material w 54 5 Questions about the studying conditions Figure 276 Indicators Profile Line in the PDF Report Here you see the profile line for the four indicators evaluation of the course evalua tion of the professor overall rating and evaluation of the handouts e In addition to the display of the indicators that you chose you can add the overall indicator of th
135. the mouse in the editing view to mark the desired question and then click on the green pencil in the area Question The Question Wizard known from work with the VividForms Editor opens Here the desired changes e g changes to the question text the answer options or the pole texts etc can be made Di Question Wizard m Please choose a question type e Scaled Question im Question Wizard Opan Question Single Choice Question text Multiple Choice Matrix Field BIU S Grade Value Students who go to the instructor for help get the i assistance they need Question Wizard m Define Options Abstention deactivated v Public Checkboxes 5 000 o p pt m Y Individualize pole labels Back Next Left Pole Strongly Disagree a We 7 Set this scaled question as mirrored question s Next Apply Cancel Figure 82 Question Library Editing Questions 96 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period To edit a question group use the mouse to mark the group or any question within the group and click on the green pencil in the area Group Here too the Question Wiz ard opens and enables editing To delete or copy a group or a question mark the desired element and select the rele vant action Please observe when deleting a question group all questions contained therein are also deleted If you want to
136. will at first only show the report for the whole module survey Only after opening the PDF report for the whole survey or closing and if necessary re opening the survey the reports for the single parts of the survey will be created If the automatic report submission is activated all recipients will receive a report by email The person linked to the module account will receive the whole report while those people linked as secondary instructors trainers to single courses will receive their parts of the report only If there is a course which has no report recipient assigned to it then the report will only be sent to the module coordinator when using the Batch Events or sendig the report directly from the survey list When sending reports via Process Defaults oder via Scheduled Tasks there are to possibilities to deal with such courses e the report for this part of the module is only sent to the module coordinator e the report for this part of the module is sent to the module coordinnator and to all report recipients defined for the different parts of the module The latter option can for example be useful when the course without a defined report recipient corresponds to a general survey part concerning the module in total and when the results are to be communicated to all persons involved 352 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw The type of dispatch can be defined in the EvaSys Settings menu System
137. window is subdivided into two sections In the top part you can among other things open the PDF files Details for questionnaire Ouest Di SP VividForms Editor G Copy and open the questionnaire in the VividForms i Designer s PDF Sample Show PDF paper survey Show 38 In the recognition set of the VividForms Reader Add Preview online survey Figure 66 Details of a Questionnaire With which Engine the questionnaire was created VividForms Editor VividForms Designer can be seen on the top left A sample questionnaire can be opened with the option PDF Sample Click the option Show for this In the Recognition Set of the VividForms Reader The VividForms Reader must know the forms that you are using so it knows where to look for answer box areas Only with the aid of this information can it evaluate the graphics of scanned questionnaires In this way it checks during the evaluation that in those areas where crosses could lie areas are actually blackened 82 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period For this reason the VividForms Reader has at its disposal a file in XML format for every questionnaire which defines this form definition file XML is a description lan guage The pool of these definition files is know as Recognition Set However EvaSys first makes such a definition file available to the VividForms re
138. written outside of the box If necessary one can even zoom in making hard to read text more legible Display the entire Picture No 3 of 6 from survey No 45538 questionnaire page Question Please give us your feedback about the instructor as well as suggestions for improvement We in Hit s te Nive A des A d G J cel A ken Te cl Jya e La Figure 232 Data Entry Assistant Display the original scanned page If you do not want the data entry assistant be able to see the entire page of the form this option can be deactivated in the EvaSys Settings System Settings EvaSys Set tings Functions Data entry assistant Verifier View entire original questionnaire page To significantly speed up the data entry process shortcuts are available The follow ing shortcuts can be used Alt S to save Alt C to cancel and Alt R to replace If the data entry assistant has already entered answers to open questions the system will only display those answers again that are relevant to the question currently being displayed For this reason not all of the answers already entered are displayed 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 203 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model To avoid having to type often recurring words such as for example course or lab course you can create a list of placeholders and extend it as needed A placeholder may not be contained completely by the replacement
139. z J i av 34 Figure 372 Report Creator Comparative Profile Line 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 291 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite In the header you first see all of the information on the selected courses and or reports followed by the list of questions on the left which are complemented on the right by the two overlaid profile lines as well as averages As usual with the profile lines only questions regarding the standard value and scaled questions are displayed here In addition to the course Organization and Management by Carlos Hernandez you also mark the course Management Strategies of Prof Dr Philipp Belmore and again choose as comparative profile line Prof Development WS10 11 You leave all other options at their default value 5 Courses Reports Prof Dr Philipp Belmore a Pp Management Strategies NA_2 Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle NA_1 Organization and Management 02 P1236 Creator train_01 train_en train_en train_en train_en_1 train_en Belmore WS 10 11 train_en ii First Comparison Line Prof Development WS10 11 train en Second Comparison Line Deactivated Please Choose a Selection D Figure 373 Report Creator Select two Courses Comparison Line In this case in the PDF you will see the profile line comparison shown above on the second page On the first page the profile line of the course
140. 0 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Survey ID Here you can change the identification of the Data survey survey ID Attention Not available in available Web verifier mode Show recognized form Here the recognized answer boxes of the Data originals as PDF scanned questionnaires can be displayed available Table 6 Overview on the Actions Concerning a Survey In the following graphic you can see header data actions and the maintenance of an email merge survey There are not yet any data available for the survey You can only display the questionnaire here finish the data collection close survey delete the sur vey assign the survey to substitute instructor trainer edit show notes and change the survey ID Survey Details A Survey Human Resource Management amp Instructor Carlos Hernandez J Course Human Resource Management 0 Survey Period S511 A Type Paper survey cover sheet Questionnaire Quest_01 Status In progress ready for data 1 Survey Created on 05 12 2011 at 10 53 36 Actions Maintenance Show cover sheet form in browser A Survey ID 15956 Change English Show Emai Number of participants for calculating response rate 20 Accept Finish Data Collection Close Survey ZS Delete Survey f Assign survey to substitute instructor H Edit Show notes Reload Back Figure 9
141. 000 c ee eee 188 The PDF report 205 Filling degrees CHECK wae aoa wales woe bard oun ee wee 198 Filter settings 0 000000e 415 416 Folder Generating a study folder 184 Form of Address 2 0000 cee eee 40 Form view 195 Free Indicator 0 00 cee eee ee eee 87 Free indicator ii vi REN EE E ae re 244 G Generating SurveyS 103 Graphical element Adding graphical elements 400 Group Question group 374 H Handwritten comments 0005 201 Hard copy procedure 100 Header PDF report header 213 468 Questionnaire header 000 370 Horizontal matrix question 378 391 HTML Tan 402 Filtering of HTML Tags 402 I ID einer Umfrage ndern 0 118 Implementation of Surveys 05 99 Implementing backups 008 34 Import Data import 484 Import of VividForms questionnaires 425 XML Import 0 000 eee ee ee ees Tf Import interface 0 0 ee 72 Import of course participants email addresses 77 Importing participant data 167 Importing participants data 70 CSV Import 70 Importing questionnaire Importing VividForms Plus questionnaires 428 Inclined pole labels 020000 ee 398 Indicator 236 Activating the indicators in the configuration 239 Creating the in
142. 05 23 2011 VF Editor P Select w 295 General General Questions Evaluation in Higher Se 311 HEsaC Education self assessment 05 24 2011 3 Select v of competence Figure 582 Imported VividForms Plus Questionnaire Now the VividForms Plus questionnaire has been imported and added to the list of questionnaires There you can see the information as you are used to e The ID the description and the name of the form e The questionnaire was created with VividForms Plus For that reason you can see the relevant information in the field Engine e You cannot copy the questionnaire e When choosing Action Edit in the drop down list on the right you can see a win dow with detailed information about the form You will see the same window when clicking on Edit Form in the detailed view e By choosing Action Details in the drop down list on the right you can see the Details for questionnaire as you are used to 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 429 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Creating Questionnaires with VividForms dn Details for Ee HEsaC m re See SS S PDF Sample Z PDF paper survey S In the recognition set of the VividForms Reader Q Preview online survey Advanced settings Questionnaire Export Form Figure 583 Details for a VividForms Plus Questionnaire Click on Edit Form and you can see further information about the
143. 1 Section VividForms Recognition Set Folder Recognition set folder for VividForms Forms Image directory for open questions Path to a directory in which the VividForms Reader will store the images of an open question Default form editor access for users You can set the following access modes 0 Unrestricted access 1 Only templates 2 No access Cover sheet text Instruction text on the cover sheet Default Font size Default font size for VividForms questionnaires Allow editing of HTML code in the VividForms Editor If activated users are allowed to edit HTML code in the VividForms Editor Maximum amount of pages that can be printed through batch printing of forms Maximum amount of pages in one batch printing charge the maximum number is 30 000 pages Display of recognized form data If activated the checkboxes whose values were transmitted to EvaSys will be marked green in the PDF overview of the processed forms accessible in the details of a survey Standard view VividForms Editor This option defines the standard view of a questionnaire in the VividForms Editor The user can switch between the paper and online view at any time if the license allows 2 5 12 Section Network Settings Display value support link Display text of the web link shown in the interface default EvaSys website 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 493 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Mana
144. 11 Standard EvaSys PDF report Type Name Status Forms Processed a Form RE POF Reports Data LE 4 Short Version LA Management Strategies HA 2 ES 4013 05 12 2011 DE trainen dtu f pop Report Plugins l S DE Data a i a Cece rer rapot A Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle NA 1 available 018 05 12 2011 177 tram en J as individual mt Textual Report ss10 Figure 269 PDF Report Plugin Selecting the Adapted Report from the List of Surveys 4 5 4 Designing an Individually Configured Letter for Sending Reports You can add a letter to the automatically generated report either a standard letter or a customized one e g a letter according to your corporate design To change the design you will need a PDF file with the appropriate letter head Then three text fields are applied with Acrobat e address For the name and address of the recipient You can use placeholders from the email texts System Settings Text Templates e subject For the subject line The content of this line is defined in System Settings T ext Templates e text For the body text of the letter The content of this text as well as the placeholders used in it are defined in System Settings Text Templates 232 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback To Prot Dr Gebrege gt as privaterconidential K Result of a survey
145. 11 Electric Paper GmbH 419 EvaSys V F Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Giiniay dp Sui 6 Defining General Templates 6 1 Defining a Template by the Administrator The administrator can create templates whose contents cannot be modified by users with instructor trainer accounts By activating the box Template the form is made available to the active instructor trainer The instructor trainer can only supplement the questions set up by the admin istrator Dy Form Wizard Form creation information Abbreviation Sample_01 Title BIU amp Sample Questionnaire Paper Ad e Template V Activate deactivate template mode V New items can only be added at the end Max Pages 2 Max Items 20 Apply Cancel Figure 567 Activating the Option Template By activating the answer box Activate deactivate template mode the form is put at the active instructors trainers disposal The administrator can also determine that the new items which can be added by the active instructor trainer may only be added at the end of the questionnaire This means that the structure of the questionnaire pro vided by the administrator cannot be changed as the instructor trainer may only add his questions at the end To select this option activate the answer box New items may only be added at the end As soon as an active user has added a copy of this questionnaire to his questionnaire
146. 18 2011 20 Sociology Introduction into EENT Sociology 43212 Data available 3 train_en 05 18 2011 05 18 2011 16 Oto 2 Figure 591 Search for surveys Displayed are e Survey name at the same time a reference to the survey folder e SurveylD this number is identical to the operation number on the questionnaire without the check digit e Status ready data existing validation or deleted e Type Paper or online survey e Form short name of the questionnaire e Creation date the survey was created e Processed date of the last time this survey was carried out e Number returns form count number of scanned questionnaires empty question naires are counted 1 1 4 Search for Deliveries The content of the search table for deliveries is identical to the delivery table in the menu System Information Deliveries see Section 5 6 7 The search is conducted in the fields survey ID target address date as well as first and last name of the recipient The table contains the following information e Batch Batch ID of jobs which contains the questionnaires processed for this sur vey 436 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Management and Summary e Survey Name of the survey the questionnaire module i e of the questionnaire as well as the course type e Recipient The recipient is also the owner of the instructor trainer account e Target address Target email addresses o
147. 2 Eeue ET ALL geht Status in progress e Philipp Belmore 5511 train Di train WEI ALL x Show Professional Development Donna Harwood ws10m Carlos Hernandez EEU BE WS09 10 Data Entry Demo Subunit _Verifier Demo Subunit Figure 87 Display Surveys In order to display a number of surveys select in the box Central Evaluation the option Display Surveys Then select one or more subunits survey periods the instructors trainers and the relevant questionnaires and click on Show 104 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys wv Goen gc Suk Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Via the additional filter the selection can if desired be refined according to differing survey status and types In the drop down lists the following status and types are available e Survey status ready data available data deleted quantity of data too low data capturing verification open closed e Survey types online surveys hard copy procedure cover sheet procedure merge report filtering report unweighted hybrid online and paper based dynamic subgroups e Submission status PSWDs reminder questionnaire evaluation submitted not submitted Additional filters 1 amp 2 Status In progress Status Data available Status Data entry Status Web verifier Type Cover Sheet Procedure Type Hybrid Online P amp P Type Online Type Hard copy procedure
148. 2 Implementation of Surveys Subunit details Subunit Name Professional Development Dept No 15 Logo File system logo eo Phone Fax Street Address ZIP Code City Email Online survey template Sample Template Peter Brown Server address for online surveys of this subunit http 192 166 245 129 evasys_01 online Subunit visibility Unrestricted F Show the subunit in the context menu Subunits Figure 140 Linking the Online Survey Template with a Subunit Creation of a Customized Online Survey Template To create a so called customized online survey template open the menu Online Templates in the main menu System Settings The online template management opens automatically Subunits Questionnaires System Settings System Information ssi V S 9 Online Template Management Customized Online Survey Templates Peter Brown pes e K Li Ach Dasic template Administrator z 13 High Contrast EvaSys Onlinetemplate Peter Brown 2 O a 6 Sample Template EvaSys Onlinetemplate Peter Brown 2 DR Instruments gt Create new customized online survey template x Text Templates ED Documents Je Report Settings Online Survey Templates Configuration 9 EvaSys Onlinetemplate SYSTEM FR iS EvaSys Settings 11 My Template Peter Brown FR oa Define Tree Structure g Course Types k Online Templates ch Template ZIP file for online surveys 4 Periods GB
149. 2011 09 26 25 05 2011 09 29 29 05 2011 09530 29 95 2011 09 31 25 05 2011 09 32 29 05 2011 09 33 25 05 2011 09 34 25 05 2011 09 35 29 09 2011 09 36 29 95 2011 09 37 25 05 2011 09 36 25 05 2011 09 39 Figure 609 Overview of System Utilization This option can be activated or deactivated in the configuration under System Set tings EvaSys Settings Maintenance Measuring of performance values Also this is 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 449 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management where the limiting values Yellow limiting value for performance diagram and Red limiting value for performance diagram for the performance statistic are stored 1 9 2 List of all Active Users Logged In As a subunit administrator you will find a list of all logged in EvaSys users and online survey participants at the bottom left of every EvaSys page In this way you can see how many people are currently online and avoid an overload due to a high number of people being logged in at the same time Current Users en g Logged in Online Surveys 2 Figure 610 List of Active Users By clicking on Users logged in or Online surveys you will automatically reach the menu System Information in the area System status There you will find a detailed listing of all users currently logged into the system QS Current Users Peter Brown Administrator 05 25 2011 at 09 45 02
150. 2p1235 Donna No continuous 5 20 o 0 F R KI Engineering j Harwood i He Ges ee z a oe 2 GER Yes continuous 1 150 3 5 7 A E Organization and Carlos 3 O2 P 1236 N H 2 10 o 0 Central Evaluation 3 Management Hermandez f SE d ww Donna F a EvaSys User Types 02 P 1236 Hangad No continuous 2 35 r0 E a Human Resource Carles A Management 02 Pt237 Hemandez No continuous z 20 Ri d a l 3 Psychology 02 P1239 relates Yes continuous 1 100 o 0 ez HHG P2H geg ER Yea continuous 1 9 uo JR Managing and a maintaining ahealthy HA Bada No continuous 2 7 1 1 7a aimore lifestyle Management Philipp F a Strategies Ha 3 Balmore No continuous 2 CH 2 5 Fa Leadership a Carlos 3 Development 02P1234 Hemandez S continuous 1 150 ili Pa E Select all Assign selected courses tothe period just contmucus Assign H UN Vaewa Figure 58 Display of a Subunit s Courses At the bottom of the table a function period link of one or more courses is available which allows you to redefine the Assign selected courses to the period 5511 Assign V Select all Figure 59 Redefine the Period link of one or more Courses Select either an individual course by ticking the check mark box on the left side of the table or select all courses by ticking the check mark box Select all Then determine from the period selection list the respective survey period and click on Assign 2 3 Import Interfaces The import is intended for data mig
151. 33 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Preparation and General Notes 3 3 Implementing Backups 3 3 1 Backing up the Database The EvaSys database contains e All of the profile data organization department user e All of the surveys with raw data as well as statistical indicators e The contents as well as the evaluation rules governing all questionnaires e Operating data logbooks survey periods PSWD lists You should regularly backup the database In case of a MySQL database the MySQL service must be stopped first Therefore open a command line by Start run type cmd and press enter Type net stop mysql and the database server will stop You can then save the contents of the folder C apache mysql data evasys2 and start the MySQL service again To start the database server enter the command line net start mysql Close the command line by entering exit If you use a MS SQL database please consult your database administrator Additionally the Apache resp IIS service should be stopped because otherwise fur ther components attempts to access the database might fail The corresponding com mand is net stop apache2 resp net stop w3svc After the backup the service can be restarted by the command net start apache2 resp net start w3svc Generally it is advisable to stop all EvaSys services before carrying out the backup The further services are e VividForms
152. 4 2 0 5 SECTION COURSE USER DATA FIELDS tegen Zeg sen dea oinn sind avasbenanishinnndnastinaanarasasiedes 485 ZOO SECTION Re 486 2 5 SECTION CENTRAL EVALUATION cinstvaiisiasiispsnaciesinseieentmnacuaaeatnausianstsindee auiubaiialndndadanttairctevanigtnatt 489 2 5 8 SECTION EMAIL FUNCTIONS amp ACCOUNTS cccccccseceseeceeeseeceeeteeeeeeceeeteeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeaes 490 2 9 9 SECTION COLOR RN spcusonn bait anrasan inana KEA EAEAN EAN KANEN NAAA ANEN 491 2 5 10 SECTION INSTRUCTOR TRAINER ACCOUNTS ccccsccsecesseeseeeeeeeeeseeseceeeceseeeseeeeenenees 492 ZO 1l SECTION ole eet EE 493 2 5 12 SECTION NETWORK TEE 493 2 5 10 SECTION SYSTEM SECURITY EE 496 2 0 D E enge ge Le 497 2 60 CLIENT OPERATIONS E 500 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Introduction A Preparation and General Notes This manual is intended to assist you in your day to day operating of the software Eva sys If you wish to familiarize yourself with particular elements have a question or for example the software has changed due to an update you will require fast and conve nient access to the relevant information Therefore this chapter deals with the most important introductory questions e Which EvaSys manuals are available and where do you find which information e lf these cannot answer all your questions where do you find more help e What does the structure of the system look lik
153. 443 1 8 LICENSE ADMINISTRATION ANERER 444 1 8 1 OVERVIEW ON THE LICENSE ADMINISTRATION ccccccccssccesseceeseceseeeeseseseuseseseseseeessanesens 444 1 8 2 ADMINISTRATION OF USER ACCOUNTS c ccccsccessseceesecessecenseseseeeseueecenseseueessueesensetenseeens 445 1 8 3 HOW TO USE A VOLUME LICENSE ccccccccccecesccesseceusececsecceeeceusesenseseeeeseuseeesseeeneeesenesens 447 1 9 PERFORMANCE CONSIDERATIONS cccccceeseccesscecesccsueeccsseseseeceueesenseseseeeueesensesensusenseesentesens 449 1 9 1 PERFORMANCE STATISTIC cccccsessccesssccssceceusececseecsuseceusesessescsueecsuresenseseneeessueesensetenseeens 449 1 9 2 LIST OF ALL ACTIVE USERS LOGGED N u ceccccecsecesceceesecesseceueeceueesenseecsseecsenesensesenseeens 450 1 9 3 DISPLAY OF ONLINE SURVEYS u ccccccccsccessecesseceseeceseesessecessescueeseaeesensesenstessunesesesenseeens 450 1 9 4 MORE TIPS FOR AVOIDING SYSTEM OVERLOAD o cccccessecessecesssecesseceseseeeessseesensesenseeens 450 1 10 DELETION LOG seats sen ee 451 ER Weg 452 Es bh fe E GE RE 452 EE Eer 452 1 11 3 ENTRIES IN THE LOG BOOK icc sccccscsccsscsssssseesseescseesssseeseeeuseeesseeesseeeeeseeesseessesauessaeeses 452 1 11 4 DELETE COMPILATIONS AND SUBGROUP REPORTS isiseeeieeeieeeeereerirerrrerrierrrerrrerrren 453 1 12 ANALYSIS OF ERRORS o cccccscsessecesseccesecceseecesseceusecceseseueccsueeceuseseseseuuessuseseasesensueesstessenesents 453 Teke E eege 453 1 12 2 MAIL SERVICE aggies egene 455
154. 5 0 Build 7 Database MySQL localhost Paper surveys Licensed Online Surveys Licensed Handwriting recognition Licensed VividForms Designer Licenses 5 Version 0 5 7 1 Scanstation licenses User licenses Figure 603 Administrating User Licenses By default the number of user licenses for each subunit is not restricted this means that any number of users can be created in each subunit until the quota of user licenses has been exhausted To make restrictions per subunit remove the tick from the checkbox next to the option unlimited for each subunit In the column user licenses in the input field you can now specify the maximum number of licenses allowed per subunit For each subunit you are shown how many user licenses are currently in use At the end click on Save to apply the settings L User licenses SE Ee sc aay Te ee oe lj ab A P 8 AUU J SEL mW G G SE Late in F 1 s Tee iv unlimited Computer Sciences 3 130 unlimited Economics 0 15 unlimited Engineering 3 60 unlimited Professional Development 5 60 unlimited Scanstation Demo Subunit 1 15 1 unlimited Data Entry Demo Subunit 1 10 1 unlimited _Systemlogins 07 110 unlimited _Verifier Demo Subunit 1 10 7 unlimited _VividForms Demos bh v unlimited Summary 15 211 max unlimited unlimited free Sack Figure 604 Limiting User Licenses 446 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Su
155. 5 5 Section Course User Data Fields Number additional fields Sets the number of user definable courses Zero corresponds to no additional fields Title of 1st 2nd 3rd 4th and 5th additional field The title of the corresponding additional field Content of the1st 2nd 3rd 4th and 5th additional field Designation of permitted values for the additional fields The values must be sepa rated by CTRL ALT gt 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 485 EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management 2 5 6 Section Functions Period display Displays the current period Permit Kiviat diagram Kiviat diagram are visible for faculty Minimal survey number report creator Minimum number of surveys with which a report creator can create a subunit report De central Evaluation Permits immediate deletion of data Defines whether the data of processed surveys can be immediately deleted after the reports have been sent by email activated The setting deactivated suppresses the corresponding configuration setting Permit certificate of participation Activates the option to download a certificate of participation Permit certificate of results Activates the option to download a certificate of results document after participation in the evaluation Anonymous saving of deleted surveys Deleted surveys are kept anonymously in a wastebasket so that the report creator can generate
156. 8 Survey Details Status In Progress Ready for data In the following graphic you can see the evaluation possibilities of a survey for which data is already available In this case considerably more options are available to you Here you can for example display the results in different export formats i e PDF CSV SPSS 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 111 iF Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model EvaSys gt Survey Automation Suite S rvey Detalls Survey Human Resource Management amp Instructor Carlos Hemandez J Course Human Resource Management 7 Survey Period 5511 Type Online survey using PSWDs amp No of PSWDs 20 of 20 PSWDs are still available Questionnaire train_en Status Data available report available 3 Survey Created on 05 05 2011 at 14 01 39 M Last data collection On 05 12 2011 at 09 19 33 No of collected questionnaires 17 of 20 generated PSWDs Contingent of feedback 85 Actions Survey data Show PSWDs in browser t Results in HTML format Receive PSWDs by email Results in PDF format C Send PSWDs by email to respondents EvaSys PDF report E ape J Download PSWDs in CSV File Engish s Zeen e i Raw data in SPHINX format Number of participants for calculating response LE SS amp Raw data in SPSS format E Raw data in CSV format Preview online survey Scheduled Tasks P Finish Data Collection Close Survey amp Restore Survey S Delet
157. AE aada 358 2 2 THE EDITOR CONTROL sores cceccscet ceceesceed ce ciee cities aaece sista eile a R Aa EE EEDEN 360 223 VIEWING OPTIONS EE 362 2011 Electric Paper GmbH T EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite 23 l PAPER EE 363 2 32 ONGNE VIEW EE EE EE Ee 365 2 3 3 PREVIEW FUNCTIONS cccccccceccccccecceeseeceeeceuueeuceeeueueeeceueueuueeaeeuaueauueueeueeeueueaeeueueaueeeeenaess 367 2 4 EDITING THE QUESTIONNAIRE HEADER ccccceecceeceeecseeeeeeeeeeuceeeceeeeeaeeeueeeueeseaueeueeeneeeaeneeasess 370 2 5 ADDING AND EDITING QUESTION GROUPS ccccccecceeeeeecceeseeeeeeeeeeseueeueeeeeeeeeueuueaeeeeeeeeeeaneaenes 374 2 6 ADDING AND EDITING QUESTIONS u ceccceccceccceeeceeceee cece ceeeueeeuceeueeaeeeeaeeeaeeeueueueueeaueeaeesuenenees 376 2 6 1 OVERVIEW ON THE QUESTION TYPES ccccccceccccseeceueseeeeeceueueeueauceuuueeueuueeueueaueeaeeueeuaueaaes 377 2 0 2 SCALED QUESTION seiccsseccsec cauiectescostautiteaecveueasadde a aidnencdecudatancwesimaaenatacnineicdeauiassieuc Meeweustent 379 203 OPEN QUESTION EE 383 2 6 4 SINGLE CHOICE MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTION sesscsscssisrierierrsrisierisrisrrrierierrnrerrerrerrerrn 389 2 6 5 FIORIZONTAL MATRIX QUESTION esoe 391 2 6 6 VERTICAL MATRIX QUESTION scassvsin iene cecceasondnssndstuwbduanisueinewbieaneewanavcesinsslisaad d SUE 392 SE VALUE ee 394 2 7 ADAPTING THE SIZE OF ANSWER BOXES ccccccccecceeccecsueeeeeseuceueseuueeaesueueuueuueuuueuueuueeauueaueuaes 395 2 8 ADDING POL
158. AND SUMMARY _ ccccccecceccccccccccccuccccccucuecauuauucceusuucuuuauesueuanestecuuuannsuuusunsuens 433 2 CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ccccccccccccccccccccacccccccuucuunueuauecueuauucuecauuauecuenuusueusueauecgueauesuuusnusuetauesesuens 456 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 3 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Table of Contents A PREPARATION AND GENERAL NOTES ccccceneeeeeeeeeseeseenseenseeesseessenasenaseeaseeusseeasenaseneseens 11 1 INTRODUCTION MNE 11 1 1 MANUALS AND DOCUMENTATION cccccceesccessesecseccsueeceeeesensesenseecsueeseusesenueseeecsseeeeennessnneseneess 12 ey MEIER eebe 12 TWD POR MPR E eege 13 113 SAMPEE TE 13 1 2 SUPPORT AND REMOTE MAINTENANCE ccccccceescceseeeseseceueecenseceneeccueeceaueseasesesesesresenneseneess 14 1 2 1 EVASYS WEBSITE AND SUPPORT AREA ccccccessesesseeseseecesesesseseseesensesesesensetenseeesnneseneess 14 1 2 2 EMAIL TO THE SUPPORT DEPARTMENT ccccccsescsessecesseceeeeceeeceusesenseseeeesseetecnesenseseneess 14 1 2 3 REMOTE MAINTENANCE NETVIEWER AD HOC DESKTOP SHARING cc ceeesseeeseeseseseneees 16 DE NCS execs ate ete eae ce cect ASE EEEE type AEE esee tea eecemen ce ESAE 17 2 1 STRUCTURE OF THE EVASYS SYSTEM cccccccsccessecesseceseeecesseceusesesseceneeecuessesueseuesenseseneneeenenes 17 2 2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY IN EVASYS uu ccccccccccesscccsscceeeseceuseceaseccseeeceueesesuecen
159. APTCHA correctly Warning Message when using the Standard Password As long as the predefined standard login admin admin has not been changed a warning message appears when the administrator logs in with a prompt to change the user name and password Both can be adapted in the menu System Settings My Pro file see chapter B 2 2 2 Generating and Managing User Accounts amp Warning Message User name and password have not yet been customized To avoid unauthorized access to the system they should be changed Click here to go directly to your profile Figure 16 Warning message when using the standard password The use of the predefined login is a security risk for working systems Check for Update Notification Once the administrator has logged in automatic checks for updates are carried out at regular intervals standard value is 30 days When checking for updates data is transferred from the EvaSys system to the update server via the administrator s web browser the EvaSys server itself does not connect to the update server The follow ing information is included e the customer name e the license key e the current EvaSys version e the default system language e the current configured language e the product derivative e the content of the configuration setting server root path e the ID of the supplier e aunique ID for the update check process itself which is added for reasons of sec
160. Adminis trators to be displayed For this the option Show all questionnaires of the Subunit Administrators is activated 80 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Aincmation Sukk Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period Deactivated questionnaires can be displayed by activating the option Show deacti vated questionnaires at the end of the listing including module questionnaires Activated forms are available for creating new surveys while deactivated ones are not In the column Engine you can see an information if the form is a VividForms Editor a VividForms Designer a VividForms Plus or a TeleForm form In the column Action a questionnaire can be edited copied and deleted depending on the Engine If the option Edit is selected the editor opens to revise the question naire Protected questionnaires which should be changed for future surveys can therefore be copied When copying a questionnaire the user can decide which features of the questionnaire beyond the standard features questions free texts formatting etc should be copied Settings for the copied questionnaire The standard copy includes all question types text and the settings set in the VividForms Editor Please select any additional elements to be included in the copy V Quality Guidelines Data export configuration Norming PDF Reports Text Templates Report for comparison v Languages Filter settings Val
161. Aincmation Suis e D Digit e N Number e A Alphanumeric digit or letter In addition there is the possibility of using square brackets to label a placeholder as optional In this way the following pattern D D D W means that only input consisting of a number of one to three digits a hyphen and a word in this order will be accepted As well as the common syntax for patterns there is also the possibility of using regular expressions on the basis of Perl syntax to formulate patterns Regular expressions are often used to recognize patterns and offer a high level of flexibility e Pattern regular expression The following template choices are available three digit number word underscore number serial number simple serial number complex email address 5 4 Required Questions Questions for which an answer is compulsory can be configured as required ques tions When submitting a questionnaire in an online survey the system checks if all required questions have been answered If this is not the case the survey cannot be submitted unless answers to the required questions have been given To define the required questions select one or multiple questions and click on Save The selected questions will be displayed with a blue background Required questions 7 Questions about yo Which gender do you belong to What is your age What is your age What is the grade of your last school gradu
162. CSV import OR e Import subunits instructors trainers and courses XML import e Integrate the questionnaires e possible setting of additional report definitions e possible definition of norms and or quality guidelines e Generate survey procedures e Integrate individual questions Instructor Trainer s Operational Questions through feedback loop to the instructor trainer Phase 2 Implementation e Mass production of individualized questionnaires for hard copy procedure e Download cover sheets and dispatch envelopes containing pre produced ques tionnaires to instructors trainers for cover sheet procedure e Generate and dispatch PSWDs for online surveys 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 37 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Auncmation Sul e Produce individualized questionnaires and or dispatch PSWDs for hybrid surveys e Implementation of surveys and return of responses to the capture location all pro cedures simultaneously Evaluation Sheet Program of Study Co ID N TT Se Date 05 11 2011 at 09 5020 Lo E Number of returns Cover Sheet ee UE a Ba eil Cee eer L br TA J Figure 18 Cover Sheet Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback e Capture of questionnaires all procedures simultaneously e Reminder function for online survey participants e Manual anonymizing of handwritten comments if required e Automated delivery of report documents by email or
163. Campus PAP ciences a healthy lifestyle 63 SE Economics Engineering NA 2 continuous Seminar Sem 02 55 deutsch Central Campus L EE Economics Engineering Computer Media amp information 73 Resource S gq 02 P1237 continuous Seminar R P 412 20 english e Pap Management Selen enter Create new course Back Figure 175 Course List with the Edit Button column Action A window with the properties of the course opens automatically Here you can define also afterwards whether this course should be conducted anonymously or non anon ymously To do this click in the area Participants data either on Anonymous survey participants for anonymous surveys or Non anonymous survey participant panel for non anonymous Surveys Edit course of Philipp Belmore Course name Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle Program of study Economics Engineering Computer Sciences CourseD NA_1 Evaluation penod continuous e Course Type Seminar e Location Sem 03 Enrollment D Participants data Anonymous survey participants ees Gees ai Non anonymous survey participants p 2 i Language english X Location Central Campus 7 Figure 176 Administrate Anonymous Non anonymous Participants After you have activated the option Non anonymous survey participant panel click on the button Edit data of participants In the following window you have the now familiar option of importing the data of your participant
164. Configuration Settings helps you to relate the questions to the instructors trainers It only affects new sur veys existing surveys are not concerned Module evaluation Delivery of module sections with no instructor If this function is activated reports from module sections courses which are not assigned to an instructor are sent to all instructors for that module These module sections are in this case viewed as general polls about the module If this function is deactivated each instructor for a module section receives only their own report This option only affects the automatic delivery of reports directly after scanning and the delivery of reports using scheduled tasks Email dispatch of questionnaires for the coversheet procedure If activated with each email dispatch of a coversheet the corresponding questionnaire will be sent too Delete in two steps If this function is activated then when you delete a survey you will only be deleting the data The survey operation itself will be recorded in the system as proof Another dele tion will then result in the complete removal of the survey If this function is deacti vated then all survey data will be deleted immediately at the first deletion Method of calculating the response rate Here the method of calculating return rates can be set Methods available are calcu lation based on the generated PSWDs 0 PSWDs sent 1 and the number of partici pants of the course 2 To sho
165. D 1 8 2 Administration of User Accounts Handling Handwritten Texts Further information at Handling handwritten texts gives a comprehensive subunit rule for the handling of handwritten responses to open questions e Direct display default setting Handwritten responses to open questions are shown as a image box graphic file in the PDF HTML analysis This option guarantees that after collection of the data the instructor trainer gets a complete feedback including responses to open ques tions 46 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period e Display after manual collection In order to preserve anonymity handwritten responses to open questions are not displayed The report recipient can only access the results to the closed questions decentral or will be sent these Central Evaluation With the user type data entry assistant Section 5 2 3 a sequential manual entry of the handwritten comments can be accomplished Multiple selections are counted sorted and displayed according to their frequency The effort put into this work allows these texts to be transmitted Central Evaluation in statistics pro grams which then can carry out a lexical analysis After all image boxes have been entered the instructor trainer receives a message that he can now view the responses to the open questions In order to minimize unnecessary costs a threshold value c
166. Demo Central Evaluation r Tree Siructure E Generate Surveys E Display Surveys Hard Copy Procedure C Cover Sheet Procedure Web Verification Online Online Survey Use Time Control ki Delete Surveys B instructors Optional Qusshons ap Batch Events Figure 456 Generate Module Survey The example shows an online survey When the survey was generated EvaSys com bined all the sections of the module into a single questionnaire The name of the ques tionnaire is random alphanumeric and eight characters long in this example Z1ALSCNQY 350 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Module Evaluation Computer Sciences EvaSys Basic Training lesen EvaSys Basic Training in Progress O A XL279XWT Show PSWDs Pn S Figure 457 Module Survey in the List of Surveys If you have generated a paperbased survey please check the questionnaire by open ing the PDF version before printing it If the layout does not live up to your expecta tions as for example the pagebreaks are located badly delete the survey and edit the single questionnaires in the editor After that generate a new survey and check the results The newly generated module questionnaire can now also be displayed in the list of questionnaires in the menu System Settings when enabling the option Show deacti vated questionnaires at the end of the listing including module questionnaires Ei Ava
167. E LABELS 396 2 8 1 HORIZONTAL POLE LABELS beieis Seed Ee intense 396 2 8 2 VERTICAL POLE LABELS ccccccccecccseecseescueeeucseeueueueuuseuseuueuueeueeuueueueuueueeeeueaeuauueaeueess 397 2 8 3 INCLINED POLE LABELS eebe ee Eeer 398 2 9 ADDING GRAPHICAL ELEMENTS u ccccccccceccecsceseccueseuusueeeueeeausueeeaeueaueueeeauueueeueesaeueueueueaeuaags 400 291 ONE SPACE EEN 400 e e 400 FW EE 400 POA PACE EE 401 2 9 5 LINE HEIGHT FONT SIZE AND FONT TYPE cccccccceccecseecceeceeuseuceueseeeseeseuueeeueeueeneeeaeeuaes 401 2 9 6 FILTERING OF HTML AGS sue ugereegt e Segen 402 2 10 ADDING PICTURES TO A QUESTIONNAIRE c ccccceccccccececeeeeceeuceueeeeueeueeueeeaueuueeuuueeuseueeaseuaueaess 403 2 10 1 UPLOAD PICTURES TO THE PICTURE LIBRARY c ccccccccecccecsceseeesueseuuseeseueeeuueeueeueeeaeeeass 403 2 10 2 INTEGRATING PICTURES IN A QUESTIONNAIRE cccceccccccecceeceeeseeesueseuceeeeeueeuueeueeueeeaeeeass 405 EE SETTINGS geen nD Oe ee ee 406 2 12 ADJUSTING COLOR SCHEME ee deed 407 Te 409 USE OF THE QUESTION LIBRARY WITH VIVIDFORMS c cccccecceeseecseeceueseececueeueeeueeaueeaeeneesueueaeeneess 409 4 1 ADDING A QUESTION FROM THE LIBRARY ssssessessisesssisriernsinsrerienretininririnti ninie uinrrnre rnaner rrene 409 4 2 UNDOING THE CONNECTION BETWEEN A QUESTION AND THE LIBRARY cccecceessecseessueeeeeeaees 412 4 3 ADDING A QUESTION TO THE LIBRARY c cccccecccescecceeceeueeuceueueeeeeeeeueueueeeaeeuaueeeuauee
168. EMAIL ADDRESSES u cccccsessecessecesseecessesesesenseeenseeens 77 2 4 ADMINISTRATION OF QUESTIONNAIRES ccccscsecsecessecesseecesececsecesueesensesenseseseecseeeseeesentesenseeens 79 2 4 1 ESSENTIAL INFORMATION ON THE QUESTIONNAIRE ccccccccceesesessesesseeeceseceseseeesensesessneees 79 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 5 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite 2 4 2 MANAGEMENT OF QUESTIONNAIRES AND DETAILED VIEW ccccecseeseecseeeseeeeueeueeeueeeueenaees 80 2 4 3 MULTIPLE LANGUAGES EE 92 2 4 4 QUESTION LIBRARY EE 95 3 PHASE 2 IMPLEMENTATION OF SURVEYS cccccccceccccscecccecceceeeusueceueueuseueueuueeuusueeeueueaueueeeueueaesaueeneuees 99 3 1 SURVEY eier TE 99 3 1 1 COVER SHEET PROCEDURE eege eege 100 3 1 2 HARD COPY PROCEDURE cccccccccecccecceceueceueeeuceueceuueeuceuaeeaueeuseuueseuueaeeuaesauueueeeaeuueneaeeeas 100 3 1 3 PSWD BASED ONLINE SURVEY cccceccccccecceeccecceuesueceeueeuseueeecueaueeuuueeueeaeeueueaueeaeeneeeaueuaes 101 3 1 4 PASSWORD BASED ONLINE SURVEY ccccccsceccecseecseeseueeeeceeeeeueseueseueeueseuusaeueueseeeueeeneuees 102 3 2 CENTRAL EVALUATION ccccccccccccecceeseeceueceeueeeueeuceueueeceueeeuueeeeaeeeauueeeuaeeueueauueueeuuueaeuaaeeueneneeees 103 3 2 1 GENERATING SURVEYS siihtoepaccaheraceccetmgaaseuctaanotaaaneue secre aA a a 103 3 2 2 DISPLAY SURVEYS paceini nananana aa A a a EE a RAA Aa ARAARA 104 3 2 3 SURVEY DETAILS eege 108 32A DELETE SURVEY dE Ee Eege 119 3 2 5 TREE S
169. Electric Paper GmbH 335 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite 6 2 4 Authorizing Access Rights to QM Views In order to grant for example a dean manager access to QM views a user account must be set up in the relevant subunit If the dean manager is already a user because his own courses are evaluated then the existing user account can be activated for QM views amp Carlos Hemandez 3 17 18 08 17 2007 A C amp amp Samantha Miller Dean 0 0 0 05 23 2011 4 O Figure 435 QM Views Editing User Data TO acquire access to QM views the user must be an active one Activation can be effected by clicking on the symbol GO next to the user The symbol appears indicat ing that access has been granted The user type Dean Manager is the exception to the rule because he also has access to the QM views as a passive user Open the profile data of the user by clicking on his name In the lower area next to the field QM views you can define access in four different authorization levels 1 2 3 2 Please define the user rights QM Views No QM Views No QM Views Only own surveys Only own subunit Unrestricted access CIIONIGETHI Gr en Za em P anstata i w hoe RA E VividForms Editor Unrestricted access 2 Cancel l lt lt Back Save Figure 436 QM Views Authorizing Access Rights No QM Views The use
170. End IP address domain participants online survey i 255 3255 255 255 Last permitted IP address for participants in an online survey Begin IP address domain user 0 0 0 0 First permitted IP address for users End IP address domain user 255 255 255 255 Last permitted IP address for users Begin IP address domain for administrator i 0 0 0 First permitted IP address for the administrator End IP address domain of administrator 259 v i s i 4255 Last permitted IP address of administrator Figure 17 Defining Access Rights For each of these user groups you can specify under EvaSys Settings Network set tings a valid IP address domain In each case both the first and the last valid address are entered Your computing center informs you that instructors trainers can have IP addresses in the domain 134 127 0 0 until 134 127 127 255 This gives the address 134 127 23 142 access but not 134 127 142 34 You need to enter the IP addresses given both at Begin IP address domain user as well as at End IP address domain user Access security becomes effective as soon as the field limited access is set at activated Confirm with Save o SOS When access is denied a message is shown for a few moments and then the individ ual is redirected to a website given at the HTTP redirection address You can put in the address of an appropriate website in your intranet 2011 Electric Paper GmbH
171. Export 312 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Open the QUE files with a double click Sphinx Plus2 will start automatically and open this survey Since in addition to the raw data the contents of the whole questionnaire are trans ferred you can immediately begin analyzing the results The following figure shows you the welcome page of Sphinx Sur we i i 5 IE Sphinx Survey V3 5y2_19 Human_ Resource Management Questionnaire design teta File Edit Stage Write a Sphinx Survey Human Resource Management E j guest onnaire design E Write the questionnaire BH Quick print L Data entry th Processing and analysis Multimedia forms DH Spreadsheet 31 questions 17 responses agement C Users Wesktop sys_19 Human_Resounce_Management 10o Sphinx E ynline Figure 405 Sphinx The functionality of this statistics solution allows you to conduct a thorough statistical analysis within a short period of time The graphic report creation makes use of the drag and drop principle aes sty Sn baie ere ott l 17 observations Total sample Which gender do you What is your age What is your age What is the grade of y How many terme have E Graphical reports Figure 406 Diagrams in Sphinx 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 313 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Ph
172. F letter then you will see PDF Template that is you can assign a PDF template for the layout to a given letter If you selected in the Action box an email text then you can add here one or more attachments Email attachments and PDF templates are saved by clicking on the button OK Heading or subject Depending on what was selected in the Action box you can define the heading text in the PDF or in the email subject line Text Depending on the option selected in the Action box you can define the text of the PDF letter or the email Within the text you can make use of placeholders Changes to the text can be saved by clicking on save 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 457 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management 2 1 2 Templates for Email Messages First you will see a description of all message types and then you will find details to the various placeholders available Report for the Dean Manager Trigger Provided that the function EvaSys settings central evaluation dean manager s copy report has been activated all users of the type dean manager will receive a copy of all PDF reports that have been created in a given subunit Content Personalized text for the processed survey PDF reports are sent as a rule In addition or as an alternative raw data as Excel readable CSV files can be attached see Sys tem Settings EvaSys Settings Email Functions amp Account
173. F report and the method of capturing the matrix value In this example the minimum value is set at 1 the maximum value at 99 The group number refers to the number of bars that will represent the analysis of this question in the PDF report A group number of 10 corresponds to the value areas of 1 9 10 19 20 29 90 99 that is ten groups If the number of groups is left at the default value of 0 then each value will be displayed individually in the bar chart of the PDF report Furthermore the entry in the matrix field can be read as a natural number or text i e to be read as a string of characters When capturing matrix values as text it is possi ble that a series of numbers with leading zeros i e as can occur in postal codes can be captured correctly 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 391 EvaSys iw Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Survey Aunmation Suite w Question Wizard Define Options Orientation Horizontal up to 5 digit numbers Vertical up to 10 digit numbers Minimum Value 4 Maximum Value 99 Question group 40 count Matrix value as Number Back J Next apply Cancel Figure 520 Create a Horizontal Matrix Question On the questionnaire the question regarding age is shown as a two row matrix Respondents can mark the 10 s in the top row and the 1 s in the lower row The advantage of this method is that the high accuracy of checkboxes makes it unnecessa
174. Form Survey ID Program of Study vi Scan Date d Period 8 Select search fields Survey Course Instructor Subunit AREA TA Survey Description Course Description Scanned Forms Enrollment weg Last name Form Description Quality Index Location E Subunit First name Form d Survey ID __ Program of Study Scan Date Figure 442 QM Views Field Selection Please note that it may not be possible to completely display more than 10 fields in the screen horizontally i e you will then have to scroll Also a large number of search fields will mean greater use of the database and a noticeably longer processing time By clicking on Select all fields of the search display or Select all search fields at the bottom of this view you can save time if you want to activate all of the above fields V Select all query result fields Select all search fields Attention this might cause long query time Figure 443 QM Views Select all Query Result Fields 340 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw E Defining the Sequence of the Fields After you have selected the fields you can change their sequence by using the option Sequence fields Highlight as shown in the figure a field name and then click on lt lt up or on gt gt down j y S i Y Ta md ka Filter Selection Standard Field order len Show Order fields Survey Des
175. Form Properties sA 2 A As LA 7 18 1 18 To protect running surveys this questionnaire has been set to read only mode You cannot apply any changes which affect the graphical representation of the questionnaire Figure 574 Write protect Mode 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 423 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Creating Questionnaires with VividForms The following points have no effect on the display of the questionnaire and can so be modified in the write protect mode e Building indicators for question groups e Display of single choice questions in the HTML survey Options available include Checkbox List and Drop Down List e For matrix fields number of groups in the evaluation report e Limiting the maximum responses for multiple choice questions e Selection of the diagram type for scaled questions in the PDF report e Definition of filter rules required questions and cross tabulations In particularly exceptional cases for example for typos the write protect mode can be circumnavigated You can alter the write protected mode in the form creation infor mation of a questionnaire as shown in the following graphic bel Form Wizard Form creation information Abbreviation train_en Title 3 Paper Ad Edit Mode al Template Activate deactivate template mode New items can only be added at the end Max Pages 3 Max Items 47 f Apply f Cancel Figure 575
176. Forms 00000e 493 SS a a a6 exe ce are Gaon boule Ne 26 Selection of several criteria 2 6 Sending of reports 233 Setting Configuration settings 6 456 Setting up the Subunit 45 Settings Configuration 475 Several criteria 2 6 Sphinx The EvaSys report module Sphinx Plus 312 Sta GC e xa erate oe os a oe eee he nee Se a ee 26 Statistic Evaluation statistics 00008 SEN Utilization statistics 441 Structure of the EvaSys system 17 Study folder Generating a study folder 184 Subgroup Delete subgroup reports 0 453 Subgroups Combining multiple criteria 2 6 Subunit ea nerve ne a he wee eee 43 45 Create new subunit 45 VC eil EEN 46 Summary report 257 Support E mail to the support department 14 Support Area 14 Support department 14 Support maintenance 13 505 Survey Conduction of online surveys 127 Delete Tree 0 ee ee 126 Delete Survey 2 0 0 0 ee 119 Display Tree 2 0 00 cee ee 123 Display survey 104 Generate Tree 0 0 00 cee eee 124 Generating surveyS 103 185 Generation of module surveys 350 Implementation of Surveys 0 4 99 Management of online surveys 127 non anonyMOus 0 0002 eee eee 173 Non anonymous survey
177. HTTP redirection address The default value is http www evasys de e The so called supportlink can be found at System Information EvaSys Website and provides you a quick access to the webpage of Electric Paper If you wish to 30 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Start up and Security change the text of this option and or the link you can change them at System Set tings EvaSys Settings on the page Network Settings There you will find the options Display value support link default EvaSys Website and HTTP link on support page default http www evasys de support If you want to change the colors of EvaSys use the page Color Settings Sys tem Settings EvaSys Settings You can choose one of several color schemes or define your own colors The following settings affect documents that are sent handed out at different occa sions PDF report The PDF report you get for your course evaluation can of course be adjusted to your needs in different respects The possibilities are described in detail in chapter B 4 5 Instant Feedback The PDF Report Letter of the PDF report You can automatically create a letter for the PDF report of your course evaluation There you can see a sender whom you can define in the menu System Settings Report Settings Configuration There you will find the option Sender part 1 to
178. He may add the question group in an arbitrary position not only at the end However it is not possible to interleave question groups i e you cannot put a ques tion group in another one You can add any elements within a question group e g questions text boxes line spaces etc The following graphics shows you a questionnaire that has been copied in the form management and can thus be modified One question group New question group and one question New question was added the remaining question groups and questions are the ones from the template indicated by the T Your comments T Additional Questions Additional question Agree O O O 0 O Disagree Figure 203 Integrated Question Group and Question in a Template 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 183 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Aimomadion Suki How many elements still can be added the active instructor trainer can see when look ing at the Form Properties at the bottom of the VividForms Editor menu Figure 204 Form Properties of a Questionnaire The upper information tells the user that you have a template where two pages are allowed left information and one page is already created information on the right hand side The line below informs the active instructor trainer about the actual number of ques tions 12 on the left and the allowed number of questions 12 on the right 3 3 4 Generating a Study Fo
179. Here at the top of the window you can select a color directly set as an RGB value or as an hexadecimal number Change color scheme p Ge Color Selection Dialogue 1 Personal Data Per Basic color SS O054ff isenge 19 Ace Red qty 0 L vd E wm Le vs e eat 1 Gs RB E In mai en ps ackoround question groups CU EI oo d Di E E di Ge 18 Example preview Green 4 E 84 ge fey zg ne j Pa General Assessment Blue 4 P 255 A A F Ad ee ee nar Le Sr oe eh Vd a Coen AGEQUATE parning Spaces are ava Brightness 4L 0 Mixed color m Cancel A brighter color is required OK Figure 550 Color Selection Dialog At the bottom of the dialog the brightness of the color is set Whilst the font and the background for question groups may have any color depth the color value for the background of the questions should not be too dark so as to ensure high readability when scanning EvaSys immediately checks the brightness of the selected color If too dark a color was selected the message A brighter color is required appears With the slider in the area Brightness the brightness can be increased Once the allowed minimum brightness is reached the warning disappears The new color can be adopted by clicking on OK 408 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Repair Form The following figure shows an example of a questionnaire with an adj
180. Hernandez 3 317 18 08 72007 AD O OUTS z MK e e zs A Samantha Miller Dean Oo Gove waan BOR O Poa a DrRichelle White 2 33 3 mom A O O L mtuter Zapp Se Select all L jw Economics b i Engineering Move selected to Computer Sciences wv a Professional Le 4 Data Entry Dem V _Systemlagins Create Mew Wiser bw Verifier Demo Central Evaluation S Browse Import instructors from CSV E Generate Surveys l CSN file contains a column with information whether the course has E kee secondary instructors Le Display Surveys kl Delete Surveys M instructor s Optional Questions Figure 37 Manually Creating User Accounts By clicking on the name of a subunit you reach the list of users All existing users are listed here New users can be added via the Create New User button A three step wizard opens facilitating the creation of a user account In the first step the user type is defined The following user types are available e Instructor Trainer e Dean of Studies Program Manager e Dean Manager e Module e Report Creator e Data Entry Assistant e Verifier e Subunit Administrator 56 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period In the third and fourth step the user data is deposited as well as the user rights being defined The most important details are shown in the table below Column Title 1 Title 2 First Name Surname Telephone Nu
181. How would you rate the trainer s ability to set and Excellent LJ O OF UU Poor meet the objectives for the course Figure 463 Module Evaluation Display the Instructor Trainer Name in a Paperbased Survey e You can activate the display of the instructor trainer name on the questionnaire in the EvaSys Settings To activate this option open the menu System Settings EvaSys Settings and choose the option Survey from the drop down list Scroll down to the option Module Evaluation Display of name of the secondary instruc tor trainer in the heading of the question group and activate it Then save your set tings by clicking the button Save at the bottom of the list Thus the names will be displayed on the questionnaire as well as in the PDF report i Module Evaluation Display of name of the secondary instructor in the heading of the question group lf activated the names of the secondary instructors are displayed on the aggregated questionnaire In this case in each first question group heading of a partial questionnaire the name of the relevant instructor is Activated e displayed This setting helps you to relate the questions to the instructors It only affects new surveys existing surveys are not concerned Make this option available to Subunit Administrators Figure 464 Activation of the Display of the Names of Instructors Trainers in the EvaSys Set tings The following figu
182. IGHTS TO QM VIEWS u ccccccececcceeeceeeceeueseeuseueeeueueeeueeeueeneeenees 336 Be USE OF OM ENEE 337 6 2 6 DEFINITION OF SPECIAL SEARCH AND TABLE CONFIGURATIONS ceccecseecseeseeseueeeeeeuees 339 7 MODULE EVALUATION WEE 342 7 1 SETTING UP A SURVEY WITH MODULE EVALUATION ccccccccecseesceceeeseeeseeceeeeueeeeeeueeaeeueeenaneas 342 7 2 ACTIVATING MODULE SURVEYS cccccccccscecececeeceeeceueeuceueceueueueeueueueeeaeueueuaueaeeueueuueeaueeueeeeeeneanes 343 7 3 CREATING MODULE QUESTIONNAIRES AND LINKING THEM TO COURSE TYPES cesceseeeeees 343 7 4 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE AGGREGATED QUESTIONNAIRE ccccecceeseecseeceueseuceueeeueeeaeeeeueueeees 345 7 5 CREATING A MODULE ACCOUNT uu cccccccccccecceescecceeceeeeeceuecsceeeeuseuueeueeaceeausaueeaeeuaueaeeeaeeeaneneeeas 346 7 6 CREATING MODULE ere EE 348 7 7 GENERATING A MODULE SURVEYS c cccccccccccceeeeceueeeecsueceuseeueeusecueeeusueeuuueaeeueeeueeeaueaeeeaueeess 350 TO INSTANT FEEDBACK ee 352 7 9 FURTHER SETTINGS wo ccccceccccccccccecceesceceeececeeeeueeeceeueeeceuaceuueueeaesauueeeeeaeeeaueeuueaesauueueeeeueausueeeas 353 C CREATING QUESTIONNAIRES WITH VIVIDFORMG ccceeseseeenseecsseeseeceeeeeseesesenseenseenees 357 1 ACCESS TO THE VIVIDFORMS EDITOR EE 357 2 CREATING A QUESTIONNAIRE IN THE VIVIDFORMS EDITOR cccccccceceeceeeceeeeeeceueeeuuseueeueeeuueeueeneees 358 2 1 DEFINE FORM INFORMATION ssclivece ncsiwechededidiindad NEE a a A aa
183. In anonymous surveys the participants data only contains only the participants email address which you require to send PSWDs in online surveys In non anonymous surveys you can specify further details 66 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period The default in EvaSys is that courses are evaluated anonymously If you wish to con duct non anonymous surveys specify this in the details of the course Edit course of Dr Richelle White Course name Introduction into Sociology Program of study Course ID 02 P1246 Evaluation period continuous we Course Type Lecture a Location R P 061 Enrollment 0 Language english v Location Media amp lnformation Center v Further report recipients secondary instructors d existing Computer Sciences Donna Harwood we Add Professional Development Donna Harwood x Remove OK Cance sl Figure 50 Editing Participants Data in the Details of a Course Specifying Participant Data in Non anonymous Surveys In non anonymous surveys in addition to the email address you can also deposit other information such as forename surname address title and user defined options Further information regarding the creation of non anonymous surveys as well as inserting and editing participant data in non anonymous surveys can be found in the paragraph Importing participant data in cha
184. In the area of maintenance you can change the survey ID as long as the changing of the survey ID in Settings EvaSys Settings Maintenance is activated This can become necessary for example if you have distributed questionnaires in the self print process with a different incorrect survey ID To enable you to assign these completed questionnaires to your survey anyway you must replace the ID of the existing survey with the survey ID of the questionnaires distributed 118 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Annman Sul Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys To change the survey ID enter your chosen ID in the survey ID field and then click on change The new survey ID must consist of five characters The following window opens automatically 0 Change Do you really want to change the survey ID Changing the survey ID results in the fact that questionnaires of this survey that have already been distributed can not longer be assigned to this survey Are you sure to continue Figure 112 Confirmation of the Changing of the Survey ID After confirming this prompt your survey receives a new survey ID 3 2 4 Delete Survey Delete Surveys 1 Subunit 2 Survey Period 3 Course Type 4 Questionnaire Engineering irain Di Professional Development Data Entry Demo Subunit Meter Demo Subunit L Select program of study 5 Course s Management Strategies NA_ 2 introduction into EvaSys Delte
185. LL x questions Advanced dit configuration Subunits Course Type WST 2211 wWS10 11 Computer Sciences ial Lecture Economics Seminar Engineering Laboratory Tutorial 5510 WS09 10 S507 WS06 07 Professional Development Working Group Scanstation Demo Subunit Others Data Entry Demo Subunit Modul General _Systemiogins Modul Trainer Figure 71 Section Usage in the Details of a questionnaire Procedure select either ALL i e Central Evaluation and activated instructor trainer accounts Central Evaluation or activated instructor trainer accounts decentral Reporting Options e Mirrored scale values The option mirrored scale values allows the mirroring of the raw data which is linked to a survey This has an effect on the calculation of the average and the median The standard scale in EvaSys goes from 1 to n from left to right Mirrored values will have a highest option on the left All raw data including averages and medi ans will be affected by this e Allow Summary Reports Defines whether summary reports dean of studies program manager report dean manager report can be created for this questionnaire 88 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Evaluation for Participants For online surveys you can grant the participants access to the results of the survey After the survey has been closed participants can use their PSWD to have a look at the HTML report You can dec
186. Make sure that you have the permission of the relevant user before you carry out this operation as you CANNOT undelete it 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 59 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Writing an Email to a User A mouse click on the letter symbol allows you to send an email to that person The EvaSys internal email system will be used LDAP Authentification Evasys offers an interface to LDAP LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol is a protocol and offers the possibility to access the directory server LDAP is often used to administer the users of a network To be able to use the LDAP connection the function must first be activated in the Eva Sys settings System Settings EvaSys Settings Network Settings LDAP There are two possibilities The LDAP connection can be activated individually for each user option 1 or it can be activated for all users simultaneously option 2 m LDAP if this setting is activated the user name and password are compared when logging in using LDAP 0 deactivated 1 can be defined individually for each user in the user settings 2 activated for all users Figure 41 LDAP Activation If option 1 is selected then the menu option LDAP Login is shown in the user set tings dialog Now the login via LDAP can be activated or deactivated for each user separately If option 2 is selected in the configuration the
187. N OF SPECIFIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS VIVIDFORMS PLUS scce 428 8 1 IMPLEMENTATION OF QUESTIONNAIRES WITH VIVIDFORMS PLUS oseere 428 8 2 IMPORTING THE VIVIDFORMS PLUS QUESTIONNAIRE cccccccccsessesesseceseeceeeseeeesesesenseesenesennens 428 8 3 INFORMATION ABOUT A VIVIDFORMS PLUS QUESTIONNAIRE c ccccccccsssseesseecsseecsseeeseeeenseeenaes 430 8 4 USAGE OF VIVIDFORMS PLUS FORMS cccccccccesseecesseeseeeceseccesesesueesessescnsesesseeseseseneesensneeeats 432 D SYSTEM SETTINGS AND MANAGEMENT ccccccsscceseceseeenseeeeseenseenseeesseenseeaseneasenasenaseeaeess 433 1 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT AND SUMMARY sssiissiseieskiieiitektttktet ttnt kant k natn nnt AE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE REEERE EEEE aaee ns 433 LA SEARO NEE 433 1 1 1 SEARCHING FOR USERS u ccccceccccessseessecescecenseceseeeceusesensesensesceesesauesensesensesenseteseeesensesens 434 1 1 2 SEARCH FOR COURSES ccccccsecessecesseecesseceuseseusesesseccueeceusesenseseueesenseseasesensesenseesenesents 435 1 1 3 SEARCH FOR SURVEYS ou eccccccescccesssesseecessecenseseuececueescnsesenseseaueeseauesensusenseesseeesensetenseeens 436 1 1 4 SEARCH FOR DELIVERIES c cccccccccscessecessecceececseccsuseseseesenseeeseeeseueesensesenseessueesesesenseeeas 436 D2 VINA orrara OE E EEE EEA A 437 Le DENERI ee 438 LABAT POI WE 439 1 5 UTILIZATION STATISTICS E 441 1 6 EVALUATION STATISTICS ccccccccsccesseccesesecssccsuseceuseceuecesueeceusesenueseueecsuseseatesensesensuesennesentesens 441 EK
188. New Folder After entering the name and clicking OK the folder appears in the list J Listing of folders O Surveys 2011 0 Surveys 0 evaluated 05 16 2011 Rename AS Figure 207 New Folder in the Listing of Folders 3 3 5 Generating Surveys After a folder has been created surveys can be set up in it The user will be guided by an assistant who will ask the following questions e Selection of the questionnaire for use e Selection of template for optional questions e Entry of optional questions self formulated or from item library e Entry of survey name e Selection of procedure 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 185 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model e Hard copy procedure e Cover sheet procedure e Online survey and number of PSWDs e Open online surveys with semi public password The survey is then ready The questionnaire and the PSWD document can be down loaded and printed or distributed The batch mailing of emails to online survey partici pants is also possible 3 3 6 Working with the Active Instructor Trainer s Data If data already exists for a survey of an active instructor trainer he just like the report creator does with his reports can create the survey subgroup reports This means that single reports for example one report each on male and female students are created for the individual options single choice multiple choice or scaled questions
189. PSWDs are described in chapterB 3 2 9 Batch Events Participation Tracking Participation tracking enables you to create a CSV file where all of the used and non utilized PSWDs of your online surveys are listed In online surveys whose PSWDs have been sent by email to the respondents the par ticipation tracking allows for easier identification of those participants who haven t taken part in a survey Whilst preserving the anonymity of survey participants who have already completed their questionnaire participants who in spite of their invita tion have not yet used their PSWD can be identified by their email address In the menu System Settings EvaSys Settings Survey Online Participation tracking online surveys Protection of anonymity you can define the minimum return The minimal return defined here must be reached in order for specific survey information on partic ipation and non participation to be released To access participation tracking click in the menu Subunits on Participation Track ing A window opens automatically in which you can select any number of subunits survey periods course types questionnaires and courses Subsequently click on Request to trigger the participation tracking A Save as dialog appears Select a folder and click on Save Then open the saved CSV file to call up the information on participation and non participation 134 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw
190. Paper KopeachkZupg Aee 13 PU Lior Datt siwe Dear Mr Philipp Belmore as private and confidential Result of a survey Dear Mr Belmore This email contains evaluation results for Human Resource Management Ham en The global indicators are listed first followed by the individual average values consisting of the following 2 Questions about the instructor 3 Questions about the course 4 Questions about the teaching material 5 Questions about the studying conditions In the second part of the analysis the average values of all individual questions are listed Note Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on your computer in order to view the files Your EvaSys Administrator Figure 236 PDF Letter Sample The letter consists of various components e the header with the address details of the sender and of the recipient 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 207 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite e the actual text of the letter including a subject line and con tinuous text e the letter s layout for example with the letter head of your corporate design The Header of the Letter The address details in the header Sender and recipient are defined at two different locations in EvaSys e Recipient s address The first two lines specified in the user data of the respective instructor trainer are used as the recipient s address In the following example EvaSy
191. Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Minimum Maximum Values The worst or the best value within a comparison group determines the margin of the presentation area If the option Minimum Maximum Values is activated the space between these worst or best values and the scale edges is grayed in Profile Subunit Professional Development T Name of the instructor Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Name of the course Management Strategies Name of the survey P Comparative line Carlos Hernandez Name of the course Organization and Management a Name of the survey Min Max values of Management Strategies Organization and Management _ Strong ly agree av 3 5 1 f j j The lead time of the course is adequate Stra nly di pe The course focuses on the current professional discussion Strongly dis Strongly agree av 2 8 agree av zs The course perfectly prepares me for my professional life Strongly dis Strongly agree av 3 8 agree av 3 3 Please grade the course altogether failure very good net 2 ay Figure 376 Report Creator Profile Line Emails Options Minimum Maximum Values Overall Average In addition to the profile lines of the courses reports you selected you can have their overall average displayed as a thick black line For this activate the option Overall Average in the comparison options Here you see an example Profile Subunit Professional Development T Name of the instructor Prof
192. Philipp Belmore Name of the course Management Strategies Name of the survey Min Max values of Management Strategies Organization and Management The lead time of the course is adequate Strongly dis Strongly agree av e3 2 agrees Dy ei The course focuses on the current professional discussion Strongly dis Strongly agree a or agree SE The course perfectly prepares me for my professional life Strongly dis Strongly agree av 23 8 agree av 3 3 Please grade the course altogether failure very good avad aves Figure 378 Report Creator Profile Line Emails Options Comparative line deactivated with Minimum and Maximum Values Here you only see one profile line in this case for the first selected course The gray zones show however that the calculation of the minimum and maximum values includes further values If you activate the overall average profile line instead of the minimum and maximum values this profile line appears in addition to the profile line of the current course Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Management Strategies Subunit Professional Development T Name of the instructor Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Name of the course Management Strategies Name of the survey T Overall average of Management Strategies Organization and Management The lead time of the course is adequate Strongly dis EENG BEE Strongly agree Ay agree av 3 6 The course focuses on the current professional discussion Strongly
193. Placeholder image files Output text for textbox not yet validated Separators CSV import and export Defines the separators for CSV import and export Accepted semicolon comma tab ulator t and the vertical line Synchronization URL for the XML import XML export interface of the external system with which EvaSys is to be synchronized Method password creation faculty import Rules for setting up new users through CSV XML import 0 User name password put on email address 1 User name password are generated randomly Activation status faculty import Rules for setting up new users through CSV XML import 0 Instructor Trainer account is deactivated after import Central Evaluation 1 Instructor Trainer account Is activated after import De central Evaluation SPSS Missing Values This option defines whether the abstentions in the SPSS export are defined as Missing Values 1 Abstentions are defined and exported as Missing Values 0 Abstentions are exported as ordinary values lf abstentions are exported as ordinary values they obtain the value 0 When calculat ing a mean value of all the results in SPSS the abstentions contribute to the mean value and thus distort the result For that reason you can define the abstentions as Missing Values when being exported to SPSS If you activate this option setting 1 then for every questionnaire 484 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Au
194. Reader Service for form reading e Cron Service for initiating scheduled tasks and performance checks e Memcached Server Service for having in store templates of online surveys on the server e ESCCMailservice for sending emails via scheduled tasks To stop the services the following commands can be used e net stop vfreader e net stop cron e net stop memcached e net stop esccmailservice To restart the services after the backup use the command net start 34 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw System Start up and Security Survey Automation Suite 3 3 2 Backing up the Image Files of the Open Questions The answers to open questions are saved as PNG image files You can find these in the folder C Apache htdocs evasys img Here you will find the images of the open questions as well as the images which are shown in the verificator The folder structure is defined as survey period subunit user survey Before you backup these files we recommend that you stop the Apache service and then restart after finishing 3 3 3 Backing up the Original Image Files from Scanstation The EvaSys scanstation software can create a backup copy from every batch You can make this backup copy in an archive folder defined in the Scanstation The exact path to the archive directory can be found in the Scanstation settings tab Scan Des tination For further information please consult the Scanstation Manual 2011 Electric P
195. S 10 train_en_1 3507 WS06 07 3506 WS05 06 5505 _ Select program of study tempiate forms Vi Show extended filter op ions Course name CourseD Location Participants gt e Secondary instructors e Language Location Reload 11 Undo Figure 328 Report Creator Extended Filter Options If you activate the filter options here you can further limit your selection and choose all properties of a course multiple selections possible The filtering criteria with the following values are possible Participant Smaller equal or larger of particular number Secondary instructor Selection Available Not available Additional course user data fields if defined up to 5 items Selection dependent on defined values Table 12 Filter criteria for Any compilations Entries in several search fields are linked with an AND conjunction meaning that only those courses are displayed that meet all criteria 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 269 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Aimomadion Suki The contents of the course user data fields in this case Language and Location can be selected from drop down lists If required they can also be typed in directly When you have defined all necessary restrictions click on the button Update Only then will the courses that meet your criteria be displayed to you Course name Course ID Location Participants gt Secondary inst
196. S and CSV tmz Results in HTML format Results in PDF format Evasys PDF report e English F z Raw data in SPHINX format E Raw data in SPSS format A Raw data in CSV format Figure 363 Report Creator Detailed View Export Raw Data The option Profile line allows you to have the profile lines of this report displayed separately Maria Report Prof Development W310 11 Profile Compilation Prof Development WS10 11 T l The instructor is always well prepared 4 r m av 3 7 The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way af if _ E Du av 3 6 The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc i Sa av 3 7 without any problems Please grade the instructor for this course poor _ 5 very good av 3 8 The lead time of the course is adequate Strongly dis Strongly agree gu se A agree The course focuses on the current professional discussion Strongly dis 1 tg ff Strongly agree av 3 6 agree i m Figure 364 Report Creator Detailed View Profile Line of the Report Furthermore EvaSys can add a further profile line which you can select in the drop down menu 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 287 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite E Raw data in SPSS format E Raw data in CSV format Profile Line H Ki Profile Line train_en train_en_1 Summary Reports trai
197. Sample pdf 72 KB a Course Types cample PDF Letter Sample POF Letter pdt 64 KB SS Description File name eOlBUede Figure 240 PDF Letter Uploading Letter Template for Designing the Layout You choose the template via the button Browse In the field Description you can enter an appropriate name that will be displayed whilst you work in EvaSys with this letter These PDF templates have to adhere to particular design settings that you will find in chapter D 2 2 2 PDF Templates Here for instance you can deposit your company s letter head as a PDF template After doing this please remember to link this template with the text of the letter To do this you return to the field Text templates where the text of the letter is defined There you add your PDF template by selecting the respective letter on the right hand side and then clicking on OK 210 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback Editing of text templates Action PDF template LETTER REDOM TOF ME prESEETT LETTER Results for instructors ie LETTER Summarized results for deans LETTER Summarized results for study deans LETTER PDF REPORT Address field Norming POF report Introduction Norming PDF report Letter PDF REPORT Format of the instructor name 2i e Lane nenoot Haer tae Irinhi unnar ee s Attac h Language English Higher Educa
198. Settings LDAP Registration also for the Administrator Deactivated activated If activated a login for the administrator is also conducted on the LDAP system Please make sure that the login name of the Administrator is a valid LDAP login otherwise a lock out from the System can occur This setting does not apply to secondary administrators LDAP host Address of the LDAP server LDAP secure connection Deactivated activated When activated the LDAP connections are encrypted The LDAP server must support encryption LDAP BASE DN Defines the base DN for LDAP or Active Directory LDAP search filter Search filter for searching for users The standard value for the filter is uid USER sAMAccountName USER The placeholder USER is replaced with the username entered LDAP login If it s not allowed to search anonymous in the LDAP or Active Directory server you have to enter the login of the search account here LDAP password If it s not allowed to search anonymously in the LDAP or Active Directory server you have to enter the password of the search account here Maximum document size Maximum size in bytes of an attachment or PDF template document Please note that changing this value requires resetting the database configuration max_allowed_packet Storing the IP address in the session If enabled the IP address of an EvaSys user is saved in the session at each login With each subsequent action initiated
199. Settings Survey Online Altemative forwarding including authentication Save Cancel Figure 74 Define Forwarding _ Alternative forwarding including authentication Participants of online surveys can be directed to a different internet site once their survey is submitted The forwarding occurs based upon the forwarding address which is defined in the details of the corresponding questionnaire Each questionnaire can be given an indmidual forwarding address The following option determines whether the authentication for forwarding requires a value chosen from the properties of a course Use the following field to determine the secret word 0 no course user data fields If no questionnaire specific spare secret password has been defined in the details of the questionnaire no secret password will be requested for the authentication 1 Course user data field 1 2 Course user data field 1 Survey ID 3 Course user data field 2 4 Course user data field 2 Survey ID 5 Course user data field 3 6 Course user data field 3 SurveyD T Course user data field A a Course user data field 4 Survey ID 9 Course user data field 5 10 Course user data field 5 Survey ID Please note no questionnaire specific forwarding address was defined in the details of the questionnaire the forwarding occurs based upon the system wide defined forwarding address Menu System Settings EvaSys Setting
200. Smith user example com Introduction to Economics ECSOO1 Economics Engineering 1 25 2 Instructor Mrs Dr Erica Miller user example com Legal Environments ECSO02 Economics L 25 3 Instructor Mrs Dr Erica Miller user example com Legal Environments ll ECSO03 Engineering 25 4 instructor Mr Prof Dr James McDonald user example com Time Management PDOO1 Economics 1 23 5 Instructor Mr Prof Dr James McDonald user example com Human Resource Management PDOO2 Economics Engineering 1 25 6 Instructor Mr Prof Dr Peter Huddle user example com Web Design WDO006 Economics L 2 7 instructor Mr Prof Dr Peter Huddle user example com Fire Walls and Access Control Lists WDO007 Economics LU 25 8 Instructor Mr Prof Dr Peter Huddle user example com Security Essentials WDO00s Engineering i 25 3 Instructor Mrs Dr Maria Hernandez user example com Spanish for Beginners LALO39 Engineering i 5 10 Instructor Mirs Dr Maria Hernandez user example com Spanish Advanced LALLOSO Engineering i 2 11 Instructor Mirs Dr Maria Hernandez user example com Spanish Conversation LALJI Engineering L 25 Figure 60 Example of a CSV File in Excel Using these text files which are independent of software applications and operating systems and are easy to generate you can import the relevant data directly into the EvaSys database system The file is created in cooperation with the administration as well as the IT support team of the subunit concerned The following structure i
201. Subunits Questionnaires System Settings System Information Search een vV a Ce Surry Menuen a ETI Subunits Guestionnaires System Settings System information Search Suhu Ej Ovgrvwu Fe gt License Management Ed D nm SW Product EvaSys bag Central Evaluation Cental Evaluation w Trees ZK Version V5 0 ju EN Ganon D pe Database MySQL localhost Lu Dein Lite Inkamaton Paper surveys Licensed Kl Delete s Oo Search Online Surveys Licensed UB asmuo 2 Send Ema EvaE xam Licensed Cuesta Cont gurati ZU Kaf Ha dam j pr el Ulliation Statabe Ncwnting recognibon Licensed a Batch E Ka 28 ON Genie Summary VmdF orms Designer Licenses Hot Liceneed A aply i E Scansiation licenses 3 EI Scheduled 7 SIM Maintenance A unlimited Campuslicense E Data imp ma a gt Li Zeen d cke Assign to subunits Q fateh Export i wy Particip e Cis A System Ceaning lirance kav Figure 33 Administrator Account The data fields of the administrator profile can be edited in System Settings My pro file Here the personal data of the administrator such as salutation title etc can be set The email address is particularly important because EvaSys users send their inquiries by email to the administrator In addition the administrator can change his password login name and password and if desired take on additional user roles With the aid of additional roles the administrator can from his own user account take on tasks
202. Sys the Faculty Evaluation Feedback System First of all please change your user name password combination Click on My profile in the left navigation menu In order to return to this window click on Folders You can set up your first folder a directory for surveys by clicking on Create new folder For further information please consult the online manual We wish you success Figure 197 Greeting Screen for Mrs Jasmine Sadhi Detail It is important that the instructor trainer changes his access data in the left menu under Own profile Depending on the rights granted to the active instructor trainer he can now create new questionnaires amend existing templates or create surveys only with existing questionnaires Accordingly he sees in the left menu either Questionnaires Create Questionnaire and Templates or only Questionnaires and Templates or none of these options Carlos Hernandez Instructor Carlos Hernandez Instructor surveys Folders Surveys 3 D Folders Carlos Hernandez Instructor Questionnaires m SE Questionnaires Eii Questionnaires A Create Questionnaire gl Templates W Verification A Questionnaires el Templates e Verification Figure 198 a c Access Options to the Questionnaire Editor to Templates or No Access 180 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys 3
203. Sys iw Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Geen Autsmation Suita For single choice questions with up to 11 answer options the position of the options next to beneath the question text can be freely defined In the report all answer options will be displayed regardless wether they have been marked on the question naires or not When a single choice question has more than 11 answer options the options are always displayed beneath the question text In the report only those options are dis played which have at least been selected once by the participants Which gender do you belong to male 44 4 female 29 6 Figure 492 Illustration of a Single Choice Question Multiple Choice m of n A multiple choice question can have unlimited options unlimited means as many options as fit on one page The options are considered yes no questions i e not marking an option is interpreted as a no The number of selections per response option is for this reason the same as the number of returns attend the course check as many as apply because am interested in the topic UO because need to earn the credit hours 66 7 because the instructor is really good 33 3 because it is important for my professional life 33 3 for the preparation of my exam 33 3 for other reasons 11 1 Figure 493 Illustration of a Multiple Choice Question Matrix Field The matrix field allows the capturing and evaluation
204. TRUCTURE o cccceccccccecceeccecseeseueseecseuceueseueseuseuueaueeueeaeeueseaueueeeueseaesauueaeseeesaneeneenes 120 3 2 6 CONDUCTING A PAPER SURVEY cccccccceccccsceceeeseuceeuceuueeeeeeuceuaueuusueceuaueuueaueeauueueuaeusueuenss 126 3 2 7 EFFECTIVE MANAGEMENT AND CONDUCTION OF ONLINE SURVEYS cccceccecseeeseeseeeeeeeees 127 3 2 8 ADDING QUESTIONS USING THE INSTRUCTOR TRAINER S OPTIONAL QUESTIONS iaiacacn 155 OZ TARE E 158 3 2 10 NON ANONYMOUS SURVEYS ccccccceccccceecseeceuueeeceuececueeeeeueeeuueaseuueeuuueaeeuaueaueeaueueueaneees 166 3 3 ACTIVE INSTRUCTOR TRAINER ACCOUNTS ccccccsceccecccecseeseueseeceuseuuseeeseuueueuueesaueeaeeaseaeeeneenes 178 3 3 1 CREATING ACTIVE INSTRUCTORS AS SUBUNIT ADMINISTRATORS cccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 178 3 3 2 LOGIN AS ACTIVE INSTRUCTOR TRAINER c ccccceccecseecscuseueeeuceeuseeceueeseaueuseuaueuueeuueuaneaeees 180 3 3 3 GENERATING AND EDITING QUESTIONNAIRES cccceccceceecseeceueeeuceeeeueeuseueueueeeaeeueueaeeens 181 3 3 4 GENERATING A STUDY FOLDER cccceccceccecccecscuseucseeceueseueeueseueeecseueseaueuseeaueauueueueaesaeens 184 3 3 5 GENERATING SURVEYS u cccccccceccccscccseeeeecseeueueeueeeuueeeeuueeuusaueeauueaueuueeaeseaesaueeueeeausuueeneenes 185 3 3 6 WORKING WITH THE ACTIVE INSTRUCTOR TRAINER S DATA u ccccccscesceeseecseeseueeeeeeeeeeueenes 186 4 PHASE 3 CAPTURE AND INSTANT FEEDBACK cccccccccccecceeceecseeceueeecseeseueseeueeaueueeaueueeaeu
205. The evaluation reports in EvaSys can be influenced in two places The configuration of each PDF report can be edited under System Settings Report Settings Please click on the configuration icon in the column Configuration The PDF report configuration of the corresponding questionnaire opens automatically Further more you can edit copy and delete the existing PDF reports in the menu Sys tem Settings Report Settings Please note with regard to the standard default PDF report EvaSys PDF Report present in the system you are only able to change the configuration This PDF report can neither be edited nor deleted You can copy this PDF report so as to create a new PDF report 226 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback A Report Settings Description Administrator Configuration Edit Copy Delete EvaSys PDF report Peter Brown V E EvaSys PDF report Copy Peter Brown oe 2 E A Individual Report Peter Brown dei 2 Er E Figure 262 Report Settings To copy a PDF report click in the column Copy on the copy icon A new PDF report is created You can recognize the copy of the PDF report by the name extension Copy To edit a PDF report click in the column Edit on the edit icon A window automatically opens in which in the area Description you can enter a new name for the PDF report In the area Questionnaires you can al
206. These menu items enable the creation of settings for course types survey periods and forms of address They are located in the left context menu Configuration in the main area System Settings This basic data is very important and should be perma nently defined before beginning operations Configuration np EvaSys Settings aS Define Tree Structure g Course Types 72 Periods QA Custom Titles Figure 20 Course Types Periods Custom Titles Course Types The default course types include lecture seminar proseminar tutorial lab and work ing group You can change this list according to the needs of your organization If you want to add a new course type enter its name in the input box beneath the list and click on New If you want to remove a course type from the list click on t 40 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period Lecture Seminar Laboratory Tutorial Working Group Others Modul General Modul Trainer Course Type Course Type Form Link for Modular Surveys Figure 21 Course Types The numbers at the left represent the index of the table in which the course types are recorded Using this key course types are allocated from the CSV import table i e the index number 2 always corresponds to the second value from the top down Periods Survey period is the period of time in which ONE survey per course is carried out In most ca
207. URVEYS ou cccccccecccccccccccccccuauuccucuucuecuuucuucuueauenuecuuuaueusuvanecueeauesuneuns 99 4 PHASE 3 CAPTURE AND INSTANT FEEDBACK ccccccecccecccccccccccucccuaucccccuucueucueaueeuuucueeuuuauecuueanennes 188 D PHASE 4 ADVANCED REPORTING eeann nnan anaana anana aa nE EEL EE EEAA EAE AA LAELLE EEEE R ARRE En rnanan 236 6 PHASE 5 QUALITY MANAGEMENT 314 f MODULE HE Er e REESEN 342 C CREATING QUESTIONNAIRES WITH VIVIDFORMS cccccececncsssccececececececnenensneeeeseeseeees 357 1 ACCESS TO THE VIVIDFORMS EDITOR 2 ccccccccccccccccccccccceccccuuauccucecuucuueauucuuuauecuuuauusueuaueauecuuenuusunnans 357 2 CREATING A QUESTIONNAIRE IN THE VIVIDFORMS EDITOR c ccccecccccccccccccccccccccuucuecuuuauecuueeueenens 358 3 REPAIR FORMEN 409 4 USE OF THE QUESTION LIBRARY WITH VIVIDFORMS ccccccccccccccecccccccecuuccuecueauceauecueuauesnecuuesueeuns 409 5 FILTER SETTINGS VALIDATION REQUIRED QUESTIONS AND CROSS TABULATIONS c cccecceceeceeees 415 6 DEFINING GENERAL TEMPLATES ccccccccccccccccccccccecceccucuecucucuccueuauunueuauuauecauenecuueauusuuvanusueesuuenenans 420 7 EDITING AND PASSING ON QUESTIONNAIRES ccccecccccecccccccccucccccccuuecueuaueauevauecuecuuusuesunuauecuueuesuens 423 8 IMPLEMENTATION OF SPECIFIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS VIVIDFORMS PLUS cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 428 D SYSTEM SETTINGS AND MANAGEMENT sue N EN ENNEN ENNEN EN ENNEN EN ENKEN ENKEN NEEN EN EN 433 1 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
208. Ufonmgied Document zointions 2011 05 EvaSys VW EvaSys MF Education Survey Automation Suite Corporate Survey Automation Suite User Guide V5 0 Imprint Electric Paper GmbH Konrad Zuse Allee 13 21337 L neburg Germany Phone 49 4131 7360 0 Telefax 49 4131 7360 60 Email info electricpaper de Chief executive officers Lars Riemenschneider Sven Meyer USt IdNr DE 179 384 158 Handelsregister HRB Nr 1604 L neburg Edited by Sandra Blomeyer Dr Iris Hille Bernd R ver Ulrike Schiefelbein 2011 Electric Paper GmbH The manual is protected by copyright Subject to change without notice EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Overview A PREPARATION AND GENERAL NOTES uiu ccccccccecececscecscscececcncncncececececececececenenenenenseeeeseseenenens 11 1 INTRODUCTION oo ccccccccccccccccccccccccucccuucuuuueuauuauecaeuguusuunduusueuauenueceuauusueuauusnensuuauusuuuauunuuvauesuecueuuunsuetans 11 2 THE BASICS NEE 17 3 SYSTEM START UP AND SECURITY ccccccccccccccccccccccccecceccuucuuaueuuuucueccuuauecguuauenueuauunuensuvanecueusuesuneanss 26 B YOUR EVALUATION PROCESS THE PHASE MODEL cccccccccccccscececnceececececececnenenseeceeecsenenees 37 1 THE PHASE MODEL YOUR WORKFLOW IN THE PROCESS OF EVALUATION ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 37 2 PHASE 1 PREPARATION OF A SURVEY PERIOD cccccccccceccecccccccccceccccuaueuueuaueeueccuucuucuuuauucueeuuusuenans 39 3 PHASE 2 IMPLEMENTATION OF S
209. VividForms Demos Cancel lt lt Back Save Figure 32 Creating Editing the User Rights of a Data Entry Assistant Verifier The Verifier can be used as a visual correction for scanned sheets The Verifier controls the VividForms sheets processed by the VividForms reader and can where necessary correct the recognition attributes The verification can be acti vated or deactivated for surveys This can be necessary because ambiguously filled out sheets cannot always be cor rectly machine read Report Creator A user profile is created with report generation rights This allows the generation of anonymized summary reports on subunits Further report forms are available when 52 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw using the server version Central Evaluation The user account of a report creator does need a user license The Administrator Account The administrator account is used to create the system wide organizational structure administrate users and integrate questionnaires as well as regulating and supervising processing In addition to this surveys can be generated displayed and evaluated and raw data exported remy Airean Coste eem Z Co EvaSys Sak Supbupid 6 Ouesitionnaires Syatom Settings Selo information Search gati Iw l EvaSys Y Va 2 NG e Subunits Queniionninines System sailings System intonation Search est e minr ipy de Arer Ca De Search Ss J 3 EvaSys Iw 6
210. Write protect Mode in the Form Information Note By editing the form the questions answer boxes can change their position whereby surveys in circulation can become impossible to evaluate This warning is to be strictly observed It is generally not recommended to make changes to forms with surveys We recommend that before activating the editing mode you make contact with our support team 7 2 Automatic Recognition Set Management As soon as a survey has been created using a VividForms questionnaire VividForms expands its recognition set to assure recognition In order to ensure that all returning questionnaires can be correctly processed it is only possible to delete a questionnaire when simultaneously deleting all surveys based on that questionnaire This is done automatically when the delete function in 424 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Editing and Passing on Questionnaires the questionnaire administration is activated and confirmed Use this function there fore with extreme care The user of an activated user account must be extremely careful when deleting a questionnaire he has created himself because there may be surveys which depend upon the questionnaire to be processed The delete function can only be activated by opening the lock symbol 73 When a questionnaire is deleted ALL surveys based on that questionnaire will be automatically deleted as well Form Manag
211. a Folders e or you create a new folder Enter the name of the folder in the area Create in a new folder In both cases confirm moving the report by clicking on the OK button Options during Report Creation General The options during report creation are presented to you as soon as you wish to create a report You can see them in the figure below the report name which here reads Show_Options Description Global report Q1 2011 Question mapping of different questionnaires Automatic with text comparison Manual Include answers to open questions Combine surveys unweighted Please note For this combination the mean values of the single surveys are averaged Verify Back Figure 300 Report Creator Options During Report Creation 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 253 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model The following options are offered to you e Question mapping of different questionnaires Summary of surveys that were car ried out with different questionnaires Options Automatically with text comparison and manual assignment Condition the questionnaires are similar and therefore comparable e Include answers to open questions Should all responses to open questions be displayed in the summary The responses to open questions are not always of interest in more extensive summaries since they do not serve the quick overview but
212. a Harwood Professional Development 3 85 31 6 T 08 17 2007 05 18 2071 Figure 597 Utilization Statistics The following data fields are found in the table e Name Title first and last name of the user Subunit e Subunit Name of the subunit in which the user profile is located e Logins Number of logins since the user account was created Scans e Scans Number of scanned paper survey questionnaires The number of question naire sets not the number of pages are counted e eForms Number of completed online questionnaires both the HTML and the PDF based online surveys e Surveys Number of surveys which are in the user account at a given time e Studies Number of folders the owner has e User since Date the account was set up e Last online Date of the last login 1 6 Evaluation Statistics You can find the evaluation statistics in the details of a paper survey where you have scanned in data 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 441 EvaSys V System Settings and Management Goen Auncmation Sule Survey Details 2 Survey Organization and Management amp Instructor Carlos Hernandez J Course Organization and Management 0 Survey Period SI Type Paper survey cover sheet Questionnaire train_en Status Data available report available Survey Created on 05 16 2011 at 10 20 02 Last data collection On 05 18 2011 at 10 31 32 No of collected questionnaires 3 D a EE ER ea Kant rca P gt f F alt
213. a separate Manual is available NonForms A non form is a scanned page that is not recognized as a form This may be the case when you e scan a questionnaire that does not yet exist in EvaSys Then the VividForms Reader cannot read this form and will treat it as a non recognized form e scan an EvaSys form that is faulty in some way For example the forms were sta pled together and the corner s were cut off or they were scanned in askew which too destroys the corners needed for alignment The form can not then be identi fied e scan something completely different for example in order to test the scanner These image files will also be treated as non forms The VividForms Reader stores the non forms in a so called non forms folder Survey Survey Process Conducting a survey in EvaSys is a process based on a questionnaire In order to cre ate a survey you have to select an existing questionnaire in the system and which you utilize for the survey As a consequence a personalized copy of the questionnaire template is created and linked to this particular survey hard copy procedure or respectively a cover sheet for the survey is created which supplements the standard questionnaire with survey details cover sheet procedure The related survey is identified through a distinct mark in the case of VividForms for example a barcode on the personalized ques tionnaires or on the cover sheet respectively This distinct mark is
214. a survey cannot be held or should not be held can be selected in the Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions Instructor Trainer s optional questions Email to the administrator when survey canceled Send an email to the administrator when the setting in the Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions has been activated that the survey has been cancelled Default value course participants The default value for the course participants is used for batch printing when no infor mation on the number of questionnaires is given This value can also be changed when batch printing Anonymization threshold The value set defines the limit to the number of questionnaires before the anonymized text of open questions will be shown If the number of questionnaires is above this value the images of the open questions will be used Please note that a value of 0 deactivates this functionality i e all of the questionnaires will be shown for anony mization when the anonymization has been activated for this subunit Module Evaluation Display of name of the Secondary instructor trainer in the heading of the question group If activated the names of the secondary instructors trainers are displayed on the aggregated questionnaire In this case in each first question group heading of a partial questionnaire the name of the relevant instructor trainer is displayed This setting 480 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite
215. ader when you have created the first survey with a new questionnaire regardless of whether a paper or online survey Only then at this moment is the VividForms Reader informed of your form and the answer box areas on it This means precisely that the pool of XML files available to the VividForms Reader is only then complemented with the new XML file This then defines your new form With each new creation of a sur vey this XML file is refreshed As soon as you create a survey for a VividForms questionnaire a corresponding form definition file in XML format is added to the recognition set of the VividForms Reader The questionnaires scanned in are evaluated by means of these form definition files This means that the VividForms Reader knows from these form definition files which parts of the questionnaire could contain crosses In the following graphic you can see a questionnaire for which a survey has not yet been created It is as such not in the recognition set of the VividForms Reader red cross Ei Details for questionnaire Quest_01 Ouest Di Evaluation Questionnaire 1 WP VinidEorms Editor Copy and open the questionnaire in the VividForms Designer wW PDF Sample Show w PDF paper survey Show In the recognition set of the VividForms Reader Add Preview online survey Figure 67 Details of a Questionnaire Recognition Set of the VividForms Reader Now if you create a survey with this question
216. aeueeeeeeenenes 413 4 4 DELETING A QUESTION FROM THE LIBRARY cccceccecceecseeseeceeeceucseeeseueeueeeeueueeaeeueueuaeeueuuaueaaes 414 4 5 ADDING A GROUP TO THE LIBRARY ccccccccecececeeeeeucecececueeuceueueuueeeseuuueeueaueeuueeuueueeuueaueeueeaeees 415 4 6 DELETING A GROUP FROM THE LIBRARY ccccecsceceecceeceeeeeecseueeueeeeueuueeueeuaueuueeaueueusueeeaeeuaueuess 415 FILTER SETTINGS VALIDATION REQUIRED QUESTIONS AND CROSS TABULATIONS nicec 415 5 1 GENERAL INFORMATION EE 415 5 2 FILTER SETTINGS tege geegent eeben EEE NES 416 53 VALIDATION ee 417 5 4 REQUIRED QUESTIONS EE 418 5 5 CROSS TABULATIONS EEN 419 DEFINING GENERAL TEMPLATES ccccccccecceescececuseeeseucseuceeeeeueseaueueeeeueeuusaueeueeeausueueueusaeueueeaeueaesuass 420 6 1 DEFINING A TEMPLATE BY THE ADMINISTRATOR cccccccsecceeseeceueceeueeuceueseuueeeseuuueeueeuseneeeaueuees 420 6 2 USE OF TEMPLATES IN INSTRUCTOR TRAINER ACCOUNTS ccccccceecceeseecsueseeeseuseueeeaueueeeaeeeees 421 EDITING AND PASSING ON QUESTIONNAIRES u cccccccceccecccececuseuuseeueeueeeeeuesecueeuseuueeaueeaeeueueaueeaeenaess 423 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite 7 1 WV RIT EP ROME CT MODE EE 423 7 2 AUTOMATIC RECOGNITION SET MANAGEMENT isssssieesieeieeiieriiesiseiiseiesirseinsrrrstinnrnserrerrt 424 7 3 IMPORT EXPORT OF VIVIDFORMS QUESTIONNAIRES c cccccccceescsesseceseceseeeceeeesensesenseeeneesennens 425 8 IMPLEMENTATIO
217. al options to process data One of them is the creation of summary reports This report creation is extremely flexible you can create reports according to all imaginable criteria summarizing these afterwards again and also tak ing the created reports apart again according to criteria defined by yourself You will see that in this way the report creator answers many questions and accommodates numerous requirements It is important to Know that the reports of the report creator have the same properties as the reports which you are familiar with from the automatically generated PDF reports e The analyses on the single questions of your questionnaire look the same for example a bar diagram for the single choice and multiple choice questions depending on the setting a histogram for the scaled questions the handwritten and or typed comments on the open questions and so forth e The elements which the administrator has set in the menu System Settings Report Settings Configuration also appear in these reports The exception is the letter which the report creator does not produce e If for relevant questionnaires extended PDF report definitions or multilingual ques tionnaires exist these settings also apply to the summary reports that are pro 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 257 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Giiruay Auisrnation Sukk duced for the respective questionnaire This means that you can also download
218. ale OR between 18 29 and in both cases has the main subject Business Studies For this reason link both criteria combinations with the Or operator Finally as you are now familiar allocate a descriptive name decide for or against including open questions in the subgroup report and click on the Create button The subgroup report now appears in the list of reports When you have created several criteria combinations using the drop down menu you can select the criteria combination to which the criteria combination of the chosen question is to be added In the following graphic you can see the results of the criteria I learned a lot in this course which is rated with a 1 applies in full and linked with criteria combination 3 In the drop down menu of the criteria combinations select the criteria combination 3 and click subsequently on Add criterion 280 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Sue Phase 4 Advanced Reporting T Questions about you Which gender do you belong to What is your age What is your age HOW many terms Nave you been studying Sp Tar Main subject Do you already have a university degree or a degree of another institute in tertiary education The instructor is always well prepared The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc without any problems Criteria combinatio
219. alog for the definition of pole labels Filter settings Validation Required questions Cross tabulations Opens the dialog for the definition of filters validation required questions cross tabulations Change color scheme Opens the dialog for adapting the form s color scheme Picture Library Opens the dialog for adding and removing pictures to from the picture library Line Height Font Size Size of the answer boxes Font Selection of line height size of answer boxes font size and type for the complete questionnaire Form Properties Online View Form properties Opens the properties of the questionnaire Repair form Recreates the questionnaire Enable numbering Toggles the numbering of questions and question groups Edit Pole Template Opens the dialog for the definition of pole labels Filter settings Validation Required questions Cross tabulations Opens the dialog for the definition of filters validation required questions cross tabulations Picture Library Opens the dialog for adding and removing pictures to from the picture library Online survey template Selection of the template used for the online view in the VividForms Editor Display Selection of the display mode for the online view in the VividForms Edi tor Question Library Choose a question from the library Opens the dialog to add questions or question groups to the library Add selected question to library Opens the dialog to add a selected question
220. also be possible to combine the reports for the first three groups and for the last three groups and thus compare the age group of 18 to 49 with the age group 50 and over Your questionnaire contains a multiple choice question or a single choice question on the subject with the responses Geology Chemistry Physics History and so forth Then you can create corresponding subgroup reports for all summarized reports based on this questionnaire subgroup report Geology subgroup report Chemistry and so forth This way you can structure courses that are attended by students of var ious disciplines according to subjects and make the results meaning the subgroup 274 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting reports available to those in charge of each discipline It could for example be that the dean of Chemistry is not interested how the course Nuclear Physics was gen erally assessed as it belongs to the field of Physics How the Chemistry students assess the course could however be of great interest to him If your questionnaire contains a single choice question regarding the grade level you can then evaluate subgroups regarding the grade level 1 Questions about you Which gender do you belong to O male O female What is your age O 18 29 C 30 39 LJ 40 49 TT 50 59 60 69 Older than 69 Figure 337 Report Creator Single
221. am ple EvaSys Basic Training Donna Harwood Thus the name of the instructor trainer will be displeayed on the questionnaire as well as in the course list and sur vey list and on the PDF report Please remember to add the instructor trainer to the list of Further report recipients as well because otherwise the instructor trainer will not receive his her report when you choose to send them by email Edit course of John Doe Program of study Course ID 03 Evaluation period Course Type Module Trainer Coplmuoug Figure 461 Module Evaluation Enter the Name of the Instructor Trainer in the Field for the Course Name In the following figure you can see the display of the name of instructors trainers in an online survey as well as on a paperbased questionnaire 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 353 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Auncmation Sukk Questions concerning the Trainer Donna Harwood Introduction into Eva Sys 2 1 How would you rate the trainer s overall teaching Excellent Foor methods 2 2 How would you rate the trainer s ability to set and meet Excellent Poor the objectives for the course Figure 462 Module Evaluation Display the Instructor Trainer Name in an Online Survey 2 Questions concerning the Trainer Donna Harwood Introduction into EvaSys 2 1 How would you rate the trainer s overall teaching Excellent O 0 0O 0O 0O Poor methods 2 2
222. ame Philipp Last name Belmore Phone Email belmore training evasys com Address Language Default language v Login name belmore New password SHOKSCHHHSSH SSS FOH Soe HSEOC OO OEEEe Confirm new password ITT LDAP registration Deactivated Activated Cancel lt lt Back Il Next gt gt Deactivated Figure 42 Activating LDAP in the User Settings 2 2 3 Creating Courses The administrator as well as the subunit administrators can assign courses to a an instructor trainer or dean manager This function is only available when using the Central Evaluation server version The basic idea of the Central Evaluation is the repetitive implementation of large scale surveys of a correspondingly large number of courses A survey is always related to a course In order to be able to compare survey results each course must be evaluated only once in a given survey period The survey period is in most cases a semester although it could also be set as a trisemester or a half semester System Settings Periods The fields available for a course include e Name Title of the course e Program of Studies The short name of the program of studies can be used to create program of studies reports across subunits e ID number Unique ID of the course e Type Lecture seminar etc Course types can be viewed and changed at Sys tem Settings Course Types 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 61 EvaSys V
223. an accumulated subunit report Hide bar diagram shadow Hides the bar shadow in PDF reports Hide end of document text Hides text end of document Hide page number end of document Hides page number on last page Batch printing Duplex printing The PDF document contains empty pages for duplex printing e g after the cover sheet 486 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Configuration Settings Batch printing form printing when using the cover sheet procedure When using the cover sheet procedure the cover sheet and the form will be included in the PDF either in a given number or as a master copy depending on whether this button is activated Batch events Naming conventions for PDF reports in ZIP files lf PDF reports are opened in the batch events as individual reports merged in a ZIP file then the file name for the PDF reports is created using the naming conventions defined here A variety of place holders listed in the manual can be used for the file names see chapter B 3 2 9 Batch Events Delete answers to open questions Activates Deactivates the option to delete responses to open questions Serial dispatch of the profile lines for active user accounts If activated serial dispatch of the profile lines of the report creator can also be used for active user accounts If this option is deactivated the report creator can only choose courses of inactivated user accounts
224. an adjusted and or multilingual report Results in HTML format Results in PDF format EvaSys PDF report standard EvaSys PDF report PDF Reports Short Version Ei e individual Report Textual Report Results in PDF format Evasys PDF report v English German Figure 306 Report Creator Multilingual Reports e Also the usual export options are available CSV Sphinx and SPSS i Raw data in SPHINX format SES Raw data in SPSS format AN Raw data in CSV format Figure 307 Report Creator Export Options The summary reports give you unlike the usual automatically produced PDF reports an overview of your evaluated data Because depending on your choice a Summary report is generated for a subunit for an instructor trainer for a course of studies etc This report looks just like the automatically produced PDF report yet it provides you with information on the corresponding assessment results of entire subunits etc Summary Reports An Overview There are four different types of summary reports available to you e Subunit reports e Program of study reports e Reports for particular instructors trainers Instructor Trainer Profile e Reports that you can put together as you like Any Compilation 258 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys Vv Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting You see these options as soon as you click on the folder and thus op
225. an be defined System Settings EvaSys Settings Surveys This anonymization threshold sets a minimum number of returns under which survey responses are anonymized can be set from 1 to 99 e Never display When this option is activated the handprint fields will not appear in either the HTML or PDF reports This option is only recommended for blocking access Using Logo Files You can link a graphic file with a subunit This file appears in the EvaSys interface as well as in the PDF report of the subunit You will need a 60x60 pixel size version of the logo in JPG format Note The logo in the 60x60 pixel size will only appear with the correct dimensions on the printed questionnaire when the resolution is 72x72 dpi 2 Subunit details Subunit Name Professional Development Figure 28 Logo File Copy this logo file in the directory C Apache htdocs evasys logos on the EvaSys server Give the file a unique name and be careful not to overwrite any of the data already in this directory In the window of the subunit details you can select a logo in a drop down menu from the logos available in the system If the logo you would like is not yet in the system then you can add it by clicking on the button Process 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 47 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model PH In the window that appears select a logo file with a click on Search and enter it into the system with
226. an be selected and stored as well as your own new formats such as for cus tomer numbers and the like The following options are available for own formats e N for numerical entries e L for alphabetical entries e A for alphanumerical entries as well as special characters To define your own format activate the option New format Click the buttons N L A to add the character types or type the text directly into the input field Please observe when creating your own templates the separator must be in inverted com mas e g TL otherwise they cannot be recognized by EvaSys Lastly different styles for the segmentation can be selected The fields can be dis played closed at the top open at the top or half open 386 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Geen Auidmatiin Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor Style of segmented box pepe ele Open above Verification display Half open Figure 510 Open Question Setting the Segmentation Style The segmentation is not only displayed in paper questionnaires but in online surveys too The display of an ICR question can be set in the report additional to segmentation The following options are available here e Like an open question In this case the results are displayed individually one below the other analogous to the results of an open question Identical entries are concentrated and have mentions added to the corresp
227. ancels the link Display in the PDF Report In the menu System Settings Report Settings you can change the configuration set tings for every PDF report by clicking on the icon in the column Configuration With the configuration setting Dual scale profile line you can activate the display of the dual scale in the PDF report By selecting 0 the display of the dual scale is deacti vated By selecting 1 you define that the critical values appear on the left side of the scale with 2 the critical values appear on the right side of the scale The critical values are calculated by subtracting the result of the quality question a from the result of the importance question b On a 6 point scale the values range between 5 and 5 Values of 1 to 5 are considered critical as soon as the positive pole agree very important in the questionnaire appears on the left side Values from 1 to 5 are considered critical as soon as the positive pole agree very important in the questionnaire appears on the right side The technical equipment is 1 i i excellent poor very important O very unimportant i roricritical area Critical area Figure 500 Explanation of the Dual Scale Calculation Dual scale profile line The technical equipement is mot prepared eee r D i i D i i L The meres E Sheva wey i P z a r a z ay mitwi gyrn a Figure 501 Dual Scale Profile Line of the linke
228. answer boxes To do this double click on the corresponding scaled question and select in the area of Define options as in creating a scaled question the number of desired answer boxes With all other question types an increase in the size of the answer boxes has no effect on the question These changes decrease in the number of answer boxes only occur with scaled questions other question types are not affected 2 8 Adding Pole Labels 2 8 1 Horizontal Pole Labels This function allows pole label headers for groups of scaled questions to be defined Firstly it requires the section Form Properties in the VividForms Editor control to be opened Select the option ie Edit pole template ff Pole Text Assistant m Edit Pole Left Pole BIU amp strongly disagree Right Pole RI Lei strongly agree Standardtextfor BT U abstention Da Apply Cancel Figure 527 Edit Pole Template Enter the text elements which should be used for the labels and click Apply Next create a new question group Now the option 48 Pole Labels in the section Add can be selected Click on Pole Labels to add them to the questionnaire 396 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor strongly disagree strongly agree n a The meals in the refectory are always warm UI UU DUU E The meals in the refectory are al
229. aper GmbH 343 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Figure 449 Create Module Questionnaires Now the single questionnaires have to be linked to course types In the context of module surveys the course type has the function to define which of your question naires EvaSys will use for the evaluation of a course If for example a questionnaire is linked to the course type lecture this questionnaire will be used for the evaluation of all courses of the type lecture on the combined module questionnaire Thus in the context of module surveys the category course type does not have to equal the classic course type in common evaluation In some cases it can be advis able to create own course types for the evaluation of your modules If for example you want to use a general questionnaire for the evaluation of the module in total and a trainer questionnaire to evaluate the single courses of your module you can create corresponding coursetypes such as module general and module trainer EvaSys iV gt Subunits Questionnaires Search Sit iV y Course Type D 1 Pi Peter Brown 2 Seminar Administrator Le 4 Laboratory Tutorial X 5 Working Group P Instruments 6 Others P a EE Text Templates T Module General General General Questions A R D I Documents G Module Trainer Trainer Trainer Que
230. aper GmbH 35 Preparation and General Notes 36 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite The Phase Model Your Workflow in the Process of Evaluation B Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Over the course of this chapter you will be acquainted with the actions and settings which are important for your evaluation work with Eva Sys This ranges from display ing the structure of your university or organization to creating questionnaires and implementing and processing captured data Out of our experience a five step phase model has evolved that follows in chapter B and so will be introduced to you first This way you can get your bearings within the chapter and find relevant paragraphs fast 1 The Phase Model Your Workflow in the Process of Evaluation This chapter first offers a brief overview of the phase model before the respective phases are discussed in detail The following five stations show the implementation of survey periods in accordance with the procedure of central evaluation e Phase 1 Preparation e Phase 2 Implementation e Phase 3 Capture and instant feedback e Phase 4 Expanded reports e Phase 5 Quality management The single phases comprise of the following steps Phase 1 Preparation e Create the organizational structure Subunits instructors trainers courses OR e Create subunits and import instructors trainers courses
231. are for example the automated update of the user accounts and survey procedures the download of eval uation reports or questionnaire supplies Connections with EvaSys via web services can be implemented by the manufacturer and or your vendor 2 5 EvaSys Settings Configuration At the menu System Settings EvaSys Settings in the administrator interface you have access to the configuration of the EvaSys server System information Search est iV Ch r 3 EvaSys Settings tl General lal Advanced i Subunits Queshonnaires Survey Peter Brown Administrator Survey Online Title Login Window Data Import and Export Course User Data Fields Survey Automation Suite Functions Central Evaluation Email Functions amp Accounts Color Settings System Language Instructor Accounts Vivid onms Network Settings System Security Maintenance of the title line on the start page Insiruments the default language of the EvaSys interface as well as al generated H documents Users instructors report creators etc can change the uage in their settings English Higher Education r Date Format Here you can define the date format The following characters are recognized notice upper and lower case Figure 627 EvaSys Settings 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 475 EvaSys iw System Settings and Management FE d S Below the button EvaSys Settings you can select a major heading for
232. are not allowed Capital and small letters are however not important e may be a maximum of 32 characters long Please note In SPSS the variable names will be truncated to 8 characters e must contain at least one character The field therefore cannot be empty In the fourth column the export values are displayed to which you can allocate new numerical values Please note that you can only use numerical values for the export value no alphabetical characters After completing your changes click at the end of the dialogue on Save EvaSys informs you whether the saving of your changes was successful Information Export configuration successfully saved Figure 401 Data Export Configuration successfully saved 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 311 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Should the variables not comply with the above mentioned rules an error message will appear After your changes have been successfully adopted click at the end of the window on Close to exit the export configuration The example questionnaire just processed Sampl1 shows for example in the raw data export via CSV the following result SPSS and Sphinx are also possible Sheet Gender Age Age Grade Term 1 1 6 75 2 9 8 2 0 4 88 1 3 4 3 1 1 61 2 2 6 4 1 3 38 2 7 3 Figure 402 CSV Export of the Raw Data with Changed Names of Variables and Export Values The variables changed by you and
233. ared HHH The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way poe 2 Questions about the i i i i i instructo 106 The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc instructor without any problems Please grade the instructor for this course n The lead time of the course is adequate I Figure 258 PDF Report Normed Profile Line The detail profile line shows all of the norm values of the questionnaire In addition to the option mentioned above Create profile line you must activate the option System Settings Report Settings Configuration Show norm values You must also specify the norm values in the questionnaire administration 218 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback Presentation Template Carios Hemandez Graduate Survey 2011 Presentation template Graduate Survey 2011 Carlos Hernandez No of responses 6 This question group contains 4 questions pe concerning the Instructor 1 nas Preparation 2 Explanation 3 Technical Skills 4 Overall Grade This question group contains 4 questions a concerning the course 1 Workload 2 Professional Discussion 3 Professional Preparation 4 Overall Grade Figure 259 PDF Report Presentation Template This part serves to facilitate a discussion with the students participants about the results of the survey All indicators can be shown with an
234. arize these compiled reports again or evaluate the reports according to different criteria is the topic of the following chapter For these two needs mentioned the combining as well as the taking apart of existing reports there are two options in the details of a report Just a small reminder You will find the details of a report by clicking on the name of this report in the report list Combining Reports First of all the combinations are dealt with here This option enables you to summa rize several created reports If you go to the details of a created report you see at the bottom right the second to last point Merge evaluations 272 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite tus Results in HTML format a Results in PDF format EvaSys PDF report Engish e Raw data in SPHINX format ES Raw data in SPSS format OO E Raw data in CSV format A S Profle Line Show C Automatic Manual Figure 334 Report Creator Report Details Merge Evaluations Phase 4 Advanced Reporting If you wish to summarize several reports click on this option A new window appears in which you can mark all reports that you wish to combine with the current report In this figure two instructor trainer profiles are united in one report Prof Belmore and Prof Hernandez from winter term 2010 11 Merge report Belmore WS 10 11 with Reports train_en train_en_1 Summary Reports 2010 a
235. as the survey has been closed Action Automatic email attachment list E MAIL Footnote for anonymous online surveys _ D E MAIL Footnote for non anonymous online surveys E MAIL Form for instructor No email attachment defined EMA Information about result access to i E MAIL Instructor s Optional Questions activated E MAIL Instructor s Optional Questions deactivated E MAIL Instructor s Optional Questions reminder E MAIL Meta data for archive email Attach Language English Higher Education OK Reference Result view online survey Mail text This email entitles you to view the results of an online survey Please follow the link and use the PSWD displayed as identification The PSWD reads PSWD E Access under SERVER Yours sincerely the evaluation office Figure 156 Editing the Email Text on Information for Online Survey Participants Password Based Online Survey Each PSWD based online survey can subsequently be converted into a password based online survey The precondition for this is that there are no online survey responses and that the function of the online password based survey is activated in the EvaSys settings System Settings EvaSys Settings Survey Online Allow pass word based online surveys Central Evaluation y To convert a PSWD based to a password based online survey click on the name of the PSWD based survey to open the details In the area
236. ase Model Goen Aimomadion Subs 6 Phase 5 Quality Management 6 1 Norms In EvaSys you can add norm values for questionnaires Thus you can more easily compare and interpret results from surveys which are based on this questionnaire If norms have been defined for the corresponding questionnaire and if they have been activated in the PDF report settings menu System Settings Report Settings Configu ration Show norm values an overview over the values of the indicators with the cor responding norm values and a normed profile line is displayed in the section Overall indicators at the beginning of the report Interpretation is made easier with colored icons that signal if a result is to be inter preted as good or bad Positive result Neutral result Slightly critical result B Critical result Overall indicators Dimension Value Norm value 2 Questions about the instructor 5 1 107 i i 3 Questions about the course 5 2 110 a 4 Questions about the teaching material 5 2 108 sho 5 Questions about the studying conditions 5 4 113 Figure 407 Normed Profile Line for Indicators In addition a detailed profile line can be activated in the PDF report which shows the norm values for all questions of the questionnaire System Settings Report Settings Configuration Show normed profile line This is displayed in the PDF report after the analysis of the individual questions As norm basis you can u
237. ata this number is adopted for surveys of the current and future periods Surveys of this course from past survey periods show the original number of participants in the survey details so that the response rates of past surveys are also calculated correctly In some cases it may be necessary to change the number of participants retrospec tively if for example the number of participants needs to be changed for a period that has expired To do this the corrected number of participants can be deposited in the survey details and with a click on Accept saved for the survey The response rate appearing in the survey overview or in the survey details or in the PDF report is now based on this corrected number of participants Show PSWDs in browser 1 Receive PSWDs by email C Send PSWDs by email to respondents Download PSWDs in CSV File wl Preview online survey CH Scheduled Tasks Finish Data Collection Close Survey amp Restore Survey 2 Delete Survey a Edit answers to open questions CG Assign survey to substitute instructor id Edit Show notes Figure 101 Survey Details Number of Participants to Calculate the Response Rate 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 113 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Delete Function for Responses to Open Questions As Administrator you have the option to delete responses to open questions This is especially helpful when empty images with only t
238. aterial 5 Questions about the studying conditions In the second part of the analysis the average values of all individual questions are listed Note Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on your computer in order to view the files Your Evasys Administrator Max Mustermann EvaSys Admumistrator Figure 618 PDF Template Letter Report to the instructors trainers Informs about the survey report SALUTATION TITLE SURNAME You are receiving the results of the automatic evaluation of the course SURVEY Questionnaire type QUESTIONARY 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 463 EvaSys V System Settings and Management Goen Auncmation Sui The overall indicator given first is made up of the following scales in the questionnaire DIMENSIONS Then you will see the individual averages of the scales given above In the second part of the report you will find all the averages of each individual ques tion The value 1 represents from the students viewpoint minimum score for the course while the value 7 is a maximum score o SOS Certificate of participation for online surveys Confirms the participation in an online survey with date and PSWD 2 1 4 Placeholder for Texts Dear Mr Example You will receive as attachment to this email the report to the survey Introduction to Sample Science Your EvaSys Administrator SSS SSS SSS This is a message of the type Survey Report to Instructors Trainers
239. ation such as information on the respon dent such as age and information on the quality of the object in question such as the instructors trainers expertise Questionnaires can be created by e The administrator He uses questionnaires for central evaluations and makes them available to active instructors trainers If a questionnaire is defined as a template it can additionally be modified by active instructors trainers e Subunit administrator He too can use them for surveys and make them available to the instructors trainers of his own subunit s Also the subunit administrator can create templates also for the instructors trainers of his own subunit e Active instructors trainers Once they have been granted authorization to access the VividForms Editor resp Designer they can create questionnaires however they cannot create templates A questionnaire created in EvaSys serves as a template in order to create any survey with it If the utilization has not been restricted it can be used system wide for as long as you wish and for all surveys that you consider necessary A questionnaire is therefore media independent You can create paper as well as online surveys with it 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 79 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Green dog Suite 2 4 2 Management of Questionnaires and Detailed View Available Questionnaires Show all questionnaires of the Subunit Administrators
240. ation How many terms have you been studying so far Main subject Do you already have a university degree or a degree of another institute in tertiary education 2 Questions about the Figure 564 Configuration of Required Questions 418 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Filter Settings Validation Required Questions and Cross Tabulations Survey Automation Suite 5 5 Cross Tabulations In order to use cross tabulations this function must be activated at System Settings Report Settings Configuration Create Cross Tabulation Select from both lists the variables you would like to use You can use scaled ques tions as well as single choice questions with as many as eleven choices The upper question is displayed in the X axis while the lower question is found in the Y axis of the matrix The number of cross tabulations possible is unlimited In the PDF report two cross tabulations per page will be displayed Cross tabulations Matrix 1 Question 1 What is your age Change Question 2 The technical equipment of the university is excellent New cross tabulation Add Question 2 Question 1 Figure 565 Create Cross Tabulations x What is your age y The technical equipment of the university is excellent 1 18 29 1 strongly disagree 2 30 39 2 3 40 49 3 4 50 59 d 5 60 69 SR 6 Older than 69 6 strongly agree Figure 566 Cross Tabulation in the PDF Report 20
241. ators deter mined over several survey periods 298 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Trend graph of the indicators es es en ep o zem w w s ST P e Ss vn wn vm em vm ep mm Em femme E TTT WS00 10 5510 WS10 11 5511 Figure 383 Report Creator Profile Line Emails Trend Graph Prerequisite for this is the availability of indicators on the selected questionnaire as well as captured data from several survey periods The trend graphics each show groups of up to five indicators with a maximum of five survey periods in one graphic If data is available from more than five survey periods the graphics are divided up cor respondingly Assignment of the Questions in the Case of Different Questionnaires As you are familiar from the report creation with profile line comparison you have the option to compare surveys that are based on different but comparable question naires To do so there both options are available the automatic and the manual ques tionnaire comparison Please activate one of the two options here if you use surveys with several questionnaires With these options you have diverse possibilities to use the batch profile lines for com parison purposes In conjunction with the summary reports this is a powerful tool for processing your data at hand 5 2 4 Result Reports With the report creator you can download further reports that pr
242. be deleted automatically columns Apply Cancel F Note The placeholder in the other column Figure 483 Define the Number of Lines in the Questionnaire Header The logo in the questionnaire header can also be replaced by your own logo By default the logo defined as the standard subunit logo is displayed To integrate a cus tom logo into the questionnaire header click on the existing logo The logo assistant opens automatically By Logo Assistant Insert logo Use standard logo subunit logo Use own logo Sample_red Position in questionnaire header O Left Sample 4 e Right Vertical alignment Top Middle e Bottom Scale of the box width in outer third of the header 100 Figure 484 Adjusting the Logo Here you can choose whether to e use the standard logo subunit logo or e use your own logo 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 373 EvaSys iw Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Green dog Suite Under Use own logo you will find the logos and pictures which you have already uploaded into the Picture Library in the menu Form Properties in the Editor Control If you have not yet integrated any pictures e g logos into the Picture Library you cannot select your own logo To upload images to the library please see Section C 3 8 1 Uploading images to the image library In the area Position in questionnaire header it can be d
243. be preserved The minimal return value defined here must be attained so that the information on partici pation or non participation of a specific survey can be released Please observe that under certain circumstances a value of 3 or less can compromise survey anonymity 482 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Configuration Settings Allow password based online surveys Central evaluation If this option is activated a PSWD based survey for which PSWDs have not yet been sent and for which there are as yet no responses can retroactively be converted to a password based survey This option is only valid in central evaluations therefore active user accounts are not affected by this setting Display of filtered questions in online surveys 0 Filtered questions are deactivated displayed grayed out 1 Filtered questions are hidden invisible as such no longer visible for the partici pant Alternative forwarding including authentication Participants of online surveys can be directed to a different internet site once their sur vey is submitted The forwarding occurs based upon the forwarding address which is defined in the details of the corresponding questionnaire Each questionnaire can be given an individual forwarding address The following option determines whether the authentication for forwarding requires a value chosen from the properties of a course Use the following field to determi
244. bgroup reports exist for this report Also delete dynamic subgroup reports Keep dynamic subgroup reports OK Cancel Figure 211 Deleting a Survey for which Dynamic Subgroups exist 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 187 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite 4 Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback When the first questionnaires have been returned the capture operations begin Make sure that the personnel who will be capturing the questionnaires are well trained in every aspect of the capture operation The scanning procedure is a critical moment in the processing of the questionnaire If the paper has been put in improperly or if the settings of the scanner have been unintentionally changed then further processing of the survey may be impossible EvaSys is set for maximum automation A number of manual checking and correction steps which are crucial for the processing of complex questionnaires like invoices have been automated for the processing of questionnaires used in teaching evalua tion surveys which are relatively simple to read Before beginning a capture session we recommend testing that the operation is cor rect by scanning test questionnaires If everything is ok then provided that the paper and print image quality remain the same you can proceed to large scale capture of forms 4 1 Scanning the Forms EvaSys Scanstation V3 2 EvaSys v Scanstation Survey Automa
245. by the administrator Instructor Trainer accounts should be activated when internal clients need a tool for carrying out a number of surveys e g an instructor trainer the library or the administration Dean Manager e Decentral system mode The only difference between the user type Dean Manager and the user type Instructor Trainer is that for the Dean Manager a complete user statistic for the rel evant subunit is created e Central evaluation mode In Central Evaluation the dean manager can be labeled as active or passive An active dean manager similarly to an active instructor trainer can create questions form questionnaires and for example access the activated QM views stage 5 A passive dean manager has access only to his personally activated QM views Dean of Studies Program Manager This user type is only available for the server version Central Evaluation The user of this profile can make a selection from a list of evaluated courses and have them sum marized in a special report The dean of studies program manager does not count as a user license Data Entry Assistant This user type is important when handwritten responses by respondents are not to appear in the report document The data entry assistant can access the responses to open questions as sorted according to survey and enter them in plain text After a sur vey has been processed you will have a completely anonymized analysis available In order for th
246. c Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period Delete Subunit JE Delete subunit Subunit to delete Engineering Warning Deleting a subunit causes the deletion of all correlative instructors and surveys You re about to delete 14 surveys and 5 users Cancel Figure 30 Delete subunit 2 2 2 Generating and Managing User Accounts As a user you will login to EvaSys with the respective username and password spec ified by the administrator You can change both your username and your password in your user profile Should a single person wish to login as multiple EvaSys users he can open different browser windows and log himself in at the same time as those users This means you can simultaneously be logged in as Instructor Trainer James Hutton as Report Cre ator Maria Report and as the administrator Admin switching between the open browser windows EvaSys users The administrator as well as subunit administrators can take on additional roles in their user accounts which means from their account they can perform other functions such as report creator data entry assistant or verifier without having to log in as a separate user The additional roles are assigned by the administrator and can only be adjusted by him After logging in the administrator or subunit administrator can switch between user roles via a drop down menu in the upper left corner of the screen 2011 El
247. c Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 5 Quality Management responsible The best attitude would be to use this score as an impulse to continue to improve your teaching How can you continue to improve the atmosphere as judged by students participants friendly manner with students participants cooperativeness and instructor trainer is open Particularly in courses with interactive teaching is this an important aspect bd As an alternative to manual entry of norm values you can also make use of existing evaluations that you have already created with the user type report creator In the section Edit norming types click on the button Edit Norming types Minimum Name eae Maximum value Below Below Above ES Average Average Average Average Far Slightly Slightly Far 1 General norm 7 2 Name New Back Assignment of General norm m Course Type m Subunits Basis for norm value ALL m P Ka Bees is E Own vake base Value base A Belmore WS 10 11 una Economic Economics W310 11 aboratory Tutorial Engineering Hernandez WS 10 11 Professional Development Hernandez Belmore WS 10 11 Scanstation Demo Subunit Overall Report unweighted odul General Data Entry Demo Subunit Overall Report weighted Modul Trainer ji _Systemiogins ki Prof Dev Economics Overall Re Figure 416 Norming Edit Norming Types In the upper part of the screen
248. cannot deliver accurate results unless a serial number has been added during batch print Now start the scanning operation As a rule documents are scanned on both sides of the page duplex which is counted as one page each If you scan 12 pages of paper printed on one side then the message box in duplex operation will show 24 pages scanned Afterwards empty pages will be automatically eliminated so that there will be no interference with the data capture Scanning Process completed P You have scanned 4 pages Would you like to continue scanning pages from this batch release this batch for further processing or discard it Figure 215 Release Cancel Batch 190 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Now select Scan more if you want to capture a further batch from the SAME survey Select Cancel batch when the scanning is completed The scanned forms will be transmitted to the EvaSys server and further processing is automatic In order to scan another survey click in the main window Scan If the scanning operation was not successful then click on Release batch in order to destroy the data scanned from the current scanning operation and to repeat as a new scanning operation 4 2 Evaluation of Scanned Questionnaires The processing of scanned batches is done with VividForms In order for processing to continue the VividForms Reader must be in operation 4 2 1 Recognition of the Checkboxes via Barcode and OMR I
249. ccording to years and choose names such as Surveys 2011 etc y Listing of folders LJ Summary Reports 2010 0 Reports 0 evaluated 05 18 2011 Rename Ti a eh LJ summary Reports 2011 0 Reports 0 evaluated 05 18 2011 Rename P Figure 298 Report Creator Folders structured According to Years The university s or company s structure also makes for a possible organizational crite rion for your folders It suggests names such as Reports Business Studies or some thing similar 252 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting y Listing of folders Seng rae Date of z TER Name Contents creation Rename Delete O Computer Studies 0 Reports 0 evaluated 05 18 2011 Rename E g Business Studies 0 Reports 0 evaluated 05 18 2011 Rename ag Figure 299 Report Creator Folders Structured Example According to Subunits Only in a study folder can you use the possibilities of the report creator for example to summarize reports The report creator can always move existing reports from one folder to another To move a report click on the folder containing the report to be moved Then click on the name of the report to be moved You are automatically switched to the details of your report Here click on Move Compilation Now the report can e either be moved to an existing study folder by selecting the relevant folder in the drop down list in the are
250. ce mode Figure 633 Maintenance Mode Activated Warning Message for the Administrator Users who are already logged into the system receive a warning message too and are requested to finish their work and log off the system as soon as possible so that maintenance operations may be carried out 498 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Configuration Settings rA Warning Message The administrator has activated the maintenance mode Please finish your work as soon as possible and log off the system There will be maintenance operations running within a short time Figure 634 Maintenance Mode Activated Warning Message for Active Users Participants of online surveys who are already logged in may finish their question naire New participants cannot log in They also receive a warning message The system is currently undergoing important maintenance Please be patient You will be able to participate in online surveys shortly Back Figure 635 Maintenance Mode Activated Warning Message for Online Survey Participants With the aid of the user statistics Users logged in Online surveys the administrator can oversee which and how many users are still logged into the system As soon as the last user has logged off maintenance operations can be started On completion the maintenance mode may be deactivated Note By activating the maintenance mode the V
251. cesseseseeeseeesenes 35 B YOUR EVALUATION PROCESS THE PHASE MODEL cceceeceeeeeeensecenneeenseeceneeeeneeseneesones 37 1 THE PHASE MODEL YOUR WORKFLOW IN THE PROCESS OF EVALUATION ccccccessesessecesseeseeesenes 37 2 PHASE 1 PREPARATION OF A SURVEY PERIOD ccccccccccessesessecenseecseeeceusecenseecsessnseeeeatesensesensneeents 39 2 1 PRELIMINARY STEPS ou cccccccccccseccesseceeseceseeccesecesueecenseseusesesseecueeseasesesseseeeeseaeeseseseneeeseneeseeess 39 2 1 1 DEFINE ORGANIZATIONAL DATA cccccccecsccesecesseccsecceueesenseeesseeceseesenteceeeseneetesnessnneseneess 39 2 1 2 COURSE TYPES PERIODS CUSTOM TITLES ou ccccceccccesescesssesensesesseeeeeeseeesensesenseeeneeseneens 40 2 2 SETTING UP THE ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE ccccccecscsesssceessccseeeceaseceasesenseecseseseneeeetesenseeens 43 2 2 1 SETTING UP THE SUBUNITS ccccccesscesseccesceceseecesseeceueecueecensescneeseseeseaueseseseauetenteseenens 45 2 2 2 GENERATING AND MANAGING USER ACCOUNTS cccccsessesessesesseeseseeseseeceeeesensesesneesnneseneess 49 DDS CREATING ee 61 2 3 IMPORT INTERFACES ccccccccsccesseccesececesccuseceusesesesesueecuseceusesensescuseseueesenueseseeseensesnessnneseneess 72 2 3 1 CSV IMPORT WITHIN SUBUNITS ccccccecsccesseseeeceeseecesesecueesensesessesesesenseesensessauesensesenseeens 72 2 3 2 XML IMPORT STRUCTURAL DATA SURVEYS AND SCHEDULED ONLINE SURVEYS u c 77 2 3 3 IMPORT OF COURSE PARTICIPANTS
252. configuration of the batch procedures the option Create com plete sets of questionnaires according to enrollment figures After a click on Download the respective PDF file is produced and displayed Please note that the number of generated questionnaires is determined by the number of occupancies defined in the courses and not by the number of imported participant data for the respective course In the following you will find two examples for personalized questionnaires The text below with placeholders was inserted into the header Example 1 The Personalized Questionnaire for Janet Gabriel Participant Janet Gabriel Course Philipp Belmore Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle NA_1 Mark as shown Dg LI L CJ Please use a ball point pen or a thin felt tip This form will be processed automatically Correction og ON CO Please follow the examples shown on the left hand side to help optimize the reading results Figure 188 Questionnaire for Janet Gabriel example 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 175 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Example 2 The Personalized Questionnaire for Michael Brown EvaSys Evaluation Electric Paper Participant Michael Brown Course Philipp Belmore Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle NA_1 Mark as shown U W U L CJ Please use a ball point pen or a thin felt tip This form will be processed automatically Correc
253. counts allows you to customize the surveys to your requirements The following points are available When creating surveys automatically send emails with cover sheet question naire PSWDs only activated instructor trainer accounts This option sends the cover sheet or personalized form for your new survey immedi ately after creation of the survey to the email addresses given in your profile Make own utilization statistics available for other instructors trainers only acti vated instructor trainer accounts The information contained in the utilization statistics concerning for example the number of scanned questionnaires and number of surveys can be viewed by your col leagues if you permit it Otherwise only the administrator can view the utilization statis tics After the scanning operation automatically generate email with message or report only paper survey You can automatically send emails also with reports after the forms have been scanned The email will be sent to the email address given in your profile If the email does not have a report file then it is a matter of system configuration A message text or in addition a PDF report and or CSV raw data can be sent This setting is made by the administrator End the survey after the scanning operation Surveys can be highlighted as either ended or not yet ended This function allows you to collect data in a number of scanning operations in different periods o
254. create a new question or question group click on the corresponding icon in the category Group or Question The wizard opens with which you can under take the required settings Finally click on Apply The group or question is now dis played in the library Please observe that the new question is always created in the library group which is currently marked Rights Structure The administrator as well as subunit administrators and active users Instructors Deans all have access to the question library administration Each user can maintain their own library and add edit and delete questions and question groups at will How ever depending on the user role access and editing rights differ for the libraries of other users The following table to be read from left to right is intended to clarify the rights structure of the differing user roles Question Libraries User Administrator Subunit Administrator Active User Data Access non public non public Administrator A9 e xox Subunit Admin own subunit x x x bw oeapnm x y o II Subunit Admin own subunit x do s f s f non public other subunit x ooo TT o Active fownsubunt x user eapogl x xv II Legend x View and Copy o Edit Delete and Create new Figure 83 Question Library Access Rights As seen in the overview an administrator can access and edit public and non public questions of other administrators as well a
255. cription Scanned Forms Quality Index Survey ID Scan Date Course Description Enrollment Location Program of Study Period Last name First name Subunit Form Description Form EE ee ail Bb Figure 444 QM Views Order Fields Saving Your Search Settings Now you can save your current search setting Activate the option Save search Enter a name By highlighting Set as default the current search setting will be dis played every time you login Finally click on Save Search Filter Selection Standard Save search w Save current query configuration Set as default Query name Save search Figure 445 QM Views Save your Search Settings 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 341 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Deleting Your Search Settings Using the option Delete search brings you to a selection list in which you can select the search settings to be deleted Then click on Delete You can only delete settings you have defined yourself _ Filter Delete saved queries Individual Search w Figure 446 QM Views Delete your Search Settings 7 Module Evaluation The functionality Module Evaluation was developed to allow multiple separate sur veys to be combined into a single questionnaire Evasys generates a module questionnaire which contains multiple areas belonging to the individual courses in a modul
256. cted level is now displayed in the desired location in the list of levels Continue in the same way with all other desired levels Define Tree Structure 1 Subunit 2 Program of Study Ei AA 3 Location Bo3 4 Instructor amp i 5 Course Course Location Position 2 x Add Figure 115 Edit the Tree Structure The individual levels added can be moved up or down one step at a time retrospec tively via the arrows in the area Action With the help of the red cross icon a level can be deleted from the list The framework levels Subunit and Course can neither be moved nor deleted As soon as the tree structure has been set up in the menu System Settings it can be displayed in the menu Subunits To do this click on the entry Tree Structure in the left context menu The tree structure opens in an overview 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 121 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Guetta Sukk EvaSys VF Questionnaires System Settings System Information 8511 iV C3 zeen Suniey A Stern gt gt d H mm Tree Structure i 1 Actions CH Ares are DN TZ a st ll _ Generate Surveys Delete Surveys EE Brown SA A Subunits 3 Filters Avmunistrator e e Engineering Survey Penod Questionnaire a m C3 Professional Development iy aa ee Additional filters m A Economics een Guest 01 Course Type EE 1 Central wstont tan DI ED
257. ction of a questionnaire e The selection of a survey procedure e The setting up of subunits e The setting up of user accounts 2 1 Preliminary Steps Before creating the organization structure some basic settings should be defined in the system Apart from adapting the organizational data also the evaluation periods course types and forms of addresses if required should be defined 2 1 1 Define Organizational Data The profile data of the organization used by EvaSys for the evaluation can be adapted in the menu System Settings Organization Please enter all required information and click OK to save the settings 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 39 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Auncmation Sul EvaSys iV x Subunits Questionnaires Catena Sura Gul rv Case system Information Search 311 V CX Organization profile Peter Brown Arita rato Name EvaSys Academy Logo File system png e instruments Phone 04131 Bees Fax 73604 w Report Settings Street Address Konrad Zuse Allee 13 E Onine Templates ZIP City 21337 L neburg Email Configuration i EvaSys Settings S Define Tree Structure g Course Types CH Periods B Custom Titles B Process Defauts E Web Service Settings a Language Seis OK ke Cancel Profiles a My Profile Figure 19 Defining Organizational Data 2 1 2 Course Types Periods Custom Titles
258. ctor Trainer s optional questions modify course data Permits or prevents instructors trainers from modifying the course data in the Instruc tor Trainer s Optional Questions Instructor Trainer s optional questions question library Defines whether the instructor trainer can use the question library in the Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions Default deactivated 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 479 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management Instructor Trainer s optional questions direct delivery of questionnaire PSWDs If this function is activated then once the instructor s optional questions is complete the email with the questionnaire and the PSWDs is sent directly to the instructors If this function is deactivated then all emails are sent to the group address given in the email category Instructor Trainer s optional questions email for deactivation contains PSWD list Deactivating the Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions a PDF with the PSWDs can be added Instructor Trainer s optional questions Status change If activated the status of Instructor s Optional Questions in the survey overview changes to completed as soon as the VividForms Editor is opened If deactivated the status changes when the save and exit button in the Instructor s Optional Ques tions is clicked Instructor Trainer s optional questions reasons for not conducting a survey The reasons for when
259. ctric Paper GmbH 431 EvaSys V Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Survey Aincmation Sukk 8 4 Usage of VividForms Plus Forms You can use VividForms Plus forms just like other forms As usual you can create paper as well as online surveys But please note that you cannot use a PDF form when creating online surveys with VividForms Plus forms Instead you can apply an HTML form eens TE SEENEN Evaluation in Higher Education self assessment of competences Evaluation in Higher Education self assessment of competences Dr Gah Bom Free Universitit Garin De E Bon Era reen Been T l exa Ma eam Competence ear end Knowledge Processing Ve may We Deg weeded wen albar riet in a work group far more Tuan tao waaks ry i Gage xyes applicable geng his goure Ss ae apeere ore eiei orrira en olim m m E CH Pete diare the boven Sve quevhorte pdy yo ES Eaed i A wee Dap Mu participation vz D dk Depu Ae G r for mg ba Bip dagadt bruks D E OD D A As arenai of tim cour can Gap An overaew of the Orat H ER Eh RH H El eather age on Pa yrk gap Mke t g e Har me 1 hig Tha course has haipad ma bnprova my analysis o complai teg 33322 J shen ts Poll bach oem conv buw KR d D WE o Soe G scht garen Me G teeatee zg Go geck rou ki A peer ba pre Oo hind v a e el Tri burta Put headed ma vfetGecg my DAD E oF EEN Eoaf estet sf a Sor gnybt beeen ipini in mhia subject area E shai in An il EE Ee This course han helped me pidg
260. custom Tties Name of Online Survey Template EN Process Defaults 7 Web Service Settings Language Sets Figure 141 Online Template Management Predefined templates can be uploaded in the bottom area of the window In the upper area of the window customized templates are created and managed 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 141 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Guetta Suite To create a customized template in the upper area of the window click on Create new customized online survey template If you have already uploaded additional online survey templates other than the standard template EvaSys Online Survey Template you will be asked on which basis template the new customized template should be based Online Template Management Create new customized online survey template O Basic template EvaSys Onlinetemplate Basic template Customized Template Figure 142 Customized Online Survey Template Select the basic template Select the desired template and click on Next If you have not yet uploaded any addi tional templates the following screen appears immediately Online Template Management EvaSys V Even Sunvey Aurai Sue Example Institute Dr Siva Seeland business economics business economics introduction fe onga The instructor is always well prepared Oe GH e086 EI General Settings Colors Navigation Question Types Online template name New O
261. d Send comparison line to the instructors email account s _ Additional recipient CH Send all comparison lines to one email account Single PDF file a 7 Single PDF file as download CH POF files in an archive as ZIP file download Figure 369 Report Creator Profile Line Emails Send a Comparative Profile Line e Dispatch of the profile lines to defined recipients As described above enter the email addresses of the desired recipients In this case however the instructors trainers of the selected courses do not receive your email Request Method Send comparison line to the instructors email account s V Additional recipient Additional recipient j doe example com Figure 370 Report Creator Profile Line Emails Additional recipients e Download of the profile lines If you choose this option you can subsequently open and view the profile line directly or save it e Download of the profile lines zipped Corresponds to the version just described with the difference that here you can download a zipped file 290 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Sule Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Thus you download except for the first option a document containing the profile lines of all selected courses Compare the course Organization and Management with the subunit report Prof Development WS10 11 Here the course Organization and Management instructor Carlos Hernande
262. d Scaled Questions in the PDF Report Apply settings to all other scaled questions You can if required apply the settings for a scaled question to all the scaled ques tions already available on the questionnaire 382 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Geen Auger Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor For this activate the option Apply settings to all other scaled questions and click on the button Define settings A window will then open where you can determine which settings should be applied and define if the selected settings should be applied for the complete questionnaire or just for the current question group J Question Wizard m Settings WI Abstention V Check boxes V Individualize pole labels V Type of Diagram W Mirroring Type of Diagram Histogram X l Use these settings as default for scaled questions Set this scaled question as mirrored question Combine to dual scale with previous question W Apply settings to all other scaled questions Define settings Figure 502 Scaled Question Apply Settings to all other Scaled Questions Apply settings to entire questionnaire current question group Apply Cancel To apply the settings close each of the opened windows with the button Apply 2 6 3 Open Question Select the question type open question and click on Next You can now enter the text of the open qu
263. d Subunit WS505 06 al Computer Sciences 1 GL Economics Available reports WSO0607 _ Engineering Prof Development WS10 11 s07 E WS09 10 Scanstation Demo Subunit 810 _Data Entry Demo Subunit WS10 11_ _Systemlogins be Add Figure 395 Profile Line Comparison Definition of the Report for Comparison the Survey Period and the Subunit Save your input by clicking the Add button As you can see in the following graphic your settings are automatically added 306 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys wv Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Define report for comparison Survey Period Computer Sciences Economics Engineering Available reports Prof Development WS10 11 Scanstation Demo Subunit LO 1 Data Entry Demo Subunit _Systemiogins _Verifier Demo Subunit Prof Development W3 10 11 WS10 11 Professional Development Figure 396 Profile Line Comparison Report for Comparison was created successfully If you now access the PDF report for surveys of the subunit Prof Development cre ated in the period WS10 11 with the questionnaire train_ en as well as the profile line of this survey you will also receive the comparison profile line of the subunit report Prof Development WS10 11 In the following graphic the profile line of the survey results of the course Organiza tion and Management from Prof Carlos Hernandez in the subunit
264. d as identification p The PSWD reads PSWD Voting under SERVER Yours Sincerely Figure 190 Personalized Questionnaire specific Email Text The resulting email text in its personalized form looks like this 176 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Goen gc Sul Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Dear Amy Hardy This email entitles you to vote in an online survey Please follow the link and use the PSWD displayed as identification The PSWD reads NK6CK Voting under http 192 168 245 129 evasys 01 onlin Yours Sincerely The evaluation office Note This survey is non anonymous If you take part in this survey with the above named PSWD your given answers can be associated with you Figure 191 Email for Amy Hardy example E As an alternative you can also use the placeholder PARTICIPANT SALUTATION2 to address the participants With this placeholder the complete address including a salutation Dear Mrs Dear Mr will be generated Processing Survey Participant Data The batch export function is available to create statistical reports on survey partici pants The data fields for the survey participants are added on the right hand margin to the raw data table relating to the respective surveys AO AP fi AQ AR AS AT d Au 1 Au Aw 1 Participant email address Participant Salutation Participant Title Participant First Name Participant Surname Participant Postal Add
265. d av 3 4 Figure 380 Report Creator Create Profile Line Emails Options Anonymize comparative lines Of course these options can also be combined You could for example have a profile line comparison displayed to you in which you mark the minimum and maximum val ues with gray add the total average to the graphic and anonymize the comparative lines Hint on Falling Short Short Number of Minimum Responses If you wish to display the profile lines only for the surveys that achieved a certain level of participation you can freely define this through Check if the number of completed forms exceeds the minimum level defined in parameters If this option is activated the limitation applies which the administrator has set in the menu System Settings Evasys Settings Survey Minimum number of returns for reporting If the number of returns to a survey lies below this value instead of a profile line a corresponding mes sage is displayed 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 297 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Aimomadion Suki Prof Sunny Narrow Data Analysis Profile Subunit Engineering Name of the instructor Prof Sunny Narrow Name of the course Data Analysis Name of the survey There are not enough filled forms for the profile line The minimum level is 15 forms Figure 381 Create Profile Line Emails Options Check if the number of completed forms exceeds the minimum
266. ddresses for courses in the menu Subunits in the area Central evaluation Option Data import Central Evaluation SW Tree Structure fea Generate Surveys Display Surveys Kl Delete Surveys amp instructor s Optional Questions Ki Batch Events Ab Display Courses D Scheduled Tasks e amp Batch Export 3 Participation Tracking Figure 173 Data Import in the Section Central Evaluation Click the option Data import The following window appears Ys Data Import XML Import for subunits instructors courses and modules Load XML File Brows pont Note You can find the CSW import for instructors in the appropriate subunit Administration of survey participants Number of existing survey participants inthe 10 Data sets found system Import survey participant O Import courses with multiple course IDs Ge Export existing survey PS participants as a CSV file Export Delete all survey participant data Delete Figure 174 Data Import via CSV File Use this window to import the data on survey participants either just course ID and email in the case of anonymous surveys or further data like name address and addi tional information for non anonymous surveys 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 167 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Ge duismnation Suite Prepare the survey participant data as CSV file You can use either a semicolon or the
267. ded from EvaSys 4 3 5 Automatic Verification To accelerate the process of verification a number of cases can be verified automati cally in the WebVerifier The prerequisite for automatic verification is that the relevant option in the systems settings is activated System Settings EvaSys Settings Func tions Automatic Verification In all three display modes batch survey and form view a column with the icon Verify automatically is displayed Beneath the column there is a checkbox to select which event is to be verified automatically Cover sheet Verification a P 2 P Selection for automatic verification No valid checkbox found invalid One checkmark and correction s found A E Figure 224 Verification Selection of Options for Automatic Verification The following options are available e No valid checkbox found invalid All cases in which no valid checkbox is found for a question are determined invalid e One checkmark and correction s found All cases in which a checkmark and one or more corrections is found are automatically determined valid with the corre sponding checkmark With one or both of the options selected the verification is initiated by clicking on the icon a the relevant cases are then filtered out of the list of elements to be verified 4 3 6 Check Filling Degrees In the batch view the section Filling Degrees appears in the table Using the PDF icon her
268. defined field If a placeholder is to extend across two columns click on the corresponding place holder and activate the option Placeholder across both columns Please observe that EvaSys will automatically delete the placeholder in the other column and where applicable you will need to insert it in another area of the questionnaire header W Placeholder Wizard Form header settings Number of lines 2 Edit placeholder Default Placeholder SUBUNIT Please choose a placeholder and or individualize the form header Placeholder Ke g w Jj ant amit SUBUNIT Participant T Placeholder Festname v Figure 482 Extend Placeholder across two Columns In order to expand or contract the size of the questionnaire header the number of lines made available can be adjusted in the placeholder wizard You can choose between 1 and a maximum of 10 lines The more lines included in the form header equates to more room being available for the logo 372 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor By Placeholder Wizard Form header settings Number of lines Edit placeholder Default Placeholder ORGANIZ Please choose a placeholder andip d altze the form header Placeholder BH RO TERU ORGANIZATION Participant een Placeholder Firstname w Placeholder across both of this line will
269. dicators for a questionnaire 241 Cronbachs Alpha 20000 ee aee 242 Free a a 87 244 The principle of the indicator 236 IMCIGAIOIS 4 4 8564 006 5 lt Hata ob e604 deb Bees 214 Individuality Designing an individually configured letter for sending 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite DEER 4 en MEN eae E Bade es 232 Individually designed reports 230 Information on the questionnaire 19 Instant feedback 2 00 c eee eee 205 Instructor Active instructor 180 Active instructor account 4 178 Creating active instructor 178 Log in as active instructor 180 Working with the active instructor s data 186 Instructor account 22 23 492 Use of templates in instructor accounts 421 Instructor s optional question 155 K Keyboard control 201 L Language Multiple languages 92 Language picture anaoa 92 Layout settings 406 Legal references in non anonymous surveys 166 Letter Designing an individually configured letter for sending FEDOS ae basa a at Sn ie Bee a Geode ees 232 Template for letterin PDF reports 461 Library Adding a group to the library 415 Adding a question from the library 409 Adding a question to the library 413 Deleting a group from the library 415
270. dis z Strongly agree av 2 8 agree Y av 4 6 The course perfectly prepares me for my professional life Strongly dis Strongly agree E SCH agree snes Please grade the course altogether failure very good me vi a N S a Figure 379 Report Creator Profile Line Emails Options Comparative line deactivated with the Overall Average EEN 296 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Anonymizing Comparative Line With the comparison of several events reports to each other it is possible for data pro tection reasons to anonymize the names of all comparative lines So the instructor trainer to whose course it relates only sees the name of his course the rest is anony mized Comparative line Course1 Comparative line Report 1 Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle Subunit Professional Development T Name of the instructor Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Name of the course Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle Name ofthe survey Comparative line Course 1 The lead time of ihe course ts adequate Strongly dis Strongly agree av 3 2 agree av a3 6 The course focuses on the current professional discussion Strongly dis Strongly agree av 3 agree av 4 6 The course perfectly prepares me for my professional life Strongly dis Strongly agree SS agree av 3 Please grade the course altogether failure very goo
271. dministrator is sending the instructor trainer the PSWDs for an online survey CE Content Personalized text with attached PSWD document for an online survey as PDF file The document contains all PSWDs and can therefore be very large Information about a New User Account This message can be used to inform new users directly about their new user account Activate the checkbox Inform user about profile creation via email Report on the Survey to the Instructor Trainer Trigger EvasSys has just processed a scanned survey and sends a message decentral CE or the administrator sends the instructor trainer a report CE Content Personalized text processed survey Normally the PDF report is sent with the text In addition or as an alternative the raw data can be sent as an Excel readable CSV file see System Settings EvaSys Settings Email Functions amp Accounts PSWD to Online Survey Respondents This text is an exception It is an email to participants in an online survey sending the PSWDs and the server address for voting The placeholders TAC and SERVER must NOT be removed The other placeholders cannot be used for this email Reminder to Online Survey Participants The PSWDs and server addresses for response returns are entered here similar to the initial delivery of PSWDs Information Concerning Validation for the Instructor Trainer Trigger A survey has been validated i e the manual data entry of the hand
272. dule name EvaSys Basic Training Login name New password Confirm new password LDAP registration Deactivated w Figure 452 Create a Module Step 2 After filling out the fields click on the button Save The module account is now cre ated in the list of users users in subunit Computer Sciences asic 1a oso 05 23 2011 AO O amp Donna Harwo 0 Boro 05 11 2001 AOR Select all 7 Move selected to Economics Figure 453 Module in the User List 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 347 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite 7 6 Creating module courses After the module account has been created courses can be added to the module To access the course list click on the number in angular brackets in the column CO Course By clicking the button Create new course you can add a new course to your module Apart from entering the name of the course at least three further entries have to be made which are essential for a successful conduction of a module survey e Enter an ID for the course in the field Course ID This ID defines in which order the questions for the single courses will be displayed on the module question naire The course with the lowest ID for example 01 will be evaluated first then the other courses will follow in ascending order 02 03 etc Select the course type which is linked to the questionnair
273. e e How dol start to work with EvaSys and how can I save my data while working These questions are dealt with in the first chapter of the EvaSys User Guide 1 Introduction The course evaluation system EvaSys was developed to offer universities and major educational institutions an effective tool for comprehensively implementing and pro cessing surveys for quality assurance purposes EvaSys is suitable for both paper and online surveys This manual introduces the system s possibilities and abilities with a strong emphasis on the administrator s access It addresses users without any EvaSys experience as well as experienced users who wish to reference something specific Hence it pro vides an introduction into the utilization of the system as well as offering answers to questions related to particular topics Apart from a few exceptions neither experience in programming nor technical knowledge is necessary For a comprehensive introduction it s best to work through the manual chapter by chapter Should you wish to look up certain steps the index will lead you to the topic in question When working with the manual s PDF version the index will also appear as bookmarks on the left hand side of the screen enabling you to navigate to the rele vant chapter In addition you will find an index at the back of the manual where you can look up important terminology and topics The manual s structure is based on the operating steps of th
274. e 05 18 2011 at 16 33 46 46 Report data GG Results in HTML format Results in PDF format EvaSys PDF report English e Show Email a Raw data in SPHINX format amp Raw data in SPSS format Q i Raw data in CSV format 2 Profile Line Ki Show Automatic Manual _ Kiiat diagram 9 show a Merge evaluations Evaluate subgroup Back Figure 360 Report Creator Detailed View of a Report Here you receive information on the name the folder Study and the type of the report created and just like in the overview you can call up the questionnaire tem plate The status the creation date and the number of returns are also indicated here 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 285 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite In the left part of the window in the area Actions you can rename the report if for example you realize that you have produced a report bearing the same name as an existent one and therefore the date was added automatically at the end Further more you have the possibility of deleting the report In the right part of the window under Survey data you can download the evaluation in HTML and PDF format If any user defined PDF report definitions are associated with this questionnaire and or if the questionnaire was translated you can download the user defined report or reports in other languages
275. e After processing the module survey EvaSys gener ates a report for the module but also separate results for each module element This allows separate reporting based on each part of the module survey Figure 447 Build up a Module Questionnaire 7 1 Setting up a survey with Module Evaluation To set up a survey with module evaluation several steps have to be taken e By default the possibility to conduct module surveys is already activated in the system if the standard settings have been changed activate the general possibil ity to conduct module surveys in the EvaSys Settings Menu System Settings Evasys Settings Central Evaluation Module e Create questionnaires you want to use to evaluate your single module courses 342 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Module Evaluation e Link the module questionnaires to course types Menu System Settings Course Types in case of module surveys the course type has the function to assign questionnaires to courses e Create users user type Module e Create courses for the modules Select the course type the module questionnaire is linked to Enter acourse ID which defines the order of the courses to be surveyed on the overall questionnaire Define a further report recipient who equals the instructor trainer of the course and will receive the report e Generate survey switch to module evaluation e After conducting the surve
276. e For this combination the mean values of the single surveys are averaged wem Figure 354 Report Creator Create Unweighted Report The report that is then created shows a symbol with paper and a warning trian gle HTML Data rs Rar CSV Overall Report weighted SPN eE 05 19 2011 1241 choose pdt repot SPHINX HTML ae Data T F a Joveran Report unweighted available trainen 05 19 2011 E 019 28 choose pdt repot Figure 355 Report Creator Unweighted Report Hint Here the date was added automatically to the name of the report because within this report creator access a report with exactly the same name already exists This is determined not by the folder level but rather by the report creator as a whole e Name The name of the report corresponds to the name which you assigned dur ing creation e Status The status here always says Data available since in the report creator you can only summarize surveys for which data already exist and therefore only produce surveys meaning report with the status Data available e Form In the column Form you can call up the questionnaire sample and thus gain information as to which questionnaire this compilation is based on e Created Here you can see when this report was produced e Processed This column informs you of the number of returns filled in question naires in this case 131 e Del Red cross By clicking on the t
277. e a PDF file can be opened which contains the scanned pages with all of the degrees of shading measured for the check boxes and open questions If the ICR rec 198 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback ognition handwriting recognition is in use the characters read can also be viewed in this file Filling degrees Figure 225 Verification Check Filling Degrees Note The PDF can only be opened when the display of the entire questionnaire page is allowed for verification Menu System Settings EvaSys Settings Functions Data entry assistant Verifier View entire original questionnaire page The presentation provides a good overview of the values measured and allows for consideration of adjustments to the OMR threshold As in this PDF file only data above the minimum degree of shading standard 15 is shown the minimal degree of shading can be experimentally lowered to 1 so as to get a clearer insight into the degree of shading of empty unchecked check boxes For expedient OMR thresholds it is important to keep a sufficient gap between the degree of shading of empty check boxes as well as that of real only lightly checked check boxes Please make sure that after such an experimental scan test the OMR threshold settings where applica ble are returned to their original values Fully disagree Fully disagree Fully disagree Fully disagree
278. e to complete the import procedure 2 3 2 XML Import Structural Data Surveys and Scheduled Online Surveys Information about the XSDs of the XML import XML schema definition and further details can be found in the additional manual about the XML import menu System Information Manuals XML Import Manual 2 3 3 Import of Course Participants Email Addresses In online surveys access codes PSWD are usually sent directly to the respondents by email The import interface menu Subunits Data Import prevents the user from having to copy a new list of email addresses into the entry field for every survey before the PSWDs can be sent The participants addresses for all courses are imported into EvasSys by the import interface before the survey is compiled Once the PSWDs have been imported the email addresses are available and no lon ger have to be entered manually This applies to both manual dispatching and email by Scheduled Tasks A CSV file with two columns is created for the import of addresses with the specifica tion of the course id in the first column and the email address of the participant in the second column lf someone participates in several courses then the email address also has to appear multiple times in the CSV file Example for 2 courses MAO5Wiw2 person01 example com MAO5Wiw2 person02 example com MAO5Wiw2 person0D3 example com MAO5Con person01 example com MAO5Con person03 examp
279. e 1 This setting determines the background color of the first line of each table Table line 2 This setting determines the background color of the second line of each table Table head This setting determines the background color of the table heads Active Area This setting determines the background color of the selected menu item Processed surveys This setting determines the background color of the table lines for processed surveys New surveys This setting determines the background color of the table lines for newly created sur veys Deleted surveys This setting determines the background color of the table lines for deleted surveys 2 5 10 Section Instructor Trainer Accounts Footnote certificate of participation Footnote of the certificate of participation document Standard text This is the footnote of the certificate for evaluation Footer certificate of results Footer of the certificate of results document Standard text The majority of statements and items in the questionnaire on teaching evaluation are Summarized as indicators Display question numbers Question numbers are displayed when processing the optional additional questions Activate link to PDF preview When activated users can click on a questionnaire name in the list of surveys in order to see a sample of the questionnaire 492 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Configuration Settings 2 5 1
280. e Survey sl Edit answers to open questions Pa Assign survey to substitute instructor D Edit Show notes Figure 99 Survey Details Survey Status Data available If your questionnaire is multilingual then you have the option in this view to display the form in the various languages Survey data tat Results in HTML format Results in PDF format EvaSys PDF report e E ng lish English Figure 100 Select Report Language After scanning the questionnaires you can display the PDF report in the language of the questionnaire 112 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Goen gc Suk Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys In the PDF report you will see the text of the letter or the legend in the linked system language All of the questionnaire texts are produced in the selected language Number of Participants to Calculate the Response Rate By default the number of participants deposited in the properties of a course is used as the number of participants of the survey This is stated in the details of a survey It serves as the basis for calculating the response percentage of a survey if the mode of calculation in the central system settings is set on the number of course participants System Settings EvaSys Settings Survey Method of calculating the response rate Should a different number of participants be noted in a new survey period for a course surveyed several times i e by importing new participant d
281. e a subgroup In this window you can click on the link Choose several criteria for subgroup reports This allows you to select multiple criteria for your subgroup report f Evaluate the report according to the following criterion To the selection of several criteria for subgroup reports A B 1 Questions about you Figure 341 Report Creator Selection of Several Criteria for Subgroup Reports 276 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting The following window opens Selection of several criteria for subgroup reports 1 Questions about you Which gender do you belong to What is your age What is your age How many terms have you been studying so far hain subject Do you already have a university degree or a degree of another institute in tertiary education stions about the instructor The instructor is always well prepared The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc without any problems Default criteria combination Add new criteria combinatio The oiterion will be added to the chosen citeria combination Add criterion Subgroup 1 from Report of Tram en Note Data compilation may take a moment V Include answers to open questions Please click the button only once Figure 342 Report Creator Selection of Several Criteria Questions fo
282. e administrator We talk of a passive instructor trainer account when only the administrator can access the instructors trainers for example in order to create surveys centrally for the instructor trainer s course If the instructor trainer himself is additionally authorized to log on to create question naires or surveys we talk of an active instructor trainer account also see chapter A 2 3 2 Active Instructors Trainers Accounts Questionnaire In EvaSys the term questionnaire may have two meanings e Firstly in EvaSys it refers to the file which serves as a template for a questionnaire and determines the layout of a questionnaire that is used for numerous surveys In this case it is a PDF file that contains the questionnaire and determines which options for questions and responses appear in what design on the questionnaire This template can be used for creating both paper and online surveys however in the case of online surveys with VividForms questionnaires the design is not defined through the questionnaire Therefore the footer of a VividForms questionnaire contains for example the word SAMPLE instead of a barcode This is what is usually referred to when a questionnaire is mentioned in the man ual This also becomes clear in the respective context e Secondly when creating a survey you of course receive a particular questionnaire which you pass on to the respondents As soon as you create a pa
283. e area VividForms Recognition Set the Refresh button By doing so all existing questionnaires in the recognition set of the VividForms reader will be refreshed e Activated with restrictions see details Figure 69 Refreshing the Recognition Set of the VividForms Reader in the List of Questionaires 84 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period Note Should you have any further questions regarding refreshing the recognition set of the VividForms Reader please contact our support department as this function is above all a feature for technicians in case of moving EvaSys The option Copy and open the questionnaire in the VividForms Designer offers you the opportunity to reorganize your existing VividForms Editor questionnaires in the designer In order to edit your questionnaires in VividForms Designer you require a corresponding license For further information please do not hesitate to contact us You can open a cover sheet questionnaire with the option PDF paper survey As this already has a barcode it can be printed out and used in a corresponding cover sheet survey To open the questionnaire click the option Show The preview of the questionnaire in an online survey can be opened with the option Preview online survey Below the information about the PDF files and the recognition set you can see a drop down list with seve
284. e con sequences of a refusal as the case may be e and of the possible recipients of the data The extent of the duty to inform as well as the admissibility of the data process itself depends significantly on the legal requirements under which your particular case is positioned This assessment depends on a number of factors which cannot be listed here You can normally get support from your data protection officer and or the data protection committee Evasys provides reference texts for anonymous and non anonymous surveys You can find these reference texts under System Settings Text Templates E MAIL Foot note for anonymous online surveys or Footnote for non anonymous online surveys These text templates are used automatically when sending the PSWDs to inter viewee s Conducting Non anonymous Surveys Non anonymous surveys can only be realized by the Subunit administrator Observe the following steps so that survey participant data can be used in EvaSys e Firstly import the participant data e Ensure that the questionnaire used contains placeholders for the participant data Otherwise the questionnaires used later cannot be assigned to participants in Eva Sys e Create a survey for the relevant course 166 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Goen Aunomation Sul Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Importing Participant Data You can import the participant data similarly as how you would import the email a
285. e data of the entire system In this case please note that he can then also view this data If you decide on this option you need a system wide report creator e Or he should only view data subunit wide That also means however that he cannot produce subunit comprehensive summary reports or comparisons respectively In this case you should define subunit wide report creators e f your report creator may access several subunits please choose the option own subunit in the area Data access Subsequently mark all necessary subunits in the area Assign additional subunits Thus your report creator accesses several subunits Multiple selections of subunits can be made by pressing and holding down the Ctrl key As an Administrator you set this value when creating the relevant user account As soon as you create a report creator a particular setting in the user rights step three of three allows you to define the report creator as system wide system level subunit groups own subunit and selection of further subunits or only subunit wide own sub unit 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 247 EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model It is crucial to consider what exactly the report creator should be able and allowed to do in order to subsequently know where and how the report creator be created or whether several are required When an administrator or subunit administrator direc
286. e evaluation Following the first three chapters that relate to the basics of the system the initial operation and security specific operations are introduced as and when you need them during the evaluation The manual follows a so called phase model that illustrates the workflow which you may have already come across during EvaSys training It will be dealt with in depth in this manual A major part of the evaluation is the creation of questionnaires EvaSys offers you a tool for creating questionnaires the VividForms Editor and the VividForms Designer optional In order to enable fast access to the explanations relating to these two edi 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 11 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Preparation and General Notes tors you will find one chapter on VividForms after the illustration of the manual s work flow Following that you will find notes on the system administration and consolidated set tings some of which are mentioned in related chapters in the manual Explanations are visualized through illustrations In more complex windows red eclipses rectangles usually show which elements the comments in the text relate to Menu names are set in quotation marks menu name Buttons are set in angular brackets button Three symbols alert you to important elements in the manual Notes and important information can be recognized by a salmon colored back ground nis Can De recoaniZecd by a ye
287. e following graphic shows you the preview in the VividForms Editor which is identi cal for all levels of inclination LO S a on A 5 R 2 Q lt a e990 90 e LD A wn S SS SA og o oe oe o o o m Oh ID OD di it complements the learning matter run oo E itis well structured CT DUU Figure 532 Inclined Pole Labels in the Preview of the VividForms Editor Independent of the Degree of Inclination In the following graphics you can see examples of possible inclinations in the PDF preview Ge e a Ge It complements the learning matter boo oo It is well structured GC O EL Ek L Figure 533 Inclined Pole Labels 45 in the PDF Preview It complements the learning matter It is well structured Figure 534 Inclined Pole Labels 65 in the PDF Preview H Ki Ki U T T ER D Wu KA lt Q 2 O gt c SG a D SS 5 2 SEKR Sa om oe amp 5 o T E DO o It complements the learning matter UI UU UU It is well structured GL ZE EE E d dl Figure 535 Inclined Pole Labels 90 in the PDF Preview 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 399 EvaSys iw Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Survey Autsmation Suita 2 9 Adding Graphical Elements 2 9 1 Line Space Using the line space gives extra room between single objects Open the menu Add and select Eine Space An empty line will be added below the active object What is your age 148 29 30 39 040 49 050 59 O60 69 Colder than
288. e following ways to configure e the menu Report Settings in the main menu System Settings e the questionnaire specific settings in the edit mode of the VividForms question naire such as diagram type of scaled questions indicators cross tabulations e the questionnaire specific settings in the questionnaire s detailed view such as norms quality guidelines 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 205 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model The configuration s respective elements and effects are described in the following For further information please read the relevant chapters in this manual 4 5 1 Components of the PDF Report So as to give you an overview of the elements that you can integrate into this report we will describe them here in the order in which they can appear in the report The report can contain the following components e the letter to the instructor trainer e bar diagrams on the indicators of the questionnaire these if desired with an over all indicator and or Cronbach s Alpha e alegend for the analysis of scaled questions e the individual analysis of the questions appearing on the questionnaire with or without open questions depending on the settings e maxi histograms on scaled questions e cross tabulations e a profile line that also can be displayed as a normed profile line provided that a norm has been defined e apresentation templa
289. e form of a tree structure consisting of three levels e User which means the Owner of the question groups questions Administrator Subunit Administrator or Active User e Question Groups e Questions By clicking on a user a question group or on the open close symbol in front of the entry the entry is opened and the elements contained therein are displayed By click ing on a question group or question the corresponding properties and available actions are displayed in the right hand window In the upper area it is defined whether the question group or question is a public or non public one Public questions and question groups are available to all users subunit administrators active instructors non public only to the relevant owner of the question group By activating or deactivat ing this option the public status can be changed at any time For each question group and question four actions can be undertaken e Edit enables the retrospective editing of a question group 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 95 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Ginvey Auncmation Sui e Delete deletes the question group from the library e Copy copies a question group e New Group Question creates a new group or question in the library Actions Public Group P i 2 Question si DCS Edit PP Cc Delete New question group GG O lt p Figure 81 Question Library Actions To edit a question use
290. e he quality of AC Achtamg Arca el em fed erh Sur week gp aoc H EE a a DI i Ui sada deh oe D D m Personal Competente Systematic Compeieisce e haea Org erg interested in tw pobjeci maher on the courte has progressed CIGL SW RI a Tht Gate bat haiteg reve te Agang Iren ien meri w icende al ar a a e O Th ocurre dE Me IO CONPRA m tudes EI EI E D E o This courte ban hipsi ma Grande my work EE GOO E J Wa beer fan carry out thet sgr Wks on thon outa LI et SIE E Tit course hat helped ma paea the aay work a ai an Ss g have enjoyed the topai studied in Sen gawr D DD D D D Thi courte hak b ie me improve my coerce piii EI DI EH DH D The course bot ropted me to study the subject baiber in my own erg CIS at ei Ia Preseotatsn Competence gave an oral presentation as part of Shim course CH G Teacher s organisation Ip Prof Or Simeria Pease awir the Eeit Kerg ageet Geh d you gee a pien ee He ae a ct Tha Courte Pork baip d ma Ee r PTO iila DE e Thee echter often gets sedetracked trom Dap lecture kee bee EI E o Afar presenting in this course fee can engage better with the audience mi Oe el a The lectures are iar ae alee Aer peerararg inthis course can snuciure siy uha beret DO OD D Tht dengn of the course helps me Lesi ergi And the mihi matbar EI EP E Lgmmmumtc ston Cpns z e 1re xhe v cke in class LJ ie ane sabelectony inbenesing nol ia munch or bbe Bite Plente wriat the eg Sowing Gr n ory d yeu t in clea
291. e mean is equal to 3 or smaller As soon as the question The course perfectly prepares me for my professional life reaches a mean value of only 3 the full 25 are deducted If other questions that belong to the guideline get a total weight of 75 it is possible to reach a maximum deduction of 100 This would mean that the deduction from the overall quality index set for this guideline would come to full effect The extent of this deduction is determined when the quality guideline is created Example Calculation when Higher Values Are Better In the following example a scaled question with a 5 point scale The instructor han des the technical equipment video projector etc without any problems was assigned a lower threshold value of 3 2 and an upper threshold of 4 2 It was also determined that higher values are better Questions of this quality guideline Based on means The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc without any problems Delete 20 gt 3 2 4 2 Figure 420 Definition of a Quality Guideline When the question The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc without any problems reaches a mean of 4 8 in a survey a green traffic light symbol indicates that the target value gt 4 2 has been reached 322 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys YV Survey Automation Suite Phase 5 Quality Management DS DS O 444 33 3 222 The instructor hand
292. e numbering Figure 547 Menu Layout Settings Via the menu item Layout Settings in the menu Form Properties you can choose between two layout variations the Traditional Layout and the Optimized Layout New questionnaires are generally produced with an optimized layout which has an improved alignment of the checkboxes Existing forms that were created with earlier 406 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor versions of EvaSys retain the traditional layout If these are copied for further pro cessing the optimized layout can be assigned to them later f Questionnaire layout settings Questionnaire layout settings Layout selection a Traditional layout Optimized layout Sp Sg Sa a CW WWW Bae eg D ms EB DR Dg eg KAUL KLEER EK DASH it Speppeppnag A Speoggo egngae G D g pppe MO a MOO Don ORM CELL ET GL REG E EC EE TELLI 50000 Layout settings single choice single Choice Position of the answer options next to the question text e Apply Cancel Figure 548 Adjusting Layout Settings The default setting for the position of the response options of single choice questions is anchored in the layout settings at the bottom The settings selected here next to the question text beneath the question text apply to all single choice questions that are newly inserted In the properties of each questi
293. e read by means of the Scanstation and the image files generated are transmitted to EvaSys for further processing The Scanstation can be utilized directly via the EvaSys computer Alternatively one or more Scanstations may be linked through de centralized computers Document reading can be carried out through VividForms VividForms VividForms Reader This is a solution that was developed specifically for EvaSys With VividForms ques tionnaires can be created directly via the web interface and later automatically pro cessed via the scanstation It also contains a web based visual correction program WebVerifier After you have created your questionnaires by means of VividForms they are pro cessed by the VividForms Reader The VividForms Reader receives the images transmitted by the scanstation and reads the questionnaires raw data This means Once you create a survey with a particular questionnaire in EvaSys a file accurately describing this form is generated and stored in a folder on the server form description file in XML format The VividForms Reader has access to this folder and therefore is familiar with those forms images that may be produced When receiving image files of scanned ques tionnaire batches the VividForms Reader verifies the form in question If the form is a familiar one the VividForms Reader is informed by the form description file about the position of the check mark boxes So it now can check to wh
294. e survey Deactivate the setting Hide overall indicator in the config uration of the PDF report In addition to the other indicators the overall indicator is displayed at the beginning of the report Overall indicators m52 Global Index ET 2 Questions about the instructor sei 3 Questions about the course av 5 2 ev S 4 Questions about the teaching material ed 5 Questions about the studying conditions ava dev 0 5 Figure 277 Indicators Display in the PDF Report With Overall Indicator e The options Left pole for indicators and Right pole for indicators define the texts that label the scales left and right margins in the report and in the presentation template Figure 278 Indicators Left Right Pole 240 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys YV Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting 5 1 3 Creating the Indicators for a Questionnaire Since the indicators form the averages of particular question groups they are also activated for particular question groups in the relevant questionnaire To do this navigate as usual to your questionnaire and open the editing screen in the main menu System Settings select Questionnaires in the left submenu select in the drop down menu below Action the option Edit Open the editing window of a question group by double clicking on the question group or by clicking on the question group and selecti
295. e talking about elements that do not directly originate from the ques tionnaire because you can directly translate all elements of a questionnaire To do this select the option Languages in the respective questionnaire s details The internationalization of online surveys is achieved by language sets Because for online surveys particularly those with an international approach many more lan guages need to be translated than is possible with linked system languages the lan guage sets enable internationalization beyond integrated system languages The expedient use of language sets requires two steps e Step 1 General definition of a language set Via the language sets you can define text elements for online surveys and thus include them in your EvaSys system e Step 2 Linking a language set with a questionnaire If you wish to use a particular questionnaire for online surveys and additional lan guages are relevant specify the relevant language sets for this particular question naire Of course you can link a language set with any number of questionnaires Step 1 General Definition of a Language Set You will find the language sets in the submenu of the main menu System Settings on the left hand side After clicking on the menu point Language sets a list appears with the language sets that are already in place If you haven t yet added any language sets they will correspond with the system languages available
296. e will be sorted in the displayed original order 410 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Use of the Question Library with VividForms D Question Library Assistant Question Selection Question Group Questions Course Evaluation af This course was worth the effort involved learned a lot in this course jearned more in this course than in others This course was extremely valuable to my education After taking this course am interested in taking others in this field This was an excellent course This was one of the best courses have ever taken would recommend this course to my friends This course has had a profound impact on me This course has given me a new direction in life Back Figure 553 Question Library Selecting Questions By clicking on the magnifying glass symbol you can see a scaled down preview of the selected questions Question Library Assistant Selected Question Preview learned a lot in this course Se Daage ooooo Strongly Agree learned more in this course than in Strongly Disagree ooooo ee others After taking this course am Zeep Disagree onoono Strongly Agree interested in taking others in this field would recommend this course to my 9 ng ooo0o00 Strongly Agres friends Figure 554 Question Library Preview of the Selected Questions Please note that elements that are taken from the library are mark
297. e you want to use for sur veying the course e With module courses the field Further report recipients serves to define the instructor trainer who has held the course The person you add in this field will receive the report for this single course 348 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Module Evaluation Edit course of John Doe Course name Donna Harwood Introduction into EvaSys Program of study Losst oz d1 Evaluation period continuous Course Type Module Trainer ep Location Enrollment D Participants data 9 Anonymous survey participants f Administrate participants Non anonymous survey participants panel SE Language bi Location x Report recipient instructor WI existing Computer Sciences Donna Harwood Computer Sciences Donna Harwood gi j a Remove Fiesse see the setting Module evaluation Delivery of module sections with no inghuctor in the settings OK Canca Figure 454 Module Evaluation Entering Course Data In the following example you can see the course list of a sample module EvaSys Basics In this case a dummy course called General questions for means of sur veying general aspects concerning the whole module has been created as well as three regular courses The general course is surveyed with a general questionnaire course type Module general the s
298. eady have defined a comparative report for this subunit in WS10 11 If you combine the settings defined above thereby defining both the two previous periods as well as the comparative report Prof Development WS10 11 for the com parison lines your PDF reports will additionally contain these three comparison lines In the following graphic you can see the profile lines for the survey results of the course Data Analysis in SS07 in the subunit Engineering together with the four comparison profile lines defined Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Management Strategies Subunit Professional Development T Name of the instructor Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Name of the course Management Strategies Name of the survey S Comparative line Prof Development WS10 11 7 Comparative line 510 Management Strategies l n e T Comparative line WS09 10 Management Strategies I 1 a n 13 ve What is the grade of your last school graduation 1 Grades 1 0 5 ei 25 n 45 to 5 0 w av 28 ne i i Vi av 2 5 nes AN n 13 Wi AV SA The instructor is always well prepared As n 4 av 4 1 AN aw 3 ne2d n 13 Kee av 3 5 The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way i av 30 nee yt n nez0 NK av ad The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc f a pdf without any problems j av 3 7 nei HIER nao PER fe AE EVA Please grade the instructor for this co
299. eae ge an ew ae oe de iene 98 Rig tS ctr cca eane e whee hood oon oe wees a 97 Use of the question library with VividForms 409 Questionnaire 25 19 Adding pictures to a questionnaire 403 Administration of questionnaires 19 Color Scheme 407 CODY ake eo yee ee oe eee ee eee ee ee 81 Creating questionnaires for module evaluation 343 Creating the indicators for a questionnaire 241 Creation of questionnaires 19 Delete siete ak tuck dot deo Net deeg Gee a Bate 82 Detailed view 80 102 Edit header 370 Editing on questionnaires 423 Editing questionnaires 5 181 Editor control 360 Essential information on the questionnaire 19 Evaluation of scanned questionnaiure 191 Form information 358 Generating questionnaires 181 Import Export of VividForms questionnaires 425 Importing VividForms Plus questionnaires 428 Languages 0 0 cece eee ee eee 87 Layout settings nanona aaa 406 Linking of questionnaires to course types 343 LOJO NEE 370 Management of questionnaires 80 102 Norm values for questionnaires 316 Placeholders 370 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Preview functions 2 0000 367 Questionnaire header 02 370 Viewing options Online View 365 Papier view cca eee eee ee 363 V
300. ectric Paper GmbH Iw Evasys Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Survey Details N D Survey Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle amp Instructor Philipp Belmore J Course Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle Survey Period 11 A Type Paper survey hard copy 3 Participants Non anonymous participants Questionnaire Quest_01 Status In progress ready for data Survey Created on 05 12 2011 at 09 42 15 Show cover sheet form in browser 3 Survey ID 34492 English X Finish Data Collection Close Survey a Delete Survey f Assign survey to substitute instructor Edit Show notes Sep Figure 97 Survey Details Status In Progress 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 109 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model The following table gives you an overview on the actions concerning surveys Action Description Survey Survey Type Status Delete survey Deletes the survey Restore survey Deletes the response data of a survey The All Data survey remains in the status ready available Unlock data collection Opens or closes a survey If closed no data Al All Finish data collection can be submitted to the survey Show PSWDes in Generates and displays a PDF document Online All browser containing the PSWDs of a survey Hybrid Receive PSWDs by Sends an email with the PDF document Online All email containing the PSWDs to the owner of the Hybrid s
301. ectric Paper GmbH 49 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Subunits Questionnaires System Settings x List of all Subunits Za Subunit iV Computer Sciences Iw Engineering V Professional Development vV Professional De v _Systemlogins Figure 31 Switching between User Roles Report Creator Verifier Data Entry Assistant The EvaSys User Types Administrator The administrator manages the complete system and sets up user accounts ques tionnaires as well as the configuration In the central evaluation procedure the admin istrator manages all surveys as well as their reports Subunit Administrator The subunit administrator has a user account that allow the administration of all of the activities in the subunit Within a subunit the subunit administrator can set up user accounts create question naires start surveys and send reports One or more subunit administrators can be created per subunit Where necessary additional subunits can be assigned to their administration which means they can administer subunits outside of the subunit in which they were created With this the following is to be observed Subunit administrators created within a subunit are con sidered as a group Therefore they can only administer the same subunits If for example a subunit is detracted from a subunit administrator it is automatically detracted from all other subuni
302. ed so that machines cannot read them They are employed to detect whether the counterpart is a human being or a machine If CAPTCHAs are activated after mul tiple failed login attempts the user is prompted to enter a CAPTCHA E Error Message _ 3 failed logins were registered from the network address 192 168 245 1 The access was _ blocked for this network address You can unblock the blocking by typing in the characters you can see in the picture or by waiting 15 minutes If you did not try to log in the system before you may share the network address with other users Version 5 0 Recognized character string Figure 15 CAPTCHA Function after several failed Logins 28 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Start up and Security If the CAPTCHA is entered correctly the user may repeat the login procedure You can activate CAPTCHAs under System Settings EvaSys Settings System Secu rity In addition you can define the number of failed login attempts to trigger a CAPT CHA The number of failed login attempts always relates to a time frame fixed by you again under System Settings EvaSys Settings System Security Should a user fail to login correctly within the given time he will be requested to enter a CAPTCHA At the same time the login screen will be blocked for the IP of the potential assailant for the defined time in minutes This block can be prematurely lifted by entering the C
303. ed for the complete contents of the questionnaire In the column recommendation text three text building blocks can be placed which should be displayed depending on whether the results are above average average or below average At the left using checkboxes you determine whether in addition to the dimensions there should also be text building blocks for individual items Example Atmosphere Dimension Above average score Congratulation Your course is considered by your students participants to have an above average positive atmosphere friendly manner with students participants coop erative instructor trainer is open Particularly in courses with interactive teaching is this an important aspect Average score Average score results in teaching are not bad since most courses have been give evaluated as good on a raw value scale between 1 and 7 at 5 So this is at least a satisfactory score How could you continue to improve the atmosphere as judged by students participants friendly manner with students participants cooperative and instructor trainer is open Particularly in courses with interactive teaching is this an important aspect Below average score Comparative norms always place 49 99 of the values under the average and 49 99 above But for norm values below 85 you should definitely take action It is important not to be discouraged or to make those circumstances you can t change 318 2011 Electri
304. ed in a directory on the server under C Apache htdocs evasys doc drive C may need to be replaced with your server name Also here other manuals such as the Installation Manual and the Vivid Forms Reader Manual can be found The Scanstation Guide is available in the dia log of the Scanstation the VividForms Reader Manual can be found in the dialog of the VividForms Reader In each active users account the Manual for Active Users is available for guidelines as well as the manual Creating Questionnaires with the VividForms Editor Note All PDF manuals are provided with linked directories so that you can navigate com fortably Should the linking not work please check that the option View documents in PDF A mode is set to Never in the settings of the Adobe Reader menu Edit Preferences Documents PDF A View Mode 1 1 3 Sample Files In the menu System Information Sample Files there are a number of example and sample files that you can use to test different functions in EvaSys such as the CSV import of users and course participants imports into the question library uploading a custom cover letter for the PDF report etc 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 13 EvaSys V F Preparation and General Notes Survey Automation Sukk 1 2 Support and Remote Maintenance 1 2 1 EvaSys Website and Support Area When logged in as an administrator in EvaSys via the main menu Sy
305. ed with an L Library 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 411 EvaSys iw Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Survey Aincmation Sula Course Evaluationj L learned a lotin this course L Strongly Disagree O O OF O O Strongly Agree learned more in this course than in others L Strongly Disagree O OF OF O0 O Strongly Agree After taking this course am interested in taking L Strongly Disagree O OF O O O Strongly Agree others in this field would recommend this course to my friends L Strongly Disagree O OF OF O O Strongly Agree Figure 555 Question Library Inserted Question Group and Questions in the Editor Preview 4 2 Undoing the Connection between a Question and the Library You cannot modify questions or chapters from the library You will see this by the gray shading of the selection options in the properties dialog as well as by the symbol L If you would like to edit a question from the library you must first undo the connection to the library by using the symbol The question can then be edited again Gw Question Wizard Please choose a question type 5 Scaled Question Open Question single Choice Multiple Choice Matrix Field Grade Value Ls Back Next apply Cancel Figure 556 Question Library Library Symbol You can detach the library question by selecting the question on the questionnaire and choosing the option Detach library question 412 2011 Elect
306. ee 302 Profile line Creating comparative profile lines 247 Dispatch of comparative profile lines 288 Protect mode 2 0c cee ee 423 SOEN 452 PSWD procedure 101 Q QM view 337 Authorizing access rights to QM views 336 Use of QM views 00000 ce eee 337 504 EvaSys v Survey Automation Suite Quality guideline 320 Average based 00 eee eee ee 322 Convert from indicators 5 328 Convert from norms 332 Define 320 Frequency based 00 eee ee aee 327 Setting quality guidelines 320 Quality Management 314 Question Adding a question from the library 409 Adding a question to the library 413 Adding Question 155 Adding questions 000 0 ee eee 376 Deleting a question from the library 414 Editing questions 376 Instructor s optional question 155 Optional question 155 Responses to open questions 201 Undoing the connection between a question and the li DE Ee Go eR ad ee e Pee eg 412 Question group 374 Adding a group to the library 415 Adding question groups 06 374 Deleting a group from the library 415 Editing question groups 6 374 Question library 95 409 PCM wt etsy wy dew eee Ge ee ee ee Par oe he ee ech 95 EXO were Mar ae ols a eR Ao eG ee 98 IMport ehre EE ach cd
307. eed as follows In the default criteria combination as you are accustomed set the criteria to female and Business Studies Then click on the button Add new criteria combination so as to create a second group 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 279 EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Criteria combination 1 Add new criteria combinatio The onterion will be added to the chosen citeria combinaton Add criterion Question Operator Value Options Default criteria combination Which gender do you belong to 2 female we a And Main subject 5 Business Studies e S And e Criteria combination 1 E Figure 350 Report Creator Add new Criteria Combination This second group automatically receives the name Criteria combination 1 Add the criteria What is your age with the value 18 29 and Main Subject with the value Business Studies to this criteria combination z Question Operator Value Options Default criteria combination Which gender do you belong to 2 emie t And Main subject 5 Business Studies gt 4 o criteria combination 1 ms What is your age e 1 18 29 e t And Main subject e 5 Business Studies ag Figure 351 Report Creator Two Criteria Combinations Imagine you only want to see in your report the results of those interviewees who fulfill the following conditions the interviewee is either fem
308. een calculated from all the answers of the interviewees e Minimum percentage of given answers to enable norming Percentage of answers which must have been given for the norming If less answers than this percentage have been given the norming for the dimension can not be conducted Attention The setting is only taken into consideration when the Mode of calcula tion for norming is set to 1 e Pole reversal of scales when taking norms If activated the poles of those dimensions items are reversed in which small val ues are judged as positive and large values as negative This option is decisive if you use different alignments of scales in your question naires That means that positive evaluation results are on the left side of the scale for some questions i e smaller values are positive but for some questions you can find positive results on the right side of the scale i e bigger values are posi tive If you do not activate the option Pole reversal of scales when taking norms 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 225 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model you have to take those differences into account when interpreting the norm profile line When activating the option the norm profile line is standardized and thus can be interpreted more easily If smaller values are positive i e left of the norm those values are reversed Furthermore the reversed values are used for
309. eeueueuueeneenaess 205 4 5 1 COMPONENTS OF THE PDF REPORT cccceccecceecseeseeceeeceucseecsueeeueueuueueeueueuuseueeueueaueuaes 206 4 5 2 PDF REPORT DEFINITIONS degt 226 4 5 3 INDIVIDUALLY DESIGNED REPORTS PDF REPORT PLUGINS c cccceseecseesseeseeesueesueeeaes 230 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite 4 5 4 DESIGNING AN INDIVIDUALLY CONFIGURED LETTER FOR SENDING Selen EE 232 4 5 5 DOWNLOAD AND SENDING OF REPORTS cccccccecececeeceeeceueseuceeueeuueuuesueueaueueeuaueaeeaeeeaees 233 5 PHASE 4 ADVANCED REPORTING cceccccsceccueceecseuceueceueseeeseueeueeeaueuuueueeeuusaueaueeuaueuuueueeuaesueneeauanss 236 e Js Tee EE 236 5 1 1 THE PRINCIPLE OF THE INDICATOR ccccccceecceecceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseueeeeeaueseeeeesueeeeusauaneeens 236 5 1 2 ACTIVATING THE INDICATORS IN THE CONFIGURATION ccccccceceeeseeceeeseeuseuseueeeeeeaeeeaueaes 239 5 1 3 CREATING THE INDICATORS FOR A QUESTIONNAIRE ccccceccecceeseecseceeeeeuseueeeueeeaeeuaueneeeas 241 5 1 4 INTERNAL CONSISTENCY OF THE QUESTION GROUP CRONBACH S ALPHA 00ccseeeeeees 242 5 1 5 FREE INDICATORS o cccecccecccecceccueceeceeecseuceueseeueuuseueueeueeueeueeeaueaueeuauseuueaeeuaesaueaaeeueeeaueeneenes 244 5 2 CREATING REPORTS AND COMPARATIVE PROFILE LINES ccccecseeseeseeceeeseueseeceueeeeeseeeenenees 247 5 2 1 THE USER ROLE OF THE REPORT CREATOR ccccccccecseeseecseeceueeeuceueeeueeeueeeaueueee
310. efault the export contains all question types texts and settings made in the VivdForms Editor Please select the items to be additionally exported Quality Guidelines V Data export configuration Norming V PDF Reports Text Templates Report for comparison Sphinx Report Languages Filter settings v Validation v Free indicators Required questions Note Information linked to further data in this system cannot be exported This would be the case for reports for comparison Seat 1 Geo Figure 578 Settings for the Export of Forms The following items can be additionally exported e Quality Guidelines e Data export configuration e Norming e PDF Reports e Text Templates e Report for comparison e Sphinx Report e Languages e Filter settings e Validation e Required questions e Cross Tabulations 426 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Editing and Passing on Questionnaires You can get to the export function in the questionnaire detail dialog Questionnaires Questionnaire List Details The import of VividForms questionnaires is done in the questionnaire administration Settings Questionnaire Activate the checkbox VividForms Then select an vfd file using search and upload it Questionnaire Import L Browse MVividForms L ox Figure 579 Questionnaire Import You can also import and export VividForms questionnaires using active instr
311. el gt lt label gt lt div class content gt lt div class leftpole gt lt Sthis gt getLeftPole gt nbsp lt div gt m lt div class inputarea gt lt SsInputarea gt e div gt lt div class rightpole gt lt this gt getRightPole gt nbsp lt div gt lt div class abstention gt lt Sshbstention lt i d i gt lt div gt Figure 150 PHTML Editing gt nbsp lt div gt EP S Access Rights to Online Survey Templates for Subunit Administrators You as the administrator define within the user properties the of subunit administrators whether a subunit administrator has the right to create or modify online survey tem plates In the drop down menu next to Online survey templates you can choose between following rights 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 149 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Aimomadion Suki e Defined by administrator No access e Templates only meaning the subunit administrator cannot create his own tem plates e Unrestricted This option of assigning rights can be seen in the following figure 2 Change the user rights OM Views No QM Views additional subunits for QM views Online Survey Templates S _ H be Defined by Administrator No access Assign additional Templates only subunits Unrestricted access Defined by Administrator No access Sicanstation Demo Subunit Data Entr
312. eliveries As regards the deletion of PSWDs you can delete all deliveries for a chosen period The deliveries can be found in the menu System Information on the left hand in the menu 1 11 3 Entries in the Log Book The log book records messages warnings and failures of the system for detailed information see below When choosing a period you can also delete those elements here 452 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Management and Summary 1 11 4 Delete Compilations and Subgroup Reports You can delete the compilations and subgroup reports of the chosen periods here i e the data the system uses to create the reports of the report creator When clicking on the button Show reports a new window opens There you can define the reports you do not want to delete You cannot delete the data you have created in your surveys it is only possible to delete that of the report creator When the report creator compiles some reports when he creates profile lines etc the system always duplicates the raw data to obtain the data for the new reports The PDF reports are based upon this data Thus no PDF report is available as a file in the system every report is created on the fly using the raw data or the copies of the data when the user calls up the report In a sense the deletion of the data copies also implies the deletion of the report of the report creator But in fact when clickin
313. ement Actions Abbreviation Title Pages Date R toma ie ea one a reviati ag Settings Copy Delete Edit Preview Export Evaluation if S Ouest A Questionnaire A Meese E 2 2 13 51 51 Template _ Sample Questionnaire 2011 05 24 CS 3 e Sample Template 1 16 34 39 Qa t e Figure 576 Form Management of an Active Instructor Trainer 7 3 Import Export of VividForms Questionnaires VividForms forms can be exported as files These files have the ending vd As a subunit Administrator the export function is available in the details of a ques tionnaire Settings Questionnaire Details by clicking on the Export button Bi Details for questionnaire Sample_01 Sample_01 Sample Questionnaire P ViidEorns Editor a Copy and open the questionnaire in the VividForms esigner s PDF Sample Show wW PDF paper survey Show B In the recognition set of the VividForms Reader Add Preview online survey Advanced settings Questionnaire l EditForm Delete eps yi zl Figure 577 Exporting a Questionnaire A new dialog containing the settings for the export of forms opens As well as the stan dard properties questions open text images formats etc here you can select which additional properties of the form are to be exported 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 425 EvaSys V Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Green dog Suite Settings for the export of forms By d
314. ement train_en_1 The global indicators are listed first followed by the individual average values consisting of the following scales 2 Questions about the instructor 3 Questions about the course 4 Questions about the teaching material 5 Questions about the studying conditions In the second part of the analysis the average values of all individual questions are listed Note Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on your computer in order to view the files Your EvaSys Administrator Figure 617 Standard Letter Summary report for dean of studies program manager The dean of studies program manager receives a Summary report with the indicators for all evaluated courses The selection is made by the deans managers themselves in their login account The function EvaSys Settings Central evaluation dean of stud ies program manager must be activated A corresponding user account must be set up and used 462 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Config uration Setti ngs d To Prof Dr Belmore as private confidential Result of a survey Dear Mr Prof Dr Belmore This email contains evaluation results for Human Resource Management train_en_1 The global indicators are listed first followed by the individual average values consisting of the following scales 2 Questions about the instructor 3 Questions about the course 4 Questions about the teaching m
315. eminar Laboratory Tutorial Working Group Others Module General Computer Sciences Economics Engineering Professional Development canstation Demo Subund _Data Entry Demo Subund _5ystemiogins WS0S 10 soos WS06 07 Module Trainer Apply Figure 569 Details for a Questionnaire The VividForms recognition set organizes itself automatically As soon as the first sur vey has been created on the basis of the questionnaire it is activated deployed and can no longer be modified with the editor If you want to create a new version of the questionnaire then you must copy the questionnaire You cannot delete the questionnaire as long as surveys based on the questionnaire are in the system This is to protect your data 6 2 Use of Templates in Instructor Trainer Accounts In the menu of the instructor trainer account in the template area you will see a list of questionnaires from the administrator 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 421 EvaSys V Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Sive Aincmation Sukk Form Templates F a n 6 E E r Abbreviation 2011 05 24 Sample 01 Sample Questionnaire 1 16 10 24 za Note Please bear in mind that required questions cross tabulations and online survey designs cannot be copied when copying the template into the form management Figure 570 Template in an Instructor Trainer Account By clicking on the
316. en The global indicators are first followed by the individual average values consisting of the following scales 2 Questions about the instructor 3 Questions about the course 4 Questions about the teaching eee 5 Questions about the studying conditio In the second part of the analysis the average values of all individual questions are listed Note Adobe Acrobat Reader must be installed on your computer in order to view the files Your EvaSys Administrator Max Mustermann EvaSys Admumistrator Figure 243 PDF Letter Sample with a new Layout If you do not wish to use this layout system wide but only for surveys that are con ducted with a certain questionnaire you can also upload documents for a particular questionnaire To do this you go to the details of the relevant questionnaire via the menu System Settings on the left hand side of the menu Questionnaires In the list that appears you select a questionnaire and navigate by clicking on the name of the details of the questionnaire In the area Advanced Settings you see a drop down list with several options to choose from 212 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys wv Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback EvaSys V gt Subunits System Settings Sys Survey Automation Sute EO T Details for questionnaire Quest_01 Quest_01 Evaluation Questionnaire s VividForms Editor Pete
317. en it Create reports Summarized Reports Subunit Comparisons Batch Profile Lines Figure 308 Report Creator Create Reports The upper drop down menu provides a list of all different tyoes of summary reports The lower drop down menu allows to access the batch profile lines which can be used to compare different reports and surveys with each other The batch profile line dispatch is dealt with in the chapter on summary reports It is not a type of report For the creation of the different reports you must make a selection in several fields This affects report specific fields also for all of them the type of course and the ques tionnaire must be selected multiple selection is possible Subunit Report A subunit report is the summary of the survey results for a specific subunit and a spe cific semester Create reports Summarized Reports Subunt Comparisons Batch Profile Lines Figure 309 Report Creator Create Subunit Report Choose the option Subunit from the drop down list If you click the button Next Now four fields are presented to you in which you can select a subunit a survey period a course type or even several types and a questionnaire or several ques tionnaires In the figure below the subunit report is created based on one questionnaire If sev eral questionnaires are displayed for the selection in the list you can mark these then however you must dec
318. en over from all questionnaires e Cross tabulations Required questions and PDF report plugins are taken over e Online Design If the display mode is set to per chapter for one of the question naires then this view is taken over for the whole survey e Vallidation plausibility checks is taken over e Norms and Quality Guidelines are taken over from the corresponding question naire 7 5 Creating a Module Account You create module accounts as you do a regular user account Open a subunit and select Create new user Select Module as the user type 2 Please choose a user type Instructor Dean of Studies Dean See utilization statistics for the subunit Report Creator Data Entry Assistant Handwritten comments Verifier Subunit Administrator f Cancel lt lt Hack Next gt Figure 451 Create a Module Step 1 Subsequently click on the Next gt gt button A second window opens in which an additional input field for the module name appears Enter the name of the module here 346 2011 Electric Paper GmbH Survey Automation Suite The remaining address record is intended to be used for the person linked to the mod ule e g a module coordinator or the administrator 2 Please define the attributes of this user Mr kd Title First name Last name Phone Email j doe example com IT Inform user about profile creation via email Address Language Default language Mo
319. en questions see chapter C 2 6 3 Open Question In this case the results of the ICR analysis can be controlled and if necessary cor rected with the help of the WebVerifier Open questions without handwriting recognition are directly transferred to the data base in form of an image and if desired can be further processed by the anonymizer 4 3 8 Keyboard Control in the Verification There are a number of keyboard shortcuts that allow you to use the verification with out a mouse The shortcuts function in most current web browsers The actions are done by pressing the ALT key and a further key Please note that some keyboard shortcuts may be missing from some views ALT B Batch View ALT N Search New Batch Seach Newsa Table 10 Keyboard Shortcuts in WebVerifier 4 4 Manual Entry of Handwritten Comments If handwritten responses to open questions should be anonymized then for each sub unit concerned the option display after manual collection in the section handling of handwritten texts must be activated You can change this in subunit details For sub unit details click on the subunit overview in column Edit on the icon The option Display after manual collection will hold back the answers of open ques tions until the captured images of the open questions have been anonymized Until then the PDF report only contains the answers to closed questions 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 201 EvaSys V
320. ens the dialog to create a text box Picture Page Break Picture Opens the dialog to add a picture from the library Page Break Adds a page break Edit Edit Edit Question Group Edit Question Opens the properties dialog of the selected question j Edit Question Edit Question Group Opens the properties dialog of the seleted question group Edit Pole Labels Opens the properties dialog of the pole labels Extended Pole Labels Opens the properties dialog of the vertical pole labels Edit Text Box Opens the properties dialog of the selected text box Picture Opens the properties dialog of the marked picture Clipboard Undo Ctrl Z Undoes the last action up to 20 in a row ee Cut Ctrl X Cuts the selected object and adds it to the clipboard Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Copies the selected object and adds it to the clipboard Sopy eu Paste Ctrl V Adds the contents of the clipboard below the marked object e Delete Del Delete Del Deletes the marked object Move Up Moves the marked object one step up 4 Down Down Moves the marked object one step down 360 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Form Properties Paper View Form properties Opens the properties of the questionnaire Layout settings Opens the layout settings for the form Repair form Recreates the questionnaire Enable numbering Toggles the numbering of questions and question groups Edit Pole Template Opens the di
321. eport for Comparison 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 303 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Aua mati n Suki The following window opens automatically in which you can define the number of pre vious periods for the comparison lines Define the number of previous periods in the profile line Here you can define the number of previous periods that will Number of previous periods in the profile line appear in the PDF report in addition to the profile line of the Ges current survey e Se Define report for comparison survey Period Subunit 5505 Dn WSO05 06 Available reports Lee 06 E Beimore WS 10 11 e WS06 07 5507 W309 10 5510 e Wi Figure 392 Profile Line Comparison Defining Previous Periods and Comparison Reports In the first part you define how many previous periods are to be considered in the pro file line Here you can choose between none and five previous periods If for example you wish to include three previous periods for comparison enter the number three here In every PDF report for surveys which were created using this questionnaire here train_en as well as the current profile line of the survey you also can see the com parison profile lines of the previous three periods This is however only valid under the premise that data for these three periods is available in EvaSys Then this is valid not only for standard report but also the user defined PDF report In the follo
322. eport looks just as you are familiar with it from the automatically gen erated reports for single surveys except for the letter and the PDF report header Inthe following the first page of the subunit produced report gives you an over view of the appearance of the PDF reports of the report creator 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 283 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Maria Report Prof Development WS 10 11 Prof Development WS10 11 Ei No of responses 46 Overall indicators Global Index S v T Instructor eu si 7 Course Ge Teaching matenal Overall indicators Dimension Value Nom value 2 Questions about the instructor 37 99 Gi gem eg 3 Questions about the course 3 5 100 Gi bb 4 Questions about the teaching material 3 5 96 4 5 Questions about the studying conditions 3 5 102 Gi Survey Results Le gend Rhye FeDe of aa Pro De kiran Medy SR En Er Eis ore BS Question text Leficote Right ose a erer Gey w i Dev 2 Sr D d 5 A Scag ites F Guay ness Description of quality symbol Mean value rg below the ai Mean os within the range of Mean value within the p et it quality guidene tolerance for the quality quality guideline gudene 1 Questions about you Which gender do you belong to m e SO Si Tae Eps e ea Evatys evawaton Page I Figure 358 Report Creator Example of a PDF Report Page 1 As usual the report header sh
323. epot CSV SPHINX Figure 318 Report Creator Program of Study Report in the List of Reports Instructor Trainer Profile The option Instructor Trainer Profile allows all surveys of an instructor trainer to be periodically summarized into reports To create an instructor trainer profile choose the option Instructor Trainer Profile from the drop down list and click the button Next 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 263 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model S ivay Auta matin Sukk Create reports Summarized instructor Profile v Next Reports Comparisons Batch Profile Lines Figure 319 Report Creator Creating an Instructor Profile From the instructor trainer list sorted according to subunits select an instructor trainer and a survey period as well as the required course types and questionnaires Then you should enter a relevant name in the example Prof Sunny Narrow SS07 acti vate the usual options as per your wishes and click on Verify Create Instructor Report 1 Instructors 2 Survey Period 3 Type 4 Questionnaire ssi We Semer TER Non_Anonym Quest_01 Sunny Narrow Professional Developmen Prof Or Philipp Belmore S510 WS09 10 Carlos Hernandez 5506 _Data Entry Demo Subunit ss05 Dennis Data k l Template forms Description Belmore WS 10 11 Question mapping of different ques
324. equipment Huo oO oO D O diden propecia eiti w l any problens Please grade tee instructor for this per DD DD D O rao O abw urge Pieaee give us your feedback about thee ineinictor os well ps suggeeSons for reegen L ict i Figure 84 Cover Sheet Procedure The alternative would be to allow survey participants to enter in the name of the course on the questionnaire but this would involve significant amounts of correction in later processing In addition it would at any rate be necessary to collect the returns simultaneously in order to set an end to collection so as that a report could be gener ated 3 1 2 Hard Copy Procedure The hard copy procedure involves identifying the questionnaire for every course The operation number is printed at the bottom of the page Additional information fields 100 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Goen gc Suk Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys can be printed in the header of all the questionnaires Optional additional questions whose content can be determined by the instructors trainers themselves can also be included The hard copy procedure also allows all of the questionnaires to be numbered This is especially useful when the questionnaire contains more than two pages or when printed on both sides of the page on more than one page of paper This guarantees that the questionnaire sets are logically coherent even if they are mixed up when col lected Course EwaluaSen Queshonnain
325. er GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period Ch CA EvaSys Settings gem Course User Data Fields F Advanced Number of additional fields Sets the number of custom course data fields Zero corresponds to no additional fields m Title of first additional field Language Enter the title of the first additional field here Title of second additional field Location Enter the title of the second additional field here Enter the title of the third additional field here Enter the title of the fourth additional field here Enter the title of the fifth additional field here Content of first additional field Enter the permitted values for the first custom field here Separate values using the pipe character Alt Ctri gt As well as the values stated here other freely selectable values can be entered into the details of a course which needn t be predefined here germanlenglishi french spanish Figure 48 Define Course User Data Fields Then indicate the headings of these fields at Titles e g languages as well as the possible values of the field at contents e g English German Spanish These additional information fields reappear for selection in the following areas e CSV import of instructor trainer and course data e Adding and editing a course e Raw data export through archiving In the previous figu
326. er a name for the report and if necessary do some further settings Such as text comparison etc Click the button Verify The questionnaire will be displayed in an overview Click on Create to finally create the report 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 271 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Aimomadion Suki Request preferred compilation Your choice Compilation name Prof Dev Economics Questionnaire train_01 train_en train_en_1 No of Surveys 25 No of completed questionnaires 345 The report gestion may take a moment Please wait until an admnowledgment has been sent back from the server Create Choice Question Form Which gender do you belong to A train en male female R a Which gender do you belong to train_en_1 train_01 Figure 332 Report Creator Any Compilation Tree Structure Questionnaire Overview The report will be created and is shown as all other reports in the list within the study folder HTML Prof Dev Economics Overall Report Data available 7 train_en 05 18 2011 345 Q choose pat report CSV SPHINX Figure 333 Report Creator Any Compilation Tree Structure Report in the List of Reports Combinations and Subgroups The previous chapters show that the report creator allows the generation of reports according to very flexible criteria So far however only the compilation of data according to specific criteria was explained How to summ
327. er threshold value upper threshold value lower threshold val ue In this example for question 1 3 8 3 4 3 0 8 For the quality in the following applies If the quality is gt 1 then 100 is reached If the absolute quality is lt 0 then 0 is reached For all values between 0 and 1 the quality in absolute quality 100 In this example for question 1 0 8 100 80 The quality index of the whole quality guideline is calculated with the following for mula gt observed quality per question in weight per question 100 In the example this is for quality guideline 1 80 25 33 75 100 44 75 This value is rounded to 45 The following formula is used to calculate the overall quality of this survey gt quality index of whole quality guideline weighting of whole quality guideline in relation to the overall quality index 100 In the example this gives the following calculation 45 25 61 75 100 57 Hence the survey has reached an overall quality of 57 PT 324 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 5 Quality Management Example Calculation of Quality Guidelines when Lower Values Are Better Po Lower Threshold Value Upper Threshold Value Weighting Question 1 Question 2 Ce o Result A Mean Quality absolute Quality Result B Mean Quality absolute Quality SSC Table 14 Example Calculation of Quality Guidelines when
328. erage compare line 6 Norm value Z Percent rank Distribution Description 105 1 115 69 16 93 32 ca 24 2 slightly above average Figure 412 Classification of Norms Mean 100 Standard Deviation 10 6 1 2 Definition of Norm Values for Questionnaires In order to use the functionality of norm profile lines the option System Settings Report Settings Configuration Show norm values must be activated In the following figure you see the settings for norming a questionnaire 316 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 5 Quality Management The option System Settings Report Settings Configuration Show recommendation text gives instructors trainers the possibility to generate a recommendation document through a link in the PDF report In the details of a questionnaire you can choose in the drop down menu in the area Advanced Settings the option Norming After marking the option Norming click on the button Edit A sub window appears in which the norm value can be entered If there is not yet a norming for the questionnaire then a message will display with the button Add Norm ing Norming for questionnaire train_en No norms are available for questionnaire train_en Course Evaluation Questionnaire Please make sure your questionnaire has active indicators before using norms Activate norming Figure 413 Activate Norming Settings for norming of
329. ere you also obtain the information through the details in the list or through a click on the name There you have the option to merge further reports Forming Subgroups Not only can you merge existing reports with others but you can also form subgroups from all reports created meaning the reports can be evaluated according to certain criteria age gender subject etc These criteria are specific groups of returns meaning completed questionnaires and these you determine yourself through the creation of your questionnaire You can form these groups according to your e single choice questions e multiple choice questions and e scaled questions Your questionnaire contains a single choice question regarding the gender with the answers female and male You can then create for all summarized reports each a subgroup report Female and Male based on this questionnaire These reports could give you information on whether women and men answered differently Your questionnaire contains a single choice question regarding the age e g you ask for the groups of those aged 18 to 29 for the students aged 30 to 39 those aged 40 to 49 etc If you evaluate reports which are based on this questionnaire according to subgroups this age question is presented to you as a criterion Then you could for example create a subgroup report for all mentioned age brackets and compare the results Following this it would
330. es and upload the ZIP file you created After this use a CSS editor to modify the file that is now in a folder named like your template in this case My Template in C Apache htdocs evasys data templates My Template This file can now be modified using a CSS editor To display the modifications you have made in the style sheet you need to remove the content of the folder C Apache htdocs evasys data tmp online and restart the system service mem cached Server To do this select the option Administrative Tools Services in the Control Panel and search the list for the entry memcached Server If you right click on the entry a context menu opens where you can choose the option Restart by a left click Here is an example of what can be changed by simply editing the styles in CSS EvaSys Academy Sunny Narrow Engineering Data Analysis 571 Dear participants we are very interested in your opinion concernig the course you are currently visiting Please take some time to fill in this questionnaire You will help us improve our courses Thank you very much General information You are female D male Your Age 18 29 D 30 39 40 49 50 Why did you choose our university check as many as apply Figure 147 Example CSS Editing C55 Selectors SN _ onlinesurvey css ir Sie bepecheg x elei e item odd tatic odd gt ek Ci Levez e Fa EN Jewseeg bscher dane S clear both a GAural
331. es e g Technical limitations mean that the actual existence of the email addresses cannot be checked Unde livered email can be found in the EvaSys logbook The email addresses are saved in the system for reminder emails Scheduled Tasks 1 PSWD to respondents 2 Online survey reminder 3 Finish survey 06 23 2011 at 23 10 00 Deactivated Deactivated Edit Edit ls Edit Deactivate Start date 06 23 2011 at 23 10 00 Note Please note that due to the execution of additional tasks there could be small delays in processing Sender email Sender name Recipient max 5 training electricpaper de EvaSys Admin S millerGexample com Reference f brown example com p delmora example com Online survey ee E marlowe example COM Mail text P gabriel example com This email entitles you to vote in an online survey a Please follow the link and use the PSWD displayed as identification The PSWD reads PSWD T Voting nder SERVER Apply to All Save Run now To survey list Figure 128 Define Scheduled Tasks In general it is possible to assign the date time and status for all selected surveys using the Apply to All button 130 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Operation online survey reminder The operation online survey reminder is the dispatch of a reminder email to all respondents who have not yet taken
332. es on the current professional discussion gt 3 4 Question JA target value Please grade the instructor for this course gt 3 4 The instructor is always well prepared o 34A gt 3 4 The instructor is always well prepared 209 60 gt 4 Question It benefits from the technical possibilities internet videotaping blogging etc 3 7 gt 3 4 p It ts well structured gt 3 4 it complements the leaming matter gt 3 4 Question QA target val The meals in the refectory are always tasty 3 z A The meals in the refectory are always fresh Rae The meals in the refectory are always warm gt 3 4 The university is connected to the public transportation very well z A The technical equipment of the university is excellent gt 3 4 got access to the technical resources computer centre etc very quickly a 3 4 duly got introductions into all the necessary hardware and software components z A Figure 439 QM Views Quality Details If a value is marked in red the quality guideline has not been met at all if the color is yellow the value is within the range of tolerance Other colors are not applied In order to open the complete report of the survey click on To the List and in the line of the survey you are interested in on Tl to open the PDF report 338 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 5 Quality Management If an information icon appears in the first co
333. estion Gw Question Wizard Question text BIU S S What did you particularly like about this course Back Next apply Cancer Figure 503 Open Question Enter the Question Text Now click on Next and choose the size of the comment box depending on the num ber of lines needed For paper based surveys any number of lines up to the whole remaining page area may be selected Box Size The maximum number of charac ters allowed for the answer can also be defined for online surveys Maximum number 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 383 EvaSys V Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Survey Aunomation Suite of characters If you enter the value 0 the participants in online surveys can enter text of any length Question Wizard Define Options Box Size 5 e 0 lines left on this page Max number of characters Online 200 Survey SS Characters Alphabetical ei Language Deutsch a Segmented Format O oooO oo New format Style of segmented box Display in report Like open questions el Closed ka Verification display Always Settings sre only valid if verification is activated when the survey is gested Next Figure 504 Open Question Define the Required Space After having defined all options click on Apply The open question will now appear in the preview and will be automatically highli
334. et Q000000000 SE l De Page Break BEER PC Sum am able to create edit a word document Fuly ayee O O O O O Fully disagree am able to create edit a presentation Fuly agree O O O O O Fully disagree Know how to zip unzip a file Fulyagee D OD OD CF Fully disagree know how to burn a CD or save files on a Fuly ayee OF O O O O Fully disagree USS stick O OHZ Aa Tech_2 Questionnaire on Technical Skills lt 1 gt Editor Control 3 Add Question Group ZF Add Question S Pole Labels tr Extended Pole Labels Questionnaire on Te Une Space Ei Separator ORGANIZATION AUTHOR _ S Text Box F wi Picture SUBUNIT SURVEY Page Break gem Ca Mark as shown OMOOOD Please use a ball point pen or a thin felt tip This Correction ORORO Please follow the examples shown to help sii 1 Questions about you Figure 473 a and b Different Zoomed in Views of a Questionnaire If the questionnaire you have created consists of more than one page you can change to the different pages using the arrows as well as the drop down list in the upper right hand corner of the screen 364 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Guer Auidmatiin Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor 2 3 2 Online View In the online view the display of the questionnaire is simulated as an online survey This view can be adjusted in different ways In the menu on the left hand side under Form Pr
335. etermined whether the selected logo should be displayed on the left or right side of the questionnaire header Furthermore in the Vertical Alignment the orientation of the logo in the question naire header top middle bottom can be defined In the area Scale of the box width in the size of the logo can be adjusted At a size of 100 the logo can occupy the entire outer third of the questionnaire header If the percentage is decreased the logo is scaled down accordingly The following illustrations give an example of a questionnaire header expanded to three lines with adjusted placeholders and custom logo in the editor view as well as in a PDF Sample Questionnaire z Electric Paper Figure 485 Adjusted Form Header Editor View Sample Questionnaire W Electric Paper Evasys Academy a Carlos Hernandez ee Human Resource Management SS11 Sa m p e DN er Figure 486 Adjusted Form Header PDF 2 5 Adding and Editing Question Groups Question groups unite questions that are thematically similar under a general head ing so that for example indicators can be calculated Text entries have the following meaning Title Title of the question group You can highlight the title of the question group as you can with numerous other ele ments with bold or italic fonts or by underlining To do this mark the desired element and click the buttons B I and or U in the bar next to the lettering Headline
336. ettings T ext Templates PDF report definitions are only then affected when for this question naire or in general your own PDF templates are used Should you want to use PDF report plugins please discuss the question of PDF A 1b compatibility when creating the PDF plugins It is important to remember that reports are never stored in the system As soon as you click on the respective buttons EvaSys creates the report based on the current available raw data This means that you can scan new data in at any time and the reports are modified accordingly If you wish to avoid the scanning of further data and so modifying the PDF report its best to simply close the survey The reports give you an overview of your survey s results by means of different ele ments For feedback on the evaluation results a PDF report is usually sent by email to the relevant people In EvaSys you can also automate this dispatch You can of course as with any PDF file save the report in your file system and send it yourself through your email account Saving the PDF report in your system however this entails that upon scanning of further data the PDF report in EvaSys and your saved version will differ Because only the report in EvaSys will be automatically updated Since the PDF report is clearly utilized much more often than the HTML report you are offered various configuration options with which to customize the report according to your needs There are th
337. explanatory text This explanatory text has to be activated first In order to activate the presentation template use the function System Settings Report Settings Configuration Create presentation template The explanatory texts are defined directly in the questionnaire when creating or edit ing a question group In the question group wizard a textbox with the tiltle Presenta tion Slide Text is shown where the desired text can be entered Each time you change the text length check to make sure that it fits in the field You can do this by opening a PDF report from a survey with the corresponding questionnaire Responses to Open Questions The responses to open questions are shown as image box sorted according to ques tion If an online survey was carried out then the answers will be displayed in machine print lf there are high return rates then this part of the report can be extensive depending on the amount of space given in the questionnaire 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 219 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Giiruay Auisrnation Sule You can separate the output of the responses to open questions from the part of the report with closed questions by activating the function System Settings Report Set tings Configuration Separate close open questions This is especially recommended when there are high return rates in order to for example print out only the part of the report with closed questions
338. ey to substitute instructor id Edit Show notes Figure 124 Preview of an Online Survey in the Survey Details You can also display a preview of your online survey in the details of a questionnaire by clicking on Preview online survey 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 127 EvaSys YV Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Ei Details for questionnaire Quest_01 Quest_01 Evaluation Questionnaire W VividForms Editor C Copy and open the questionnaire in the VividForms Ss Designer PDF Sample Show PDF paper survey Show In the recognition set of the VividForms Reader Refresh Figure 125 Preview of an Online Survey in the Questionnaire Details In both cases calling up the preview of your online survey in the survey details or questionnaire details you will receive the following warning The preview ofthe online survey does not show all the functions of a real online survey It only offers you a visual preview lf you want to test temporarily saving or similar please generate a real online survey for testing Figure 126 Warning Message of a Preview of the Online Survey This warning makes you aware that the preview of your online survey is not a real online survey but solely offers you a visual preview Generating and Managing Time Scheduled Online Surveys EvasSys provides the option to run time controlled surveys The following actions can be contr
339. f time e g when returns come in waves If you are sure that you will not need further scanning operations after the first scanning operation then you can answer this question with yes 474 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Configuration Settings Keep survey data after analysis in the system only paper survey only activated instructor trainer accounts The survey data is stored in the EvaSys database after it has been captured No one other than you has access to this data The survey data can be deleted manually at any time If however you would like to delete the survey data before it enters the data base you must activate the option After the scanning operation automatically gener ate email with message or report 2 4 Webservice The configuration area Web Service Settings in the main menu System Settings allows the administration of external web servers that communicate with the EvaSys server via the web services EvaSys SOAP API Please note You will see the area Web Service Settings in the menu only after acti vating Activation of EvaSys Web Service XML based SOAP interface in the EvaSys Settings page Functions By the so called web services web servers can communicate with one another and download the other system s functionalities This way it is possible to integrate Eva Sys into existing web software systems Typical applications
340. far it reads No indicator When you open the drop down menu you see that you can also select an indicator for all kinds of scales Make your desired selection here according to the scale of your scaled questions and close the window by clicking on Apply 5 1 4 Internal Consistency of the Question Group Cronbach s Alpha In EvaSys Cronbach s Alpha describes the internal consistency of a question group This value indicates whether the items of a question group are meaningfully related to each other and can thus be seen as capturing the concept the question group is meant to measure Cronbach s Alpha can range between minus infinity and 1 however only positive val ues have a meaningful interpretation A value of O means that the items i e ques tions are not associated which each other at all A value of 1 would be the strongest relationship between questions that is possible In general with a value of 0 7 or above the scale i e question group can be considered as reliable The table below gives a guide how different values of Cronbach s Alpha can be inter preted Figure 280 Interpretation of Cronbach s Alpha 242 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting When activated in the PDF report settings Cronbach s Alpha is given in the PDF report for each indicator menu System Settings Report Settings Configuration Cron bach s Alpha Cro
341. ference to the course ID e fa module part has no course ID it will be the first part of the module question naire e If more than one module parts have no course the creation dates of the module parts define their order on the module questionnaire The first questionnaire used for the module questionnaire defines e Font type e Default font size e Line height Exception If the font size of a question group of one of the question naire parts is bigger than the the line height of the first questionnaire the line height will be accordingly adapted for the whole questionnaire e Layout traditional or optimized e Position of the answer options of single choice questions e Color scheme e Display of question numbering Placeholders e Entries for the placeholder AUTHOR and COURSE are deleted e The standard placeholders are reactivated If the following characterstics apply to all questionnaire parts they also apply to the questionnaire in total e Enable temporary save 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 345 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Sirva Aua mati n Suki e Evaluation for participants Allow result access Display answers to open questions e Show print option e Show certificate of participation Further elements which are included in the complete module questionnaire e All PDF reports allowed for all questionnaires involved e All languages defined for all questionnaires e Filter questions are tak
342. for online surveys Default file is simple_html template inc The images and colors of the online survey are defined in the file Alternative forwarding for online surveys This option activates the forwarding of participants to online surveys After dispatch the participants are forwarded according to the settings under System Settings Eva Sys Settings Survey online Alternative forwarding address for online surveys Alternative web address for forwarding the participants of online surveys The participants of online surveys are after dispatch of the results forwarded to the Email address given here The address must be given complete with protocol i e http Language selection using images If activated you can select the language for multiple language online questionnaires by language icons The icons must be defined for the languages and the files must exist EvaSys automatically stores the images you have uploaded in the following folder C Apache htdocs evasys data images flags As an alternative you can also use predefined flags included in the system These are stored in the folder C Apache htdocs evasys images flags If this option is deactivated languages can be selected using a dropdown box Participation tracking online surveys Protection of anonymity With participation tracking available as a CSV export the participation anonymity for online surveys is abrogated whereby the survey anonymity should
343. for questionnaire Quest_01 Peter Brown Administrator Questionnaires New PDF Report Definition Ga Create Questionnaire E Question Library Figure 263 Report Settings for a Specific Questionnaire In the area Standard PDF Report you can define the PDF report with which the cor responding questionnaire will be displayed by default Select the corresponding PDF report in the drop down list and save your changes by clicking on Save Please note that the EvaSys PDF Report is selected by default To create a new custom PDF definition click on New PDF Report Definition If required you can create more than one report definition for one questionnaire In the window now open you have the following settings e name of the report e selection of the basic report The configuration settings are adopted from the basic report e description of the report e recipient list for automatic email delivery e activate recalculation of indicators only available if you have defined indicators for the corresponding questionnaire You can now enter further recipients in this report definition Further recipients could include for example the dean of studies program manager or a head of technical ser vices if a section of the questionnaire deals with the technical infrastructure of the uni versity company The recalculation of the indicators causes the average values of the indicators to be recalculated indepe
344. g Phaips Deiere Managing and maintaining a beaity este Mark St groen OOS 0 CG Faris ms Aas pes pr3 fb tes pe Then Forres wi bt EEGEN Coon ORDA Pete oe pe impi gen to ip tee Dr nei Ing W Electric Paper Ren pm Dear Participant We are very interested in your opion about the course ms well an ge the urtearmty gees Therefore we would Me GE reed the questionnaire thoroupliy and complete it Onhy your can judgement is itipertant you fe wrong CN course the dala is completely anonymous 1 Questions about you Whi Duch pander do you belong to O male C Genee Ahal is your age SIE BEES Oo ao o sosa oO 6 89 O Cider than g5 Whal is your age DDDDDDDDDE UU DDDUHUOO What is the grade of your Last school Cake LL Wl Wh ath i Oooo di How many tems hover you beeen studying oo fe O i UI SE CIA SE Ce oO os Ca LI 1 Uu LJ More han 11 i puc ET Assbsies UH American Sides O Appia infannatics O Automation Engineering O Business Studies O Chemisty C Computationa Linguistica CH Gecko O Seopiyysscs O German Literature and Linguistics O homas O Logistics Oo Aergar ee Engineering O Mathematics O Computer Science in Media O kiada Siudies O Minermiogy O Nuckear Physica O pis O Physics O Environmental Geology O Potties Economics O Business Informatics O Romance Studies O Chemical Engineering O Corgarapve Fagkc oerg O indusa Engineering and Managennent De you aiready have a uiniversty degree or OO yes One A degrees of another institute in tertiar
345. g on the button Delete reports you only delete the duplicated data which overloads your system 1 12 Analysis of Errors 1 12 1 Log Book The log book reflects all the operations that occur in connection with the automatic capture of paper questionnaires There are three types of symbol message symbolized with a blue i error red X and warning yellow warning triangle Wg Book There are 129 Log entries available Messages warnings and errors show 15 Records starting from 0 OK Type Text Picture From Batch User Date Attention The Mail Service appears to be incorrectly configured This can lead to problems regarding the system functionality e g the processing of scheduled CO tasks Please contact the support team to verify the 0 A SYSTEM 05 25 2011 at 09 14 48 2 configuration of the Mail Service on the server As soon as the configuration has been corrected this message will not be shown again Figure 614 Log Book 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 453 System Settings and Management EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite The following messages can occur Error messages 454 Error when updating the survey table The status of the survey could not be updated Check the status of the survey ready processed etc as well as possible error messages in the VividForms Reader If the status of the survey is shown as processed open the report If this is empty then reset the survey and scan this que
346. gement HTTP link on support page Target address of the web link shown in the interface default http www evasys de support HTTP redicrection address Redirection address for rejected access attempts IP address mail server IP address or domain name of the mail server EvaSys should use for messaging func tions If you want to use a secure mailservice you have to add the string ssl to the IP address ssl lt lP address gt Additionally the port of the mail server has to be changed to the 465 You cannot use the TSL protocol here Port mail server Port of the target mail server Default 25 HELO to mail server Greeting for the mail server in this case the name of the mail server to be addressed Ignored impolitely by most mail servers Authentication Activates the authentication on the mail server In most cases not necessary User name User name with which EvaSys should log in to the mail server if authentication needed Password Password with which EvaSys should log in to the mail server if authentication is needed Server root path This setting defines the root path of the EvaSys web server LDAP LDAP deactivated can be defined individually for each user in the user settings acti vated for all users If this option is activated the user name and password are com pared at the login with LDAP 494 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Configuration
347. ghted What did you particularly like about this course Figure 505 Open Question in the Editor Preview Handwriting Recognition in EvaSys EvaSys supports handwriting recognition via ICR This feature is only available when licensed For further information please contact your vendor 384 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Siirvay Auidmatiin Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor By means of handwriting recognition short handwritten texts can be read and pro cessed automatically For this activate the option Handwriting recognition when cre ating an open question Gw Question Wizard m Define Options Box Size 0 lines left on this page Max number of characters Online Survey Handwriting F recognition Characters Alphabetical Language English X Segmented Format New format Style of segmented box C253 Display in report Like open question Venfication display Always Settings sre only valid if verification is activated when the survey is gested Back Next Apply Cancel Figure 506 Open Question Activate Handwriting Recognition After activating this option the box size is automatically set to 2 as EvaSys can only read single line handwritten texts one handwritten line matches two VividForms lines In the first drop down menu you can define the kind of characters to be read You can choose between the foll
348. guidelines can even be combined within one quality guideline and for the same question In this case the worst result determines the traffic light color in the PDF report 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 321 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model In addition to this quality guidelines can be set up without defining them manually by directly converting them from indicators or from existing norm values of the question naire The following subsections explain these options in more detail Note Both the threshold values and the weighting in percent of the individual questions for a quality guideline can be changed anytime after setting it up In order to do this enter the new values and click on Save changes Average Based Quality Guidelines In the above example the question The course perfectly prepares me for my profes sional life was assigned a weight of 25 a lower threshold value of 3 and an upper threshold of 4 It was also determined that higher values are positive In this example we are dealing with a scaled question with response values ranging from 1 strongly disagree to 5 strongly agree The targeted value in terms of quality is reached when the mean value is 4 or higher If the mean for this question is below 4 a deduction will apply starting with 0 and in creasing linearly depending on the extent the value falls short of the target The full 25 are deducted when th
349. gure 25 Menu Subunits 44 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period 2 2 1 Setting up the Subunits Choose a reasonable number of subunits These subunits can either be departments or other teaching units Create new Subunits Create subunit Subunit Name Dept No 5 Logo File system logo el Edit Phone Fax Street Address ZIP Code City Email Online survey template default Server address for online pe surveys of this subunit http 192 168 245 129 evasys_01 online Subunit visibility Unrestricted Show the subunit in the context menu Subunits Assign user licenses unlimited Handling of handwriting texts Direct display default setting Display after manual collection note customizable threshold System settings EvaSys Settings Surveys Never display OK Cance Figure 26 Create Subunit In order to set up a new subunit click on the button Create New Subunit in the win dow subunits This is where the name of the subunit as well as a few address data go The address data go into the letter for the summary report and appear in the system info System Information The Subunit number is automatically incremented It can be adjusted if necessary If desired a separate online survey template can be defined for each subunit which defines the presentation of an online survey for the subu
350. h the logical operator And for computer scientists amongst you you can select the Booleschen operators here On the other hand if you want to create a subgroup report containing the results of all interviewees who are either male OR studying Business select here the Or opera tor Your subgroup report would then contain the results of all male students as well as the results of all other students who have the main subject Business Studies This means that this subgroup report also contains the results of female students who study Business Default criteria combination Which gender do you belong to Main subject Figure 348 Report Creator Two Criteria with the Operator Or Finally as you are accustomed allocate a descriptive name decide for or against including open questions in the subgroup report and click on the Create button The subgroup report now appears in the list of reports HTML 05 19 2011 005 8 choose pdf report v CSV E Male Business Studies from Report of Data ws SPHINX Train en available tram en Figure 349 Report Creator New Subgroup Report in the Report List You also have the possibility of creating several criteria combinations If for example you wish to summarize the results of all female students who have the main subject Business Studies or the results of all students between 18 and 29 who have the main subject Business Studies proc
351. he PDF report Show normed profile line When normed data exists for the questionnaire a normed profile line will be shown in the PDF report Create Profile Line for indicators Activates the display of the profile line for indicators in the PDF report Create Cross Tabulation Activates the display of cross tabulations in the PDF report The cross tabulations are defined in the details of a questionnaire Advanced Settings Cross Tabula tions 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 221 Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model 222 EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Create presentation template Once the indicators for a questionnaire have been defined they can be displayed together with a short descriptive text at the end of a PDF report as a presentation template The presentation slide can serve as a discussion aid to discuss the results with the course participants Show notes in the PDF Report This option activates the display of survey notes in the PDF report For example the notes of a survey of the Instructor the dean or the administrator are displayed in the PDF report Left Right Top Bottom margin Left Right Top Bottom margin for all pages on the PDF report Font size question texts Font size of texts in the PDF reports Font size pole texts Font size of pole texts in PDF reports Font size for numerical data Font size for average av standard deviation s and frequency n in the PDF report Font
352. he edges visible have been saved or when the empty field has been crossed out In order to use the delete function you must activate it in the settings EvaSys Set tings Functions Deletion of Responses to Open Questions With a click on the icon you will open the window with all of the responses to the open questions of this survey The responses are either displayed as image or if they have already been anonymized as text field These have a red background In order to delete all of the selected responses click on the Delete button at the bottom of the window Assign a Survey to a Substitute Instructor Trainer If a course is taken over by a substitute instructor trainer at short notice an evaluated survey can be transferred from the original instructor trainer to the other instructor trainer To do this click within the survey details on Assign survey to substitute instructor Actions 7 Show PSWDs in browser 3 Receive PSWDs by email JA Send PSWDs by email to respondents J Download PSWDs in CSV File Z Generate more PSWDa 0 h x Number of participants for calculating response rate 3 20 Accept Preview online survey CH Scheduled Tasks Finish Data Collection Close Survey amp Restore Survey 2 Delete Survey sl Edit answers to open questions 3 Assign survey to substitute instructor id Edit Show notes Figure 102 Survey Details Assign this Survey to a Substitute I
353. he language e Language picture Here you can specify the logo of a language set that can be used for switching the language in online surveys You should choose the size of the logo in such a way that the display is fitting i e for flags 40x27 pixels Either click on Upload the file and then on Browse and choose a graphic file The file formats JPG GIF and PNG are supported 92 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period Or you use the logos supplied Here EvaSys offers you the country flags of the world to choose from Click on Please choose a flag and then on the button Choose In the window that then opens you can choose the flag that fits the lan guage e Linked system language The language set selected here is used for the system dialogue for online surveys Language sets are defined in System Settings EvaSys Settings Language sets e Use Activate Deactivate the language Then click Save to save the main language You can add a new language with the button Add language First enter as described above the details of the language and save these entries Afterwards you can translate your questionnaire Properties Language English N Z Current logo AS Please choose a flag Language Picture Upload the file Linked System Lanquage Linked language set Enable Language English Higher Education vi
354. he names of the variables questions automatically In CSV export this is unproblematic because the question text is adopted With export to Sphinx or SPSS however no meaningful variable name appears but an alpha numer ical combination for example V2_A for the first variable as question in the second question group You can specify new names for all variables These are then displayed in the CSV file thus in Excel as well as in Sphinx and SPSS instead of the automatically assigned names This function is intended to support you in the evaluation with statistic tools To rename the variables go to the details of a questionnaire and in the area Advanced Settings select the option Data export configuration Click on Edit L i Details for questionnaire rain en train_en Course Evaluation Questionnaire w VividForms Editor C Copy and open the questionnaire in the VividForms Designer s PDF Sample Show w PDF paper survey Show s in the recognition set of the VividForms Reader Refresh Preview online survey Advanced settings Questionnaire SE Edit Form E Delete Text Templates E Edit Text Templates Norming POF Reports Quality Guidelines Sphinx Report Report for companson Data export configuration D Finer settings Reporting Options M Online Design Valdation Required questons Cross tabulations y Free indicators Languages Export Mirrored scale
355. he questionnaire Clicking the icon in the column Copy inserts a duplicate of the questionnaire in the list and counts up the abbreviation e Delete the questionnaire Clicking the icon in the column Delete deletes the questionnaire after an additional request if the questionnaire should really be deleted If the questionnaire is based on the central template the template will not be deleted in this case of course e Edit the questionnaire Template can only be edited within the allowed limits e Preview a PDF template of the questionnaire e Export the questionnaire By clicking on the icon in the column Export active users can save the questionnaire as a vfd file in their file system and hand it on e g to their colleagues Those can read the file after importing it into EvaSys again Actions Settings Copy Delete Edit Preview Export Recognition Set x RK OM D B Figure 201 Possible Actions in the Form Management of an Active Instructor Trainer If the active instructor trainer copied a template in his form management he can edit it here This is only allowed within the limits the Subunit administrator has set If e g the administrator created a template with three pages and 45 questions and the questionnaire already has two pages and 40 questions the instructor trainer can only add one page and at the most five questions To add them to the template the active instructor trainer clicks the paper and penc
356. heet is generated It serves for the unique identification of the survey in the scanning process At System Settings EvaSys Settings page VividForms the text of the VividForms cover sheet can be modified default text empty e Certificate of participation A certificate of participation is available only for users of activated accounts after analysis of the survey The certificate can be retrieved in the details of the survey after evaluation The footer can be changed at EvaSys Settings Instructor Trainer Accounts decentral There you will find the option Footnote certificate of participation e Certificate of results In contrast to the certificate of participation this document gives the score for each of the dimensions given in the survey Its description is identical to the Certificate of Participation 3 1 4 Adjustments in the Text Templates At any case you should check the text template that serve as templates for letters emails and welcome texts at different occasions Some of them should urgently be adjusted some of them may be For this purpose please read the chapter about the text templates 3 1 5 Adjustments in the Documents You can add documents to the emails sent by the system For example you can send the evaluation regulation of your institution together with the PDF report In addition to this the adjustment of the documents affects the letter that can be added to the evalua
357. hinx Report Usage Report for comparison Data export configuration Fitter settings Validation Required questions Cross tabulations V Allow Summary Reports Enable temporary save fe Free indicators Languages Show print option Reporting Options v Online Design Mirrored scale values dl show the header of the survey Figure 285 Free Indicators Access in the Questionnaire Details After clicking on the button Edit the window for setting the indicators opens automat ically Now question groups can either be converted to indicators and be subsequently processed or the indicators can be defined freely 244 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting iat Free indicators Questionnaire indicators Course Evaluation Questionnaire trainen Tom Generate indicators from question groups Set new indicators o n Back Figure 286 Free Indicators Setting By clicking on the button Generate indicators from question groups the indicators are established based on the question groups on the questionnaire and the scaled questions contained therein This compilation can be subsequently edited by using the green pencil icon so that the questions of an indicator can be freely distributed throughout the questionnaire By using the green arrows the indicators can be moved up or down The i
358. hods just contact us for additional information Beneath the section License Key you will find the administration of VividForms Designer licenses It will only be displayed if you have purchased the corresponding licenses With the help of the drop down list a license can be assigned to an EvaSys user e g Subunit administrator or instructor trainer Select the desired user from the list and click the button License allocation The user will then be shown in the over view of VividForms Designer licenses If necessary a license can be revoked by click ing the icon with the yellow brush In the bottom section of the license management a list of all licensed scanstations depending on the license and activation one or more scanstations are listed As an administrator you can activate the option Automatically assign a license to next requesting Scanstation By doing so the next scanstation to log on to the EvaSys server is automatically issued a license Needless to say automatic activation can only take place as long as a license is available Once the scanstation is activated the option is automatically deactivated This means that as an administrator you can control the point in time at which a scanstation can automatically activate itself As a default this option is deactivated 444 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Goen Aummation SE System Management and Summary License Management EvaSys B ss Cen
359. hrter Herr Deutsch Seminaranbieter Dear Mr English Seminar Providers Create new title Salutation text Title Save Figure 23 Custom Titles The defined titles can be used in the CSV user import The key word for the title is in the second column of the CSV file see chapter B 2 3 1 CSV Import within Sub units The configured title will be used for all emails or PDF reports which are delivered to the user The placeholder SALUTATION in the email text templates will be replaced by the contents in this option area 2 2 Setting up the Organizational Structure The organizational structure in EvaSys consists of three levels which are arranged hierarchically e First Level Subunits e g departments faculties e Second Level Users e g instructors trainers deans managers report creators e Third Level Courses they are only assigned to instructors trainers and deans managers With the help of the course settings further intermediate levels can be inserted such as for example the program of study These further levels can later be used for filter ing purposes By dividing the system into subunits a clearly arranged survey administration can be established and workload can be shared Each subunit can be administrated by one or more subunit administrators so that work within the system can be distributed to more than one person On user level the role of the instructor trainer is of special importance a
360. i EvaSys VividForms Editor V EvaSys online survey i le J gt V http 192 168 245 129 evasys_01 index php mea online index preview8efrmid 3088sLang er el a Google P f er EvaSys fw Ex Survey Ai rgeaton a gp SW La Clees 1 Questions about you You are male female m What is your age 7 18 29 O 30 39 7 40 49 7 50 59 _ 60 69 O Older than 69 Your Zipcode PC Skills am able to create edit a word document Fully agree Fully disagree am able to create edit a presentation Fully agree Fully disagree Know how to Zip unzip a file Fully agree Fully disagree know how to burn a CD or save files on a USB stick Fully agree Fully disagree See Figure 479 Preview of Online Survey A new window opens with a preview of the online survey Check to make sure you like your layout Close the window in order to continue editing the questionnaire To finish editing the questionnaire click Save form and exit editor or the symbol with the open door After that you will reach the details of a questionnaire 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 369 EvaSys V F Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Green cet Suita 2 4 Editing the Questionnaire Header The header area of a questionnaire contains a number of placeholders which are dynamically filled with the information of the corresponding survey process in the later use of the questionnaire for paper and online su
361. ices too cell phones smart phones internet tablets etc are supported The prerequisite for this is that the corre sponding function is activated in the configuration System Settings EvaSys Settings Survey Online Support for mobile devices All other templates must be adapted for display on mobile devices All kinds of templates are organized in the menu System Settings Online Templates Here you can view and edit existing templates or create and upload new ones EvaSys iV z Subunits Questionnaires conn Survey Automaton Ca ste System Information Search YQ Online Template Management Customized Online Survey Templates Peter Brown 1D Name Basic template Owner Actions Administrator SC 13 High Contrast EvaSys Onlinetemplate Peter Brown J DR 6 Sample Template EvaSys Onlinetemplate Peter Brown iD Instruments os Create new customized online survey template Online Survey Templates D Name Owner Actions Figure 139 Menu Online Survey Templates In the properties dialogue of a subunit you can select one of the online survey tem plates available and thus individually define the layout of this subunit s online surveys Select an option from the list next to Online survey template As well as this an indi vidual addition to the online survey web server address can be defined for the subunit 140 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Goen Aumsmation Sul Phase
362. ich degree each check mark box has been blackened This is how it receives the survey s raw data This data is then transmitted to the EvaSys data base where it is in turn made avail able for further processing In the case of paper surveys you scan filled in batches of questionnaires using the Scanstation and a scanner In turn image files are produced and saved in a folder that is checked by the VividForms Reader at pre defined intervals By means of the form definitions at hand the VividForms Reader recognizes the blackened check mark boxes and transmits this data to the data base 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 19 EvaSys iw Preparation and General Notes Survey Automation Suite The VividForms Reader cannot process the scanned questionnaires if these are not based on VividForms forms Should this be the case the image files are stored in a so called NonForms folder meaning in a folder for non recognized image files With online surveys of course no scanning is required The data will be transferred directly to the data base Once the data has reached the data base the user can access the data base via the web server with a web browser and view the results of their survey 2 2 Web Accessibility in EvaSys The HTML content generated by EvaSys is optimized for accessibility Particularly for participants of online surveys special aids are built in to the display output Such con tent can be detected by so called screen reade
363. idation Free indicators _ Required questions Cross tabulations Note Information which is linked with other data from this system could not be copied This is relevant for example for reports for Figure 65 Copying a Questionnaire 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 81 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Aunomation Suite After clicking the button Copy the questionnaire list will show a copy of the question naire The description text of this questionnaire is marked by the annotation Copy the abbreviated name is counted up This copy can then be edited in the VividForms Editor as it has not yet been used in a survey The questionnaire along with all the collected survey data can be deleted with the option Delete in the column Action This means that the questionnaire and the sur vey results will be permanently deleted from the database Before the questionnaire is permanently deleted the delete process must be con firmed by the user again In this case EvaSys informs the user how many surveys will also be deleted The delete procedure can be cancelled at any time by clicking the button Cancel By clicking the button OK the questionnaires and all related surveys and their results will be deleted Further details about a questionnaire can be opened when the option Details is selected in the column Action in the questionnaire table This
364. ide if answers to open questions are to be displayed or not Online Design Here you can decide whether in online surveys the survey header should be dis played Should you display it the survey appears as follows EvaSys IY Educsjon Suney Automaton Sute Evasys Academy Carlos Hernandez Professional Development Human Resource Management d Electric Paper Dear Participant We are very interested in your opinion about the course as well as about the university in general Therefore we would like to ask you to take the time read the questionnaire thoroughly and complete it Only your own judgement is important you cannot give wrong Of course the data is completely anonymous 1 Questions about you Which gender do you belong to Figure 72 Online Survey with an Activated Survey Header Should you decide to display it not the dark blue header with the information about the course disappears and the survey appears as follows EvaSys V Koster Survey Automaton Sute 1 E Electric Paper CO iL 2 GE Dear Participant We are very interested in your opinion about the course as well as about the university in general Therefore we would like to ask you to take the time read the questionnaire thoroughly and complete it Only your own judgement is important you cannot give wrong Of course the data is completely anonymous 4 Questions about you Which gender do you belong to Please select Fig
365. ide to either go with the automatic text comparison or with the manual assignment in order to combine the reports Give the report a relevant name so that later you are able to relate to what was sum marized and make a selection regarding the open questions and the weighting of the surveys that you compile 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 259 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Guetta Sukk Create Subunit Report 1 Subunit 2 Survey Period 3 Type A Questionnaire 5511 Non_Anonym H Tae ind i a x Professional Development SIO Quest_01 _Data Entry Demo Subunit 5510 L wS09 10 1 S07 WS06 07 506 ws0s 06 eege Template forms Description Prof Development WS1 Question mapping of different questionnaires Automatic with text comparison Manual _ Include answers to open questions _ Combine surveys unweighted Please note For this combination the mean values of the single surveys are averaged Figure 310 Report Creator Subunit Report Selection of Elements and Properties As soon as you click on Verify EvaSys calculates how many surveys suit your selec tion In another window you are again informed of the details of the summary before you actually produce the report Request report on a subunit Your choice Subunit Professional Development Compilation name Prof Development WS Questionnaire train_en Period WS10 11 2010 09 01 to 2011 02 28 No of Su
366. iews Open View A new window with a list of evaluated courses appears 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 337 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model A en Se i Organization 2011 05 18 100 0 47960 1031 32 Se Professional Course R ead 3 10 P 410 Economics Engineering 5511 Hernandez Carlos Development Zieser am en t d 2011 05 13 HS Professional Course f EEEE Geen 20 69 7 22672 10 1220 20 P a Economics Engineering 911 Hemandez Carlos Development Evaluation ran en T Management a bis Leadership en 2007 08 24 R Professional DOOD Geioneen 22 680 10780 weg 150 enen Economicsi ngineering WS06 07 Hemandet Catos D ege Figure 438 QM Views Overview In the example the results are for instance shown for the survey of the course Lead ership Development with a quality calculated at 68 0 The green red circles each represent a quality guideline in this example teaching structure practical application interest interaction The more red area the more ques tions in this quality guideline are below the targeted value In order to receive a more precise view click on Details You will then see a detailed list of all the quality guidelines of the questionnaire as well as those questions which did not reach the target value Quality details for survey No 43010 SE Question Please grade the course altogether oo ara The course focus
367. igure 441 QM Views Special Search Configuration e Search This is the search mode in which you will use the table view e Field selection Here you can select those database fields you would like to use in your search e Sequence fields This allows you to determine or change the sequence of columns selected in field selection e Save search This function allows you to save the current search settings under a name you enter or to replace an existing search 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 339 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite e Delete search This function lets you remove self defined search settings Defining the Display and Search Fields Using Field selection in the option field will display the database fields defined for the current search In this example the fields are from the pre set default search The fields appear twice In the upper area the fields needed for the table view are marked In the lower area those fields appear which are to be searched using the Search field The selection of the search fields should include only those fields to be displayed Filter Selection Bin KS Standard Field Configuration Select query result fields Survey Description d Course Description Scanned Forms IV Enrollment mr ane Last name d Form Descnption vi Quality Index v Location Fl Firat i Subunit He i W First name Wi
368. il icon in the column Edit The known VividForms Editor opens but due to the limita tions of the template also indicated by the word Template in and above the header the active instructor trainer must not change the existing elements All the question groups questions and further elements show the annex T i e they are unchange able But the instructor trainer may add additional elements as long as the maximum number of pages and questions is not exceeded 182 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Goen Aummation Sui Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Quest_4 Evaluation Questionnaire Template EvaSys Evaluation Questionnaire Template W Electric Paper ORGANIZATION AUTHOR SUBUNIT SURVEY PERIOD Mark as shown ogoogo MARK Correction OM ORO CORRECTION II Dear participants we are very interested in your opinion concermig the course you are currently visiting Please take some time to fill in this questionnaire You will help us improve our courses Thank you very much T General information T You are T O female O male Your Age T 0 18 29 0 30 39 O 40 49 L150 Figure 202 Template Questionnaire The new elements must be added to a new question group a sort of chapter of the questionnaire as is usual when working with the VividForms Editor That entails that an active instructors trainers must first of all decide where to add a new question group
369. il with cover Display questionnaire Display personalized Delete sheet to instructor as PDF cover sheet survey Figure 91 Survey Status Cover sheet procedure In Progress Hard Copy Procedure 0 s511 3 Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle NA_1 In Progress CH Quest_01 SE a A a Send email with questionnaire Display personalized Delete to instructor trainer questionnaire as PDF survey Figure 92 Survey Status Hard copy procedure In Progress Online Survey in Progress OQ Quest_01 Show PSWDs x J 38 Send emails with PSWDs to survey participants Show online Download Delete Send email with PSWD document to intstructors survey preview PSWDs geg i System Settings EvaSys Settings Email Functions amp Accounts Delivery method PSWDs 1 System Settings EvaSys Settings Email Functions amp Accounts Delivery method PSWDs 2 Figure 93 Survey Status Online survey In Progress Survey Status Verification ws10 11 A Verifier Sample Survey Display questionnaire Display survey details as PDF Figure 94 Survey Status Verfication Web Verifier 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 107 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Green Automation Suite Survey Status Data available Data entry Send email with questionnaire cover Display questionnaire Download Reset Close open sheet to instructor trainer as PDF export files survey survey atus E 2 ms Procesa DS An el Am j Repor
370. ilable Questionnaires Show all questionnaires of the Subunit Administrators V Show deactivated questionnaires at the end of the listing including module questionnaires Peter Brown ID Name Description Date Engine Status Action 295 General General Questions 05 23 2011 VF Editor S seect 18 Non_Anonym Evaluation 05 22 2009 VF Editor Q 3 Select v 259 Quest_01 Evaluation Questionnaire 05 05 2009 VF Editor 9 Select 261 Quest_3 Evaluation Questionnaire 05 12 2011 VF Editor Q J Select Questionnaire on Technical 293 Tech_01 Skills 05 16 2011 VF Editor Q 9 Select v 296 Trainer Trainer Questionnaire 05 23 2011 VF Editor 3 Select v 243 train 01 Course Evaluation 06 04 2009 VF Editor Select v Questionnaire 244 train_02 Ge EEN 05 05 2009 VF Editor 3 Select v uestionnaire 245 train_en oe SE 05 18 2011 VF Editor 4 Select v uestionnaire 297 XL279XWT EvaSys Basic Training 05 23 2011 VF Editor WY Select w Figure 458 Display Module Questionnaires in the List of Questionnaires By clicking on the name of the questionnaire you can access its details and define fur ther settings for your survey for example change the online design edit the text tem plates etc After all settings have been done the survey can be conducted just like any other paper or online survey in EvaSys i e print or email questionnaires or PSWDs scan forms etc 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 351 EvaSy
371. imit the available options 390 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor ff Question Wizard Define Options en Option B J U Add option Option List because am interested in the topic o A because need to earn the credit hours o because the instructor is really good 4 because is important for my professional life a for the preparation of my exam Ti L se 1 Nex Appi Canet Figure 518 Multiple Choice Question Enter the Answer Possibilities In the Editor preview multiple choice questions are marked with a red MC This is of course not visible in the PDF 3 Questions about the course attend the course check as many as apply LJ because am interested in the topic O because need to earn the credit D because the instructor is really hours good O because it is important for my O for the preparation of my exam O for other reasons professional life Figure 519 Multiple Choice Question in the Editor Preview 2 6 5 Horizontal Matrix Question The horizontal matrix question enables you to display five digit numbers Select the matrix field question type and click on Next You can now enter the text of the question Then click on Next In the next window select the matrix question type horizontal or vertical the mini mum and maximum value the number of groups in the PD
372. in 8 Data sets found b i _Systemiogins the system bi Verifier Demo Import survey O Import courses with multiple course IDs ma ivii orme Den participant data Import SE Export existing survey Central Evaluation particinants as a CSV S Tree Structure file H e E waere i m 6 ressilha i Delete all survey Delete j Display Surveys participant data wl Delete Surveys LB Instructors Copal pe Shion e Batch Events GE Display Courses Scheduled Tasks SC E Date import Figure 63 Menu Data Import The administration of survey participants is in the bottom section of the window The number of participant data sets currently in the system is shown in the top line of the table With the button Browse in the section Import survey participant data an already prepared CSV file can be selected and uploaded with the button Import The participants data is now automatically assigned to the course that is linked to the course ID A CSV list of all participant data sets in the system can be opened with the button Export in the section Export existing survey participants as a CSV file This can be useful if the list of the current participants should be revised and then imported again Existing data sets for a course are expanded but are not overwritten If they are to be overwritten then the participant data must be deleted from the system beforehand All nexuses between courses and email addresses can be deleted from the
373. ine surveys from the menu System Information Sample files e Upload the PDF template in the menu Documents area PDF templates Attach the PDF template to the text template PDF Certificate for participation in online surveys in the menu System Settings Text Templates global resp in the details of a questionnaire menu Advanced Settings Text Templates per question naire In case of using online surveys you have the possibility to permit your participants after closing an online survey to look at the results report with their PSWD HTML Report You can decide if you permit the access to open questions too Advanced Configuration Participants of online surveys who submit their survey can be directed to a specific internet site Here an optional password can be conveyed which ensures that the page to be accessed can only be reached by those people who have actually taken part in an online survey In this way incentives to increase response rates such as raffling prizes or the like can be implemented without the risk of abuse from unauthor ized people To activate questionnaire specific forwarding click on the Edit button The window for questionnaire specific forwarding for online surveys opens automatically Here you can e deactivate the questionnaire specific forwarding In this case the setting in the menu System Settings EvaSys Settings Survey Online Alternative forwarding for o
374. inesurvey css __ organizationheader phtml pagination phtml _ submitted phtml _ surveyheader phtml Figure 149 Content of the Folder onlinedefault Each part of your online survey is available for you to modify it the login screen the way pagination is dealt with the header the content of the form etc Most important the CSS style sheet onlinesurvey css allows you to modify almost everything as each object of the online survey layout is described by a style In the subfolder element you find files describing how each question type single choice scaled question multiple choice question and so on will be displayed In the subfolder partial you will find how errors and warnings such as please fill in this required field or only numbers are allowed in this field will be displayed You can add further files you would like to integrate into your template You can also create several other folders here like for instance the folder images where you can save files specifically needed for your template Note You might just modify some of the files and not all of them When a file is missing in your custom template folder EvaSys is using default instead so you do not have to import files you did not edit 146 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys To have EvaSys load your template zip the content of you
375. influence on the indicator than questions with a higher number of valid answers Your questionnaire contains for example a question group Instructor trainer with the following three scaled questions for clarity reasons fewer questions than displayed above are used Question 1 The instructor masters his field Question 2 The instructor openly takes on board questions and comments Question 3 The instructor knows how to present the topic interestingly You hereby use a scale with six response options with the bad values lying to the left and the best values to the right To question 1 the following five valid responses are given here for clarity reasons also an unusually small number 3 4 2 5 4 Average of this question 8 4 2 5 4 5 3 60 For question 2 a respondent put two crosses this answer is therefore invalid The following four valid responses remain 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 237 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite 1 4 2 4 Average of this question 1 4 2 4 4 2 75 Question 3 was ticked only three times the other two respondents did not give a response These three answers are valid and read 5 6 5 Average of this question 5 6 5 3 5 33 Now an indicator is calculated for this question group EvaSys needs the responses to the corresponding scaled questions for that adds them and divides them by the total number Indicator 3 44 2
376. ing cover sheets and forms and not for sending them If you want to print your questionnaires double sided you can also activate the option Batch printing Duplex printing in the menu System Settings EvaSys Settings Func tions Then the PDF document will contain blank pages which are necessary for dou ble sided printing i e after a cover sheet or with questionnaires with an odd number of pages Surveys in hard copy procedure have the option to include all the questionnaires needed in the PDF document and to number them serially When each questionnaire has its own number then the consistency of each data set during scanning can be guaranteed This is especially important when your form has a number of pages Should the pages get mixed up when scanning a batch then the unique number on each questionnaire will allow them to be correctly sorted The number of questionnaires for printing is based on the number of participants If this information is missing then a default value can be entered into the entry field You can now use the batch print feature without needing the serial number hard copy procedure if you deactivate the option Add serial number for automatic sorting This is useful in case you are unable to prevent forms being duplicated during the sur vey process and you need to collect all data despite having multiple identical serial number IDs Print only master versions of cover sheets and questionnaires
377. ing the PDF reports via the Process Defaults deans managers of the discipline subunit receive a copy of the instant report Dean manager s copy open ended questions The dean s manager s copy of the instant report contains responses to open ended questions Archive mailing of evaluation reports If activated a copy of each email concerning reports will be send to the configured archive address compare configuration Email address of the archive This applies to the reports of the central and decentral evaluation as well as to the profile lines sent by the report creator Email address of the archive Defines the recipient address of the email archive function Maximum number of attachments The maximum number of email attachments Maximum size of attachments The maximum size of attachments in MB concerning the mailing of PDF reports Emails in HTML Format If this function is activated emails are sent in HTML format You can then use HTML tags in the text templates for formatting and linking 2 5 9 Section Color Settings Preset color scheme All colors will be replaced by a preset color scheme Background color contents This setting determines the background color of the content area 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 491 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management Background color external This setting determines the background color of the external area Table lin
378. ingle courses are surveyed with a trainer ques tionnaire course type Module trainer A secondary instructor trainer is assigned to each course who will later on receive the report on his part of the survey IP Courses of John Doe Number Coursename EZ Censep NNN Cpe Location Participants Language Location SCC Actions EvaSys Basic ee Module is Training General Ws ALE General 4 x R Donna Harwood i 77 Introduction into 02 continuous E 0 w F a EvaSys j Samantha Miller Module S Advanced Reporting LG Gebees Trainer 0 v R Peter Huddle 79 Norming and 04 continuous a 0 Di a Paphos rainer Quality Guidelines Create new course Back Figure 455 Module courses in the course list 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 349 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model 7 7 Generating a Module Surveys The generation of module surveys is done using the function Subunits Generate Sur veys Select the checkbox Switch to Module Surveys to show selections for mod ules You may generate either paper or online surveys Questionnaires System Settings System Information agit IV Generate Surveys 1 Subunit Compular Scences 3 Module Eva Basse Iraning Subunits ED Overview ica Computer Scene E Economies bh Engineering b Professional De b i _Oata Entry Dem Cd _ Systema gins 7 Switch to Module Surveys fe Verifier
379. ion e Sender part 1 2 and 3 Organization name part1 mail address part2 and footer part3 below the mail address e Sender above recipient address Sender name on cover letter in PDF report e Background color report heading Color setting in order to adjust logo background color e Color progression in the report header If this function is activated then the background color in the header of the report starts at the set background color and lightens gradually towards the top of the page If this function is deactivated then the background color remains consistent e Alignment of subunit logo Defines whether the subunit logo will be at the left or right in the PDF report e Hide overall indicator If this option is activated the overall indicator will not be displayed e Left pole for indicators Text for the left pole of the indicators Default value of the left pole is The pole is also displayed in the presentation template e Right pole for indicators Text for the right pole of the indicators Default value of the right pole is The pole is also displayed in the presentation template e Display Cronbach s Alpha Activates deactivates the computation of Cronbach s Alpha internal consistency for indicators Please note that Calculate indicators must be activated e Show legend Display legend in PDF report e Values legend Values given in the legend The number of values must match the scale divisi
380. ion Suite aah AA ia IEN HCP prhe Loes _ _ ene Era ee CR iTe FS em em ep b LR r f mE TETT GC Le y Ceti TEW CIUNE C U CE L A EE ep A rai 4 E i ZS d Se SE NR DIS ai Sei A k h 1 A WW D ee Oe eee ee H r ut i e an py b T t b i SESCH pease Gree Eevee mer A Zeien dees Ep ae fe le ete mant r II STE SEL de D D L a PGTI Malata Ze gt T Om en V LARKAKUK J OAA a P vie L Video C We AE K i d bh ad Ind Figure 423 Define Frequency Based Quality Guideline In the following figure 55 5 33 3 22 2 have ticked the values 5 or 6 in response to the question The instructor is always well prepared Therefore a green traffic light symbol in the PDF report indicates that the target value was met n ng sipao iao a LE 0 0 O 44 4 33 3 222 The instructor handles the technical equipment video Am um m9 a projector etc without any problems S mi5 dev 0 8 Figure 424 Frequency Based Quality Guideline Traffic Light 6 2 2 Converting Indicators into Quality Guidelines If you have defined indicators for your questionnaire already you can use these in order to save work when defining quality guidelines EvaSys can convert question groups for which you have set indicators automatically into quality guidelines it allo cates the questions corresponding to the question group to the respective quality guideline Like this the
381. ion click on Cancel After the mailing process is complete the system will show a listing of successful and unsuccessful submissions All outgoing email will be logged under Deliveries in the menu System Settings 162 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Archive PDF Reports and CSV Raw Data Your existing PDF reports and CSV raw data can be archived by sending them to the email address defined in the configuration System Settings EvaSys Settings Email Functions amp Accounts Email address of the archive In this way legacy data can be exported with a complete audit trail and subsequently deleted from EvaSys increas ing and maintaining clarity of the system During the export you can determine whether just PDF reports or CSV data or both are to be archived This option is only available if you have activated the archive function of the batch events in the menu System Settings EvaSys Settings Email Functions amp Accounts Archive mailing of PDF reports and entered a valid email address in the menu Sys tem Settings EvaSys Settings Email Functions amp Accounts Email address of the archive Send PSWDs to Instructors Trainers For online surveys the PDF files containing the PSWD codes can be sent to the sur vey owners by email This option is only available if you have selected the option 2 PDF lists of PSWDs for printing and dist
382. ions in Search In EvaSys VW e Subunits Questionnaires System Settings Jaton Survey Automatia Suite em Y SC EvaSys Searchmask Search Query Search In Users Courses Peter Brown surveys Administrator Delveres Search Information H j Send Email Figure 587 Searchmask For the search text you may use the following operators Without operator day Entering day as a search term leads you to day Monday Daytona daylight Wild card characters are automatically placed before and after the search term 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 433 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management The same as the search term day or day The search term day will just return day Alternatively you can use day In con trast to day tday can be expanded by an asterisk that is day which also returns the term Daytona Exclude a term day Monday Returns day Tuesday Daytona etc but not Monday Greater than gt 10 Returns number entries that are greater than 10 Smaller than gt 10 Returns number entries that are smaller than 10 You can combine more than one search term e g day Henry Maria searches for text passages in which the terms day and Henry but not Maria are found 1 1 1 Searching for Users Searches for users are conducted in the
383. is user type to be able to work you must under the properties of this sub unit in Handling handwritten text set the option Show after manual collection A user license is not necessary for the data entry assistant 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 51 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite You can define individual access rights for each data entry assistant e own subunit data entry assistant has only access to handwritten comments of all surveys proceeded in own subunit e multiple subunits data entry assistant has access to handwritten comments of all surveys proceeded in the selected subunits Multiple selections of subunits can be made by pressing and holding down the Ctrl key e system level data entry assistant has access to handwritten comments of all sur veys proceeded in EvaSys As an Administrator you set this value when creating the relevant user account As soon as you create a data entry assistant a particular setting in the user rights step three of three allows you to define the data entry assistant as systemwide system level subunit groups own subunit and selection of further subunits or only subunit wide own subunit 2 Change the user rights Data access own subunit Assign additional subunits Computer Sciences Engineering Professional Development canstation Demo Subunit _Data Entry Demo Subunit _Verifier Demo Subunit _
384. it not appear in the verification e From low to middle reading reliability Only ICR questions that the Reader has rec ognized with low to medium reading reliability are displayed in the verification e Only when reading reliability is low Only ICR questions that the Reader has recog nized with low reading reliability are displayed in the verification All other ques tions medium to high reading reliability are not displayed in the verification This option is suitable when the verification requirements should be as low as possible and when under certain circumstances incorrectly read values can be accepted The characters that have been securely read in the verification are highlighted in white while those that have been insecurely read are highlighted in yellow speeding up verification date IS MO BOs Figure 513 Open question ICR fields in the verification 388 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Siirvay Auidmatiin Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor By clicking the button Apply the open question is inserted into the questionnaire 1 Questions about you Date moar ra RR Wa ee e a E e Oe AC ih amp it E E g ge E LC 0 E E E amp amp Figure 514 Open Question Segmented Fields in the Editor Preview If you create a survey with a questionnaire which contains open questions with hand writing recognition the verification is automa
385. iterion that is a question for example the gender and a value for the criterion meaning the corresponding response option to the question here for example Male Then you assign a relevant name decide for or against the inclusion of the open questions in the subgroup report and click on the button Create The subgroup report now appears in the list of reports HTML Subgroup Male from Report of Train en Data available S trainen 05 18 2011 t1 amp choose pdf report CSV SPHINX Figure 340 Report Creator Subgroup Report in the Report List Please note Subgroup reports are identified by a logo different from that of the other reports the remaining options are however identical So you could again create for example subgroups from this report for example grade level and or merge this report with further evaluations Combining Multiple Criteria In order to summarize the results of different criteria such as Gender Registered Major Subject and Target Degree in a subgroup report you can use criteria combi nations These offer you the possibility of creating a subgroup report with several cri teria i e with multiple questions To create a subgroup report with several criteria click as you are accustomed in the details of a report on Evaluate subgroup the last option on the bottom right Subse quently a Window opens offering you all possible questions with which you can eval uat
386. iting on questionnaires 423 Password based online survey 102 153 PDF PDF report header 468 Template for letter in PDF reports 461 PDF report 220 cucu Onaga d EN E ward 205 Components of the PDF report 206 CronbacheAlnha eee eee 242 Designing an individually configured letter for sending DONS daa ke aes 2 ee bas oe are Ses 232 Individually designed reports 230 PDF report definitions 0 226 PDF report header 213 Sending of reports 00 ee eee 233 PDF templates 471 PDF A 1b EENEG 205 Performance considerations 449 Performance statistic 008 449 Period of evaluation 40 Phase 3 Capture and instant feedback 188 Phase Model Phase 1 Preparation of asurvey period 39 Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys 99 Phase model 37 Phase 3 Capture and instant feedback 188 Phase 4 Advanced reporting 008 236 Phase 5 Quality Management 314 Picture Adding pictures to a questionnaire 403 Place holder Editing the place holders on the questionnaire header 370 Pole labels inclined noaua uaaa ee 398 Preparation of a survey period 39 President Report for the president 299 Preview of online surveys 046 127 Process Defaults 474 Profile comparison 00000 e e
387. ive instructors trainers also in the Central Evaluation the opportunity to create their own individual questions for the questionnaires for their courses To use the instructor s optional questions you should activate the template mode in the VividForms questionnaire and set the maximum number of pages and possible elements whereby every item that can be selected is an element e g question groups question image and also line spaces or separators You can also set that an instructor trainer is only allowed to add new elements at the end If these options are 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 155 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite not activated the instructor trainer can expand the questionnaire of the instructor s optional questions at any place with as many elements as desired Questionnaires System Settings System Information Sen i V L Instructor s Optional Questions Peter Brown ga Actwate Remind Deactivate Administrator Wi Sending emails to instructors Subunits F 8 1 Subunit 2 Survey Period 3 Course Type d Questionnaire ees Engineering a J bh Computar Scienc Professional Development WS 10 11 QGuest_3 bai Kg S505 Ham en K Tesora L Ka Wate Eniry Ger py 5 yalemiogina S _Verifier Dem _ Select program of study Central Evaluation 5 Course s TEA Human Resource Management 02 P1237
388. ividForms PluS 0 000000 0000eeuae 428 VividForms Plus questionnaire 430 R Recognition Automatic recognition set management 424 Barcode EE 191 OMRseactepeiess son as eave ok Oar enn 191 Recognition of the checked boxes 191 Recognition Set of the VividForms Reader 82 Remote Remote maintenance 14 16 Repair form 409 Report Advanced reporting 236 Components of the PDF report 206 Creating comparative profile lines 247 Creating reports 247 Gronbach s Alpha e 91 6 dae ww eae Oa 242 Designing an individually configured letter for sending DEER e E EE tenes gue are 232 Download of reports 233 Generating aggregated Reports 257 Individually designed reports 230 PDF repot sxe or vs co sear Ge we ten ah ct eer 205 PDF report definitions 226 PDF report header 213 468 Report Creator 247 Report for the dean aaaaaaaa aana 299 Report for the dean of studies 299 Report for the president 299 Sending of reports 233 Summary reports 257 Template for letter in PDF reports 461 The EvaSys report module Sphinx Plus 312 The user role of the report creator 247 Report creator 0 0 0 0 cee ee 247 Any compilation Tree structure 270 Creating a report creator 248 Required questions
389. ividForms Reader is not automatically stopped Before installing an update please ensure that no forms are being pro cessed and if necessary terminate the VividForms Reader Automatic update check This option determines the interval at which the system searches for automatic updates after the administrator has logged in When checking for updates data is transferred from the EvaSys system to the update server The following information is included the customer name the license key the current EvaSys version the default system language the current configured lan guage the product derivative the content of the configuration setting server root path the ID of the supplier as well as a unique ID for the update check process itself which is added for reasons of security All this information is SSL encrypted and used solely for technical purposes No personal data or captured data from your system is transmitted If you do not agree to the transfer of the above mentioned information simply deactivate this function Independent of this function you will be informed of available updates through other channels O deactivated 1 every 30 days 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 499 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management 2 every 7 days 3 after each login CSV export for blackening degrees in the verifier If this function is activated the verifier can export the blackening degrees
390. l cause other questions to be suppressed In an online survey suppressed questions will not appear or will be inac tive For paper surveys filter settings apply after processing i e retrospectively In this way the filters in the paper surveys have an effect on the report Validation By defining validations you can test entries to open questions and matrix fields in online surveys with value ranges and regular expressions before a survey participant can send the questionnaire Required questions Those questions of online surveys for which an answer is compulsory can be defined here Cross Tabulations The cross tabulations shown here will appear in the PDF report 86 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period Free Indicators It is possible to define indicators freely so that questions of different question groups can also serve as a basis for calculating an indicator In this way the elements of an indicator can be freely allocated across the questionnaire These so called free indi cators can be stored separately for each questionnaire and later displayed in the PDF report instead of the traditional indicators Languages Different languages can be stored for questionnaires in online surveys so that online survey participants can select questionnaires in different languages With paper ques tionnaires you must create several questionnaires and surveys whose
391. laceholder wizard will appear as shown here You can insert different placeholders in the text fields provided To do this click on the buttons which symbolize the relevant content with small graphics 370 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor Following placeholders are available in the icon list SUBUNIT Name of subunit ORGANIZATION Name of organization AUTHOR Name of instructor trainer SURVEY Name of course or survey PERIOD Name of survey period COURSEID Course ID In addition to these placeholders two text elements can be used to fill the box contain ing hints on completion MARK Filling instructions part 1 CORRECTION Filling instructions part 2 Apart from the placeholders that are available as buttons almost all further placehold ers for use in text templates can be used e g CUSTOMFIELD_X for the user defined course fields PROGRAMOFSTUDY for the program of study course etc A comprehensive list of all placeholders can be found in chapter D Only the following are excluded from use in questionnaire headers e all placeholders that apply to further report recipients secondary trainers e g SEC SURNAME_X e questionnaires that are used for paper surveys all placeholders that apply to online surveys e g TAN SERVER etc The placeholders can be manually placed in the entry field of a placeholder assistan
392. language attributes at a later point in time by selecting a language in the drop down Current Language editing the text and then saving the changes Language Options in Online Surveys You can display a questionnaire s translated languages in the HTML online survey The questionnaire always appears in the main language after authentification through the PSWD procedure Beneath the header data you will see the logos that have been defined as questionnaire languages By clicking the logo you change languages There is also a drop down menu with the name of each language After clicking the logo or selecting the language in the drop down menu the survey is displayed in the desired language A further authentication is not necessary EvaSys V gt ws Z gt 1 2 Electric Paper GG L LEGE Dear Participant We are very interested in your opinion about the course as well as about the university in general Therefore we would like to ask you to take the time read the questionnaire thoroughly and complete it Only your own judgement is important you cannot give wrong Of course the data is completely anonymous 1 Questions about you Which gender do you belong to Please select Figure 79 Languages Selection in Online Survey 94 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period 2 4 4 Question Library The question library is centrally administered i
393. lates must be in PDF format or converted into this format The templates in EvaSys are filled with data from the EvaSys system when the reports are generated In order to do this certain fields are necessary on the PDF A full ver sion of Adobe Acrobat V5 0 and higher is necessary to create the fields in PDF 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 471 EvaSys V System Settings and Management Goen Auncmation Sul mp De d VUn f i ps d EH l H gt i r SW E Max KE E Max Mustermann EvaSys Admuinistrator Figure 625 PDF Template Acrobat Professional View Schematic layout of template A letter template is made up of a static part logo sender other text an a dynamic part which is filled out by EvaSys depending on the report For the dynamic part there are three different fields available address This field is filled with data about the instructor trainer e g name address etc A placeholder determines which data appears The types of placeholders are described 472 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Configuration Settings in Section 2 1 3 Template for letter in PDF reports In Adobe Acrobat placeholders are defined in the text field at Options Default Value For example TO GENDER TITLE FIRSTNAME SURNAME confidential S d 221105 16 2 To CD cp cp Prof Dr Belmore bd T as private confidential
394. lder After having changed the login date and possibly created some questionnaires the active instructor trainer must create a study folder to be able to work reasonably The study folders structure the surveys of an active instructor trainer and shall therefore be created according to the use of the user account In the following there are named some possibilities for structuring a user account e Survey periods e g semester if the surveys of the active instructors trainers are repeated regularly e g Surveys SS07 Surveys WS07 08 Surveys SS08 etc e Survey types if the surveys are not repeated regularly but can be assigned to spe cific survey types Survey research project XY Survey empirical studies YZ etc e Student Participant projects if you allow that access Surveys Diploma John Doe Surveys Master Thesis Jane Doe Surveys PHD Thesis John Sample e Etc Of course you can combine several of those examples if suitable But please notice You cannot generate tree structures i e a folder within a folder is not possible To generate a new folder click the button Create new Folder 184 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Geen Auidmatiin Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys y Listing of folders Figure 205 Create New Folder In the following dialogue the active instructor trainer is asked for the name of the folder New folder Surveys 2011 ok Jl Gene Figure 206 Name
395. le com MAO5Con person04 example com MAO5Con person05 example com EE CSV files are independent of the operating system and can be generated in Windows for example with Microsoft Excel The used separator can be adjusted under EvaSys Settings Data Import and Export Separators CSV import and export For the allocation of the course participants email addresses to the respective course it is essential that the course id is unique system wide If several courses were to be found in EvaSys with the same id then the addresses from the CSV file would not be 2011 Electric Paper GmbH TT EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite related to any course However with the activation of the option Import courses with multiple course ID this allocation can be forced In this case every course found will have the same email addresses attached to it To perform a CSV import of participant data open the menu Subunit Data Import EvaSys iV Questionnaires System Settings System Information Search 544 H e Cu Buneary ACTA Sune Data Import Peter Brown Amines rato XML Import for subunits instructors courses and modules ebe Load XML File Browse_ Irport Ei Overview Mote You cen find the CSV import for instructors in the appropriate Subunit iv Co Ce Le P e Er iesma bw Scanstation Dem Number of existing bd _Date Entry Dern suwey participants
396. les with the aid of placeholders a naming convention can be depos ited By default the following placeholders are used SUBUNIT SURNAME FIRSTNAME SURVEYID SURVEY The following placeholders are available eege Meaning Bm FIRSTNAME Forename offrsvucor Max A DATE Date in ISO syntax 2011 03 08 ISO_ DATETIME Date with time in ISO format 2011 03 08116 19 20 Date given according to the date 10 12 2010 091853 TIMESTAMP and time format configured in Evasys CURRENTDATE Date given according to the date 10 12 2010 format configured in EvaSys Figure 171 Placeholder Special characters are filtered out of the filenames and spaces are replaced by under scores When defining the naming conventions the following characters and special characters may be used e All letters and numbers e Round brackets Parenthesis e Square brackets e Hyphen e Comma e Period or full stop dot e Equals sign e Underscore _ 164 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Send PDF Reports You can determine that an instructor trainer receives all evaluations of his courses accumulated in one email To do this please activate the option Reports of all courses of an instructor or trainer collected in one email Should this not be the case the instructor trainer will receive a separate email for each course Please obse
397. les the technical equipment video up projector etc without any problems Figure 421 Traffic Light in a PDF Report Lower Threshold Value Upper Threshold Value Weighting Question 1 Question 2 Question 3 Question 4 Question 1 80 se a Quality absolute Quality mm mm Table 13 Example Calculation of Quality Guidelines when Higher Values Are Better Question 2 Q Index 1 Result B Question 3 Question 4 Q overall O G The values in the top half shaded yellow are the values from the quality guideline that you set individually when creating the guideline For each quality guideline you set the weighting in relation to the overall quality index QG 1 25 You can then assign any number of scaled questions to each quality guideline QG 1 two questions For these questions you also define a lower and upper threshold value as well as how much this question contributes to the quality guideline in percent Question 1 lower threshold value 3 upper threshold value 4 a proportion of 25 No esch m D O zi O 0 o D O 3 E SS GA N GA EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model In the lower half of the table shaded green you see the results of your questions The question 1 for example reached a mean of 3 8 The absolute quality is calculated according to the following formula observed mean low
398. lete all email addresses by clicking on Delete all Displaying Courses The function Display courses in the main menu Subunits under Central evalua tion offers an overview of the courses of an entire subunit Here along with the access to respective properties the period affiliation of a large number of courses can be defined here After clicking on Display courses select a subunit and an survey period Then click on Display A table appears showing the identification data of the identified courses By clicking on the respective column headers this table can be sorted as you wish whereby the order alternates between ascending and descending By clicking on the icon a course can be edited Clicking on this icon 2 will delete a course 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 71 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite System Settings System information EvaSys iV Questionnaires een Ki As are Auman Sue E Display Courses Computer Sciences Ni i Engineering lt 4 Display Courses Professional Development Show Peter Brown _Systemingins Airave trator Subunits Courses for each period n F ier d Ip inerctear Secondary Rees Course Number ef e E Carer erat ie Ges kal d Ee D Overview _Type Course name CourseID_ Instructor Tee Period Zen Type Participants surveys Actions Kl Computer Scienc A EvasysExerises 0
399. lete batch 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 195 EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model f Current forms in Verifier Form Description Pages Sheets se wey _ Cover sheet Verification Tech_01 Questionnaire on Technical Skills 1 6 A Ai 2 7 YO g train 01 Course Evaluation Questionnaire 2 T ad a P E x Selection for automatic verification SSS Sey No valid checkbox found invalid One checkmark and correction s found Figure 220 Verification Form View 4 3 4 Carrying out the Verification As soon as you click on the Process symbol green pencil in a view you will be auto matically taken to the correction view In the correction view there is always a question to be verified You work through the questions one by one until you are finished verify ing all the questions in the batch or in the survey or in the form m Reader errors and wamings amp Question has more valid answers than permitted _ 36 49 Figure 221 Verification Processing Status and Messages The current processing status is shown in a bar in the upper left corner of the screen The green area symbolizes the questions that have already been corrected while the red area shows the number still to be corrected The number of questions is also shown Left of the bar graph you can see the status messages from VividForms Reader The three most common alarm signals are
400. level defined in parameters Excluding Questions from the Presentation When you activate the option Remove certain questions from profile line s and click on Request the questions of the questionnaire are displayed prior to the dispatch or download so that you can exclude individual questions from the presentation of the profile line Of course only those questions that can also appear in the profile line are presented meaning only questions regarding the standard value and scaled questions Questionnaire Comparison Result Choice train_en 7 What is the grade of your last school graduation The instructor is always well prepared The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way The instructor handies the technical equipment video projector etc without any problems Please grade the instructor for this course poor very good The lead time of the course is adequate Strongly dis agree Strongly agree Figure 382 Report Creator Profile Line Emails Option Remove certain questions from profile line s Adding Trend Graphic If you have defined indicators for the relevant questionnaire you can display a trend graphic in addition to the profile line For this purpose mark the option Add trend graphic for indicators to the profile line as far as corresponding data is available over several survey periods The trend graphic shows you a course of time of the averages for indic
401. lick on the button Convert quality guidelines from norms Course Evaluation Questionnaire EE Figure 431 Button Convert quality guidelines from norms After you have clicked on the button Convert quality guidelines from norms a new window opens showing your questionnaire with all question groups and the scaled questions that were assigned to them as well as the mean and standard deviation of the norm base The conversion of the dimensions question groups of the norm base into quality guidelines is conducted as the conversion view is accessed Initially all questions within a question group are weighted equally within the quality guideline Select a norm set as basis under Base norm in the header area This norm set needs to be already there for the norms of this questionnaire The guidelines are listed with the respective questions belonging to them underneath On the right the norm base mean avg the norm base standard deviation dev as well as the lower and upper threshold are shown for each question Initially the default settings of the threshold values correspond to the norm base mean avg Now the factor for the positive and negative threshold can be selected in the drop down list in the header area 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 333 EvaSys YV Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Giiruay Asmal Sukk Conversion of Normings l Legend Positive threshold o Siss threshold o
402. locate for which question naires the PDF report is to be valid A multiple selection can be made by pressing the Ctrl button In the details of each questionnaire you define the PDF report with which the corresponding questionnaire will be displayed later also see the following para graphs Save your changes by clicking the OK button Clicking the Cancel button closes the window without saving any changes You can delete the respective PDF report by clicking on the red cross in the delete column The second way is by restricting the content of the PDF report as well as defining the subreports and special report recipients If you have a questionnaire built up out of modules you can use report definitions to automatically create PDF reports for each module These partial reports can also then be sent automatically to one or more recipients by email PDF report definitions are always defined for each questionnaire and then are valid for every survey created with this questionnaire Define Report Definitions Just choose the option PDF Reports in the drop down list in the details of the corre sponding questionnaire area Advanced Settings Subsequently click on Edit The following window opens automatically 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 227 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Guetta Suite EvaSys y ge Subunits System Settings System Informatior een V Spee Z nn Sg Skier Ges Ge PDF report
403. look like this Your Zipcode K ds 1 WoO 2ROOOO sO OMANO ATI sSJIOOO0 sIOOO0 70000m s0D0000 sQOOOO MIOOOO Figure 524 Completed Vertical Matrix Question 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 393 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Creating Questionnaires with VividForms 2 6 7 Grade Value Select the grade value question type and click on Next You can now enter the ques tion text and then click on Apply What is the grade of your last school graduation H A O E A Slslelsfsieleleieie Figure 525 Grade Value in the PDF Preview The survey participant can now give a grade by checking a place before and after the decimal point The advantage of this method is that the high accuracy of checkboxes makes it unnecessary to use ICR for handprint recognition which would mean a considerable amount of review and correction Please note that only values between 1 0 and 5 0 will be considered 394 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Green duet Suita Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor 2 Adapting the Size of Answer Boxes You can change the size of your answer boxes in the VividForms Editor under Form properties You have five sizes 8pt 9pt 10pt 11pt and 12pt to choose from Form Properties Layout settings Repair form Enable numbering Edit Pole Template Filter settings Validation Required questions Cross tabulation S Change color scheme Picture Lib
404. luded and the other way round as you can see in the figure below Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Management Strategies Subunit Professional Development T Name of the instructor Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Name of the course Management Strategies Name of the survey Comparative line Carlos Hernandez Comparative line Prof Development WS10 11 Name of the course Organization and Management a Name of the survey a The instructor is always well prepared A um ie a The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way iii A ma vi av 3 6 The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector ete mm wee um Wats without any problems z i a 3 7 Please grade the instructor for this course poor LE Lat very good peer E av 3 8 The lead time of the course is adequate Strongly dis Strongly agree EE agree EES The course focuses on the current professional discussion Strongly dis Strongly agree nay agree av 3 8 The course perfectly prepares me for my professional life Strongly dis Strongly agree SCH agree av 3 6 Figure 375 Report Creator Profile Line Emails Compare Selected Courses with Each Other If you do not activate the option Comparison of the selected courses of reports to each other the number of eligible courses is unlimited But then the profile lines will not be shown in one and the same diagram 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 293 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The
405. lumn beside the green and red circles then this means that data is available for this survey that has not yet been incorpo rated into the quality guidelines calculation This can be the case if for example the online survey data has been entered but the PDF report has not yet been opened Click the icon to calculate the quality guidelines for this survey The quality guidelines are now newly calculated for this survey man Hu OOO Resource a lear 2er GE 20 R ee SE 11 04 12 P 412 There is new data available for this survey which has not yet been incorporated inthe PPF quality guidelines calculation Click here to update the calculation for this survey Dever pmen T i L ee ae T Pos GOOO Resource 1 erg 43010 2010518 w lay Eco 15 30 02 i P 412 Management Figure 440 QM Views New Calculation for Single Surveys 6 2 6 Definition of Special Search and Table Configurations In order to build a table according to your own specifications you can define searches yourself and save them One of these self defined searches can then be saved as the new default search When you next login at EvaSys this self defined default search will automatically be used To define a search use the menu Options to arrive at all the necessary functions These are Filter Selection Standard we Search el 50 Show Search Field selection Search Result Field order Save search Delete search SS SS SS F
406. lution is the questionnaire comparison via the option Ques tion mapping of different questionnaires in the report creator Question mapping of different questionnaires Automatic with text comparison Manual Figure 301 Report Creator Question Mapping of Different Questionnaires Whenever you compile reports that are based on different questionnaires here you must select whether to have the questionnaires compared automatically or want to assign them manually In either case it is important that the questionnaires are com parable meaning that they are similar e The automatic assignment is advisable when the questionnaires are nearly identi cal for example when only one question was added such as in the first exam ple The questionnaires are compared with each other by pure string comparison In computer science a string is a sequence of letters and special characters i e a Character string EvaSys thus lays the character strings over one another and checks them for identity Decisive is therefore the number of different characters in the questions and the level of marking When you choose Automatic with text comparison a page opens where you can view the result of the text comparison The left questionnaire is the basis questionnaire the wording of which is carried over into the report 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 255 Se Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model EvaSys V 2
407. ly blind or poor sight users Consequently specific functions were created that would help you to create code that makes your online surveys avail able for all people 148 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys pg class hidden gt SsADAQ0ptiontex1 lt php global pole def amp e abstention fehlen value Sthis gt getValue Sname this gt gqetName Slabel Sthis gt getLabel preapare inputfields and abstention SsAbstention SsInputarea SsLeftPoleText Sthis gt getLeftPole SsRightPoleText Sthis gt getRightPole Sshbstentionlext Sthis gt getAbstention SsQuestionText Sthis gt getLabel j So asPoleDefExtended array Sa0ptions this gt getMultiOptions i foreach S a0ptions as SoptionValue gt Ss0ptionCaption Schecked fi if is null value 4 value optionValue Schecked checked checked SsOptionname Sname TT SoptionValue SsiInput lt input type radio id Ss0ptionname name name y SsADAOptiontext Sthis gt getADAOptiontext SoptionValue SsiInput e lt label for Ss0ptionname switch SoptionValue case 1 Sshbstention SsInput Sthis gt getAbstention i break default SsInputarea sInput break Sthis gt placePartial errormessages lt div class item vie this gt getCS5Classa gt gt lt label gt lt lab
408. manager General Settings First you must select a general setting Choose a subunit a survey period and a ques tionnaire and then click on Continue gt gt Report Creation A Computer Sciences e W112 o DEMOFORM a gt Basic setting for result Ern Eea train_01 z Continue gt Engineering E train_2 Soe reports ie iene AEN Data Entry Demo Subunit e WS0S 10 train_en_1 Figure 385 Additional Reports Basic Settings 300 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Survey Automation Suite Report Creation Computer Sciences a Economics Basic setting for Engineering result reports Professional Development Data Entry Demo Subunit aoe 7 WOU mi Parameters Subunit Professional Development 0 Period WS10 11 Questionnaire train_en Report for the President Download report on all subunits Rep ort for the Dean Professional Development Download Choose a subunit of the dean to display the report for Peter Brown Report for the Dean of Studies wens ee Download Choose a dean to create the report for a Figure 386 Additional Reports Generating aggregated Reports The general setting can always be selected again at the bottom of the screen gener ating reports and applied with Next Report for the President Report for the Preside
409. mbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting 3 75 3 7 2 9 3 3 45 The overall indicator is therefore 3 45 It is a reference to the survey s overall result On the basis of your scale a scale with six options and the assessment positives on the right you can now recognize for example that the result sits to the right from the middle therefore it is relatively good o SOS In order to really be able to interpret the indicators produced one must know how other surveys turned out For this you can fall back on norming 5 1 2 Activating the Indicators in the Configuration If you wish to utilize the calculation of indicators you must first activate them in the configuration of each PDF report For this purpose you call up the option Configuration in the menu System Settings Report Settings Please bear in mind that you have to define the configuration for each of your PDF reports There you find the setting Calculate indicators which you can activate and deacti vate If you activate the calculation of the indicators here the indicator and standard devia tion are displayed at the beginning of the PDF report as a bar diagram On the margin you can also see both of them as numerical data _ Overall indicators 2 Questions about the instructor Sc 1 2 3 4 5 6 DEE ee SCH 0 6 W 1 2 3 4 5 6 4 Questions about the teaching material C I I I H
410. mber Address Institute Number Email Login name Password Password repeat QM Views Additional Subunits Form Editor Content Mr Mrs Ms or neutral Max 50 characters optional field In the report document the combination Title2 Surname will appear Max 50 characters optional field Max 50 characters non optional field Max 100 characters optional field User defined three lines recommended optional field This field is used as the internal email address in the Central Evaluation server version Self registering version and has no function when the standard user profile decentral or the Standard version is used Max 6 numerical characters This field is used for the subunit classification in the Central Evaluation server version self registering procedure and has no function for the standard user profiles decentral or the Standard procedure Max 100 characters optional field EvaSys sends all messages to the user at this email address e g PDF reports for processed questionnaires Max 50 characters non optional field This field must be unique across the system i e it may be only used once Max 50 characters non optional field Max 50 characters non optional field No QM views Only own surveys Only own subunit Full authorization Additional subunits can be added to QM views QM views has to be set to Only own subunit Unrestricted Templates only No acces
411. me of the survey the questionnaire module i e the questionnaire as well as the course type The survey name is also a link which provides access to the surveys of the relevant instructor trainer account Type Enter the content of the delivery e g default report activate template or cover sheet Recipient The recipient is also the owner of a instructor trainer account In addition the name of the subunit is given in which the instructor trainer account is located The instructor trainer name is also a link which provides access to his or her user profile Address The target email address or the internal email address to which the report will be sent When the internal email address is used only in the self registering pro 438 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Management and Summary cedure then reports that are ready for delivery must be accessed through the internal email printing account Method Symbolizes the method of transmission This is either email letter symbol or internal email paper symbol Sent Tells whether the report has been sent or printed green checkmark A blue means that the report has neither been sent nor downloaded Delivery on Date of the email delivery or internal email printing download With the red X symbol you can delete individual entries The settings in the head of the table allow you to refine your search queries f OK
412. ment H course Types CH Periods D Custom Teles lg Process Defauis General Settings Colors Navigation Question Types 5 rme ree ein Screen background color Language Sein E rn GH FFFFFF 2 K F This color will be used as the screen s background color Prones Logo background color ah Wu Profi BFFFFFF H S This color will be used as the logo s background color aa Adnmisiratora aaaaaaaaaaaaaussaaiasssssssssssiIaIssssIMIMSM EH Organization Survey header background color m r rA i FFFFFF _ This color will be used as the survey headers background color Curent Users m Survey header fom color Legged i 000000 E 3 This color will be used as the survey header e font color Ka Onine Sumaya H _ Questionnaire background color Figure 9 Color Setting of Online Templates It is also possible to set a high contrast color scheme for the administration interface 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 21 EvaSys iw Preparation and General Notes Survey Automation Suite Vad Iw Subunits System Information a EvaSys Y ubunits ystem Information 554 vi Advanced Peter Brown Preset color scheme All colors will be replaced by a preset color scheme Instruments i 3 7 Were fue option ausatafar m Background color contents DEE3EA Z This setting determines the background color of the content area f IER r Ae ke La Ti ake ie
413. mp Philipp Belmore h amp 3 Donna Harwood Figure 39 Active Belmore and Passive Harwood User Account lf a user account is deactivated then the individual will not be able to login to the Eva Sys server If he does try to log in then he will see a message that his account has been blocked by the administrator An exception is the deactivation of the dean manager s account The dean manager can log on to the system if the administrator has allowed him access to the QM Views Furthermore it is possible to give all deactivated instructors trainers the right to access their reports from the central evaluation In order to do this the option EvaSys Settings Central Evaluation Passive Instructors Trainers Login for Report Request must be activated The instructor trainer can now log on with his id and view all the results of his surveys 58 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period When using the Central Evaluation server type passive user accounts are as a rule used to implement all or a large amount of the surveys from the administrator profile User accounts can be activated at any time Two passive accounts are equivalent to one active user license Changing User Data Click on the name of a subunit A list of the users in this subunit will appear By click ing on the user name you will reach his or her user profile Profile data can be changed by ente
414. mple this file is called CTextualReport php Then enter a description text and click on Save In this way several PDF report plugins can be integrated into the EvaSys system In order to change the setting of a PDF report plugin click on the symbol for editing Paper and Pencil Icon In the following dialogue the description text can be changed PDF Report Plugin EvaSys PDF report Copy Description Textual Report Copy Questionnaires ALL a DEMOFORM Non_Anonym If Quest_01 Quest 3 Tech_01 train_ 01 train_02 OK Cancel Figure 268 PDF Report Plugin Dialogue for Editing a Plugin 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 231 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite From the selective list next to Questionnaires you can now select the questionnaires for which the PDF report plugin should be available Note A PDF report plugin may not support all question types and may thus only be useful to certain types of questionnaires With a click on OK the changes are saved If you go back to the main menu Subunits and access surveys a drop down menu appears in the column Report of the survey overview Through these you can access the available PDF report types and have the respective survey evaluated through the chosen report type ssi Human Resource Management 02 P1237 0 lenin 017 85 05 12 2011 OD trainen Ys e ISP 3 We 0
415. ms Editor Heading A longer text describing the questionnaire This appears in the header of the ques tionnaire Paper Choose between the paper formats A4 letter and legal Dy Form Wizard Form creation information Abbreviation Sample_01 Title BI Oli Se Sample Questionnaire Paper Ad e Template Activate deactivate template mode New items can only be added at the end Max Pages 2 Max Items Apply f Cancel Figure 470 Define Form Information Click on Apply Now the questionnaire is created It contains a header and the editing bar can be used The preview mode which can be activated in the lower part of the window should only be switched on if the questionnaire is to be made available to active users instructors trainers as a template or for the purpose of instructor s optional ques tions As a rule it should first be activated after completing the sheets Template Once you place a tick in the area Activate deactivate template mode you have defined your questionnaire as a template With a questionnaire that is defined as a template you can decide whether the new items should only be added at the end of the questionnaire By doing so you can ensure that the existing structure of your questionnaire cannot be changed To do this activate the option New items may only be added at the end Max Pages Defines the maximum number of pages this form can
416. ms Green dog Suite D Question Library Assistant m Question Group Selection Question Group Course Evaluation instructor Evaluation Excellent Very Poor instructor Evaluation Poor Outstanding Instructor Evaluation Strongly Disagree Strongly Agree Cancel ul D 2 ra OD A i Figure 552 Question Library Selection of a Question Group You can select one or more questions with the Ctrl key With the check field you can determine whether the question will be transferred to the questionnaire In this case they are assigned to a new question group you can recog nize that by the green tick mark in the window If the checkbox Create in the window before is not activated you will see a red cross instead of the tick mark In this case no question group will be created You can choose between two possibilities regarding the order of the elements e The order of the elements as it was on the original questionnaire from whence the question group comes from and from that to which it was inserted in the library This is the default sorting order e Alphabetical sorting of the elements if you decide on this sorting order activate the option Alphabetical sorting Furthermore you can sort the questions on the questionnaire alphabetically To do this activate the option Alphabetic Sorting If you don t activate this option the ques tions on the questionnair
417. n 2 ell Add new criteria combinatio Default criteria combination l Citara combination The criterion will be added to the chosen citeria combination Add criterion P Figure 352 Report Creator Selection of the Criteria Combination for the new Criterion Subsequently this criteria this question with the selected answer is added to the selected criteria combination Information on a Report Report List The list of the reports of a folder provides you with an overview of the properties of the reports Reports in Folder Summary Reports 2011 Data WS CSV available Iran en Prof Development WS10 11 SPHINX 05 18 2011 046 OB choose pdf report Figure 353 Report Creator Subunit Report as Overview This view provides you with following information e Type of the weighting If itis a weighted summarized report the symbol as here at the top of the col umn shows two sheets with green arrows For unweighted reports a symbol with paper and a warning triangle appears here For an unweighted report choose the respective option whilst creating a report 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 281 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Aimomadion Suki Description rall Report unweighted Question mapping of different questionnaires Automatic with text comparison Manual Include answers to open questions v Combine surveys unweighted Please not
418. n Calculate indicators In addition these indicators must be defined in the questionnaire editor for the relevant questionnaire If Display Cronbach s Alpha has been activated then the calculated value of Cron bach e Alpha will be displayed behind the indicator names System Settings Report Settings Configuration Display Cronbach s Alpha This value is a measure of reliability and shows the internal consistence of the ques tion group The value range of Cronbach s Alpha spans from minus infinitely to 1 it is only sensible to interpret positive values EvaSys uses the regular non standardized Cronbach s Alpha which is calculated from the variances and covariances of the questions within a question group Norm Profile Lines As an alternative to averaged indicators you can show norm profile lines In addition to the setting discussed above calculate indicators you must activate the option System Settings Report Settings Configuration Show norm values You must also specify the norm values in the questionnaire administration If the alignment of the poles is different for different questions i e positive answers are not always on the same side negative not always on the other you can despite this enforce a standardized display of the norm profile line For this purpose activate the option Pole reversal of scales when taking norms You can find this option in the 214 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSy
419. n a given eval uation The norm profile lines and message text functionality were developed in collaboration with Dr Heiner Rindermann from the University of Magdeburg 6 1 1 Calculation of Norms The norming in EvaSys was developed in cooperation with Dr Heiner Rindermann from Magdeburg University and consists of a modified form of the Z transformation The formula for cases where large above average values are better is Sen 8 mean normbasismean 4 e ee standard deviation a Figure 409 Formula for Norming when Higher Values Are Better When lower below average values are better the formula is as follows mean normbasismean 4 0 ee ae ae norm basis standard deviation Figure 410 Formula for Norming when Lower Values Are Better 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 315 EvaSys VY Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Guetta Sule Example Calculation when Higher Values Are Better Suppose the indicator i e the overall mean of a question group in a questionnaire is 5 9 and the corresponding value of the indicator for the norm basis is 5 388 Fur ther suppose the standard deviation of the norm basis is 0 9344 The norm value is then given by the following calculation Normed value EE x 1o 100 Normed value 105 5 Figure 411 Example Calculation The norm values can be interpreted according to the following table For example a value of 105 5 can be considered as slightly above av
420. n operation at settings process defaults to no the settings of the scanner driver may have been changed Open the scansta tion software click on Settings and select test scan Compare the settings of the driver with the EvaSys standards Duplex 200 DPI black white image 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Management and Summary Warning Document FORMABBREV doesn t match survey Questionnaires in the batch which do not match the form type specified in the sur vey were identified and processed The cover sheet procedure may have been used and a wrong questionnaire form was used In this case a new survey with the questionnaire type that was actually used must be created Scan the batch with the new cover sheet Some questionnaires of the wrong type have gotten into the batch that was scanned SURVEYNAME processed X forms X invalid A batch was processed that contains some invalid questionnaire types The data of the invalid questionnaire types were discarded while the valid questionnaire types were processed Messages SURVEYNAME FORMABBREV processed X forms The survey was correctly processed 1 12 2 Mail Service Log Emails from scheduled tasks are sent in the background by the service Mail Service This service can provide detailed information in case of problems All errors are docu mented in the menu System Information Mail
421. n the following dialogue you can select the subunit as well as a substitute from the list of instructors trainers 114 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Select substitute instructor Human Resource Management Please select a subunit Please select a substitute instructor Send PDF report Computer Sciences a Dr Richelle White e 24 Economics Engineering Donna Harwood Scanstation Demo Subunit L _Data Entry Demo Subunit _Systemiogins _ Verifier Demo Subunit _VividForms Demos f Next Cancel j Figure 103 Select Substitute Instructor The checkbox Send PDF report permits the dispatch of PDF reports to the substitute instructors trainers again To continue click on Next The survey will then be assigned to a substitute instructor trainer and is then no lon ger existent for the original instructor trainer If there is only one survey for the course that is to be moved EvaSys will ask whether the associated course is to be moved as well Do you want to move or to copy the course which is linked to the survey Leadership Development o Copy course Move course Assign Cancel Figure 104 Selection Window Copy or Move the Course Click on Assign to complete the procedure If there are several surveys for one course the course will always be automatically copied since it has to remain with the original instruc
422. n the following example the comparative report Prof Development WS10 11 was selected This subunit report which was created by a report creator contains all sur vey results of the winter term 2010 11 for the subunit Engineering Once you have selected the comparative report define in the area Survey Period which period it should be used for You can only mark one single period If for example you define here the period WS10 11 in all PDF reports of the surveys which were created with this questionnaire in WS10 11 the profile line will be supple mented they contain additionally the profile line of the subunit report Prof Develop ment WS10 11 Additionally you define for which subunits the comparative report should be used for As opposed to the survey period whereby only one period can be selected in the area of Subunits you can define several subunits To do this press and hold down the Crtl button and click on the desired subunits Please note that a subunit adminis trator only has access to his subunit You can allocate subunits to a subunit adminis trator in his user profile In the following screenshot you can see that the comparative report Prof Develop ment WS10 11 was selected This comparative report is to be used for all surveys in WS10 11 for the subunit Prof Development both of which were created with the train en questionnaire Define report for comparison survey Perio
423. n the following graphic you see two form pages one of which is a cover sheet and the other a page from the questionnaire The relevant capture zones have been marked in red o D Electre Paper Gogemg Gonecion OO Cl Phas tote ng erpcba whic io Fale GE re reacing rt rT a EE 1 Cop Eelef ve 1 1 werall this ooflege i very elective in achir Wa eticoional goals and obpectives 12 Greonall thi college gives the students a superior value for their tuibon 13 Heda sta ower veel ap chen ko aland Gobeoe haere 1 4 The placement rala for undengraduates is relathely Migh 15 Tho placement rate for graduates bs relatively high LE Thi college is well neepected in tho business community 2 7 How vould you rate tho sponber resrvagiogtwzg be questions 22 How would you re the relevancy of thee lapie 23 Comments Figure 216 Barcode and OMR Recognition Barcode Recognition Elec Paper Gogemg 1 Coe Ewe ve 1 1 werall this ooflege is very elective in schirsia Wa colonel goals and obpectives 12 Qepa thi colege gives the students a superior value for their tuibon 1 3 Hl ecu slant ower w s ap choceo to ater galege haere 1 4 The placement rala for undengraduates is relathely high 15 Tho placomerd raba for graduais bs relatively high LE Thi college is well neepected in tho businoss community 2 7 Hee vould you ratefosponker respornsivengga W questions 22 Mow would you rie
424. n the menu Questionnaires Question Library Different editing functions as well as functions for import and export are avail able here Also a print preview of all question groups and questions can be accessed Subunits System Settings System Information Bi V H Question Library w l Editing View of the Question Library Actions hf M Peter Brown Public Peter Brown Sen College Evaluation Administrator bi A Course Evaluation Instructor Evaluation Excellent Very Poor E DEE Instructor Evaluation Poor Outstanding Group RDI P Instructor Evaluation Strongly Disagree Strongly Agree Question 742056 4 Questionnaire List Gd Create Questionnaire Ej Question Library students who go to the instructor for help get the assistance they need The instructor encourages students who are struggling to visit The instructor has a comprehensive understanding of the subject The instructor is clearly an expert in this field The instructor seems committed to helping students succeed The instructor willingly assists and helns the stirents This instructor has an encyclopedic knowledge of this subject This instructor knows this subject very well Currant Users n i Show ki Gees l SS Print view o AA Export Export Se SS 5 Import Browse mport Figure 80 Question Library Editing View In the editing view the current content of the question library is displayed in th
425. n the overview of the quality guidelines you can now see the question groups of the questionnaire as quality guidelines Course Evaluation Questionnaire 25 5 Questions about the studying conditions Change Delete 25 4 Questions about the teaching material Change Delete 25 3 Questions about the course Change Delete 25 2 Questions about the instructor Change Delete Seet Convert quality guidelines from norms Convert quality guidelines from indicators New Re calculate all Surveys Figure 429 Quality Guidelines Overview of Quality Guidelines You find this list in the area Advanced Settings in the questionnaire details choose the option Quality guidelines then click on Edit The dialog pictured above appears Each quality guideline can now be edited as usual For example individual questions can be weighted differently if necessary or different threshold values can be defined 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 331 EvaSys v Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Gun dog Suite Edit quality guideline Figure 430 Edit Quality Guideline 6 2 3 Converting Norms into Quality Guidelines When defining quality guidelines it is often difficult to decide where to set thresholds for good and poor quality A natural approach is therefore to set these thresholds on the basis of results that you have collected with this questionnaire in past surveys The function Convert quality guideline
426. n the symbol H the group you have highlighted will be entered as a new group to the library The elements of this group will not be entered 4 6 Deleting a Group from the Library With the symbol fa in the editor control bar you can delete the current group from the library 5 Filter Settings Validation Required Questions and Cross Tabulations 5 1 General Information If you open the menu Form Properties on the left hand in the VividForms Editor you will find the option Filters Validation Cross Tabulations Required Questions Click on this option and the dialog for editing these elements will open up These options are also available in the details of a questionnaire in the area Advanced Set tings In Questionnaires Questionnaire List please click on the name of the ques tionnaire you like to activate the filter settings validation required questions or cross tabulations for The details of this questionnaire open automatically Open the drop down list in the area Advanced Settings and choose the desired option Thus click on Edit to edit the option Filter Settings This is where you define whether certain answers will cause other questions to be suppressed In an online survey suppressed questions will not appear or will be inac tive For paper surveys filter settings apply after processing Le retrospectively Validation By defining validations you can test entries to open questions and mat
427. n to cli ents systems please also note that the path component evasys is to be supple mented or replaced respectively by the name of the client s installation If need be please consult your system administrator 12 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys v Survey Automation Suite Introduction 1 1 2 Further Manuals Apart from the user guide the following manuals are available e the manual First Steps with EvaSys which provides an overview of the most important features of your work with EvaSys It is designed as a guide for begin ners and helps you off to a quick and easy start e the manual Whats new in EvaSys in which all of the newest innovations in Eva Sys are listed compared to the previous version e the VividForms Designer Manual which is a guide to creating forms using the VividForms Designer e the Scanstation Manual which describes the scan process e the manual EvaSys Calculations which provides an overview of the equations used in EvaSys for statistical calculations e the XML Import Manual which supports you in importing your data into EvaSys You will be provided with the XSD for the import via XML XML schema and receive further detailed information All manuals listed here can be accessed by administrators and subunit administrators as PDF files directly in the EvaSys menu System Information Manuals In addition all manuals are by default stor
428. n_01 train_en Summary Reports Economics WS10 11 Summary Reports Ge Belmore WS 10 11 Summary Reports Report of Train_en Summary Reports W i Prof Dev Economi Summary Reports Prof Dev Economics Summary Reports ay Hernandez WS 10 11 Summary Reports i Hernandez Belmore WS Summary Reports Back Subgroup Male from R Summary Reports Male Business Stud Summary Reports Overall Report weigh Summary Reports Overall Report unwei Summary Reports Figure 365 Report Creator Detailed View Selection of a Comparative Profile Line Via the option Merge evaluations the report can be combined with further reports and via the option Evaluate subgroup it can be filtered according to a specific aspect You can obtain further information on this topic in the chapter on combina tions and subgroups Further possibilities of comparison are described in the following chapter 5 2 3 Dispatch of Comparative Profile Lines You are already familiar with profile lines from the automatically generated PDF reports They give a graphic overview on the results of your evaluation You can download these profile lines in the report creator for all surveys and all reports produced by the report creator and lay them over one another This way the report creator compares completed surveys with one another and or with the created repo
429. naire or click on Add the form definition file is created and added to the recognition set of the VividForms reader Ei Details for questionnaire Guest Ui Quest_01 Evaluation Questionnaire SP VividForms Editor Ss Copy and open the questionnaire in the VividForms esigner wW PDF Sample Show PDF paper survey Show In the recognition set of the VividForms Reader Refresh Preview online survey Figure 68 Details of a Questionnaire Questionnaire is in the Recognition Set of the VividForms Reader When moving EvaSys for example to another disc drive or another computer it can become necessary to refresh the recognition set of the VividForms Reader To be precise this becomes a necessity as soon as the directory forms which contains the recognition set is moved By default this directory is in Program Files Electric 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 83 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Paper VividForms The reason for this is that the XML files contain file paths to serv ers which after moving may no longer be correct For this reason you have the possibility of reloading the form definition files created by clicking on Refresh in the survey details under In the recognition set of the Vivid Forms Reader see figure above You also have the possibility of refreshing the entire recognition set To do this click in the questionnaire list in th
430. nal field according to the number in the Course Types e g 1 Lecture 2 Seminar 3 Proseminar etc Course Participants Number max 10 digit optional field Table 3 Structure of the CSV File Il You can define further titles in the main menu System Settings in the submenu Custom Titles These are the default values You can change them in the main menu System Set tings in the submenu Course Types The following rules must be followed The course code must be unique The left side of the table instructor data must be repeated for each course an instruc tor trainer teaches Course data itself cannot be imported unless assigned to a instructor trainer The right side of the table course data can remain empty except for the course ID You just import the instructor trainer data Note Without a course ID the import will fail In addition to the information depicted above you can add further data fields 74 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period e Secondary instructors trainers If the course is held by more than one instructor trainer and if they are to be evalu ated together using the same questionnaire and will receive the same report then add a 1 in the next column This indicates whether there is a secondary instruc tor trainer for a course Information about additional instructors trainers
431. nbach s Alpha can only be displayed if the indicators of the corre sponding questionnaire have been defined previously 4 Questions about the teaching material a 0 72 7 g Figure 281 Display of Cronbach s Alpha in the PDF Report Evasys calculates Cronbach s Alpha with the following formula N F 1 N 1 F Figure 282 Formula Used to Calculate Cronbach s Alpha where N number of items i e ques tions in question group and r ratio of covariance variance average correlation between items a In order to determine T the covariance for all possible combinations of questions is calculated as well as the variance for all questions of the question group The result ing values are averaged and the ratio between them is determined in order to calcu late the average correlation between the questions in the question group In order to calculate the covariance for each question of the question group the differ ence of the given responses to the respective arithmetic mean is calculated These values are multiplied for all possible combinations of questions and their sum divided by n 1 n number of responses DA Sas 8 4 5 l t Figure 283 Formula for the Calculation of the Covariance 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 243 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite The variance corresponds to the sum of the squared differences of the resp
432. nd something especially useful you can also filter according to criteria defined by you This is possible if you have created user defined course fields A small reminder If the set fields name Course ID room etc do not suffice for the description of your course the EvaSys administrator can create additional fields For this purpose he or she defines a number of additional fields in the configuration on the side course user data fields their names and contents 268 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting As soon as the administrator inserts these fields in the configuration they are dis played in all courses and in addition to the standard information selection of the set contents from a drop down list further details can be entered For further information on course user data fields see chapter B 2 2 3 Creating Courses section Expand ing the Course Data with User Specific Fields These data fields complement a course s standard data and can in the same way serve as a filter criterion for Any compilation reports If you select the Any compilation as a report type you can activate the option Show extended filter options 1 Subunit 2 Survey Period 3 Course Type 4 Questionnaire Engineering 5511 a Lecture e Non_Anonym e Professional Development Seminar Quest_01 _Data Entry Demo Subunit S810 WS0
433. ndently of the questions used A click on Save saves the settings 228 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback Select Eliminate Questions Please give us your feedback about the course as well as suggestions for improvement 4 t complements the learning matter it is well structured t benefits from the technical possibilities internet videotaping blogging et Overall grade teaching material have already been in the refectory The meals in the refectory are always warm The meals in the refectory are always fresh The meals in the refectory are always tasty The university is connected to the public transportation very well Figure 264 PDF Report Definitions Exclude Questions After saving the basic settings you now have the option to define the contents of the report Select from a list all the questions that should not appear in the report By pressing the CTRL key you can select a number of questions simultaneously By pressing the button Save at the bottom of the list your selection of questions to be eliminated will be saved You can see this by the blue background behind a selected question Automatic Subgroups What is your age Figure 265 PDF Report Definitions Build Automatic Subgroups In the section subgroup questions you can define a question for which automatic subgroups are built for each option in the report The ques
434. ndicators can be deleted at any time by clicking on the red cross Bi Free indicators Questionnaire indicators Pies Course Evaluation Questionnaire train_en Ee 1 2 Questions about the instructor Scale width 6 PAR A SN 2 3 Questions about the course Scale width 6 FJ a JA 3 4 Questions about the teaching material Scale width 6 2 9 3 3 4 5 Questions about the studying conditions Scale width 6 J o 3 amp Generate indicators from question groups Set new indicators Figure 287 Free Indicators Generate from Question Groups To edit an indicator click on the pencil icon An overview of the questionnaire is now shown Initially the indicator name is displayed and can be changed as desired If the ques tionnaire exists in different languages the indicator name must also be deposited for each respective language in this case German and English In order to achieve greater clarity it is possible to hide all questions that are not of the scaled question type Via the selection box in the left column the questions relevant to the indicators can now be selected or deselected Please save your changes by clicking on Save at the bottom of the page 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 245 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Free indicators Indicator name English ineinuetor Indicator name German Tehronda v Hide all questions which are not scaled q
435. ne the secret word O no course user data fields If no questionnaire specific spare secret password has been defined in the details of the questionnaire no secret password will be requested for the authentication 1 Course user data field 1 2 Course user data field 1 Survey ID 3 Course user data field 2 4 Course user data field 2 Survey ID 5 Course user data field 3 6 Course user data field 3 Survey ID 7 Course user data field 4 8 Course user data field 4 Survey ID 9 Course user data field 5 10 Course user data field 5 Survey ID Please note If no questionnaire specific forwarding address was defined in the details of the questionnaire the forwarding occurs based upon the system wide defined for warding address Menu System Settings EvaSys Settings Survey Online Alternative forwarding for online surveys no secret word will be used 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 483 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management Support for mobile devices If activated when recognizing a mobile device Cell phone Smartphone Internet Tab let PC or similar the display of the online survey will be optimized to the screen size of the corresponding device as far as possible 2 5 4 Section Data Import and Export Permit data export for open questions When activated the CSV raw data files also receive the responses collected to open questions
436. neeenaeeas 188 4 1 SCANNING THE FORMS o ccccccceccceccecceeseeeeeeceeceeeeeueeueueaeeeeaeeuaueueaeaneuaeeegeeaueaueeeauaueuaueeseueaeeas 188 4 1 1 SCANNER SETTINGS ee 189 4 1 2 IMPORTANT RULES FOR SCANNING u cccccccceccececececeseucsueceueeaceuueseuueueeueseuuueaeeueueaeeeaeeneess 189 4 2 EVALUATION OF SCANNED QUESTIONNAIRES ccccecceceecececeeceeeeueuueeeeueeueeeeauuaueeueaeeueeeeaueaeeaes 191 4 2 1 RECOGNITION OF THE CHECKBOXES VIA BARCODE AND OMR anre 191 4 2 2 PROCESSING IN VIVIDFORMS READER ccccecceceeeseeceeeeeuceeeuecueeuuueueeaueeuueuaueeeeaeuuaeeuass 192 4 3 CORRECTION OF CHECKBOXES NOT CLEARLY READ THE VERIFICATION cc cccsecseesseeseeeeees 192 BG Mer age CT 193 4 3 2 SURVEY VIEW EE 194 A F ORNE TEE 195 4 3 4 CARRYING OUT THE VERIFICATION c ccccccccesceeeseceueceeusuuceueueeueeueeeueeaueaueeueueaeeueesueueaneauess 196 ASS Os AUTOMATIC VERIFICATION wextessosscnceisse deen st desucotatues a Traa aN Ta EROSi ate 198 4 3 6 CHECK FILLING DEGREES ccccceccccccecceeceeceeecseeseueeeuceueeeeseueseaueeeeeueseueeuseuaeeuaueueeaesauas 198 4 3 7 RESPONSES TO OPEN QUESTIONS EE 201 4 3 8 KEYBOARD CONTROL IN THE VERIFICATION c cccccceccecsceceeeseuceueeeuueeusseueeuueuueeueeeaeeeeeanes 201 d A MANUAL ENTRY OF HANDWRITTEN COMMENTS cccceeceececeseueseecseuseueeeeceueeeuesuueeueueaeeeeeeanes 201 4 5 INSTANT FEEDBACK THE PDF REPORT cccccccecceecseeseecseeeeueseeceuececueeueeeeeuueeu
437. ng allows you to find defective data and other problems If necessary you will be asked by support to activate this Because an activated debug mode can slow your system down the administrator after login is informed of all possible scenario regarding this e Warning Message The debug mode was activated Please note It may reduce the performance of your system significantly Please click here to deactivate the debug mode Figure 631 Warning Message Debug Mode If you click on lease click here to deactivate the debug mode the debug mode in the configuration is automatically deactivated EvaSys informs you of the deactivation of the debug mode Information The debug mode is deactivated now Figure 632 Debug mode Deactivated Successfully Changing the survey ID If activated this option allows changing the survey ID You can then change the survey ID in the details of a survey as long as the survey does not have any results question naire returns This option is available only for the hard copy procedure for cover sheet and hybrid surveys Logging of system sessions The logging of system sessions provides an overview of the users and participants of online surveys currently logged into the system This function gives an insight into the current level of utilization of the system 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 497 EvaSys V F System Settings and Management Geet Suis Display information of system ses
438. ng and to avoid overloading the editor specific design requirements are realized outside of the VividForms Editor Thus Electric Paper offers a service providing the implementation of any question naire which corresponds exactly to your ideas and at the same time is as simple to use as possible You tell Electric Paper your wishes or provide an existing question naire Electric Paper implements the questionnaire and delivers the so called fod2 file and the corresponding PDF file of the questionnaire to you The fbd2 file contains the information about the content and the layout of the questionnaire It can be imported and used in EvaSys and then later read in with the VividForms Reader You therefore do not need any experience in programming Thus a VividForms Plus questionnaire combines the advantage of easy handling and scanning as you know from VividForms with comprehensive design features Please note You cannot subsequently change a VividForms Plus questionnaire in EvaSys How ever you can always look at the PDF preview as with VividForms questionnaires 8 2 Importing the VividForms Plus Questionnaire Before you can import a VividForm Plus questionnaire in EvaSys you have to be sure that the system can find the following two files The FBD2 file The FBD2 file is a supplemented version of a FBD file In addition to the content of the questionnaire it contains information about its layout The FBD2 file can be put in an
439. ng documents Display documents by clicking on the icon in the next to last column You will need to have the appropriate application software e g Microsoft Office for DOC files Deleting documents Delete documents from the system by clicking on the icon in the next to last column All links to email types or to PDF report types are also deleted The size of the document is limited to 1 megabyte You can change the maximum size in the EvaSys settings EvaSys Settings General Maximum Size of Document 2 2 1 Email Attachments Every email type in EvaSys e g Send PSWD to respondent or Send report to instructor trainer can be provided with its own email attachment For example an instructor trainer could receive along with his PDF report a document with the evalua tion requirements Under the heading Documents for Email Attachments you can find all related files Email attachments can be created in any file type so please remember that recipients may have trouble opening uncommon file formats More about assigning documents to specific email types can be found in the section Text Templates 2 2 2 PDF Templates Customized letter templates PDF templates can be entered for the various PDF report types e g Report to Instructor Trainer or Summary Report to Dean Man ager The template layouts can be designed so that they meet any corporate identity requirements As the name says the temp
440. ng or deleting the language set This option is also recognized by the additional buttons in the list Step 2 Linking a Language Set with a Questionnaire In order to use a language set for online surveys you have to link it with the question naire with which you conduct the respective online survey This is possible in a ques tionnaire s details The details of a questionnaire are available in the menu Questionnaires Questionnaire List Click on the name of a questionnaire in the list you will be directed to the details of the questionnaire In the drop down menu in the area Advanced settings select the option Languages and click on Edit If you have not yet defined a language you first have to define the questionnaire s standard language 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 137 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Auncmation Sul Properties You have to define the properties of the existing language main language first Language English Current logo S go FAN Please choose a flag Upload the file Language Picture Linked System Engish Higher Education v Language Linked Deutsch Hochschulen s Y language set Enable w M Language 4 Please note that VividF orms only supports multiple languages for online surveys Figure 136 Defining the Questionnaire s Main Language The above figure shows that the language set English is linked with the sy
441. ng the option Edit Question group in the menu Edit As described above for the indicator only scaled questions are used meaning that the definition and calculation of an indicator only makes sense for group questions that indeed contain scaled questions You see the following window E Question group Wizard New question group Page 1 Title BIU lt 2 Questions about the instructor Presentation Slide This question group contains 4 questions concerning the Scaled questions with 6 options Enk Gisa No indicator FONE Siza Scaled questions with 2 options Text Element Scaled questions with 3 options Scaled queshons with 4 options Scaled questions with 5 options Scaled questions with 6 options Scaled questions with 7 options Sealed questions wih amp options Sealed questions with options 2 ove US Your feedback actul Scaled questions with 10 options Scaled questions with 11 options Figure 279 Indicators Editing Window in the Question Group The first specification of the window refers to the heading of the question group this however is possibly grayed in since you can no longer change it once the surveys have been created 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 241 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Below it and possibly the presentation slide text you find information on the indicator If no indicator has been created so
442. ngle choice item found on questionnaire Validation Question to check Range of values Options Add question What did you like in this course What needs improvement Add Required questions Knowledge Processing my D 45 8 result of this course can remember most of the important terms and facts from this course E Save As a result of this course can ghe an overview of the course The course has helped me improve my analysis of complex issues in this subject area This course has helped me improve my handling of typical probleme in this subject area This course has helped me both to see the connections and to notice inconsistencies in thie subject area This course has helped me judge the quality of academic articles in the subject area Systematic Compefence This course has helped me to acquire information more efficiently This course has helped me organize my work Cross tabulations a New cross tabulation Question 1 D Geer Contents of Questionnaire FieldID Type Text Options Knowledge Processing He Indicator e P Be Not applicable TA Scalar5 As aresult ofthis course can remember most of the important terms and fac totally disagree totally agree een i gram x SA a z Hot applicable 18 Scalar5 As aresult ofthis course can give an overview of the course totally disagree totally agree Histogram Ke Figure 584 Further Information on the Questionnaire 2011 Ele
443. nit For more information please see chapter B 3 2 7 Effective Management and Conduction of Online Sur veys section Online Surveys Customization of the Used Layouts 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 45 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model The visibility of a subunit can be limited for example to hide subunits containing only old survey data which should however remain in the system Thereby the clarity of the system can be increased In the area Subunit visibility there is a choice of different display options Hidden Unrestricted Subunit Administrator only Report creator only As well as this it can also be determined whether the subunit regardless of the status should be dis played in the context menu on the left If a subunit is set as invisible it is also hidden in the subunit overview Via the option Show all subunits it can if desired be displayed Gei List of all Subunits 4 Subunit s not visible Subunit User Edit Delete Subunit administrators iV Computer Sciences ao A iV Engineering a5 A P Henry Darcy iV Professional Development a4 4 2 V _Systemlogins a A X Show all subunits Create new subunit Figure 27 Hide Subunit In the case of instructor account licenses by using the option Assign user licenses the number of available licenses can be limited for each subunit For more informa tion please see chapter
444. nline Survey Template Logo E Logo to be shown in the survey header Online template description Logo justification left aligned e Determines the justification of the logo in the page header Disnlav temnlate Innn Figure 143 Customized Online Survey Template Create template 142 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Goen gc Suk Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys In the upper half of the window a preview of the online survey template is displayed In the lower half the layout of the template can be edited All changes made to the lay out are immediately shown in the preview Numerous functions for customizing the templates are available in four different tabs e General Settings The name of the template is defined here your own logo can be uploaded and aligned the organization s logo and the survey header can be shown or hidden etc e Colors The color settings for the different areas and elements of the template are set here The background as well as the font colors of all areas displayed can be custom ized Example Institute Dr Sima Seeland business economics business economics introduction 2090 M1 2 Questions about the instructor The instructor is always well prepared The instructors explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way E ke e Lee de orme oe o be ee ell e eh e Be a be zm Le ee ee ee zm zb General Settings Colors Navigation Q
445. nline surveys is applicable 90 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Siirvey der Suki Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period e activate the questionnaire controlled specific forwarding and enter a questionnaire specific address please observe the format of the URL http www example com As a password you can either define your own secret word or use a predefined one which can be defined in the System Settings and which consists of informa tion from the course e g a combination of the user data field and the survey ID System Settings EvaSys Settings Survey Online Alternative forwarding including authentication E Ej Advanced configuration Quest_07 Online Design Questionnaire specific forwarding is deactivated the EvaSys Settings apply menu System Settings Evasys Settings Online Survey Alternative web address for forwarding the participants of online surveys SH Questionnaire specific forwarding is activated After sending the sheet forwarding to the following URL Please observe the following URL format http www example com htipJ www example com lottery php Determine the secret word with the following method Apply the system configuration method _ Define a questionnaire specific spare secret password This secret password will only be used if there is no other secret password defined in the course user data field and in the system configuration menu System settings EvaSys
446. nse options as scale under the graphic report bar Show notice for suppressed report Activates the display of a notice instead of the question summary when the mini mum response is not reached The content of the text can be changed in the text 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback templates Action PDF Report Text for too little response If deactivated the respective question does not appear in the report e Bar Mean Value Line thickness for mean value e Bar standard deviation Bar Std Dev Line thickness for standard deviation e Show recommendation text When activated a link for generating a recommendation document will be placed after the detailed norm profile line e Mode of calculation for norming 1 Mean value of the dimension Mean values of all datasets 2 Mean value of the dimension Mean value of the mean values of the data sets Please note In this case in each dataset the number of answers for each item must be at least as high as a defined minimum value see also Configuration of Norming You can choose between two ways of calculating the mean value here When choosing the first one the raw data of all given answers to the questions is taken into account for calculating the mean value When choosing the second one the mean value is calculated from the already computed mean values for the questions those in turn have b
447. nt i Download A report on all subunits Figure 387 Additional Reports Report for the President Click on Download to create the PDF document You will then be able to download it shortly Report for the Dean Manager Report for the Dean Professional Development Download Choose a subunit of the dean to display the report for Figure 388 Additional Reports Report for the Dean Select the subunit For the letter accompanying the report the address in the subunit details will be used The dean manager will be addressed in neutral terms as he or she is not in the system as user Click on Download in order to create the document 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 301 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Aimommadion Suki Report for the Dean of Studies Program Manager Courses provided by the subunit Professional Development CO Name Instructor CO Type cCOID e o iv Human Resource Management Hernandez Seminar 02 P1237 R P412 iv Human Resource Management Prof Dr Belmore Seminar 02 P1237 RP 412 v Leadership Development Hernandez Lecture 02 P1234 R P 080 v Management Strategies Prof Dr Belmore Seminar NA 2 Sem 02 E iin js Prof Dr Belmore Seminar NA 1 Sem 03 v Organization and Management Hernandez Seminar 02 P1236 RP 410 Figure 389 Additional Reports Selection of Courses for the Dean of Studies Program Manager For the report type dean of studies program manager it is es
448. nts with access to online results Sender email Sender name training electricpaper de EvaSys Admin Reference Result view online survey Mail text This email entitles you to view the results of an online D survey Please follow the link and use the PSWD displayed as identification The PSWD reads PSWD bd Access under SERVER Save Run now Figure 154 Dispatch Email to Participants via Time controlled Online Surveys After activating the procedure Close survey the option Send result access informa tion to participants appears This way the dispatch of accessibility details is directly linked with the automated closure of the particular survey Upon entering their PSWD the authorized survey participants receive access to the HTML report Survey Human Resource Management Philipp Belmore Number of evaluated questionnaires 17 iG EES SST SE GE Liese a aDOUT VOL as L Which gender do you belong to male EE 8 female ay 9 What is your age 17 18 23 ZO 3 Figure 155 The HTML Report 152 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey dee Suis Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys The text templates main menu System Settings submenu on the left hand side Text Templates contains the text E mail Information about result access to partici pants Here the standard text that is sent to the participants of a survey can be deposited as soon
449. of Prof Dr Belmore is compared to the first comparative line Prof Development WS10 11 Exception you send out these comparative lines then Prof Sunny Narrow and Prof Dr Michel White each receive their profile line compared with the subunit report SN Comparison Options during the Batch Profile Line Dispatch Below the selection of the comparative lines you have the option to modify the presen tation of the profile line comparison through a number of options or to integrate addi tional comparative lines V Compare selected courses reports with each other Comparison options C amp Minimum Maximum Values adi Overall Average A Comparison lines J Anonymize comparison lines Figure 374 Report Creator Profile Line Emails Options 292 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Comparison of the Selected Courses of Reports to Each Other Activate this option if you wish to compare the selected courses reports not only with the respective comparative lines but also with one another Though in this case a profile line comparison is created for each course report the profile lines of ALL selected courses reports are contained in each graphic Example 2 continuation In the upper example 2 this would mean that in the graphic for Philipp Belmore Man agement Strategies additionally the profile for Carlos Hernandez Organization and Management is inc
450. of all recog nized fields within a batch as a CSV file in the batch view 2 6 Client Operations An EvaSys system is made up of VividForms the web server and a database server Together the EvaSys database and the server software make up a single system This single system can be configured and divided up into separate areas There are certain situations in which it makes sense to completely separate single systems e g e The departments of a university company would like to use their own subsystems with their own settings and user space and prevent other departments from accessing their data e A small college or university is considering sharing an existing EvaSys installation at a large neighboring university Both situations can be solved by using client operations Clients are subsystems that are completely separate from each other and yet use the same VividForms and com puter environment In principle this means a number of EvaSys installations in ONE system Electric Paper offers as a service the setting up of clients Since for each client it is only necessary to have the necessary number of user licenses especially small col leges and universities will find it affordable to participate in teaching evaluations 500 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Index A Access right Authorizing access rights to QM views 336 Access rights lt 4 i2cu lt Geovecedtactaeadeos 32 Accessibili
451. of five digit numbers horizontal matrix question or 10 digit numbers vertical matrix question Analysis of matrix fields can portray numbers in any dimension What is your age 18 26 22 2 SS 27 34 66 7 35 42 11 1 Figure 494 Illustration of a Matrix Field Question 378 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Geen Auidmatiin Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor 2 6 2 Scaled Question Gw Question Wizard Question text RI HL got access to the technical resources very quickly Back Back i Next Nex Apply Cancel Figure 495 Scaled Question Select the question type scaled question and click on Next In the next step enter the question text and click on Next Gw Question Wizard Define Options Abstention activated we Checkboxes 6 wi DD E OD o V Individualize pole labels mm e A Right Pole Seye Disagree 2 Type of Diagram Histogram 7 Use these settings as default for scaled questions Set this scaled question as mirrored question Combine to dual scale with previous question 1 Apply settings to all other scaled questions Define settings Back Next Apply Coste Figure 496 Scaled Question Individualize Pole Labels The last step involves entering the text of the two poles and selecting the number of check fields You have the choice between two and eleven fields The pole labels and the optional abstention tex
452. of the period of the current survey will be compared to the profile lines of the survey of the same course from the previous period In order to activate the profile lines for a questionnaire go to the questionnaire details in the area Evaluations and select the option Comparison report in the drop down menu and click subsequently on Edit Subunits Questionnaires System Settings System Information er iV Ei Details for questionnaire train_en train_en Course Evaluation Questionnaire WP VividEorms Editor E Copy and open the questionnaire in the ViidForms K Designer Peter Brown Administrator EI wv PDF Sample Show s PDF paper survey Show W In the recognition set of the VividForms Reader Refresh Preview online survey S Advanced settings Questionnaire Questionnaires Questoonaire Ls p EditForm Delete Text Templates el Edit Create Questionnaire Text Templates Question Library Nonming POF Reports Quality Guidelines eee SEhina Report vi H Report for comparason Data export configuration Export i Bo iy Fiter settings Reporting Options 7 Online Design Vatdation Show the header of th ik t Mis F ow the header of the surve Required questions Mirrored scale values d Y Cross tabulations JI Allow Summary Reports Enable temporary save Free indicators Languages Show print option Figure 391 Profile Line Comparison Selecting the option R
453. olled e Starting the survey and dispatching the PSWDs by email to the respondents e Reminder to respondents per email with PSWD e Closing the online survey and if necessary sending an email with evaluation report to the instructors trainers These actions are managed separately in the so called Scheduled Tasks The activation and settings of the time triggered control system are dependent on each survey That means that the process of each online survey can be separately 128 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys controlled An overview of all planned operations can be found in the menu Subunits Scheduled Tasks Activate time triggered control To activate the time triggered control when generating an online survey put a checkmark in the box You can always activate the time triggered control at a later date by using the menu item in te survey detail view A Paper survey Hard Copy Procedure s Cover Sheet Procedure _ Web Verification Online Online Survey Use Time Control Figure 127 Time Trigger After generating the survey you can define the planned operations for the survey in the following view In the header is the name and number of the survey By clicking Next survey and Previous survey you can navigate between the surveys In the view beneath the header there are three actions which can be activated and controlled sepa
454. olors Docu ments You can also adjust EvaSys to your organization in several points Some text sent respectively shown by the system can and partly should be changed in the EvaSys Settings You can find these on the left hand side in the main menu System Settings Your changes are only active when you save them For that purpose click Save at the bottom of the page With Undo you can reconstitute the default settings By changing the following settings you can adjust EvaSys to your organization e You can change the header of the login screen default is Faculty Evaluation Feedback System in the EvaSys Settings main menu System Settings On the page General you will find the option Title Login Window to change this title e Define the welcome text for the first login of an active instructor trainer in the Eva Sys Settings on the page Instructor trainer Accounts GHD There you will find the option Welcome text for the first login As it contains a placeholder for the name of your organization at any case change this text to be sure it makes sense Default Welcome to EvaSys the course evaluation system of LACE NAME OF ORGANIZATION HERE Please start by changing your password Click on My profile in the navigation menu on the left To return to this page click on Fold erg e For denied access you can define a redirection address at EvaSys settings net work settings option
455. omes necessary to modify an existing question naire Example You have been evaluating with one questionnaire for three years The computer cen ter would like to use the general evaluation and to integrate a question to your ques tionnaire regarding the equipment of the computer rooms 254 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Or you have been evaluating with one questionnaire for three years and now the cor porate identity of your university company changes vastly This also affects names such as Technical University of Sample City which is renamed in University of Applied Sciences Sample City Furthermore the subunits and graduation titles now carry other names for example Department Electrical Engineering instead of Fac ulty Electrical Engineering Master instead of Diploma and so on These linguistic changes affect of course the questionnaire which must be clearly adjusted o SOS A questionnaire which has been evaluated can no longer be changed In these cases you have to copy an existing questionnaire and work on the copy For information on copying questionnaires see chapter B 2 4 2 Management of Questionnaires and Detailed View After the evaluation with the new questionnaire consideration has to be given as to how one can compare the results with the old reports and or compile the results of the different reports The so
456. on the position can be adjusted manually if necessary 2 12 Adjusting Color Scheme Under a new menu item in the Form properties Change color scheme different color shadings for question groups and questions can be defined This improves the readability and increases the optical quality of the questionnaire To change the color of your question or question group click on the green pencil icon next to the corresponding option You can change the following areas e Font color of the question groups e Background of the question groups e Background of odd questions eg 1 1 and 1 3 etc e Background of even questions e g 1 2 and 1 4 etc 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 407 EvaSys V Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Green dog Suite Color Scheme Assistant m Change color scheme Font question groups ee Background question groups P Background odd questions P Background even questions P Example preview 1 Personal Data Ge settings 44 Gender Repair form 1 2 Age Enable numbering Edit Pole Template 2 General Assessment Filter settings 2 1 Adequate parking spaces are available Validation Required 2 2 am taking part in further education activities questions Cross 2 3 Your notes and comments tabulation o Picture Library Apply 1 Cancel Figure 549 Adjusting Color Scheme After clicking on the pencil icon the color selection dialog opens
457. on Suite Configuration Settings PDF format Selection of the format for the creation of PDF documents DIN A4 210 x 297 mm Letter 216 x 279 mm Legal 216 x 356 mm 2 5 2 Section Survey Minimum number of returns for reporting If the number of returns is under the value n there will be no display of the results no PDF report no HTML report no raw data Instead there will be a note in the letter the function generate letter must be ACTIVATED The note can be edited at Sys tem Settings Text Templates Warning threshold in for PDF report dispatch by email Defines the threshold percentage of pages not recognized for the automatic dispatch of the PDF report Explicit confirmation is necessary for manual dispatch of the report Default 70 Warning threshold in percent for recognition problems during the processing of paper forms If this error occurs a serious problem was found in the quality of scanned forms The problem must urgently be analyzed and corrected before scanning the next forms If the threshold defined here is exceeded for a survey this survey will be marked red The PDF report will not be dispatched automatically if this option is activated Further more the EvaSys administrator gets a warning notice via email Default 0 2 Instructor Trainer s optional questions activation status Here you can activate or deactivate the Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions Instru
458. on batch so as to edit a verified question again In addition the following buttons are available Sheet Displays the complete sheet in a new window The question being pro cessed is circled in red This view can be helpful for seeing the whole context Cancel The correction is cancelled Please note that all corrections made since the last save will be lost Save The current corrections including the open view are saved Then you will be automatically taken back to the view you were in before going to the correction view The verification can be continued immediately or at a later date Saving the verification is necessary for example when you interrupt your work When you have finished verifying a batch the results are automatically saved and the over view Is displayed iT allel al ul Sheet Back Cancel Save Next Figure 223 Verification Navigation The verification is however completed when the NonForms in a batch have been deleted You can do this by using the NonForms view or the button Delete Non 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 197 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Aimomadion Suki Forms When the NonForms are deleted after completing the manual verification then the verification must be completed by clicking on the button Process batch Now all the results of the batch are submitted to the database and the evaluation can be downloa
459. onding number for exam ple 21337 2 mentions E 20 21 2 Counts E 22 Figure 511 ICR Question Display like an open question e Bar for every mention The results are analyzed using bar charts with each answer option receiving its own bar Identical entries are concentrated This option is recommended for double digit numbers at maximum Figure 512 ICR Question Display with bars for every mention e Bar for mentions across 10 groups The results are analyzed in a bar chart The group number relates to the number of bars here 10 that should be displayed later in the PDF report as the analysis of this question In this way numerical que 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 387 EvaSys V Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Green ice Suita ries in the value range 0 999 format NNN are divided into the following 10 groups 0 99 100 199 200 299 900 999 It can be individually determined for each segmented ICR question when it should be displayed in the verification In EvaSys the following settings are available e Always The question is always displayed in the verification regardless of the Reader s reading reliability This option should be used when the unread charac ters should be captured exactly e From low to high reading reliability The question is very likely to appear in the ver ification Only when all entries of the ICR question have been recognized with absolute certainty does
460. ons 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 223 Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model 224 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Divisions legend Scale divisions of the legend Show bar diagram with histogram Advanced results bar for scaled questions When bar diagram is activated the mini histogram should be deactivated Separate closed open questions When activated the results for open and closed questions in the PDF reports are displayed separately This results in better readability particularly of those reports created with a mix of open and closed questions Show text boxes If activated the text fields of VividForms forms will be shown in the PDF Report Show quality indices traffic light view When activated the quality indices of the items will be shown as a traffic light sym bol in the PDF report Please note that indices will only be shown for items used in quality guidelines Show standard deviation as number Activates the display of the standard deviation Show average median You can display the following values in the PDF report 1 Average value 2 Median 3 Average value and median Show quantile You can display the following quintiles in the PDF report 1 No quantile 2 10 quantile levels Decile 3 25 quantile levels Quartile Show standard deviation in graph Show the standard deviation in the graph of scalar questions Show scale divisions for bar diagrams Activates the display of the export values for respo
461. onse val ues to their respective arithmetic mean value divided by n 1 n number of responses S oder Ai A iY i Figure 284 Formula for the Calculation of the Variance 5 1 5 Free Indicators In general the question groups containing the questions on the questionnaire form the basis for the calculation of the indicators this means that question group and indica tor are consistent with regard to the questions included It is also possible to freely define indicators so that questions of different question groups can serve as the basis for the calculation of an indicator The elements of an indicator are as such freely dis tributable throughout the questionnaire These so called Free Indicators can be stored separately for each questionnaire and displayed later in the PDF report in place of the conventional indicators The Free Indicators can be defined in the questionnaire details drop down list in the area Advanced Settings option Free Indicators a Details for questionnaire train_en train_en Course Evaluation Questionnaire W VividForms Editor i Copy and open the questionnaire in the Vnadtoms Designer wW PDF Sample Show w PDF paper survey Show s In the recognition set of the VividForms Reader Refresh Preview online survey Advanced settings Questionnaire Edit Form A Delete Text Templates Text Templates Norming POF Reports Quality Guidelines l Sp
462. onverting a Quality Guideline from Indicators Dialog for Conversion On the top left the relevant lower and upper threshold values for the quality guidelines are set for all scaled questions in terms of percentage values In addition you can declare a global default setting regarding the orientation of the scales whether higher values are better or lower values are better Underneath you find the question groups with all scaled questions that belong to them On the right hand side you find for each scaled question a drop down menu as well as the lower and upper threshold values The orientation of the scales is particularly important Here this can be defined indivi dually so that you can change poles for individual questions if necessary The thresh old values for the range of tolerance depend on the length of your scale 2 to 11 options exact target values can be defined later In order to refresh the view after editing values click on Reload 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 329 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model The following examples illustrate some threshold values for different scales Upper Type of Scale Threshold Threshold ee El l Higher values are better gt 2 2 2 8 4 point scale 5 point scale a Higher values are better gt 26 34 T point scale gt 3 4 4 6 4 point scale gt o p 6 point scale 7 point scale Table 15 Threshold Values
463. operties the type of display for the online questionnaire can be adjusted All three display modes complete per chapter and per page can be selected which are also available for the real online survey If for example the display mode per page was selected tabs are then shown by which one can skip between the individual pages of an online questionnaire XQ t Standard Editor Control 9 Add gt Edit EvaSys V Cli pboa rd gt Education Survey Automation Sute Move gt Form Properties ORGANIZATION G Form Properties SUBUNIT E 8 Repair form 3 Enable numbering 1 Questions about you z Edit Pole Template You are Filter settings male female 5e Validation Required questions Cross What Is your age tabulation 18 29 20 39 60 69 Older than 69 ON Picture Library Online survey templates Your Zipcode EvaSys Onlinetemplate Display Complete PC Skills Per Chapter Per Page am able to create edit a word document Figure 474 Display Modes for Online Questionnaires If customized online survey templates were created on the basis of the EvaSys stan dard template cf here chapter B 3 2 7 Effective Management and Conduction of Online Surveys the online questionnaire can also be presented in the design of the customized template To do this select the desired template under Online survey templates in the form properties 2011 Electric Pape
464. ou can define the default PDF report with which the questionnaire will be evalu ated Furthermore subvariations of the standard report can be created by suppressing parts of the questionnaire for a given feedback recipient Additionally subgroup reports for single choice multiple choice or matrix questions can be created Quality Guidelines This is where you can set the quality standards for the questionnaire These stan dards are found again when using the QM views QM views can for example be given to deans at the end of a survey period so that they have a clear overview of the results of their department The quality guidelines should give an impression of the quality of a course so that if necessary a detailed report can be consulted Sphinx Report Here you can link a report template for Sphinx in HYP file format with the question naire This report template will later during the creation of Sphinx exports be inte grated into the generated ZIP file so that when opening the evaluation in Sphinx the report template is automatically used to create the report Report for Comparison Here you can define the number of previous periods and comparative reports of the report creator which should be compared with the current PDF report Data Export Configuration You can rename the variables and allocate new numerical values for the export of the questionnaire Filter Settings This is where you define whether certain answers wil
465. ough active instructor trainer accounts In the following graphic you see at the bottom level the active instructors trainers whose license to evaluate is highlighted by blue colored rings Figure 12 Active Accounts in Addition to Central Evaluation Of course active instructors trainers are not able to access one another s results Only the active instructor trainer himself and the administrator subunit administrator have an insight into the data If you have been using EvaSys for some time it may be noted that this type of evaluation was formerly known as de central evaluation 2 4 Basic Terminology within the EvaSys User Guide Within this manual you will come across some terms repeatedly Due to their impor tance their meaning is outlined in the following Quires Questionnaires may be several pages long The complete copy of a questionnaire including all its pages is called quire AS soon as more than one sheet of paper is 24 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite The Basics needed ONE quire comprises SEVERAL sheets of paper Quires may also be known as booklets in other applications Instructor Trainer Accounts Active Passive Surveys are always created for particular instructors trainers and courses Therefore you require the instructor trainer of the course as an element within the EvaSys struc ture These instructors trainers are managed centrally by th
466. ould be defined as from 1st of Jan 2009 to 31st of Dec 2009 name Year 2009 e g add 1st of March 2009 to 31st of August 2009 SS 2009 Existing periods can be updated by clicking on the green pencil symbol and modifying the entry fields in the area Period at the bottom of the page A modification of the period names is not critical Custom Titles All identities in EvaSys have a title The in built titles are Mr Mrs Ms and neutral The menu Custom Titles allows the definition of additional titles To do this enter a new title and a salutation text An example title could be Provost with the salutation Dear Save changes by clicking on the Save button The newly defined title will be used in the active system language Translations of the new title may be added if additional languages are present in the system You can only edit your entered custom titles By clicking on P you can alter the salu tation text and title in question Afterwards save your changes by clicking on the but ton Save A click on S deletes the form of address in the respective language The new titles can be linked to the identities in the user profiles 42 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period QA Custom Titles Title Salutation text Title Language Mr Sehr geehrter Herr Deutsch Hochschulen Dear Mir English Higher Education Sehr gee
467. ount 49 Generating user accounts 005 49 Managing user accounts 005 49 User Guide 12 24 Basic teminology 24 User role The user role of the report creator 247 User Type E ote oS ea dren taieri hi eee ee eo 52 Utilization statistics 0 0000 SEN V Validation 415 417 Value Norm values for questionnaires 316 VEIINCAIION cas cauon euedaeawoe sn bo neue 192 Batch View 193 Check Filling Degrees 06 198 Correction View 196 Form view 195 Survey V EW 194 Verifier a na naaa ee 52 192 Vertical matrix question 378 392 VividForms Import Export of VividForms questionnaires 425 Overview on the three VividForms Components 35 7 Use of the question library with VividForms 409 VividForms Reader 192 VividForms WebVerifier 0 192 VividForms Editor Adding Pictures 403 Integrating pictures in a questionnaire 405 VividForms PluS 00 00 e eee eens 428 Implementation of questionnaires 428 Importing questionnaire 428 Information about a questionnaire 430 Usage of VividForms Plus forms 432 VividForms Reader Recognition Set 82 Volume License General information 447 W Webservice n nananana eee eee ee eee 475 WebVerifier aoaaa aa aaa a 192 201 Keyboard control in WebVerifier 201 Write
468. ovide an overview of survey results to the management of your institution or your company You can find these reports in the menu Reports on the left hand side Using this function you can create summary reports for the president for studies the deans of studies program managers as well as the deans managers which give them an overview of the results of the course evaluations These functionalities are for questionnaires that were set up for the creation of summary reports 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 299 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Economics f d Report Creation l 8 l 3 al Computer Sciences o Economics T ontinue Engineering Professional Development Data Entry Demo Subunit Basic setting for result reports Additional peony Figure 384 Additional Reports There are three report forms for summary reports e Report for the president Contains an overall indicator for all surveys in the past semester sorted according to subunits e Report for the dean manager Contains an overall indicator as well as individual indicators for all surveys in the past semester in his or her own subunit e Report for the dean of studies program manager The dean of studies program manager selects from a general list of all Surveys in all subunits those which should be compiled in his report The report has the same degree of detail as for the dean
469. owing four options e Alphabetical letters only e Alphanumeric letters and numbers e Numeric numbers only e Numerict numbers and special characters lt gt E Handwriting gt recognition Alphabetical Alphabetical Alphanumeric Segmented Numeric Numeric Characters Language Format Figure 507 Open Question Choice of Character Types 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 385 EvaSys iw Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Survey Aincmnation Suite Possible fields of applications could be the following e Alphabetical names of persons or places e Alphanumeric license numbers e Numeric measurements e Numerict prices dates In the second selection box you can define the language for which the handwriting recognition is to be conducted The German language is set as default Handwriting p 7 recognition Characters Alphabetical Y Language English m nta Deutsch Segmented English Format Figure 508 Open Question Selecting the Language Segmented v Format NNNN NN NN e New format Style of segmented Half open D box Figure 509 Open Question Setting Segmentations Optional segmented fields can be formatted and displayed for handwriting recognition By segmenting handwritten entries appear more orderly and provide for considerably improved automatic reading Preset formats for date specification e g NNNN NN NN c
470. own subunit or extend one or more accesses first select the option Own subunit only Then you can define further subunits by selecting Additional subunits in the gray area 178 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys v Survey Anomalon Suis Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys QM Views No QM Views EN No QM Views Only own surveys Only own subunit Unrestricted access Figure 194 A User s Access to QM Views Once you have assigned these rights please remember to create an appropri ate log in name and a password e The instructor trainer must be activated From the user overview you as the sub unit administrator can see whether an instructor trainer is activated A icon with a padlock in front of an username means this is a passive user Jasmine Sadhi no padlock added to the icon signals an active user Prof Sunny Narrow To switch simply click on the icon E Philipp Belmore D Donna Harwood Figure 195 Passive with Padlock and Active without Padlock Instructors Trainers You can switch the instructor trainer between active and passive at any time for example denying access after an activated period e You have to pass on the access data to the instructor trainer log in name pass word and the link to the EvaSys homepage Otherwise he cannot log on even if you have created and activated him e You as the administrator need to check that you have adapted the greeting in your system that a
471. ows the title of the report In addition it displays the number of responses 46 According to the setting defined by the administrator the details of the report are then displayed to you here for example an overview over the indicators of the questionnaire Following you will see the legend for the scaled questions as well as five diagrams for the first five questions of the questionnaire e Export Here you can create export files for the subsequent processing in statis tics programs 284 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys wv Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting a Prof Development WS10 11 Figure 359 Report Creator Export Options train_en HTML 05 18 2011 1046 P EvaSys PDF repot e CSV SPHINX You always have the option of the CSV and SPSS export For representation reasons you see here only two of the options the SPSS export is however displayed in the details of the report Information on a Report Detailed View If you click on the name of a report the detailed view is displayed to you Details of report A Report O Study Type Questionnaire Status Compilation Created on No of collected questionnaires Actions Rename Compilation J Move Compilation 38 Delete Compilation H Edit Show notes Prof Development WS10 11 Summary Reports 2011 Compilation of multiple survey results reports train_en Data available report availabl
472. part in the survey In the reminder email you can send the login information once again Optionally more than just one reminder email can be sent In this case select the Multiple reminders every x days The system will then keep resending reminders until the survey is closed After activating this operation the fields sender email sender name subject line and email text can be edited The recipients are automatically read out of the sys tem so that all participants who have not responded receive an email After defining the start date you have to save the settings of the operation In general it is possible to assign the date time and status for all selected surveys using the Apply to All button Operation close survey This operation serves to close the online survey When the survey is closed then no more returns are possible Unused PSWDs are then invalid and cannot be used anymore Survey participants are not informed of this operation The evaluation report can be sent directly to the survey owner When this is the case then the owner of the survey i e the user allocated to the survey in the sys tem receives an email of the results of the online survey automatically This operation is terminated by a start date and saved with Save In general it is possible to assign the report delivery date time activation status and setting for all selected surveys using the Apply to All button Use of calendar
473. per survey a copy of the sample questionnaire is cre ated and the variable areas of the questionnaire for this survey are filled hard copy procedure lf you do not wish to receive a new print template for each survey the question naire s blank version can also be used cover sheet procedure In this case the personalizable areas of the questionnaire remain blank only the barcode area contains information on which questionnaire and which page of questionnaire it relates to However in this case you must use a cover sheet which is automatically created for each cover sheet survey when you send out surveys This cover sheet con tains all further details of a particular survey course instructor trainer etc and 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 25 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Preparation and General Notes has to be scanned in along with the respective questionnaire batch Because here the cover sheet functions as a reference to the relevant survey during processing In the case of VividForms questionnaires online surveys are only possible as HTML surveys here you do not need a personalized PDF file However you do of course require the sample PDF When creating an online survey the HTML ques tionnaire is automatically created in accordance with the layout of your question naire your PDF template Of course you have the option of changing the layout of the online survey using online survey templates for which
474. period WS06 07 i Survey of same course in period S507 Comparison options Survey of same course in period WS09 10 LA Minimum Maxi Survey of same course in period 5510 S Survey of same course in period WWS10 11 2 RI Comparison lines Survey of same course in period 5511 train_01 train_en train_en Check if the number ol train_en train_en_1 train_en appears on the docum Belmore WS 10 11 train_en Economics WS10 11 train_en Hernandez WS 10 11 train_en Remove certain questi yernandez Beimore WS 10 11 train_en Male Business Studies from Report of Train_en train_en Overall Report unweighted train_en Overall Report weighted train_en Prof Dev Economics Overall Report train_en od _ Add trend graph for inc a ff Figure 368 Report Creator Profile Line Emails Selection of a Comparative Profile Line After the selection you can scroll to the end of the page and choose one of the follow ing download methods e Dispatch of the profile lines to the instructors trainers of the marked courses This option ensures that each instructor trainer is only sent the profile line of his or her course if selected with the first and second comparative lines that are inserted into the graphic If you mark the option Additional recipient you are presented in a further field with the possibility to enter further email addresses separated by a semicolon Request Metho
475. played multi selection using the CTRL key It is also possible to define the number of records per page 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 451 EvaSys V F System Settings and Management Geet Suis Deletion Log y There are 1252 Log entries available Selection of object types Fei Entries per page 40 Reload Course Log Ohiert ALEL aan ID of Triggering p User Object Type Object Description Date Aae 1253 Peter S Human Resource Management id 62241 Carlos 05 23 2011 at Brown ca Hernandez Sample_01 id 307 311 16 35 20 1252 Peter ine Organization and Management id 3387 Carlos 05 23 2011 at Brown y Hemandez Sample_01 id 307 88511 16 33 11 Figure 612 Deletion Log 1 11 System Cleaning You can delete the files that you do no longer need via the system cleaning For this purpose you have to define a period to erase dispensable data You can delete the following elements 1 11 1 PSWDs When you choose a period and click on the button Delete PSWDs you delete all the PSWDs of the chosen period which have not been used by that time Please note You cannot delete PSWDs of open surveys here The deletion will only concern surveys that have already been closed Please select the period WS11 12 0 a S511 17 WS10 11 0 lt A S510 0 Delete PSWDs WS09 10 0 EE 507 54 WS06 07 50 ball In brackets Combined deletable PSWDs 121 Figure 613 System Cleaning 1 11 2 D
476. ponents The single components bear the following functions Web Server EvaSys Interface EvaSys is controlled via the web server providing users with the user interface which is accessed via the web browser For data transfer EvaSys offers two different access methods e aregular unsecured connection via the http protocol and e an additional optionally usable secure connection via SSL SSL stands for Secure socket Layer and offers administrators the ability if desired to securely encrypt any data traffic from EvaSys SSL connections are most easily recognized by https instead of the usual http in the browser s address bar Usually current browsers graphically indicate the presence of a secure connection The number of users is only limited by the number of user accounts Participants of online surveys can also communicate with the EvaSys server via an encrypted connection Email messages to the respective recipients are sent via your local mail server 18 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite The Basics Data Base Any data generated through the utilization of EvaSys is stored in a data base This means that the entire user structure the questionnaires and the survey data is stored in this data base For this a MySQL database or a MS SQL database is utilized Note Please be sure to save this data base at regular intervals Scanstation Questionnaires ar
477. port department of Electric Paper 1 9 Performance Considerations The following paragraphs offer several references with regard to optimizing system performance 1 9 1 Performance Statistic In the menu System Information System status you will find details to the current system utilization The performance statistic shows the time needed to execute an internal function which is called up every minute Thus it represents an indicator for the workload of the system at the respective time of measurement When a series of measurements are located in the red zone for a longer period of time this indicates a state of overload which can impair system performance for users or participants in online surveys From these statistics subunit administrators can make decisions regarding optimization of peak access times Access peaks can be optimized by the following points For example the access time for online surveys can be optimized by starting the surveys on different days Apart from that the participants of online surveys can receive information on off peak times with the instruction that participation should take place at these times In addition subunit administrators can move heavy tasks such as verification creating question naires and reports to off peak periods Performance values of the system of the last 15 minutes 0 80 Performance measuring Seconds 29 05 2011 09 25 25 05 2011 09 26 29 05 2011 09 27 29 05
478. ppears automatically when an active instructor trainer logs on You will find the text in the main menu System Settings in the submenu on the left hand side under Text templates It is titled EvaSys Welcome text for the first login of instructor trainer Editing of text templates Action EMAIL Forw PSWDs to the instructor Instructor s Optional Questions EvaSys Welcome text for the first login of instructors LETTER Form count below minimum LETTER Regulatory information LETTER Report for the president LETTER Results for instructors LETTER Summarized results for deans LETTER Summarized results for study deans Language English Higher Education w Figure 196 Editing the Welcome Greeting for Active Instructors Trainers 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 179 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Green dog Suite Modify the text as you see fit and then click on Save A subunit administrator has no access to these texts therefore he cannot check this setting Please consult your EvaSys administrator on this As soon as you have secured these details the instructor trainer can log on with the details that you have supplied him with 3 3 2 Login as Active Instructor Trainer In order to log in the active instructor trainer calls up the EvaSys Log in window and enters his access data here Subsequently a window appears with the greeting text Welcome to Eva
479. profile fields title first name last name user name and email Example You are searching for users who have the word William in their profile data Enter William as a search term and highlight user as search goal Then click on Search Go EvaSys Searchmask Search Query Search In Courses Surveys Deliveries 7 doe Search Search Result Table Hits Max Details Users 1 Hits in this Table 25 Details Figure 588 Searching for Users You will then see under the search template the area for search results In hits you see that two users were found Click on Details to display the search returns 434 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Goen Aummation Sule System Management and Summary Search Result Hits Max Details 1 Hits in this Table J User Search Result Details gt Computer Sciences _john doe example com Details ma oUrvey Details lt lt lt Otot gt gt gt Figure 589 Search Result Details The results can be sorted in ascending or descending order by clicking on the column name The data fields are themselves the references e Last name Refers to the user profile e Subunit Refers to the subunit window e Email Initiates an email to the relevant user e Surveys Opens the surveys of the user 1 1 2 Search for Courses With this search you can find details about existing courses Search Result its Max
480. properties of the questionnaire Before adding a question to the questionnaire the user first has to create a new question group Questions cannot be added to groups already created by the administrator When setting the form properties the administrator can define that new elements added by users such as question groups questions or design elements may only be inserted at the end of the questionnaire 24 weld recommend this course to my friends IT StrongyO O OF 0O OStrongly Disagree Agree 3 Individual Questions 3 1 How would you rate the instructor s overall teaching methods Excellent 0 0 0O OPoor Figure 573 Added Question by the Instructor Trainer 7 Editing and Passing on Questionnaires To show the content of a questionnaire click Editing in the Drop Down Menu on the right hand in the list of questionnaires Please note You can edit a questionnaire only as long as you have not activated them When surveys are created for a questionnaire the questionnaire is automatically protected against modifications This is done in order to guarantee processing of a form being used No changes of any sort to the layout or contents can be made to pro tected forms 7 1 Write protect Mode As soon as you generate a survey with a certain questionnaire it is automatically pro tected against further changes Write protected forms in the VividForms Editor have a yellow lock in the area form information see figure
481. pter B 3 2 10 Non anonymous Sur veys Specifying Participant Data in Anonymous Surveys If you wish to evaluate the course anonymously and therefore activated the option Anonymous survey participants in the above graphic you can only insert the email address of the participants This makes sense for example when you want to send the participants of an online survey their PSWDs via email After you have activated the option Anonymous Survey Participants in the details of a course click on Edit data of participants In the window which opens automatically 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 67 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite you have the opportunity to either insert the email addresses of your anonymous par ticipants manually or to import them via CSV import Administrate participants Participants of Introduction into Sociology Email Delete CSV import of survey participant data Import the participant data Figure 51 Adding Anonymous Participants of a Course Overview Further information on CSV importing of email addresses can be found in chapter B 2 3 3 Import of Course Participants Email Addresses To enter email addresses manually click on the button Add in the field Participant of The following window will open Search for participants The email address of a participant has to be entered and verified before the data can be comple
482. ptions Next to Option enter the text for the first option and click on Add option The option will now appear in the option list Repeat this procedure until you have entered all the options You can highlight each option edit or change their sequence by clicking on the sym bols TC and Settings for the display in online surveys can be made for both single choice question types You can choose between the drop down list and checkbox list For paper based surveys the alignment of answer options of single choice questions can either be set to next to the question text or beneath the question text For ques tions with more than 11 answer options only the option beneath the question text can be selected The option Default Questionnaire Layout refers to the settings defined in the menu Form Properties Layout settings Further information can be found in chapter C 2 11 Layout Settings After all the options have been entered click on Apply The single choice question will now appear in the preview and will be automatically highlighted 1 Questions about you What is your age 1118 29 030 39 040 49 050 59 L160 69 Colder than 69 Figure 517 Single Choice Question in the Editor Preview The ability to limit the number of possible answers is a specific feature of multiple choice questions The value Max is predefined with zero which allows all options to be selected Enter a number here to l
483. pus Figure 179 Administrate Anonymous Non anonymous Participants If you wish to edit the imported participant data click on the button Edit data of partic ipants In the following window you can edit green pencil and delete red cross each existing participant You can also delete all participants by clicking on the Delete all button 170 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Administrate participants Participants of Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle E irs UN 1 Hide user defined columns custom field 1 custom field 2 RE alle Brown _m brown example com Engineering Michael Samantha Miller s miller example com Economics Janet Gabriel _j gabriel example com Economics Peter Taylor p taylor example com Economics Maria Hernandez m hernandez example com Engineering Add Deletean Figure 180 List of the Non anonymous Participants Additionally you can add further participants To do this click on the button Add The following window will open Search for participants The email address of a participant has to be entered and verified before the data can be completed Email Sam Details of the participants Course Human Resource Management Title First Name Last name Email Address Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Figure 181 Add Non anonymou
484. quality guideline use the following formula gt observed quality per question in weighting per question 100 In this example for quality guideline 1 100 25 0 75 100 25 The overall quality of the survey is calculated using the following formula gt quality index of whole quality guideline weighting of whole quality guideline in relation to the overall quality index 100 In the example the calculation is thus 25 25 75 75 100 62 5 The survey thus reached an overall quality of 62 5 If in the questionnaire you have defined questions where the best worst evaluation re sult can be found exactly in the middle level questions you can choose them twice when defining a quality guideline A possible level question is Do you think the number of presentations was ade quate In answer to this the interviewees can select one of seven possible options connected with the ratings too few just perfect too many The positive judg ments lie in the middle when the interviewees choose just perfect respectively the value of 4 To integrate these questions into the quality guideline in a meaningful way first choose a question and define the first side of the scale to be negative left of the middle For evaluation results below a certain threshold e g 2 5 you have to make a quality deduction As normal you have to define a range of tolerance here e g
485. questionnaire train_en Edit norming types Delete norming R Recommendation Report N Norming 1 Questions about you ore is the grade of your last school grad 2 Questions about the instructor linir m PUP i swers Ir ar f i iFa g iz d k T FET E L dosti Item The instructor is always well prepared Figure 414 Norming Details 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 317 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model In the table displayed you can now set for all the dimensions indicators as well as items only scaled items are permissible norm values and analysis rules R Recommendation Report N Norming Recommendation __ g ene eae Recommendation text Normed values E Norming Hame Positive pole Report Text for above average scores e General norm Dimension Here a text can be 2 Questions about the instructor entered which will be SCH shown as a mean SD d Positive are Above average scores w recommendation text 0 0 Minimum number of valid answers in each dataset 1 Figure 415 Norming Edit Whether results are to be seen as positive must be set for each dimension e g for methodology and structure above average for redundancy average for anomie lack of discipline below average At the right hand side of the screen you will see the average as well as the standard deviation of the comparative group This is repeat
486. r Brown Administrator x s PDF Sample Show s In the recognition set of the VividForms Reader Refresh m Advanced settings Questionnaires L Questionnaire List Text Templates Gd Create Questionnaire E Question Library Figure 244 PDF Letter Modify Text Templates for a Specific Questionnaire Questionnaire Details When the top option Text Templates is marked and you click on Edit the window for the Text Templates whose screen resembles the one for global text templates will open Editing of email and template texts of questionnaire Quest_01 Action PDF template OTA RET UMIE SU vey H iLLAH0Onmt O E MAIL Results of a survey EMAIL Form PSWDs to the instructor Instructor s Optional Questions No PDF template defined LETTER Report for the president LETTER Results for instructors LETTER Summarized results for deans ml LETTER Summarized results for study deans LETTER PDF REPORT Address field Niorming PDE renort Intradiuction J Attach e r r i n V Language English Higher Education w Sample Letter OK Figure 245 PDF Letter Modifying Text Templates for a Specific Questionnaire Template View However all templates that you upload here and all texts that you change here are only used for the reports that are associated with this questionnaire s survey This way you can design the letter according to your particular
487. r GmbH 365 EvaSys V Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Green dog Suite Form Properties v e Form Properties ORGANIZATION 9 Repair form SUBUNIT 7 Enable numbering ze Edit Pole Template Filter settings 11 Questions about you C Validation Required You are questions Cross male female tabulation j F F What is your age 4 Picture Library 18 29 30 39 Online survey templates 60 69 Older than 69 Sample Template ly EvaSys Onlinetemplate Your Zipcode High Contrast My new Template 2 sample Template Figure 475 Select Online Survey Template Via the drop down list in the viewing bar above the questionnaire you can where required simulate the display of the online questionnaire for mobile devices As well as the standard view which is intended for screen viewing on PC s the view for small medium and large mobile devices can also be selected The following screenshot shows the resolution for mobile devices of a medium size EQ 1 BD Blus Ges z n ech 2k EH Editor Control J kom sr ORGANIZATION Form Properties AUTHOR SUBUNIT SURVEY Repair form Enable numbering Edit Pole Template 1 Questions about you Filter settings You are a Dope Validation Required V questions Cross Amale emae i tabulation What is your age 18 29 30 39 Picture Library D 40 49 50 59 Online survey templates 5 60 69 Olde
488. r Subgroup Reports In this window for example you can select all male interviewees as the first criteria To do this click in the area Available questions on the criteria Gender Choose on the right hand side the value of the criterion i e the desired answer for this question In this example you would choose male election of several criteria for subgroup reports Which gender do you belong to What is your age What is your age How many terms have you been studying so far Main subject Do you already have a university degree or a degree of another institute in tertiary education 2 Questions about the instructor The instructor is always well prepared The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc without any problems Default criteria combination Add new criteria combinatio The citerion will be added to the chosen citeria combination Add criterion Figure 343 Report Creator Selecting the First Criterion female for the Subgroup Report 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 277 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Finally click on the button Add criterion The criterion then appears in your Default criteria combination In this case the criterion Gender with the value male was added The condition being that exactly this val
489. r example which you might use to create action according to this information this gt getValue adds an additional class to the current element you might this gt addCSS decide that you won t display a question in the same way if Class sClass the label is short or very long so you could define a specific class in your CSS file for long labels and insert this class after having tested for the length of the label returns the URL to the template directory of the current tem Sthis gt getT emplatePath plate Useful for routing to images or extra CSS files inserts a partial template at the calling position Name should not contain a path or an extension This is typically used for mentioning required questions or validation rules specific to some questions this gt placePartial sName returns an array of error objects for the user like this ques tion was required but not filled in or this field should be completed only with numbers rules that are defined through the VividForms Editor Designer this gt getErrors Table 7 Functions for Advanced Template Editing 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 147 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model The creation of advanced design templates is also offered as a professional service so that all our customers can benefit from the advantages of a fully customized online survey template For further information please con
490. r folder Please note The ZIP file has to contain the content of the folder and not the folder itself Go to the menu System Settings Online Templates and upload the file You can then modify the template directly in the folder where it has been created in C Apache htdocs evasys data templates Please if you make modifications to the CSS file onlinesurvey css do not forget to remove the content of C Apache htdocs evasys data tmp online As a general concept the form is available as an object the methods of which will pro vide you with all information you need in order to choose the way you wish to display each element on the page Here are some of the functions that you might regard as useful when starting to work with EvaSys advanced template editing You will find examples of other functions methods and classes used to get information about items you are editing and willing to modify in the files that are available in this folder Function Description this gt getLabel returns the label of the current question returns the value of the current question very useful if you wish to create javascript reaction to a value for example this gt getMultiOptions returns all options of a question if existing returns the whole class attribute of the element multiple classes get separated by space it will also give you some this gt getCSSClass information about where you are in the code even or odd item fo
491. r has no access to QM views Only Own Surveys The user has only access to his own surveys These are surveys that have been reg istered by the administrator to the user s own user profile 336 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Phase 5 Quality Management Only Own Subunit This option gives the user access rights to all surveys within his own subunit It is possible to access multiple subunits by selecting from the additional subunits list This can be done after the access level only own subunit has been selected Unrestricted Access This option grants authorization to access all existing surveys in the system 6 2 5 Use of QM Views Displaying Course Lists Individuals with access rights are informed through login details user name pass word web address To increase security you can restrict the permissible IP address domain Consult the relevant section in the Initial Operations After logging in with the user name and password the user arrives at his or her acti vated user account This user account is equivalent to an activated instructor trainer account that is it can also be used to implement private surveys With a click on the menu item QM view the quality overview is opened Carlos Hernandez cb DS UORZLOM Surveys 5 Folders Cl Surveys 2011 Quality Management Additional Reports Reports central evaluation Figure 437 QM V
492. r individual scaled questions Using this method control questions can appear inverted in the survey but at the same time flow correctly into the calculation of the indicators On your questionnaire you can establish mirrored scaled questions in two different ways 1 by composing a question text in a negative way with the pole labels being con sistent throughout the questionnaire e g The technical equipment is poor with the pole labels strongly agree left and strongly disagree right 2 by inverting the pole labels for a question while the phrasing of the question remains positive e g The technical equipment is excellent with the pole labels strongly disagree left and strongly agree right This method is only apt for scaled questions with individual pole labels To create a mirrored scaled question click on the option Set this scaled question as a mirrored question whilst you are creating the scaled question In the VividForms Edi tor preview the scaled question is marked with a red arrow F Dual Scale The combination of quality and importance dual scale is a frequently encountered question type The purpose of the combination is to separate the important cases from the unimportant ones Bad and unimportant as well as good and unimportant cases should be disregarded as negligible The dual scale is helpful in that it separates the 380 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V
493. r internal email addresses the reports have been sent to e Method Delivery method either email letter symbol or internal email paper sym bol e Sent Tells whether the report has been sent or printed e Delivery date Date of the email delivery or the internal email print download 1 2 Writing Email This function gives you the possibility to send a message to all EvaSys users By selecting all users press the left hand button on the mouse and pull to the bottom of the list you can send an email to all users AS soon as two or more recipients are selected EvaSys sends the email via the BCC field blind copy so that the addresses of the recipients cannot be seen Please remember that creating hundreds of emails could take depending on the email server load several minutes Enter a subject line as well as a message and then click on OK to send the email You can see if this action was successful in the display line at the top of the browser window EvaSys v ga Subunits Questionnaires System Settings ania IV Saco Dag Aion Ca ge V e lt Send email Peter Brown Recipient __ Alternative Email Address John Doe information Computer Sciences Subject Denna Harwood Economics Caroline Bingley Subunit Administri a Utilization Statistics Maria Report Report creator a g System Summary Doris Dean Dean Henry Darcy Subund Admanisirator Miainianance Peter Huddle S
494. r of unidentified pages in a batch Name of the scanstation Number of checkboxes not found Number of all pages Shows whether other users are already processing the batch Corrections already processed Total corrections Display cover sheets Delete all NonForms Display NonForms Display filling degrees in original PDF Export filling degrees as CSV file only when activated in the Evasys Settings Process batch Verify automatically Delete batch 193 EvaSys wv Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Ff Current batches in WebVerifier Batch ime Scan OMR e i Cover Filling eea ip Time Duration NonForms station Errors Sheets progress Status aha NonForms SE Verification ea ee 0 S01 0 6 3 gt 0 D 98 17 15 31 EE 1 2 S01 0 4 A gt R T L sg IS AS 16 43 34 Selection for automatic i verification Search for new batches Delete all NonForm batches No valid checkbox found invalid One checkmark and correction s found Figure 218 Verification Batch View 4 3 2 Survey View In this view you will see all of the surveys that still need to be verified Because sur veys can be scanned in a number of batches and a VividForms batch can have a number of surveys in it the number of surveys is rarely identical with the number of batches The table is made up out of the following columns e Survey Name of the survey e Form Short name of form e Sheets
495. r present a file open that file ga Logged in to start the designer Online Surveys Curent Users Hote Please note thet questionnales ceated with the VividFonms Designer cannot curently be used for module evaluation of ihe instructor s optional quesiions process Log Off e aa p Figure 469 Access to the VividForms Editor The VividForms Designer is a questionnaire designer with extended layout versatility which is available as an add on to EvaSys To use this a separate license must be acquired In systems without this license the Designer is deactivated and cannot be started For further information on the VividForms Designer please consult the Vivid Forms Designer manual If interested in acquiring a license please contact your cus tomer service agent To start the VividForms Editor click with the left mouse button on the questionnaire graphic under the heading VividForms Editor The Editor opens directly in the browser window and you can begin creating a questionnaire 2 Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor 2 1 Define Form Information After starting the Editor a form creation wizard opens Some fundamental information regarding the questionnaire must be deposited here e Short Name A five to ten digit short name which may only exist once in the system It must not contain any spaces 358 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividFor
496. r than 69 EvaSys Onineumfragentermpla la Figure 476 Online View for Mobile Devices 366 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor 2 3 0 Preview Functions Independent of the view in which you find yourself paper view or online view pre view options are always available by which the paper forms as well as the online sur vey can be displayed in a separate browser window Both preview possibilities can be found in the viewing bar above the questionnaire Editor Control 3 3 Add Question Group Figure 477 Preview Possibilities In order to display a preview of the future PDF questionnaire click on the PDF symbol Di A new window opens with a PDF example of your questionnaire This PDF document is generated in real time on the server Check to make sure you like your layout Close the window in order to continue editing the questionnaire 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 367 Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Lei EvaSys VividForms Editor x DN tmp _6425db9Sd2afclaleceS0cli37 L i DN http 192 168 245 JLi ievapvs DL gdatadtmmp itrmmp GA Sdb diestcl ttl ce c 378cd4_Addabbl 07 70 pdf pat D Al 1 1 loe 673 kd Vi hark ai showr O BOO D Fes uve a taponi pen o amm taap This um w oe processed Aen Cergc ee OBO D ane rosa pe greng chown to Bip pomit ne resin FU 1 Questions about you Yo
497. rainer Download Reports from the Central Evaluation After authentification of the instructor trainer he can click on the link Central Eval uation Report and then receive the same view as the passive instructor trainer After selecting the period he can download the reports from the survey EvaSys V Professional Development iV erer Gumay Abo cume gt a Requesting central evaluation reports survey Period s Canos Hernandez Reload Sumi ege ssi E 2 Typa Survoy Status Form Created Forna Request Additional Reports Short Version e Human Resource Management id Data available Ham e 05 13 2011 1 English s PDF Questionnaires Shon versin e dl Questionnaires 2 Organization and Management P Data available train_en 05 18 2011 3 English e Sl Templates PDF af Verification Figure 272 Download of Reports by Active Instructors 234 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback In order for the instructor trainer to receive a message that he can download new reports the automatic dispatch of emails should be activated after scanning At the same time the dispatch of the PDF reports or CSV data must be deactivated at System Settings EvaSys Settings Email Functions amp Accounts The email text E MAIL Report for Survey can be modified and for example describe how the instruc tor trainer should login to the sys
498. rainer by email In the hard copy procedure the questionnaires adapted for specific surveys are either produced centrally or by email delivery to instructors trainers Document Quality The quality of the paper and the print image is critical for the scanning and processing stages We discourage the use of gray recycled paper due to the gray shadows which can appear Note that when producing questionnaires using private printers or copiers the printer driver is set up for A4 size paper and the copies should vary due to tilting or enlarge ment reduction only marginally from the original The tolerance range for such image discrepancies is about 10 of an edge length The general rule is that clearly visible changes to the original document should be avoided 3 2 7 Effective Management and Conduction of Online Surveys Preview Online Survey You have the possibility of displaying a preview of your online survey either in the details of a survey or in the questionnaire details In the details of a survey as you can see in the following graphic click in the area Actions on Preview online survey Actions Show PSWDs in browser _ Receive PSWDs by email Send PSWDs by email to respondents JJ Download PSWDs in CSV File Generate more PSWDs 0 gt o Number of participants for calculating response rate 10 Accept GJ Scheduled Tasks Finish Data Collection Close Survey 8 Delete Survey Assign surv
499. ral options moreover two buttons and the Delete function Advanced settings m Questionnaire E Edit Form Zi Delete Text Templates Edit SSS Text Templates _Norming POF Reports Quality Guidelines Sphinx Report Usag Report for comparison Data export configuration Fitter settings Vabdation Export Reporting Options M Online Design i Show the header of the surve Required questions Mirrored scale values I Yy Cross tabulations d Allow Summary Reports Enable temporary save Free indicators Languages i Show print option Figure 70 Advanced Settings in the Questionnaire Details The options in the section Advanced Settings have the following meaning for all options you will first have to select the option from the drop down list and then click the button Edit Text Templates You can define custom email texts or texts for PDF reports in order to incorporate ele ments specific to a given questionnaire in reports or emails You can also define email attachments for the questionnaire Norming This is where the norm data are defined for the questionnaire In addition sub norms can be selected for for example subunit or course type level as well as displaying message boxes for interpretation 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 85 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model PDF Reports Here y
500. rary Line Height Font Size 12pt 10pt e Size of the answer boxes GERS Bauh E Figure 526 Adapting the Size of Answer Boxes If for example you have defined a line spacing of 11pt and then set your answer box size up to 11pt the system automatically increases the line spacing to 13pt If you reduce the line spacing EvaSys automatically reduces the size of your answer boxes so that as a basic principle a minimal difference in size of 2pt is ensured With a scaled question with 11 response possibilities your answer box size will be Spt Now if you increase your answer box size to 9pt for reasons of available space only 10 answer boxes will be displayed With a answer box size of 10pt you can only display 9 answer boxes With a answer box size of 11pt or 12pt only 8 or 7 answer 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 395 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Creating Questionnaires with VividForms boxes are displayed and so on Before applying the change you will get a warning message If you then click on Cancel your changes will not be applied Decreasing the number of answer boxes follows automatically in the system when increasing the answer box size If you decrease the size of the answer boxes after wards the number of answer boxes displayed will not however be automatically increased by the system This means that when decreasing the size of the answer boxes you have to increase manually the number of
501. rash can you can delete the report Please observe the following details EvaSys does not hold any completed reports in memory The automatically generated PDF reports for single surveys are also produced on the fly when you click on PDF in the column Report The report creator combines this data according to your reports and keeps it 282 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Survey Automation Suite ready When you click on PDF EvaSys produces the summarized report and displays it This means that here you only delete the compiled data however you can reproduce the compilation again from your surveys at any time In the following figure you can see the confirmation if you like to delete a report r A Delete Compilation Compilation to delete Prof Development WS10 11 Warning Deleting a Compilation causes deletion of all correlative data l OK IL Cancei Figure 356 Report Creator Delete Report e Report Here you can download the HTML and the PDF report Either you only see the lettering PDF for the download of the PDF report or as in the screen shot a drop down list The latter is the case if several PDF report definitions exist Type Name Status Form Created Forms Dei Report Export Data SE available Tram en Prof Development WS10 11 05 18 2011 5046 2 Figure 357 Report Creator Download Reports The PDF r
502. rately Clicking on the button Edit will take you to the action you want After generating the survey all actions are deactivated by default By clicking on Activate you can activate the operation The next sections give a detailed description of the individual actions operations Operation PSWD to respondent The PSWD to Respondent operation starts the online survey That means that the participants to the survey receive an email with the login information For this email you can define the following details Sender Email Default Email address from the system settings Sender Name Default Email address from the system settings Subject Line of email Default Subject line from the setting Text Template Text of email The email text can have placeholders Default Email text from the setting Text Template 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 129 Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model EvaSys iv 2 Survey Automation Suite Email Addresses List of the email addresses of all respondents The number of email recipients is limited by the number of available transaction numbers The time of the email operation can be defined in the field Start Date A click on the button with the calender symbol opens the calendar The use of the calendar is explained in the last point of this section All settings can be saved by clicking on Save Before saving check syntax of the email address
503. ration System Settings EvaSys Settings Functions Data Entry Assistant Send ing a report to the instructor Any single survey whose answers to open questions have already been entered by a data entry assistant is protected and cannot be simultaneously edited by others In this way disruptions caused by the unseen concurrent editing of data are avoided 204 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback 4 5 Instant Feedback The PDF Report After scanning the questionnaires during which you may have verified unclear fields and entered open questions you can immediately view the evaluation results As soon as there is data available from at least one questionnaire there are two types of reports available the HTML and the PDF report If you wish to get an impression of a specific type of report for example whilst creating particular types of reports it suf fices to create an online survey fill in a questionnaire and send it With this data alone reports can be created EvaSys supports the PDF A 1b Standard This standard ensures that your PDF reports are suitable for long term digital preservation and are clearly able to be repro duced Note When using your own PDF templates your PDF reports are no longer PDF A 1b compatible This applies to reports whose cover letter was modified by your own templates under System Settings Documents as well as System S
504. ration from existing systems Existing data struc tures can be imported into EvaSys via CSV and XML import This is possible not only via the administrator s access for the complete system but also via the subunit administrator s access for the subunits of the relevant subunit administrator 2 3 1 CSV Import within Subunits Creating a User with CSV Import In order to avoid having to enter all the instructors trainers and courses in a subunit manually EvaSys offers a CSV import interface which allows the import of user pro 72 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period files CSV stands for Comma Separated Values and means that data sets are changed line by line or other separators such as in our case semicolons into data fields separated by commas in text files You can set the separator at EvaSys Settings Data Import and Export Separator CSV Files Spreadsheet programs e g Microsoft Excel offer the possibility to save tables as CSV files To import this file click on Subunits then Browse and select the file Finally click on import All users as well as their courses will be generated unless they already exist Instructors Trainers already present will not be set up a second time so that you can always import the current list in order to keep the system updated A B L D E F EI H l J Ky jb 1 Instructor Mr Prof Dr Adam
505. re Thus you can configure an individual PDF report for each questionnaire Generate letter Creates a letter for the PDF report The letter contains the senders address defined in the section sender part 1 as well as the logo of the system taken from the setting in the organization profile and a predefined text which is person alized using placeholders This text is deposited in Text Templates Calculate indicators If the questionnaire supports the calculation of indicators these can be displayed at the beginning of the report There is a general average value which summarizes the general values again to an indicator the latter can be activated at hide overall indicator This function should only be used with questionnaires which have been developed for the averaging of individual questions in a category Show norm values If there are norm values then both indicators and the profile line in the PDF report will be normed Analysis of single questions Activates the detailed analysis of single questions main part of the PDF report Create maxi histogram After the detailed analysis part of a PDF report large histograms of scaled ques tions can be created using this function The bar for the response distribution the question text the pole identifiers the average the standard deviation and the total response percentages will appear as well Create profile line Activates the display of the profile line in t
506. re You will see the selected picture in the pre view Additionally you can define the position of the picture on the questionnaire left aligned centered or right aligned If you choose to scale the picture the basis for this is the width of the page width of page 100 In this case the alignment is centered and the scaling is 25 When you click on Apply you add the picture to the last place in the questionnaire where the focus was i e where you last clicked on the questionnaire Via clicking on the picture and using the key Delete you can remove the picture from the questionnaire again Alternatively you can set the focus on the picture and choose Delete in the menu Clipboard The position and selection of pictures can be changed after insertion as long as the questionnaire is not in use Just double click on the picture and the picture assistant will open Alternatively choose Picture in the menu Edit If you look at the PDF preview you can view this via the PDF symbol above the upper left corner of the form you will get a preview of the actual appearance of the ques tionnaire Here you can see an example Thanks for attending the survey and helping us improve the course Your Evaluation Commissioner Foa Hid amean Figure 546 Picture in the PDF Preview 2 11 Layout Settings Editor Control a I Add 4 Form Properties Layout settings Repair form Enabl
507. re shows the display of the instructor trainer name in an online and in a paperbased survey with the option activated in the System Settings Questions concerning the Trainer Instructor Donna Harwood Introduction into Eva Sys 2 1 How would you rate the trainer s overall teaching Excellent Poor methods 2 2 How would you rate the trainer s ability to set and meet Excellent Foor the objectives for the course Figure 465 Display of the Instructor Trainer Name in an Online Survey 354 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Module Evaluation 2 Questions concerning the Trainer Instructor Donna Harwood Introduction into EvaSys 2 1 How would you rate the trainer s overall teaching Excellent O0 0 0 0 0O Poor methods 2 2 How would you rate the trainer s ability to set and Excelen O O OF UU Poor ____ meet the objectives for the course Figure 466 Display of the Instructor Trainer Name in a Paperbased Survey Samantha Miller Advanced Reporting Please give us a feedback for the trainer of the course shown above Questions concerning the Trainer How would you rate the trainer s overall teaching methods Excellent ECHO CH 8 Poor How would you rate the trainer s ability to set and meet the Excellent EE EE GI Poor objectives for the course Figure 467 Display of the Course and Instructor Trainer Name in an Empty Question Group 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 355 EvaSys iw
508. re you have access to the online user manual for all active EvaSys users explaining the essential points on the user access in a much more compact fashion than the User Guide at hand does Maria Report Report Creator Reports g Folders Additional Reports T Reports System Settings amp My Profile System Information el Utilization Statistics E Deliveries AN System Info Help CA Send Email E Manual Manual for Creating Questionnaires Log Off Figure 295 Report Creator Main Menu If you wish to create summary reports or send out profile lines this is not possible without a folder Therefore you should initially create a new folder by clicking on the button Create new folder 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 251 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite EvaSys vV Economics V Eoucscion Survey ALR Suie s51 y Listing of folders Aen Mana Report Repon Creasi _ Create new Folder Reports Figure 296 Report Creator Creating a Folder After clicking on the button a window appears in which you can name your folder New folder Summary Reports 2011 Figure 297 Report Creator Naming the Folder Here a neutral name was chosen General Summaries 2011 However according to the type of your summaries planned you should choose a suitable structure for your folders You could for example arrange the reports a
509. re you see the user defined data fields Language location in the details of a course All predefined contents are shown here in a drop down menu If necessary the content of a field can also be entered here directly 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 65 EvaSys wv Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Auncmation Sule Edit course of Dr Richelle White Course name Introduction into Sociology Program of study Course ID 02 P1246 Evaluation period continuous Course Type Lecture Location R P 061 Enrollment 80 Participants data Anonymous survey participants Language english Location Media amp information Center Further report recipients secondary instructors W existing Computer Sciences Donna Harwood e Add Professional Development Donna Harwood a L Remove OK Il Cancel Figure 49 Course User Data Fields in the Details of a Course Editing Participant Data In the details of a course you also have the possibility of editing the participant data of a course In this area you can e manually insert participants into a course e delete single participants of the course e process existing participants e delete all existing participants of the course and e import all participant data directly for this course via CSV Import The participant data differentiates itself depending on whether you are conducting the course anonymously or non anonymously
510. read during pro cessing Only the correct identification of a survey by means of this number enables the correct assignment of generated data to a particular survey in EvaSys 3 System Start up and Security The initial operation of your EvaSys server was carried out during installation and test runs by our technicians This includes the installation and configuration of the required software programs including the connection and testing of collection devices produc tion level scanners Finally the system is integrated into the local network so that the users have access to the system with their Web browser Such access by users can if 26 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys wv Survey Automation Suite System Start up and Security required be severely limited The final step is configuring the mail server which sends reports and messages from EvaSys For maintenance purposes we recommend having so called remote maintenance access which allows our technicians to have direct access to your local EvaSys sys tem so that they can quickly and systematically analyze and remedy any problem that might arise The alternative would be a lengthy diagnosis via telephone 3 1 Adjustment to your Organization EvaSys has login screens shows colors when working with the software sends emails documents etc Many of those visible elements contribute to the appearance of your or institution or organization and thus can be adjusted according to
511. red in Settings Text Templates After selecting the batch event type Send Cover Sheets Forms The option boxes are completed automatically Choose a subunit and the corresponding options In 5 a list of courses which correspond to the selection will be displayed Only those courses which have survey processes without response data linked to them will appear 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 161 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite a Batch Events C Print Cover Sheets Forms Print PDF reports Send Cover Sheets Forms Send PDF reports Archive PDF reports and CSV raw data _ Send PDF reports as instructor profiles Send PSWDs to Instructors Hide surveys with documents which have already been sent Subunit 2 Survey Period 3 Course Type 4 Questionnaire Professional Development i gt Lecture Quest_01 WS10 11 Seminar train_en _ Select program of study 5 Course s fi 8 F Management Strategies NA_2 ianaging and maintaining a healthy lifestyle NA _ 1 Human Resource Management 02 P1237 may ee Deveiocment eM Gey EE e Gees 4 Figure 168 Batch Events Send Cover Sheets Forms Click on Request to start batch emailing A progress bar shows the status of the email submission process Dy The task is in progress Send email to belmore example com 100 Figure 169 Batch Events Email Submission To abort the email submiss
512. representation purposes As does the administrator the secondary administrator has administration rights for the entire system and can access all subunits For the creation and management of secondary administrators go to the menu Administrators in the main menu System Settings Profiles A click on the menu item opens the administrator management A summary table displays all existing sec ondary administrators The first column shows the name and in parentheses the additional roles of the secondary administrator The second column shows the num ber of reports generated by the report creator role The administrator can customize the user settings in the column Edit By use of the red cross in the column Delete a user can be removed completely 54 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period Subunits Questionnaires System Settings System Information ssi vV AQ Additional Secondary Administrators ne eRe nai ett Name Hepo Es An Mal in can Lieilerte AA L d i pe a John Doe Report Creator Verifier Data Entry Assistant 05 11 2011 A AS Create new secondary administrator Figure 35 Management of Secondary Administrators To create a secondary administrator click on the button Create new secondary administrator A three step wizard opens facilitating the creation of a user In the first step the user t
513. ress Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 2 a hardy example com Ms Amy Hardy Business Studies 3 mbrowngexample com Mr Michal Brown Computer Studies 4 s millere example com Mes Samantha Miller Business Studies 5 j gabriel example com Ms Janet Gabriel Business Studies 6 r fletcher example com Mr Rupert Fletcher Computer Studies Figure 192 CSV Files of a Non anonymous Survey Use the Participant Data for Participation Certificates All above mentioned placeholders PARTICIPANT LASTNAME PARTICIPANT _ FIRSTNAME etc can also be used for the participant certificates for online surveys 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 177 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Aimomadion Suki 3 3 Active Instructor Trainer Accounts Instructors Trainers can also implement surveys if they are granted authorization The difference compared to central evaluation is that active instructors trainers sur veys are linked neither to particular courses nor to survey periods The following provides you as the administrator or subunit administrator with a short overview of the options available to an active instructor trainer As an introduction for active instructors trainers a brief manual is available in PDF format called Active User Manual 3 3 1 Creating Active Instructors as Subunit Administrators To grant an instructor trainer authorization to implement his own surveys you as the Subunit administrator
514. ribution are sent to the instructors respec tively trainers in the menu System Settings EvaSys Settings Email Functions amp Accounts Delivery method PSWDs central evaluation select the courses which require the PSWD lists to be delivered to the survey owners The submission will be started by clicking Request Print PDF Reports For surveys that have already been evaluated the evaluations of a selection of courses can be requested There are two possibilities e The PDF reports of the selected courses are created together in a common PDF file This is advantageous for example when the PDF reports for multiple courses are to be printed at the same time e The PDF reports requested are summarized as single PDF files in a ZIP file This is advantageous for example when the single PDF files are to be passed on in electronic format deposited in a public folder or when one wants to print them individually Create an entire PDF Create individual PDF reports in ZIP file l Request Figure 170 Batch Events Print PDF Report For each of the PDF reports in the ZIP file it is possible where necessary to configure the naming of individual files in advance In the central system settings menu Sys tem Settings EvaSys Settings Functions Batch Events Naming conventions for PDF 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 163 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Reports in ZIP fi
515. ric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Management and Summary 1 5 Utilization Statistics In the section utilization statistics in the Menu System Information you will receive an overview about the utilization behaviour of EvaSys users At the top of the screen you will see two graphics At the left is the top 20 instructors trainers according to the number of surveys At the right you will see the top 20 in relation to the number of logins This number is of course interesting only in connection with the decentral model Complete access is only allowed the administrator and the deans managers Normal user accounts can only see the data of those users who in their configuration have permitted this sn WV EvaSys V i Subunits Questionnaires System settings EE ENEE Utilization Statistics E eem Name Subunit Logins Scans eForms Surveys Studies User since Last online Administrator amp Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Professional Development 0 150 152 23 6 09 06 2007 amp Caroline Bingley Economics 0 0 0 0 0 05 24 2011 amp Henry Darcy Engineenng 5 0 0 0 08 03 2007 03 25 2009 Information amp Dennis Data Data Entry Demo Subunit 0 10 0 3 3 08 16 2007 amp Paul Data _Systemlogins 13 0 0 0 O 08 03 2007 05 17 2011 amp Doris Dean Dean Engineenng 2 0 0 0 0 OB 08 2007 05 18 2009 tization Statistics amp Donna Harwood Computer Sciences 0 0 0 0 0 05 11 2011 oO System Summary Donn
516. ric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Use of the Question Library with VividForms Question Library zb Choose a question from the library Delete selected question from library Ta _ Detach libra ag pe Delete selected question group from libra J Detach library group Figure 557 Question Library Detach Library Question Library Group Use the option Detach library group to undo the connection between a protected question group and the library 4 3 Adding a Question to the Library If you would like to add a question you have highlighted click on in the area ques tion library on the edit bar The dialog shown to the right will appear You have three options Question Library Assistant m Add question to library Which library question group should the question be added to 9 College Evaluation Add highlighted question group to library and include this question vV Make question available to all users Apply Cancel Figure 558 Question Library Add a Question to the Library Include in an existing Question Group Select a group from the list and click on Apply Create a new Group Select the second option and enter the name for the new group Click on Apply 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 413 EvaSys V Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Green dog Suite Add the current highlighted Group Select the third
517. ring new data and saving it with OK Addresses and institute numbers play a role only in the self registering procedure If an activated user has forgotten his password it can be overwritten by entering the new password twice The user can then login again and change their password Moving User Accounts In the list of users in a subunit you will see a check field on the right hand side You can check any combination of these fields At the bottom of the table you will see the function Move selected to SUBUNITNAME Select the target subunit from the selection list A click on the button move will start the procedure Please note that users with the same name may already be in the target subunit if a number of instruc tors trainers have the same name In this case you will be notified that you have for each of the affected instructors trainers the following choice e Overwrite The surveys and profiles will be consolidated As a result there is a single user account e Recreate The user profile is moved even though the names are identical and there are two accounts with the same name which only differ in their login names The following users already exist in the targeted subunit Course name Overwrite Create Donna Harwood OK Cancel Figure 40 Move User Delete User Be extremely careful when using this function Deleting a profile means that all pro gram files and surveys will also be deleted Note
518. rison Manual Include answers to open questions Combine surveys unweighted Please note For this combination the mean values of the single surveys are averaged Verify d Back Figure 316 Report Creator Program of Study Report Selection of Elements Except for the selection of the program of study this window largely corresponds to what is presented to you during the creation of a subunit report 262 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting In the same way the information windows resemble one another prior to the actual generation of the report Here you once again receive detailed information on the report that you create you can again exclude single questions from the report and create the report via Create Request report on a program of study Your choice Program of study Economics Compilation name Economics WS10 11 Questionnaire train_en Period WS10 11 2010 09 01 to 2011 02 28 No of Surveys 3 No of completed questionnaires 46 The report creation may take a moment Please wait until an actinowledgment has been sent back from the server Which gender do you belong to male female Figure 317 Report Creator Program of Study Report Overview of the Selection made and the Questionnaire Then the report is added to the report list Prof Development WS10 11 Data available rain en 05 18 2011 2046 cchocsepdt r
519. rix fields in online surveys with value ranges and regular expressions before a survey participant can send the questionnaire Required Questions Those questions for which an answer is compulsory can be defined here Cross Tabulations The cross tabulations shown here will appear in the PDF report To save the form and close the Web editor click on the diskette symbol kd You will return to the questionnaire administration In order to completely delete the question naire click on the trash amp 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 415 EvaSys iw Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Geen Automation Suita 5 2 Filter Settings Filter settings allow you to suppress questions which may in certain circumstances be irrelevant This is especially interesting for online surveys where this prevents invalid questions from being responded to Filter settings Item triggering filter Value Options Add question have already been in the refectory ki Add Figure 560 Filter Settings However the filter settings defined here are also used for data from paper surveys When analyzing each completed questionnaire a check is carried out whether the filter settings should be applied A question asks about the use of presentation programs in a course If this question is answered with a No then questions about the quality of such presentations will not be asked online surveys or not analyzed paper survey Filter settings I
520. rs and voice output can be used for a better understanding This allows blind people to take part in online surveys easily and without complication Electric Paper orientates itself on the Web Content Accessibility Guidelines WCAG 1 0 and partly according to WCAG 2 0 which in turn are based on national guide lines such as BITV or ADA Section 508 As part of the Electric Paper quality management the graphical interface of the com plete system is tested for Web accessibility using suitable tools such as WAVE http wave webaim org NM WAVE has detected no accessibility errors but you must still check your page to ensure it is actually accessible Subunits Questionnaires System Settings System Infor Zeg Gel List of all Subunits l Subunit fthliser thleait A f JA user Fedi IV Computer Sciences list for subunit Delete_ Jemmy Jerry User count iz Ss Subunit Sr Peter Brown PE ETETE ETNE P 5 SE Be user ART Co Delote Henry D I V epartment Training list for subunit lecht Subunits User count 3 sl Subunit SBU len Display user a Edi i I A SIM E Z Computer lv Engineering list for subunit Delete Henry Darcy User count 5 D Subunit subunit 5 Figure 7 Testing the EvaSys Interface with WAVE In order to ensure the highest possible accessibility high contrast color schemes can be used 20 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V S
521. rse you can also use this account for yourself Login and First Steps In order to be able to log on as report creator open the usual EvaSys start page It looks just like the one shown in the following Version 5 0 Login User name Password OK Figure 294 EvaSys Login Window As soon as you have logged on here the start screen of the report creator appears offering you on the left hand side a menu with various options e The option Reports allows you to download reports on indicators which give the university management and or the management of your company an overview of the assessment the courses e By the option My profile you can change the user data of this report creator access for example password language etc 250 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting e The utilization statistics give you an overview of the activities of this report creator for example the number of the log ins the created folders etc e Deliveries informs you how many emails the report creator has already sent e The field System Info gives you an overview of the address data of the organiza tion as well as of the individual subunits e Clicking on the option Send email opens a page that enables you to send an email to any address e The option Manual below provides you with further information on EvaSys and the use of the program He
522. rses By clicking on the button Show the courses are shown in the list If required the name of the instructor can also be shown by activating the option Show instructors By using the control button and mouse clicks any number of courses can now be selected After clicking on Display Surveys you are redirected to the survey list of the desired surveys 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 123 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite 3 Filters Questionnaire Additional filters Ouest DI Course Type train_en ALL k ws0g 10 ALL e WS0e 07 306 5S05 Show instructors 48 Human Resource Management 73 Human Resource Management 62 Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle 47 Organization and Management Display Surveys Professional Development Philipp Belmore ssi Human Resource Management Data ygi l Eer e im vi 02 P 1237 3 available 2017 85 05 12 2011 Q Qa train_en vat op y Sy SSPR Managing and maintaining a healthy In A a ate OOA A lifestyle NA 3 Proe CO Ouest DI Show Questionnaire gj AS Figure 120 Tree Structure Display Surveys Generating Surveys In order to use the tree structure to create new surveys in the panel actions select the option Generate Surveys On the left select the levels in which you would like to generate the surveys by checking the appropriate boxes Then on the right select the required s
523. rt Creator Changing Criteria from female to male Furthermore you can delete a selected criterion at any time by clicking under Options on the red cross You can also create a subgroup report for all male interviewees via a simple sub group you do not need a criteria combination to do this You can however combine this criteria with others for example with the grade level In this way you can create a subgroup report for all male interviewees who have the grade level freshman As described above first select the criterion Gender with the value male In a sec ond step select the criterion Main Subject with the value Business Studies Your Default criteria combination now contains two criteria 278 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Question Operator Value Options Default criteria combination Which gender do you belong to 1 male e EE And e Main subject e 5 Business Studies e P 4 Figure 347 Report Creator Criteria Combination of all Male Interviewees with main subject Business Studies In this example you wanted to consolidate all male students with the main subject Business Studies in your subgroup report This means that both conditions must be met at the same time i e the student is male AND he studies Business For this rea son both of the selected criteria are connected wit
524. rt creator Minimum number of surveys to allow a report creator to D v SE create a subunit report Decentral Evaluation Figure 313 Administrator Login System Settings EvaSys Settings Functions Minimal survey number report creator This way the message no longer appears and you can create the test reports Amongst the general information on the summary report you will find a listing of the questions of the related questionnaire Here you can deactivate selection boxes as required and thus exclude questions from the summary report When all properties are selected correctly you click on the button Create and the report is produced Please note that depending on the data quantity the processing may take up to several minutes After the creation of the subunit report the folder view appears again the list of the reports is however now complemented with the subunit report Reports in Folder Summary Reports 2011 Type Name Status Form Created Forms Del Report Export HTML Prof Development WS10 11 Data available trainen 05 18 2011 046 choose t tegen CSV SPHINX Figure 314 Report Creator Subunit Report in the Study Folder Program of Study Report In the same way you can produce a summary for a program of study a particular semester and selected course types and questionnaires 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 261 Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model EvaSys V 2 Survey Automation Suite
525. rther Report Recipients Secondary Instructors The defined standard PDF report is sent to the defined recipient s The standard report can be defined in the details of a questionnaire The report recipients are the instructor as well as selected Further Report Recipients Secondary Instructors Batch Events Details of the Survey parte user can define which report is to be sent to the defined recipi Table 11 Types of Dispatch 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 235 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Guipvay Aomain Sukk 5 Phase 4 Advanced Reporting As soon as you have implemented surveys and scanned data you receive the auto matically generated reports If you wish to process this data further for example to summarize and or compare it there are extensive and flexible options in EvaSys available to you as well as the export facilities into other programs In the phase model this is the fourth of the five phases In this chapter you initially learn what indicators are and how you can create them in EvasSys since they form the basis for a certain type of summary reports You will then receive a comprehensive introduction to the options in producing sum mary reports The creation of reports does not occur via the administrator access but rather you must be logged in as a report creator Often this role however is carried out jointly with that of the EvaSys administrator For expanded evalua
526. rts Since this comparison provides at a glance a comfortable and expressive overview of surveys it is conducted often A popular application is the comparison of a survey with the subunit report as well as the total evaluation Before you can create comparison lines the necessary surveys and reports must of course be available Creating and Downloading Comparative Profile Lines When you have created these select the option Batch Profile Lines from the second drop down list in the study folder and click the button Next 288 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw PHH dear Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Create reports Summarized lt nn Reports 72 sl Me Compansonsl Batch Profile Lines F Next A Figure 366 Report Creator Create Profile Line Emails Then the usual choices are presented to you in a new window Select the desired sub units the survey periods here no multiple selection is possible the course types and the relevant ones comparable questionnaires here As usual the list of courses that meet all criteria is displayed Create profile line report 1 Subunit 2 Survey Penod 3 Type 4 Questionnaire Engineering a ESM a Ouest Di a Professional Development wston Seminar _ Data Entry Demo Subunit 5510 train_en_1 ws09n0 507 WOP 506 WSO0S 06 505 5 Courses Reports A Rss e gem Management Sirategies HA 21 Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle
527. ructors B Language english Location Technical School Reload Undo Figure 329 Report Creator Extended Filter Options Update Course List With Back all entries are being deleted from the search mask and the course view is updated likewise Any Compilation Tree Structure When creating an Any Compilation report surveys can also be selected with the help of a tree structure By this the hierarchical order of the different organizational levels e g subunit location program of study instructor etc is better visualized and the desired surveys can be selected more easily Choose the option Any Compilation Tree Structure from the drop down list and click the button Next Create reports Summarized Reports Any compilation Tree structure Comparisons Batch Profile Lines Figure 330 Report Creator Create Any Compilation Tree Structure In the left section of the next window the tree is displayed The single levels of the tree can be opened or closed by clicking the symbols or clicking on the name of the level All levels the administrator has selected for the organizational structure are shown in the predefined order By marking the boxes single levels can be selected For further information on working with the tree structure please see chapter B 3 2 5 Tree Structure 270 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation
528. rve the defined maximum number and size for email attachments System Set tings EvaSys Settings Email Functions amp Accounts Maximum number of attach ments respectively Maximum size of attachments In the menu System Settings Text Templates the relevant email text can be edited CEMA Results of a survey and E MAIL Results of a survey Summary Send PDF Reports as Instructor Trainer Profiles You can send your instructor trainer profile for surveys that have already been evalu ated as a batch email By activating the option Include courses with secondary instructors or secondary trainers in instructor profiles or trainer profiles courses with additional report recipients are also included You can determine whether or not the answers to open questions are to be included in your instructor trainer profile To do this please activate the option Include answers to open questions If the respective instructor trainer in addition to his profile is to receive a detailed report for each of his courses simply activate the option Also send single PDF reports Furthermore you can determine whether profiles and PDF reports are sent solely to the respective instructor trainer Send to instructors or trainers or only to a speci fied email address Send all to the following email address Include answers to open questions Also send single PDF reports o Send to instruc
529. rvey Automation Suite System Management and Summary Alternatively restricting the number of licenses available can be undertaken directly in the details of a subunit In the area Assign user licenses the administrator can adjust the number of licenses retrospectively or define this directly when creating the subunit iz Subunit details Subunit Name Professional Development Dept No 15 Logo File system logo D Edit Phone Fax Street Address ZIP Code City Email Online survey template My new Template Peter Brown er dee ees E http 192 168 245 129 evasys_01 online Subunit visibility Unrestricted D 4 Show the subunit in the context menu Subunits Assign user licenses en unlimited Handling of handwritten texts Direct display default setting Display after manual collection note customizable threshold System settings EvaSys Settings Surveys _ Never display OK p Cancel Figure 605 Restricting User Licenses in the Details of a Subunit The subunit administrator cannot make any of his own settings here He can how ever see in the subunit details how many licenses are available to him and how many have already been used Once a subunit has reached the established limit of user licenses no new accounts can be created The same is true when moving users into subunits whose contin gency is already exhausted When creating a new subunit a warning is shown if all accounts
530. rveys 3 No of completed questionnaires 46 The report creation may take a moment Please wait until an actnowledgment has been sent back from the server Which gender do you belong to male female What is your age 18 29 30 39 40 49 50 59 60 69 Older than 69 Figure 311 Report Creator Subunit Report Final Overview 260 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Here you can check once again which subunit you selected what the report will be called and based on which questionnaire it will be created Furthermore the selected survey period appears here again with the precise data defined by the administrator You can see how many surveys meet your selected criteria and to how many return responses it applies meaning completed questionnaires If you would like to test the report creator and have only very few surveys running in your system a warning message may appear here and you do not have the possibility to produce a summary report No of Surveys 1 below minimum No of completed questionnaires 9 Figure 312 Report Creator Number of Surveys below the Minimum Number In this case please inform your EvaSys administrator For testing purposes he can change in the EvaSys Settings under System Settings EvaSys Settings Functions the option Minimum survey number report creator by setting it to 0 m Minimal survey number repo
531. rveys You can recognize the place holders by their continuous capital letters as well as the angular brackets With online surveys you can define whether the survey header should be displayed See here chapter B 2 4 2 Management of Questionnaires and Detailed View online sur veys These include for example the name of the subunit the name of the course to be evaluated or the name of the instructor trainer The placeholders which are automatically indicated during editing of a questionnaire usually suffice If required however these can be individually adjusted In the follow ing figure you can see the placeholders that the header area contains by default Sample Questionnaire W Electric Paper ORGANIZATION AUTHOR Sugua SURVEY V Mark as shown OMOO OF I MARK Correction OBO RI O CORRECTION Figure 480 Placeholders in a Questionnaire Click on a placeholder to edit its content Placeholder Wizard Form header settings Number of lines 2 m Edit placeholder Default Placeholder SUBUNIT Please choose a placeholder and or individualize the form header Placeholder HAQOSJA SM SUBUNIT Participant Placeholder Firstname w ka Placeholder across both Note The placeholder in the other column d of this line will be deleted automatically columns Apply Cancel Figure 481 Editing the Placeholder A p
532. ry to use ICR for handprint recognition which would mean a considerable amount of review and correction 1 Questions about you What is your age om CTT 000r Figure 521 Horizontal Matrix Question in the PDF Preview 2 6 6 Vertical Matrix Question With the vertical matrix question up to ten digit numbers can be entered i e student number zip codes etc Select the question type matrix field and click Next You can now enter the text of the question Then click Next In this example a vertical matrix question was selected with a minimum value of 00001 and a maximum value of 99999 In the report the results are presented in 10 categories In order to also register leading zeros the matrix value is captured as text 392 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Aunomation Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor Gw Question Wizard Define Options Orientation Horizontal up to 5 digit numbers Vertical up to 10 digit numbers Minimum Value 00001 Maximum Value 99999 Question group 40 count Matrix value as Text e Back Nex Apply Cancel Figure 522 Create Vertical Matrix Question The PDF preview of this vertical matrix question looks as follows Your Zipcode III 200000 3OOOOU0 4900000 STI STITT TOOOOU STITT aTIITUI OUT Figure 523 Vertical Matrix Question in the PDF Preview When filled out such a matrix question could for example
533. s 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 103 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Giiniay Ainsmation Suis Select e asubunit e asurvey period e one or more types of courses e a questionnaire e one or more courses e a survey type You can select more than one option by pressing down the left mouse button and pull ing the mouse down You can also hold the Ctrl button and select any number of individual courses Finally you must select the survey method You have the choice of e Hard copy procedure Each questionnaire for each course is downloaded automatically personalized and printed e Cover sheet procedure A cover sheet is printed for each course while the questionnaires are prepro duced Afterwards the cover letter is scanned together with the completed ques tionnaires and serves to identify the survey e Online surveys For each course the appropriate number of PSWDs will be produced The number of PSWDs is taken from the data field number participants in the course data If this information is missing then there is a default setting at EvaSys Settings Sur vey Online Default value PSWD per survey central evaluation These PSWDs are then sent to the survey participants There are two ways of doing this The possibilties of distributing questionnaires and PSWDs are described in chapter B 3 2 9 Batch Events 3 2 2 Display Surveys E Le 3 al it Ss Additional filters 18
534. s Cover Sheet to Instructor Trainer Trigger The instructor trainer has used an activated user account to create a survey according to the cover sheet procedure decentral or the administrator is sending the instructor trainer a cover sheet CE Content Personalized text with an attached cover sheet for a paper survey in the cover sheet procedure a PDF file Batch Printed Form for Instructors Trainers Hybrid Surveys Trigger The administrator sends an email with personalized questionnaire to the instructors trainers Central Evaluation for a hybrid survey The setting EvaSys Settings Email Functions amp Accounts Delivery Method PSWDs Central Evaluation must be at Lec turer Content Personalized texts with attached PDF document containing personalized forms The PSWD makes each form unique Form to Instructor Trainer Trigger The instructor trainer has used an activated user account to create a survey according to the hard copy procedure decentral or the administrator has sent the instructor trainer a questionnaire CE 458 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Configuration Settings Content Personalized text with attached form for a paper survey in hard copy procedure as PDF file or FDF file PSWDs for Online Surveys to Instructor Trainer Trigger The instructor trainer has used an activated user account to create an online survey decentral or the a
535. s Number of failed logins before a CAPTCHA will be shown Number of failed logins a user can have befora a CAPTCHA will be shown to be typed in Observed period of time and blocking time lf a user has several failed logins during the period of time defined here he she will be prompted to type ina CAPTCHA At the same time the login screen will be blocked for the network address of the potential attacker for the period in minutes defined here The blocking can be unlocked ahead of time by typing in the CAPTCHA correctly Restricted access Activates deactivates the restriction of access When activated the EvaSys server checks the IP address of each inquiring computer for the following IP address domains Begin IP address domain participant online survey First permitted IP address for participants in an online survey End IP address domain participant online survey Last permitted IP address for participants in an online survey Begin IP address domain user First permitted IP address for users End IP address domain user Last permitted IP address for users 496 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Configuration Settings Begin IP address domain for administrator First permitted IP address for the administrator End IP address domain for administrator Last permitted IP address for the administrator 2 5 14 Section Maintenance Debug mode Activate deactivate debug This setti
536. s Table 1 Necessary Information for a new User Account Remember that you will not be able to use again a login name you have already used in another profile The following figure shows exemplarily creating an instuctor account 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 57 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite 2 Change the user type E Instructor Dean of Studies Dean See utilization st Module Report Creator Data Entry Assistant Venfier Subunit Administrato 2 Change the attributes of the user Mir k Title First name Philipp Last name Belmore Cancel Phone Email belmore example com Address 2 Change the user rights Language Default language QM Views No OM Views x Login name belmore additional subunits for QM views New password PTTTTITITTT TTT Ty Computer Scene Confirm new TEEPE ETE Trey password Cancel i I ViidForms Editor Unrestricted access e Geet ss fe JI Save Figure 38 Creating an Instructor Account three Steps Activating Deactivating User Profiles With this function you can activate or deactivate a user profile Simply click on the icon directly next to the user name Icons with a portrait and a padlock stand for pas sive user profiles Icons with a portrait but no padlock stand for active user profiles a
537. s Correction of checkboxes not clearly read 192 Recognition of the checked boxes 191 Client operations 500 Color scheme 407 Combining multiple criteria 276 Comment Handwritten comments 201 Comparative profile lines Dispatch of comparative profile lines 288 2011 Electric Paper GmbH Comparison of profile lines 302 Compilation Delete compilations 453 Components of the PDF report 206 Configuration 0 0 0 0 c ee eee eee 4795 Activating the indicators in the configuration 239 KEE eege Roe be ew a oe e aw Set 30 Cronbach s Alpha eee 242 Definition of special search configurations 339 Definition of special table configurations 339 Biel Lu 30 TOM beet Eeer A EE eh eed oa 30 Configuration settings 0 456 Connection Connection between question and library 412 Correction View 196 Course Creating courseS 61 Editing courses 00 0 e eee eee 61 Search for courses 435 Course typeS ac can eae aca bs ed ere oe eet 40 Cover sheet procedure 000 100 Creating courseS 61 Creating indicator Creating the indicators for a questionnaire 241 Cronbachs Alpha 0 00 eee eee 242 CSV Import CSV Import within subunits 72 D Data Working with the active instructor s data 186 Data entry Manual entry of handwritten comments
538. s e g the average of the program of study and of the department 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 217 EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Profile Subunit Professional Development Name of the instructor Carlos Hernandez Name of the course Graduate Survey 2011 l Name of the survey n What is the grade of your last school graduation 1 Grades 1 0 5 av 17 to 5 0 Ven a n The instructor is always well prepared if _ 1_ n av 5 n The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way a HI av 5 j n The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc without any SI SU av 47 problems n Please grade the instructor for this course poop very good au zb Figure 257 PDF Report Profile Line In order to activate the profile line use the function System Settings Report Settings Configuration Create profile line If desired the profile line can be divided corresponding to question groups and thereby can be displayed in separate sections To do this activate the option System Settings Report Settings Profile line Display question groups Detail Norm Profile Line Normed profile Subunit Professional Development Name of the instructor Carlos Hernandez Name of the course Graduate Survey 2011 l Name of the survey ZU 55 100 115 130 Dimension Norm value The instructor is always well prep
539. s the service appears as ESCCMailService 1 12 3 More Log Files VividForms Log File The VividForms Reader protocols all processed questionnaires in this text file You can find it in the program group in the VividForms Reader If the debug mode in the VividForms Reader has been activated then the protocol will receive very detailed data about the form processing operation 2 Configuration Settings 2 1 Text Templates Provided they have the setting in their configuration EvaSys sends emails to users for a number of reasons The texts for these emails can be edited here Alongside the texts for emails you can also define texts for cover letters which are used in PDF reports By using a placeholder you can personalize these automatically created mes sages for your recipients If desired emails can be sent in HTML format and be edited with the help of HTML tags You can continue to define attachments for emails and templates for PDF letters These documents must be first uploaded into the system Please note that some option settings can also be defined specifically for individual questionnaires Settings at questionnaire level have priority over general settings 2 1 1 Viewing Email Texts and Text Templates The key elements for these settings are the selected actions and the language Head ings text and attachment or PDF template can be defined for this combination The window for processing the text template is made up of
540. s Participants 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 171 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite To add a new participant you must first enter the email address of the participant in the area Search for Participants Then click on Search EvaSys searches all exis tent participant data for this email address If the participant is already in the system for example for another non anonymous course EvaSys adopts all existing data in the area Details of the participants With exception of the email address you can change these details as and when required If the given email address is not yet in the system EvaSys adopts this email address in the area Details of the participants and you can add all other information such as name address etc You can add further information on the participant such as course of study type of degree etc using the three custom fields You can later on use these criteria to filter the CSV raw data Details of the participants Course Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle Mr F Title First Name John Last name Doe Email j doe example com Address Custom 1 Engineering Custom 2 Custom 3 Save Cancel Figure 182 Details of a Non anonymous Participant Close the window by clicking on Save The participant has now been created Click on the button Back at the bottom of the page to return to the course details
541. s Survey Online Alternative forwarding for online surveys no secret word will be used Figure 75 Define a Password in the System Settings 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 91 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Aimomadion Suki Subunits Select a subunit for which the questionnaire should be available Course Type Select one or more different types of course for which the questionnaire is permitted Period Give the periods for which the questionnaire can be used 2 4 3 Multiple Languages For online surveys you can assign several languages to one form in EvaSys By this means EvaSys allows you to create forms conduct surveys and present results in reports in a number of languages A questionnaire already integrated into EvaSys can be adapted to a new language any time you like The language of the first version is automatically defined as the main language To define a language select the option Languages from the drop down list in the Details view of a questionnaire 7 Details for questionnaire Quest_01 Quest_01 Evaluation Questionnaire s VividForms Editor wW PDF Sample Show s In the recognition set of the VividForms Reader Refresh m Advanced settings Figure 76 Add Languages to a Questionnaire For the main language and any subsequent language you can make the following settings e Name of the language Enter the name of t
542. s from norms has been created to make this process simpler Statistical Approach The direct basis of the quality guidelines are the norm values i e mean and standard deviation of the norm base of the individual questions The strength of this approach is that the norm values are based on a very large data basis and the poling of the questions is already set The idea of the conversion is to tie the lower and upper thresholds of the quality guide line to the means and standard deviations of the norm base Whether the threshold value corresponds exactly to the mean of the norm base or is slightly better or worse can be defined by the user by choosing a multiple of the standard deviation of the norm base S This multiple is called granularity The granularity can be between 3 and 3 so that you can define whether the threshold of the quality guideline is to be below or above the mean of the norm base The granularity is chosen once for the lower and once for the upper threshold for all questions together The calculation of the threshold values for the quality guidelines is done automatically after the conversion 332 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Phase 5 Quality Management Conversion In order to access the conversion view choose Quality guidelines in the question naire details in the drop down menu under Advanced Settings then click on Edit In the window that opens c
543. s iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback system settings of the PDF report If you activate it the scales of those dimensions items where smaller values are considered as positive and bigger values as negative are reversed Dimension Value Norm value 70 100 130 2 Questions about the instructor 48 106 a 3 Questions about the course 4 107 4 Questions about the teaching material 45 106 5 Questions about the studying conditions 4 105 Figure 248 PDF Letter Norm Profile Lines Thus if smaller values i e values left of the norm are positive the values are reversed All amplitudes of the normed profile line on the right side of the norm can be interpreted as positive evaluation results Accordingly the values left of the center are negative Please note The reversed values are also taken for the calculation of the mean values Detailed Report Includes an analysis of all closed questions e Scaled questions with 2 to 11 options e 1ofn questions with any number of options e mofn questions with any number of options with e graphic display of histogram arithmetic or trimmed mean am tm and standard deviation e numeric value of absolute or relative response frequency arithmetic or trimmed mean am tm and or median with 10 or 25 quintile levels s n total e lf the quality guidelines have been defined and the traffic light symbol has been activated then next to the evalua
544. s iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Goen Aimomadion Subs 7 8 Instant feedback As soon as the questionnaires have been scanned and analysed by the VividForms Reader resp the online survey participants have taken part in the survey EvaSys will automatically generate reports on both the module survey in whole and all its single components courses which have been surveyed In the following figure you can see the report on a module survey and all of its compo nents The report for the whole module has the name of the module in this case Eva Sys Basics It can also be recognized by the name of the module questionnaire in the column Form in this case XL279XWT amp Computer Sciences EvaSys Basic Training Zeen Type Name A Status Forms Processed Form Repot Export Actions Donna Harwood Introduction into EvaSys 02 er 2008 05 23 2011 O Trainer O mA me v Jg EvaSys Basic Trainin Data C3008 32 05 23 2011 XLZ79XWT ORA ee gS 9 oe y g available EvaSys Basic Training General 01 Data Coop 05 23201 O General ORO S JSPR available ie Huddle Norming and Quality Guidelines Seet 2009 05 23 2011 O A Trainer OBD e vr JSIR Data Samantha Miller Advanced Reporting 03 alaha 2009 05 23 2011 OQ Trainer Jakes B l DS Figure 459 Reports on the Module Survey and all of its Components Please note When you have conducted an online survey the list
545. s mask php mode show amp tan C XES Your EvaSys Administrator Doo S After clicking on the link the Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions a new window appears where the instructor trainer can change some settings concerning the course At the top the instructor trainer can supplement or if necessary correct information concerning the course Use of a VividForms Questionnaire When using a VividForms questionnaire the recipient will receive a template with options to extend the existing questionnaire using the VividForms Editor The adminis trator can limit the size of the questionnaire by defining a maximum number of pages when creating the form template e Remind The instructor trainer is reminded of the Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions Again the link is entered in the email Optionally the dispatch of emails can be prevented by activating the option No email submission In this case the instructor trainer will not receive information on activation or deactivation of the instructor trainer s optional questions 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 157 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Guetta Sukk e Deactivate The Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions are deactivated and can no longer be accessed Optionally the dispatch of emails can also here be prevented by activat ing the option No email submission Activate Remind Deactivate Figure 163 No Submission of Emails
546. s necessary for CSV import files Instructor Data Course Data Func Title 1 Title 2 First Last Email Course Course ID Course Program Course Number tion Name Name Name Location of Studies Type Partici pants Examples Instruc Mr Prof Dr Ned Overend over Math 10554 v 02 105 _ Economics 1 34 tor end exa mple com Instruc Mr Prof Dr Edward Mont montg ex Math II 10564 v 02 123 Economics 2 20 tor gomery ample com Instruc Mrs Prof Dr Mary Cheva m cheva 20 tor lier lier exam ple com Table 2 Structure of the CSV File 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 73 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model A line of the CSV file looks like this Instructor Mr Prof Dr Ned Overend overend example com Math II 10574 v 02 104 Economics 1 20 Column Function Function Keyword Instructor or Dean Dean of Studies Data Entry Assistant Report Creator these user types cannot be given course data Title 1 Keyword Mr Mrs Neutral or custom title Title 2 Max 50 characters optional field First Name Max 50 characters optional field Surname Max 50 characters non optional field Email Max 100 characters optional field Course Name Max 200 characters non optional field Course Code Max 150 characters non optional field Course Location Max 100 characters optional field Program of Studies Max 50 characters optional field Type Index of course type non optio
547. s only instruc tors trainers can be assigned courses Without having created an instructor trainer no course can be created nor surveyed To conduct a survey the system always has to be built up to the third level the course level By choosing a questionnaire as well as an evaluation period the survey for a course can be created 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 43 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite The following figure shows an example of an organizational structure for a university Figure 24 Example of an organizational structure of a university The functions for creating the organizational structure within EvaSys can be found in the menu Subunits Here the single levels can be created or imported and their con tents can be managed Furthermore you will also have access to the survey manage ment This view is available to the administrator as well as to the subunit administrator The subunit administrator can use all the functions described in the following sections except for setting up subunits EvaSys IV S Subunits Questionnaires System Settings System Information Kaf 5544 iV Eat Survey Automaton Suie Sa List of all Subunits Peter Brown compere V Computer Sciences SH a 4 Subunits E Engineering enry Darcy Wies V Professional Development e Computer Scienc e Engineering vV S Iw Professional De _Systemiogins bw _Systemiogins Central Evaluation Fi
548. s other wise not possible e Do not activate any first or second comparative line as then you would restrict yourself to 5 Courses Reports in order to select profile lines If you activate the Minimum Maximum Values and or the Overall Average but deactivate the Comparison lines only the respective current profile line will be dis played to you the values of further courses reports however flow into the calculation of the minimum maximum values and that of the total average In practice this looks for example as follows Under 5 Courses Reports you select Management Strategies and Organization and Management as well as the report Prof Development WS10 11 The first and second comparative line remain deactivated Now tick Comparison of selected courses of reports with each other no necessity but is advisable In the comparison options the Minimum Maximum Values are activated and Com parison lines and the two other options are deactivated Everything else remains the same The graphic contains only one course each in this example but the values of the others are taken into account clearly proven by the grayed zones 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 295 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Management Strategies Profile Subunit Professional Development T Name of the instructor Prof Dr
549. s takes the address of Donna Harwood and inserts it below the user name 2 Change the attributes of the user Mr T Title First name Philipp Last name Belmore Phone Email belmore example com Language Default language Login name belmore New password reesesseresseeeesereeeeresseeeg e Confirm new password LDAP registration Deactivated Cancel lt lt Back Next zs Figure 237 PDF Letter Specification of the Recipient s Address e Sender s address The sender s address in the figure shown at the letter s top right is specified by you in the configuration of each corresponding PDF report System Settings Report Settings Configuration You will find the options Sender part 1 up to Sender part 3 Here you can insert the university s name your company street and city or whatever else you may require 208 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback Electric Paper First line of the senders address field on the PDF report file cover letter m Sender part 1 Se Sender part 2 Konrad Zuse Allee 13 Second line of the senders address field on the PDF report file cover letter Sender part 3 21337 L neburg Third line of the senders address field on the PDF report file cover letter Figure 238 PDF Letter Sender s Address on the Letter The sender s details
550. s the public questions of subunit administra tors and create new question groups and questions A subunit administrator who has the right to create public questions can edit the public and non public question group s of other subunit administrators and also create new elements here however he only has viewing rights for other subunits 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 97 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model A subunit administrator who does not have the right to create public questions cannot edit the public or non public questions of other subunit administrators in his subunit he only has viewing rights The right to input public questions in the library can be given in the user properties of the subunit administrator By default subunit administrators do not have the right to create public questions The active user only has viewing rights and cannot input public questions into the library He can however copy question groups and questions from public libraries into his own library and edit them there Import and Export The import into the question library as well as the export from it is achieved via a CSV file An example file for the import is included in the system System Information Sample files Question library When importing the question library as a CSV file the following structure must be adhered to Question Question Number of Question Left pole Right Abs
551. s via CSV r CSV import of survey participant data Figure 177 CSV Import of Participant Data The newly imported participants are added to the already existent participants of the course 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 169 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Editing Participant Data You have the possibility of editing the imported participant data in the properties of the corresponding course To do this click on the green pencil in the course list of an instructor trainer Courses of Philipp Belmore eee Managing 62 maintaining EconomicsiengineeningiCompater ua 4 continuous Seminar Sem D 7 english Central Campus a healthy ee lifestyle 63 GET Economics Engineering NA continuous Seminar Sem 02 55 deutsch Central Campus Human T x 73 Resource conomicslEngineeringlComputer 02 4237 continuous Seminar R P412 20 engish Meda information Management Create new course Figure 178 Course List with the Edit Button column Action A window opens automatically displaying the properties of the course Edit course of Philipp Belmore Course name Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle Program of study Economics Engineering Computer Sciences Course ID NAA Evaluation period continuous e Course Type Seminar we Location Sem 03 Enrollment Participants data Anonymous survey english Central Cam
552. s you to define skipping rules in order to skip irrelevant questions The participant has responded to a question whether a presentation program was used with no Any following questions about the quality of the presentation program should not be answered in order to avoid falsifying the data E If an online survey has an insufficient response rate a reminder function can batch email the participants with a reminder to complete the questionnaire The anonymity of the participant remains unaffected Upon submission the system will save a time stamp which is available through the raw data export for each dataset This information can be used to analyze the respondent behavior The option certificate of participation is available to allow the participants to prove their completion of the survey This certificate can either be displayed as a PDF docu ment after submission of the form or provided through an email with a PDF attach ment The certificate can only be mailed if the PSWDs were sent out by email in the first place The option of displaying a PDF certificate in the browser requires the cre ation upload and attachment of a PDF template see B 2 3 2 Management of ques tionnaires and detailed view Online surveys are symbolized with a globe You can create so called templates to customize online surveys to individual needs 3 1 4 Password Based Online Survey The password based online survey is an online survey with
553. se averaged data from surveys you conducted in the past with the same questionnaire You can add these norm data mean values and stan dard deviations for the individual questions of the questionnaire manually or you can have them converted automatically from a summary report that was created by a report creator This can be e g a summary report for a subunit or similar 314 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 5 Quality Management Carlos Hernandez Graduate Survey 2011 Normed profile Subunit Professional Development P Name of the instructor Carlos Hernandez Name of the course Graduate Survey 2011 Name of the survey 70 a5 100 115 130 Dimension Norm value The instructor is always well prepared H The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way Sa 2 Questions about the e 107 The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc instructor without any problems Please grade the instructor for this course kb The lead time of the course is adequate bett Figure 408 Normed Profile Line for each Scaled Question of a Questionnaire In addition to norming survey results individual message texts for below average average and above average results can be added to the results These texts can be accessed by instructors trainers via a link in the PDF report Text building blocks are used to create individual message texts based on the results achieved i
554. se enter the session number the consultant gives to you on the phone Session number Connect T Exit Figure 3 Netviewer Participant Login When being asked if you want to transfer your screen click Yes The support consul tant will now be able to see your screen On your screen a small control window is dis played The option Show is activated which means that your screen is transferred Remote control Figure 4 Remote Control Activate the remote control by clicking the button on in the area Remote control You can end the remote control at any time by pressing the F12 key or closing the program 16 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite The Basics By clicking the arrow button the whole control panel opens In the menu Application Selection you can if necessary restrict the selection of transmitted programs by deselecting the box next to the corresponding program The options Transfer newly opened applications Transfer task bar and system and Transfer desktop should remain activated Application selection Show all applications W Microsoft Office Word A Online Support Windows I vM Corporate de NEU_16_0 9 Windows Explorer Inbox Microsoft Outlook Transfer newly opened applications Transfer desktop Transfer task bar and system ht Dh ESO S S Sisi Transfer Netviewer panel Figure 5 Application
555. sential that the user pro file of the type dean of studies program manager has been set up The deans of studies program managers can then login with user name and password and from a list of all evaluated courses select those that they would like to have in their report The user type dean of studies program manager cannot however create this report himself This is done on the report creator interface Peter Bro win Report for the Dean of Studies Vera White Download Choose a dean to create the report for Figure 390 Additional Reports Report for the Dean of Studies Select the name of the dean of studies program manager whose report should be cre ated Click on Download to create the document 5 2 5 Integrating Profile Comparison Lines in the PDF Report Comparative Profile Lines in the PDF Report Fundamental Possibilities The automatically generated PDF report of a survey shows you if activated in the configuration of the corresponding PDF report a profile line at the end With regard to scaled and matrix questions it gives you an idea of how the interviewees voted As report creator you can compare the profile lines of the evaluated surveys with each other or with the profile lines of other reports available The profile line compari son gives you one or more PDF documents in which several profile lines are placed next to each other The following conditions are necessary in order to create these doc
556. ses the courses are evaluated once per semester and so EvaSys is delivered with semesters as survey periods If for example you would like to evaluate twice per semester you can set up quarters as survey periods Survey periods play an important role in enabling internal allocation to surveys includ ing the image files from open questions The survey periods must therefore be defined before beginning productive operations We strongly discourage making changes in completed or current survey periods In order to set up a new survey period enter the name enter the start date and the end date and click on New 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 41 Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model 72 Survey Period EvaSys v Survey Automation Suite Period From To Actions S05 03 01 2007 08 31 2007 ZF ZS WS05 06 09 01 2007 02 29 2008 P R S5506 03 01 2008 08 31 2008 P R WS06 07 09 01 2008 02 28 2009 FR S307 03 01 2009 08 31 2009 P R WS09 10 09 01 2009 02 28 2010 FR SS10 03 01 2010 08 31 2010 FR WS10 11 09 01 2010 02 28 2011 P R 5511 03 01 2011 08 31 2011 F WS11 12 09 01 2011 02 28 2012 FR New period New period Start date of the period End date of the period New Figure 22 Periods Please remember the defined date convention MM DD YYYY The date format is defined in the menu System Settings EvaSys Settings General Date Format Over laps of existing survey periods are allowed For example one period c
557. sesensessesusecaueseeesentesensnenes 20 2 3 CENTRAL EVALUATION AND ACTIVE INSTRUCTOR TRAINER ACCOUNTS ccscesssccesscsessesenseeenseeens 22 2 3 1 CENTRAL EVALUATION A CENTRAL OFFICE CONTROLS THE EVALUATION osese 22 2 3 2 ACTIVE INSTRUCTORS TRAINERS ACCOUNTS c ccccccseesesesseseeseeceseesensesenseecueeseeeeeenesenseens 23 2 4 BASIC TERMINOLOGY WITHIN THE EVASYS USER GUIDE ccccccecscceesesesseceseeecseeeseeeeeenseeenseeens 24 3 SYSTEM START UP AND SECURITY ccccccessssesseeceeseceusesesuescsueeceueesensesesueesueesensesensessseatesnesenteseneens 26 3 1 ADJUSTMENT TO YOUR ORGANIZATION E 27 3 1 1 LOGGING INTO EVASYS ENTRY POINTS cccccccccccsssccesecensesesseceecsessesesseecsueeseseeeenesenseens 27 3 1 2 ET 28 3 1 3 ADJUSTMENTS IN EVASYS SETTINGS TEXTS COLORS DOCUMENTS ssiciccccceceeeen 30 3 1 4 ADJUSTMENTS IN THE TEXT TEMPLATES cccccccecscseccesessecceeseceeeeseusesenseecusesseeeeenesenseesns 32 3 1 5 ADJUSTMENTS IN THE DOCUMENTS AANEREN 32 3 2 DEFINING ACCESS RIGHTS ou ccccccccssesssceessecesseccsesecsecesueescnsesensesesseeceuseseueseseseneeeseeesentesenseeens 32 3 3 IMPLEMENTING BACKUPS ee 34 3 3 1 BACKING UP THE DATABASE cccccccssecesseecessecesseceusesensececsuecsueeceueesensesenueeseusessaeeeetesenseesns 34 3 3 2 BACKING UP THE IMAGE FILES OF THE OPEN QUESTIONS ccccccesscesseeesseceseecseeeaneenseeeaes 35 3 3 3 BACKING UP THE ORIGINAL IMAGE FILES FROM SCANSTATION ecccccceesesesse
558. should be checked You can use these action icons to control the operations you have planned Ze Modify planned task Immediate execution of task Le Deactivate task E Delete all planned tasks in survey By clicking on the Edit icon the data of a time controlled task can be retroactively adjusted Here it can be decided whether the changes made should be applied to all surveys created at the same time or only to those surveys currently selected O Change Summary of scheduled tasks The scheduled tasks belong to a survey which was generated at the same time as other surveys Do you want to edit these scheduled tasks with effect on all of these surveys Click on No to change the scheduled tasks for this survey only f Yes l No Figure 131 Scheduled Task Saving changes for all surveys created at the same time Actions for all surveys with a definite status can be directly performed by selecting from the footer In this way for example all surveys with the status deactivated can be edited In the drop down list Action you can choose between the actions Edit Run and Deactivate The tasks on which this action should be performed and with which sta tus are set in the second drop down list box Different statuses are visible here depending on the selection in the box Action To which task the selection applies can be defined in the last drop down list Task
559. sions in the menu Display of the information concerning active system sessions in the menu of the Sub unit Administrator This setting is only relevant when logging of system sessions is activated Measuring of performance values As a means of measuring performance values a graphic illustration of the system workload of the EvaSys server can be displayed at different times The diagram can also be adjusted for different periods Yellow limiting value for performance diagram Defines the lower limiting value in seconds for the yellow zone of the performance dia gram The area beneath is displayed in green Red limiting value for performance diagram Defines the lower limiting value in seconds for the red zone of the performance dia gram The area beneath is displayed in yellow Maintenance mode The maintenance mode allows technical operations Such as updates to be carried out by the administrator without hindering any current operations When activated no further users can log into the system Participation in online surveys is also sus pended Once activated a warning message informs the administrator that the maintenance mode is activated and that users already logged into the system can continue operat ing A Warning Message The maintenance mode is activated Please bear in mind that users who have already logged into the system may continue operating in the system Please click here to deactivate the maintenan
560. size for presentation slides Font size of texts in PDF reports presentation slides Show internal question number Shows the internal question numbers Relative values The PDF reports show the distribution of the responses to closed questions with relative activated or absolute deactivated values Minimum percentage for display Defines the minimum percentage response frequency to a question in relation to the total number of returns needed in order to display the question in the HTML PDF report For example with 50 returns the value is set at 20 As a result only analyses of questions that have been answered by at least 10 persons will be shown If the value is set to 0 all questions of the reports will be displayed Please also consider the setting Show notice for suppressed report Minimum response frequency for display absolute Defines the minimum absolute response frequency to a question required in order to display the question in the PDF report Please also consider the setting Show notice for suppressed report 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback e Procedure to calculate the mean value The procedures to compute the mean value for the PDF report are defined here 1 standard procedure 2 trimmed mean e Decimal point precision average standard deviation Number of digits after the decimal point for averages and standard deviat
561. ss 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 173 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Arti ee AC IONS Show cover sheet form in browser S English Y After removing the participant data you will not see the information about the participants in the raw Ser data This action cannot be undone Itis not recommended to remove participant data as long as the A Finis survey has not been completed Do you want to continue S amp S Resta 2 Dee Ga sl Edit a fA Assign survey to substitute instructor Lid Edit Show notes SJ Remove participant data we Figure 186 Subsequent Anonymization of a Non anonymous Survey Note This retroactive anonymization cannot be undone If you remove the participant data from the survey they are irrecoverably lost for this survey Customizing the Questionnaire for a Non anonymous Survey With non anonymous surveys the questionnaires are assigned to specific participants So that these allocations can be adhered to during distribution of the questionnaires you have to insert the relevant information of the survey participants in the header of the questionnaire This is achieved by placeholders recognized by the continuous Upper case and the angular brackets The VividForms Editor Designer allows you to use placeholders for participant data in the header of the questionnaire The placeholder names refer to the data structure introduced above as follows
562. ssed storage without losses which cannot be guaranteed with the JPEG format Thus the PNG format is suitable for pho tographs as well as text and graphics However files in the PNG format are consider ably bigger than the according JPEG files To upload pictures click on the button Picture Library in the menu Form Properties in the VividForms Editor A new window called Picture Library opens Form Properties Layout settings Repair form Enable numbering Edit Pole Template Filter settings Validation Required questions Cross tabulation Change color scheme ON Picture Library Line Height Font Size 12 pt 10 pt e i DDE ZS Figure 542 Option Picture Library in the Menu Form Properties The new window picture library appears D Library Assistant m Picture Library SS Upload pictures Description Upload pictures Edit pictures Smiley _ Description Smiley D Apply Delete picture chose Figure 543 Picture Library If you click on Browse you can search for the picture in your file system Clicking on Upload pictures integrates it in the picture library Here you can see a picture that 404 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Eugen deet Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor was uploaded and integrated in the picture library On the left hand side you can see the name of the added picture on the right
563. st of a subunit Click on the number in square brackets in the column CO next to the name of the desired instructor trainer QA Users in subunit Department Training Lie i Ae ab Ze Ki d Wi a ia teal te geg EN i Survevs r wl ech S AE eer teal cl E amp Donna Harwood 375 08 17 2007 4 amp Am amp Carlos Hernandez 112 08 17 2007 O amp C amp DrRichelle White 0 0 08 17 2007 4 O amp Ae Select all Move selected to Computer Sciences e Figure 44 User List within a Subunit The course list of a trainer instructor opens Via the button Create new course you can add new courses at any time The entry mask shown in the picture above opens and the data for the course can be entered L Courses of Carlos Hernandez 47 Organization and 02 P 1236 3 continuous Seminar RP 410 Management 48 dee Resource 02 P1237 continuous Seminar RP412 20 english anagement Leadership Ee 66 Develo pmen LS continuous ae R P 080 150 english v FR Figure 45 Course List An existing course can be edited with a click on P Courses can be deleted by clicking on e By clicking on the respective column header the course list can be sorted ascend ing and descending Definition of Secondary Instructors Trainers lf a course is held by more than one person but only one evaluation questionnaire is to be used then secondary instructors trainers are specified who will also receive a cop
564. stem Informa tion on the submenu s left hand side you will find the option EvaSys Website _ EvaSys lV Subunits Questionnaires System Settings Eoxarnen Survey Automaton age amp 9 License Management Product Peter Brown Central Evaluation Version V5 0 Build 7 Database My SQL localhost Information Paper surveys Licensed Search Online Surveys Licensed CH Send Email EvaExam Licensed ia Utilization Statistics Handwriting recognition Licensed System Summary VividForms Designer Licenses Not Licensed scanstation licenses 3 Maintenance teen unlimited Campuslicense License ser licenses Assign to subunits Ca Send Emai to Support Ki System Cieaning License key d System Status Mee WW Cvesys Website Customer name Figure 1 Link to the Support Area when logged in as an Administrator When clicking the option EvaSys Website you are granted access to the EvaSys website and the EvaSys support area 1 2 2 Email to the Support Department In the main menu System Information you will find the option Send email to support in the submenu on the left If you have a query addressing Electric Paper s support department click on this option The following page will open 14 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Introduction EvaSys vV e Subunits Questionnaires System Settings Search 5544 iV Laus sen na
565. stem lan guage English here the main language After defining the main language you can add a further language Options Current Language English Properties Delete Language Add Language Back Figure 137 Adding a Further Language As you do with the main language you define their properties and can link your lan guage set with the questionnaire here For example it makes sense to use the lan guage set Fran ais for the questionnaire s French translation 138 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Goen gc Suis Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Properties Language French Current logo M e Please choose a flag Language ae Upload the file Browse Linked System Engish Higher Education v Language language set Pettson Hochschulen sL JAJE Ser Deutsch Hochschulen system Enable Deutsch Seminaranbieter system Language English Higher Education system Ge v English Seminar Providers system SES lease note that Vivi Bahasa Indonesia online surveys Espa ol Magyar Nederlands Svenska PX Figure 138 Linking the Language Set with the Translated Questionnaire Online Surveys Customization of the Used Layouts The layout of online surveys in EvaSys is handled by online survey templates A tem plate is a sample that in this case for example controls the color the insertion of logos or the questionnaire display
566. stionnaire P A kan Report Settings C i Course ec e Onine lempaies Typ Course Type Module Trainer Configuration Form Link for Modular Surveys hap EvaSys Settings Trainer Trainer Questionnaire S Define Tree Structure H m Save Cancel EE EE CH Herede Figure 450 Form link for modular surveys 344 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Module Evaluation To link questionnaires to course types open the dialog System Settings Course Types To create new course types for example a course type Module General for the evaluation of the module in total enter a new name in the area Course Type and select the corresponding questionnaire from the drop down list underneath Form Link for Modular Surveys Click on New to add the new course type to the list To link a questionnaire to an existing course type click on the green pencil icon You will find the selected course type in the area Course Type at the bottom of the list Select the corresponding module questionnaire for the selected course type and click on Save to apply the selection 7 4 Characteristics of the Aggregated Question naire When generating a survey the questionnaires for the different module parts are auto matically merged to a complete module questionnaire The complete questionnaire adheres to the following rules e The single parts are put together in ascending order with re
567. stionnaire again If this error reoccurs then your database may be damaged Contact EvaSys Sup port Interactive cover sheet general DB problem Access to the database could not be provided Interactive cover sheet invalid form type identified Interactive cover sheet general problem An operation number could not be generated The survey could not be set up Data could not be written in the cover sheet table ProcesslID invalid VividForms was not able to find an operation number on the first page of the scanned batch The data could not be assigned to a survey and were discarded Click on the leaf symbol next to this message in order to display the first page of the batch as a graphic file Check the image It may be that a wrong page was scanned as the first page or that the operation number cannot be identified due to dirt or manipulation Repeat the scan operation and reproduce if necessary the defective cover sheet The procedure with the ID SURVEY ID is not open any more The survey for which the data were collected is closed The data were discarded Check whether the batch has already been scanned and the new capture was an error an incomplete scanning operation has already taken place In this case the sur vey must be reset broom symbol a further batch in the survey was scanned and the automatic closure of the sur vey operation was unintentional In this case set the option close survey after the first sca
568. structure of a questionnaire with its question groups and ques tions belonging to them can be directly adopted for the quality guidelines In order to convert guidelines choose the option Quality Guidelines in the drop down menu Advanced Settings and click on Edit You are now offered a dialogue where you can define quality guidelines Now click on Convert quality guidelines from indicators Course Evaluation Questionnaire Re calculate all Surveys Figure 425 Button Convert quality guidelines from indicators 328 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Phase 5 Quality Management After clicking on the button Convert quality guidelines from indicators the following window appears listing the content of the questionnaire with its question groups and questions Conversion of Indicators Lower threshold 0 Upper threshold 100 lower values are better e a he ps mes Ce r e 6 a oe a EA 2S ZC n Cee Sa Fe e ea Rea re WEEN IEN di tit ieiunpe Z hue deif bet the gtrurtor E Fa it L kat Base d A i Ke K ET a A ke d A ke Za es bp RH ee ee WARS SBS HESS W WEN eegene lower values are better w The instructor is always well prepared Lower threshold 1 Upper threshold 6 lower values are bette w The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way Lower threshold 1 o Upper threshold 6 Figure 426 C
569. subunit Professional Development 3 Name CO Surveys Created Actions amp Philipp Belmore 2 7 7 09 06 2007 ALD C Donna Harwood 3 08 17 2007 2 ST O amp Carlos Hernandez 3 33 3 08 17 2007 ADR OO amp Dr Richelle White 2 J 0 0 08 17 2007 A OG C Select all _ Move selected to Computer Sciences e Move Figure 90 Accesing surveys within a Subunit The display 3 4 means that the user has created four surveys in his user profile for three of which returns have been received With a mouse click on the number in brak kets you can access the survey results In the survey window you will see in a table the surveys you selected according to the filter above depending on the status of the survey you can now initiate a number of different operations All available actions and information about the survey can be found in the survey details which can be reached by clicking on the survey name With a click on one of the column headings in blue the window will be sorted according to this column You can sort the surveys according to e Type e Name e Status e Form e Created date e Processed date e Recorded number of returns 106 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Goen Ausomation Sule Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Survey Status In progress Cover Sheet Procedure wenn 3 Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle NA_1 o Progress OF Quest_01 a USS _ zani TEE Send ema
570. subunit administrators have no authorization to view or export survey results Data entry assistant Verifier View entire original questionnaire page If this function is activated the data entry assistant and the verifier can view the entire questionnaire 488 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Configuration Settings Data entry assistant Sending a report to the instructor If this function is activated the data entry assistant can use a button to send a PDF report to the instructor once all survey comments have been processed 2 5 7 Section Central Evaluation Depending on the system version some of these settings are preset and cannot be changed Creation of summary reports Permits the creation of summary reports e g for the dean manager s report dean of study program manager s report as well as the president s report Report president Report function for the president Report dean manager Report function for the dean manager Report dean of studies program manager Report function for the dean of studies program manager Program of study reports Report creator can download reports on programs of study Instructor Trainer profile reports Report creator can download reports on instructor trainer profiles Dean of Studies Program Manager Toggles existence of the Vice Dean Quality Management Activate deactivate the availability of quality assurance and QM views
571. symbol you can create a copy of the template for editing Information A form was added to your form management view Form Management Sample Questionnaire 4 2011 05 24 Template 16 31 39 Sample_2 Figure 571 Copy of the Template for Editing Next you will see the user s own questionnaire administration with a new entry Name of questionnaire Template The notice Template is automatically added to the heading and shows that the questionnaire is from a template OOW a a Sample_2 Sample Questionnaire Template La ik ___ Sample Questionnaire Template ORGANIZATION AUTHOR SURVEY PERIOD Mark as shown ogggg MARK Correction OBORO CORRECTION D General Questions T 1 1 lam II Ofemale Omale 1 2 My age is between mO lt 18 148 25 126 35 Figure 572 Editing a Template If the administrator has given the authorization a click on the symbol 4 allows the user to begin editing the questionnaire Questions from the administrator s template appear in the Web editor with a T Template and cannot be deleted or edited 422 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Editing and Passing on Questionnaires The user can add as many question groups and questions as needed as long as he does not exceed the maximum number of pages or the maximum number of ques tions defined by the administrator see form
572. system using the Delete button You must then delete the email addresses particularly if courses with the same id but different participants are kept over several cycles in Eva Sys 78 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period 2 4 Administration of Questionnaires Another precondition for creating surveys is of course along with the organizational structure the creation of questionnaires Without questionnaires you can t interview anyone therefore some fundamentals regarding the questionnaires follow in this chapter You can create questionnaires using a form designer which is integrated in EvaSys the VividForms Editor To be able to explain the creation of questionnaires with these tool clearly and com prehensively this manual contains a complete chapter dedicated to VividForms If you are reading this manual as an introduction to EvaSys and are not presently using it as a reference it would be helpful for you to create a small questionnaire with the aid of the chapter on VividForms before reading on In this chapter you will find out about the questionnaires purpose in EvaSys and how to administrate them however it does not supply information on how to create them 2 4 1 Essential Information on the Questionnaire Questionnaires are the basis of every survey They contain various types of questions and in turn provide different types of inform
573. t Instead of the placeholders you can enter text directly It then becomes a static text which is not adapted to the respective surveys As you know using the cover sheet procedure the header of the questionnaire remains empty because it cannot be adapted to a single particular survey If you only want use a questionnaire in the cover sheet procedure you can avoid this issue by inserting static texts into the header instead of the placeholders If the questionnaire is to be used for non anonymous surveys personalized to individ ual participants other placeholders can be added For this simply select a placeholder from the shortlist in the lower area of the dialogue and click on the button marked The following placeholders are available for non anonymous surveys PARTICIPANT FIRSTNAME Survey participant s first name PARTICIPANT LASTNAME Survey participant s last name PARTICIPANT IDENTIFIER Survey participant s ID PARTICIPANT SALUTATION Survey participant s salutation PARTICIPANT TITLE Survey participant s title PARTICIPANT ADDRESS Survey participant s address 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 371 EvaSys V Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Survey Aincmation Sukk PARTICIPANT EMAIL Survey participant s email address PARTICIPANT CUSTOM1 Survey participant s first user defined field PARTICIPANT CUSTOM2 Survey participant s second user defined field PARTICIPANT CUSTOM3 Survey participant s third user
574. t 02 P1236 W __ Include answers to open questions __ Combine surveys unweighted Please note For this combination the mean values of the single surveys are averaged Data Analysis 01 G123 4 Dr Richelle White introducton into Sociology 02 P 1246 Psychology 02 P1239 Figure 324 Report Creator Any Compilation Selection of Elements If you wish to additionally filter the courses according to programs of study activate the option Select program of study In addition to the existing selection fields subunit survey period course type questionnaire and course s the field Program of study appears in third place In this field you can select one or several programs of study 2 Survey Period 3 Program of Study 4 Course Type 5 Questionnaire Engineering ssi Economics iB Lecture Evati Professional Development WS10 11 Engineering Seminar Non_Anonym __Data Entry Demo Subunit 510 Social Sciences E Working Group Quest_01 WSOS 10 Psychology Quest_3 St undefined Iran D WS06 07 Computer Sciences itrain en 506 Comuter Sciences WVSOV06 S505 Figure 325 Report Creator Any Compilation Selecting the Program of Study When you click on Verify after selecting the elements a small overview of the ques tionnaire is provided or if there are several questionnaires as in this case an over view with a questionnaire comparison is provided 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 267
575. t Report Header Report Creator sf Language English Higher Education Mail text lt center gt lt font size 14 gt TITLE FIRSTNAME SURNAME lt font gt lt font size 3 gt lt font gt lt font size 9 gt SURVEY COURSEID No of responses FORMCOUNT lt font gt lt center gt l Save Figure 619 Text Template for the PDF Report Header In the text field the header content is defined by HTML formatting and placeholders The example shown here produces the following PDF report header Prof Dr Philipp Belmore iV Human Resource Management 02 P1237 No of responses 14 Figure 620 Sample PDF Report Header You could for example insert a line containing the static text Result of student sur vey in the example in font size 8 468 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Configuration Settings Mail text lt center gt lt font size 14 gt TITLE FIRSTNAME SURNAME lt font gt lt font size 8 gt Result of Student Survey lt font gt lt font size 9 gt SURVEY COURSEID No of responses FORMCOUNT lt font gt lt center gt Figure 621 Modifying the Text Template by Inserting a Line After a click on Save you will see upon re opening of the report that the PDF report header has changed as follows Result of Student Survey Human Resource Management 02 P 1237 No of responses 14 Prof Dr Philipp Belmore V
576. t editor 361 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Creating Questionnaires with VividForms At the foot of the editor control panel the field meta information provides an overview of the current state of the questionnaire Form Properties B 10 e Ad Y A 1352 L I 1 1 8 Figure 471 Editor Control Meta information Individual lines are read from left to right as follows e Line 1 Template mode activated deactivated Maximum number of pages Current page number Edit mode e Line 2 Paper format Numbering on off Information on the active object e Line 3 Current number of questions on the sheet Maximum number of questions on the sheet PDF version of the form Editor version of the form 2 3 Viewing Options Two different display options for displaying the questionnaire in the VividForms Editor are available the paper view and the online view With the help of an icon PDF and globe with green arrow in the viewing bar above the questionnaire you can switch back and forth between views as long as the system is licensed for both types of sur veys If the system is only licensed for paper or online surveys only the licensed type of view is displayed 362 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor Editor Control Add Add Question Group ZE Add Question ss Pole Labels Evasys Figure 472 Swi
577. t sten EM Zell ieee Jet Ecg A Data Entry Sample Survey D 12345 Data Se ST ws10 11 Type Name A Data Entry Sample Survey D 12345 0a 20511212011 train noe ms WE Perr Data available Send analysis to Download Delete answers to Delete instructor trainer HTMLIPDF report open questions survey Figure 95 Survey Status Data available Data entry Survey Status Data Deleted only when function delete in 2 steps has been activated ws10 11 A Human Resource Management 02 P1237 Data deleted ER 9 05 12 2011 train _ inen a Display questionnaire Finally delete as PDF survey Figure 96 Survey Status Data Deleted 3 2 3 Survey Details Display of Survey Details In order to display more detailed information about the survey you can click on the survey name You also have access here too all the functions of this survey Some functions can only be accessed using this detail window Depending on the sta tus of the survey e g ready data available the survey type and further attributes specific to the questionnaire or survey e g language PSWD status a variety of sur vey data and functions will be made available At the top of the Detail Window you can see the header data for the survey In the lower left hand corner you can see a number of options relating to the survey and in the lower right hand corner you can select the evaluation report and export for mat 108 2011 El
578. t administrators of this group Similar to the administrator the subunit administrator can take on additional roles in his user account report creator data entry assistant and verifier The configuration options available to the subunit administrators are defined by the administrator under System Settings EvaSys Settings Here specific setting options are marked Make this option available to Subunit Administrators In doing so the subunit administrator is able to change certain configuration options by which overwriting his subunits settings as defined by the administrator 50 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period Instructors Trainers e Central evaluation mode When using the central evaluation mode instructor trainer accounts are set at pas sive This shows the organization structure and courses which have surveys regis tered to them and reports The email addresses given in the profile receive PDF reports as well as other emails As long as the instructor trainer account is set at passive it can only be used indirectly by the administrator e Activated instructor trainer account mode When the instructor trainer account is activated then it can be accessed by its owner with a user name and password It can now be used for the creation of indi vidual questionnaires and surveys while at the same time the general course eval uation is carried out
579. t always be possible to determine in every case where two checkmarks were made which was intended as the correct response by the respondent 4 2 2 Processing in VividForms Reader Processing with VividForms Reader is explained in the manual VividForms Reader 4 3 Correction of Checkboxes not Clearly Read The Verification The verification is used in order to correct checkboxes that have not been clearly read In order to use the WebVerifier as an administrator or subunit administrator change to the role of Verifier Alternatively a separate user role of the user type Verifier can be created This has the advantage of allowing the task to be delegated to other persons After login three different views are available which can be changed with a click on the symbol Batch View Survey View and Form View lew 5 K E Batch SUMEYS Forms Figure 217 Verifier View Options 192 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite 4 3 1 Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback Batch View All batches needing to be verified are shown in a table The table is made up of the following columns Batch ID Time Duration NonForms scanstation OMR errors Sheets In progress Status Cover Sheet NonForms Filling Degrees Verification 2011 Electric Paper GmbH Serial number of the batch scan time of the batch Processing time of the VividForms Reader in seconds Numbe
580. t and click the button Next Create reports a Any Compilati e Next q Comparisons Batch Profile Lines Next Figure 323 Report Creator Create Any Compilation The window which then opens offers you the usual selection Here you can mark sev eral elements by simultaneously pressing with the mouse and the Ctrl key In the fol lowing example a ReportOfAIl Engineering is produced which is a summary of all surveys that have been conducted so far The questionnaires Demo2 and Demo2A do not differ considerably from one another and are therefore suitable for such a compilation 266 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Create Any Compilation Report 1 Subunit 2 Survey Period S5511 WS10 11 5510 WSO TO 3 Course Type 4 Questionnaire Lecture Evati Seminar Non_Anonym Working Group Engineering Professional Development _Data Entry Demo Subunit Select program of study _ Show extended filter options Description Report of Train_en 5 Course s Question mapping of different questionnaires Automatic with text comparison Manual LSA E i 6 ay CS Lei Lg Human Resource Management 02 P1237 Management Strategies NA 2 Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle NA_1 Human Resource Management 02 P1237 Leadership Development 02 P1234 Organization and Managemen
581. t can be defined individually after enabling the checkbox individualize pole labels Otherwise these labels remain empty or will be defined by the horizontal or vertical pole labels which can be gener ated separately 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 379 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Creating Questionnaires with VividForms A choice of diagram types to be used in the report is available at the bottom Note Experts may edit the appearance of the report graphics by editing the file lib jograph php in the EvaSys email folder Contact your support representative to receive the necessary unencrypted file Information on further options when creating a scaled question can be found in the fol lowing sections Click on Apply The scaled question will now appear in the preview and will be automatically high lighted got access to the technical resources very Strongh O O O O O UI Strongly O N A quickly Agree Disagree Figure 497 Scaled Question in the Editor Preview Use these settings as default for scaled questions If you would like to apply the settings of the created scaled question abstention check boxes pole texts chart type etc for all further scaled questions activate the option Use these settings as default for scaled questions All scaled questions that you add afterwards receive these settings per default Mirroring of Individual Scaled Questions The VividForms Editor allows you to mirro
582. t write outside of the box Figure 538 Text Area in the Editor Preview As with other objects the text area on the questionnaire can be moved around The text also appears in online surveys and if desired in the PDF report too To activate this select the option Show text boxes in the menu System Settings Report Set tings Configuration 2 9 4 Page Break If a page becomes full VividForms Editor will automatically apply a page break to con tinue adding objects on the following page Page breaks can also be added manually at each phase of the questionnaire First mark an object by clicking on it with the left mouse button Now open the menu Add and select the option CH Page Break Note Please do not write outside of the box Il Page Break Figure 539 Page Break in the Editor Preview The page break will be symbolized by a selectable row containing the text Page Break The next object added to the form will appear on the following page If the page break is deleted later the objects throughout the rest of the questionnaire will realign 2 9 5 Line Height Font Size and Font Type With the line height you can change the vertical space needed for a line This could be necessary if for example a questionnaire does not quite fit on two pages Decrease the line height and you will be able to make do with two pages 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 401 EvaSys iw Creating Questionnaires with Vi
583. tact Electric Paper Example of PHTML Editing scala phtml Scaled questions are used a lot in surveys While you cannot choose how you want them to be displayed in paper based surveys in online surveys you can By means of editing the scala phtml file located in the element folder of a template you can define it for your own use As you can see in the next figure lots of information like the label of the question the definition of left pole right pole and abstention or details of options are available through simple functions of the current object getLeftPole getRightPole and so on Code is commented so that you will clearly see what is done at each step You can decide to display the radio buttons in a table or in a div element you can choose to have them to the right of the label or under the label this can also be defined in the CSS file you can add your code for extended validation rules put images instead of poles each time the left pole is defined as do not agree and the right pole as totally agree and other images for other types of poles for example In this example you also see some code resulting from functions as getADAOption Text These functions are very important Please bear in mind that EvaSys has origi nally been designed to ensure accessibility Therefore many requirements have been met for example to guarantee the accessibility of the content for people of all abilities and disabilities main
584. tailed information about the volume licenses To upload a new volume file you first have to delete the old one Then you can select the volume file which you have received by Electric Paper and stored on you computer with the help of the button Browse information on all volume based licenses License time frame Activation state Volume Used license volume Number of cycles Used cycles Choose the file with valid license 1 Browse Figure 606 Selecting the Second License Key A click on the button Upload license activates the volume license and displays a message about the successful activation as well as the details of the license Information New license was added Information on all volume based licenses License time frame Activation state Volume Used license volume Number of cycles Used cycles 05 25 2011 05 23 2012 Activated 2500 0 Unlimited 1 a Choose the file with valid license Browse Figure 607 Volume License Added Successfully When you click on the button Back you can see the window License Management again Now the license is activated Volume license 2500 2500 free Details Figure 608 Activated Volume License in the License Administration 448 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Geen Ame matiin Sule System Management and Summary In case of questions or obscurities please ask your system administrator or the sup
585. tching between Paper and Online View In the system settings menu System Settings EvaSys Settings VividForms Standard view VividForms Editor the default view when opening the editor paper or online view can be defined If in the properties of a questionnaire it is defined that this is only released for paper surveys only the paper view is displayed when opening the sheets If the sheets are only released for online surveys only the online view is displayed The button for switching is then no longer available 2 3 1 Paper View In the paper view the display of the questionnaire is simulated as a paper survey This view can be adjusted by different control elements You can use the symbols amp and to zoom in the preview window to four different levels Below you can see examples of different zoom levels Select the one best for your screen resolution After zooming to fit the preview to the size of the chosen window click on the icon with four arrows 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 363 EvaSys V Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Survey Automation Suite al E Tech_2 Questionnaire on Technical Skills lt Editor SaLe 2 Add Cuestion Group J Add Question ze Pole Labels Line Space D Questions about you 2 e t You are O male O female S separator What is your age 018 29 30 35 040 45 El Text Box Os0 59 Oeo 85 Cl Older than 65 Your Zipcode ee OOO0000000 Picture
586. te containing the indicators e responses to open questions handwritten or typed the latter if it is an online sur vey or if the data entry assistant was used e notes of a survey You can display the added notes of the different user types in the PDF report See here chapter B 3 2 3 Survey Details editing displaying notes Since the report is crucial to your evaluation here you will find a detailed description of how to de activate the components The Letter The letter is a regular type of letter and serves as courteous piece of information for the instructor trainer on the subsequent results of the PDF report If you wish to add a letter to the evaluation results please activate it in the settings of the corresponding PDF report in the main menu System Settings Report Settings Please click on the configuration icon in the column Configuration The PDF report configuration opens automatically The option Generate letter activates deactivates the letter Please note that you have to activate deactivate the letter for each PDF report sepa rately 206 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback Report Settings EvaSys PDF report Peter Individual Report Peter Brown a Drees n EST L Zezozh ThE rire ir JEScript beet at tee Figure 235 PDF Report Configuration The following figure shows a sample letter Electric
587. ted Email Search Details of the participants Course Introduction into Sociology Title First Name Last name Email Address Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 cave Cancel Figure 52 Adding Anonymous Participants of a Course Details To enter new participants first enter the email address of the participant in the field Search for participants Subsequently click on Search In the following search or checking of the email address you supplied EvaSys checks the following 68 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period e ls there a participant with this email address already existent in the system In anonymous surveys you see no impact of this should this already be the case In non anonymous surveys a data synchronization takes place and the already existent information such as forename last name etc are automatically adopted e ls the email valid meaning valid within the usual rules of an email address At this point as well as in other parts of the system the structure of an email address is thoroughly inspected This concerns amongst others the following rules there must be at least one character before the sign and after it too this character must be followed by a dot and at least two characters Umlauts as characters are not allowed After checking EvaSys automatically adopts the email address in the area
588. ted the online survey and received this email Content Personalized certificate of participation 2 1 3 Template for Letter in PDF Reports The letter text for PDF reports can be defined in same list like email texts Letter texts starts with LETTER For using a letter you must have activated the function System Settings Report Set tings Configuration Generate letter A one page default letter can be used or a PDF template attachment for a one or more page letter A letter can contain a maximum of one page of text The contents can be personalized with a series of placeholders which are described at the end of this section Reports not created and not sent to instructors trainers The minimum number as defined at System Settings EvaSys Settings Survey Mini mum number of returns for reporting of completed questionnaires was not reached and so a report is not created and sent Summary report for dean manager The dean manager receives a Summary report with the indicators for all evaluated courses selected from a combination of subunit survey period questionnaire 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 461 EvaSys V System Settings and Management Goen Auncmation Sul Electric Paper vWad 2LeAlee 123 olay Kireper Dent Zeg Dear Mr Prof Dr Philipp Belmore as private and confidential Result of a survey Dear Mr Prof Dr Belmore This email contains evaluation results for Human Resource Manag
589. tem The settings for email delivery do not only affect the automatic email dispatch but also the manual delivery of reports by the administrator using the survey view Mass Production and Sending of Reports You can use the batch events for the mass production and sending of reports For fur ther information please consult the chapter B 3 2 9 Batch Events Types of report dispatch The following table gives an overview on different possibilities of report dispatch in Evasys together with notes on types of reports and report recipients Shalt ls The PDF report definitions are sent to the defined recipient s The Process Defaults recipients are defined when creating or editing a PDF report definition only paper based If no PDF report definition exists the defined standard report will be surveys sent instead The standard report can be defined in the details of a questionnaire The PDF report definitions are sent to the defined recipient s The recipients are defined when creating or editing a PDF report definition If no PDF report definition exists the defined standard report will be sent instead The standard report can be defined in the details of a questionnaire Scheduled Online Survey The defined standard PDF report is sent to the defined recipient s Survey List Enve The standard report can be defined in the details of a questionnaire lope Icon The report recipients are the instructor as well as selected Fu
590. tem triggering filter Value Options have already been in the refectory Field valuen Remove Select items to be skipped bresis apot Le Set anaon B Save The meals in the refeciory are always warm D EC e L Gi The meals in the refeciory are always fresh The meals in the refectory are always tasty The unrversiy i connected to the public transportation very well The technical equipment of the university is excellent got access to the technical resources computer centre etc very quickly duly got introductions into all the necessary hardware and software components Figure 561 Filter Settings Selecting Items to be Skipped In order to create a filter setting select from the list a single choice question and click on Add Now select a response value for which the filter setting should be applied In the lower area you will see a list of all the questions following the filter question You can now highlight all of the questions that should not be displayed or should not be analyzed When you are finished click on Save Repeat this procedure for each additional filter setting 416 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Filter Settings Validation Required Questions and Cross Tabulations In the settings System Settings EvaSys Settings Survey Online Display of filtered questions in online survey you can determine whether deactivated questions in online surve
591. ten Group Title type options text p pole tion Table 4 Structure of the Question Library CSV File The question types are assigned numbers the following schema is valid 0 Scaled Question 2 Open Question 4 Grade Value Question 6 Single Choice Question with up to 11 answer options answer options located next to the question text all answer options are displayed in the report 8 Multiple Choice Question 10 Single Choice Question with any number of answer options answer options located beneath the question text only selected answer options are displayed in the report 14 Matrix Field Question Note Please note that for scaled questions neither mirroring nor dual scale functions can be imported or exported Number of options In scaled questions the number of checkboxes is stored here In grade value questions and open questions this field remains empty In single choice single choice extended and multiple choice questions the number of response options is recorded In matrix field questions the number of groups in the PDF report is recorded here 98 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Left pole In scaled questions the left pole description is recorded here In open questions you can enter the number of lines available to the survey participant for his response here In grade value questions
592. text or represent an entire word Example Course may not be abbreviated to C but may be abbreviated to CS We recommend using special characters as a prefix for placeholders for example CS Edit Placeholder It is better to use placeholders with special characters as a prefix e g CS as individual letters or letter combinations can also be found in other words and can lead to erroneous replacement Print Version Placeholder Replace by ORG Organization Z CO Course P 4 Figure 233 Data Entry Assistant Placeholder If a statement that has already been classified is entered along with a new statement then the existing statement can be marked with a checkmark and only the new state ment need be entered Both statements will be registered and counted After the last image has been entered a corresponding note appears and by clicking Survey list the data entry assistant can now change to the tracking information on the surveys that still need to be processed You have processed all images and can now switch to the survey list by clicking the button List of Surveys List of surveys Figure 234 Data Entry Assistant Close a Survey If desired the data entry assistant can send the PDF report to the owner of the survey usually the instructor trainer after the completion of the data entry with the button Send PDF report For this the corresponding function must be activated in the con figu
593. the EvaSys settings The following categories e General e Survey e Survey Online e Data Import and Export e Course User Data Fields e Functions e Central Evaluation e Email Functions amp Accounts e Color Settings e Instructor Trainer accounts e VividForms e Network Settings e System Security e Maintenance Select an item from this list in order to display its settings Click in the field Settings on Advanced in order to reach the save option M Advanced Settings Settings View Sort options to categories w show Current Configuration Name sae Chosen Configuration Standard v Replace Old Configuration Standard Delete Cancel Figure 628 Advanced Settings You can save the current EvaSys setting here under a name This allows you if required to recover an earlier EvaSys setting You can do this by using the function replace the present configuration by And finally you can delete a configuration you have saved at delete an earlier config uration Many of the available configuration options are characterized and marked 476 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Confi gu ration Settin gs by gray text Make this option subunit available to subunit administrators meaning that they can be activated for the use by subunit administrators Default value course
594. the calculation of the mean values Thus all the amplitudes on the right hand of the norm can be interpreted to be positive Accordingly values on the left side are negative Those questions where the center is the best value are an exception to the explained rules e g with the question Was the number of presentations ade quate and the answers too few just perfect too many e Permit listing of open questions Listing and counting of individual comments in the report If this option is activated repeated entries to open comments which have been marked as such during data entry are displayed in a summarized form e g The course was well organized 2 Counts e Dual scale profile line When activated critical values of dual scale questions are highlighted by means of a color gradient 0 deactivated 1 critical values on the left side of the scale 2 critical values on the right side of the scale e Profile line Display question groups If this function is activated the question groups are displayed in the profile line e Page Break before Responses to each Open Question If activated and at the same time open questions appear at the end of the report option separate closed open questions a page break is inserted into the report before the answers to each open question In this way clarity is enhanced particu larly when there are many answers to open questions 4 5 2 PDF Report Definitions
595. the export values are displayed In the third col umn for example instead of the usual variable description V2_B the newly defined variable name Age is displayed Also the newly defined export values 0 1 in the area V2_ A are displayed here instead of the usual export values 1 2 5 5 The EvaSys Report Module Sphinx Plus The statistics solution Sphinx Plus2 is available as an expansion for EvaSys When this export interface is enabled you can see this in the license administration you can create all surveys summaries filtering and archiving ssi ee Name a Status Forms Processed Form Human Resource Management Data 3 02 P1237 i available H017 85 05 12 2011 O train_en Human Resource Management Data Wid Le Human Resource Management Data AA ar i DI 02 P1237 available HIT 85 05 18 2011 O Quest_3 Figure 403 Export to Sphinx Just click on the text SPHINX in the drop down menu in the column Export In a few moments a download window will appear Save the ZIP file to a folder on your local hard drive The data are transmitted as ZIP file because three separate files have to be transmitted Extract the ZIP file You will get a sub folder in which there are the three files 3 sys_19 Human_Resource_Management bat sys_19 Human_Resource_Management ouv 4 sys_19 Human_Resource_Management que __ sys_19 Human_Resource_Management rep Figure 404 Files of the Sphinx
596. the pencil icon the template can be edited at any time or deleted by clicking on the red cross icon Also with the aid of the page icon a copy can be made The copy now appears in the list as a new template and can be edited further Once you have created the template link it as described above with the subunit in which it is to be used In the online survey it is then for example presented as such EvaSys Academy Philipp Belmore Professional Development Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle La ie P 2 Questions about the instructor The instructor is always well prepared The instructor explains even complex topics ina comprehensible way The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc without any problems Please grade the instructor for this course oo EN HOO GO den god ans Figure 146 Customized Online Survey Template in the Online Survey CSS Editing If you wish to modify other elements of design as for instance the way buttons or dropdown menus are displayed and if you have some knowledge of CSS styles edi tion you can build your own online template The easiest way is to copy the file onlinesurvey css you find in C Apache htdocs evasys application modules online templates onlinedefault 144 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Goen gc Suk Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Zip this file go to the menu System Settings Online Templat
597. the report accessibility will be sent out either manually or by using the time control of online surveys If you wish to send out the information manually click in the details of a survey on Send result access information to participants Number of participants for calculating response rate 20 Accept ZA Unlock data collection amp Restore Survey a8 Delete Survey Edit answers to open questions fa Assign survey to substitute instructor id Edit Show notes Figure 153 Manually send an Email on the Accessibility of the Report Upon confirmation of the recipient list the email is sent Please note that this function is only available after an online survey has been closed The automated dispatch of the access information is accomplished through the time control The time control can be reached either through the survey details provided that the survey is still running or via the check mark box User Time control straight after the generation of online surveys 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 151 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Scheduled Tasks N er EE EEN eee 3 Finish survey 05 27 2011 at 10 14 00 Start date 05 27 2011 at10 1400 LI Note Please note that due to the execution of additional tasks there could be small delays in processing Automatic report dispatch PDF to the instructor s after closing the survey Send email to participa
598. the roiev mC of the lapie VeyPoo O OF 4 O DO Excatiera ele En enka a S af Ee Ges On the cover sheet as well as the pages of the questionnaire there is a process num ber in the form of a 2D barcode The barcode also contains information about the type of form being used 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 191 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model OMR Recognition Answer box fields as well as open questions are processed using so called OMR Rec ognition OMR Optical Markup Recognition In a defined capture zone the mark is scanned Using a predefined threshold the system decides whether a check mark is valid or not or whether a completely filled in box is to be considered a correction or not Open question fields are also searched for a significant marking and then saved as an image file These image files are later integrated into the PDF reports Interpretation Rules for Automation In the interest of maximizing automation there are decision rules to handle exceptional cases which would normally require user interaction via VividForms WebVerifier These are If more than one check has been made where only one is permitted then the check will be interpreted as not marked If a check was detected but is under the threshold e g because the box was uninten tionally marked then it is considered as not marked Even if you were to view questionnaires by sight it would no
599. this field remains empty In single choice single choice extended and multiple choice questions the response options are recorded here Please note the different response options must be separated by a vertical line Pipe In matrix field questions enter the minimum value here Right pole In scaled questions the right pole description is recorded here In matrix field questions enter the maximum value here For all other question types this field remains empty Abstention In scaled questions an abstention text can be stored here For all other question types this field remains empty The following example should clarify the structure of a CSV file for you EE pe 1 Course Planning The course provides a good and Presentation cl overview of the topic Course Planning 5 Your comment on the and Presentation course content Table 5 An Example of the CSV File Structure when Importing and Exporting the Question Library This structure is also valid for the export of the question library as a CSV file To import a question library click on Browse and select an EvaSys question library file To start the import process click on Import To export click on Export A Save as dialog appears Select a folder and click on Save To integrate question groups and questions from the library into your questionnaire please open the question library in VividForms Editor See also chapter C 4 Use of the Ques
600. tically activated This can be deacti vated if desired To ensure a high reliability of results we also strongly recommend the use of verifica tion when working with open questions and ICR for the use of verification see chapter B 4 3 Correction of Checkboxes not Clearly Read The Verification Taking into account the additional expenditure of work and time caused by the pro cess of verification you should always check if the data cannot be collected by means of closed question types such as single choice or matrix questions 2 6 4 Single Choice Multiple Choice Question Select the single choice question type and click on Next You can now enter the text of the question and then click on Next This example functions identically for single choice and multiple choice questions W Question Wizard Question text BIU S What is your age Figure 515 Single Choice Question Enter the Question Text 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 389 EvaSys iw Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Survey Aunomation Suite w Question Wizard Define Options Option BI U Add option Option List a t 18 29 a P 30 39 ail a 40 49 T 50 59 a epes Online Drop down fist Mean disable calculation Position of the answer Default Questionnaire Layout w options Back Next Apply Cancel Figure 516 Single Choice Question Enter the Answer O
601. tion Sample Letter Figure 241 PDF Letter Selecting the PDF Template in the Field Text templates No PDF template defined The selected PDF template is then assigned to the letter text Action PDF template LEIIER KEDUN tor me present LETTER Results for instructors LETTER Summarized results for deans Show Delete LETTER Summarized results for study deans LETTER PDF REPORT Address field Norming PDF report Introduction j Norming PDF report Letter PDF REPORT Format of the instructor name D sample Letter Custom Cover Letter Sample pdf Please note The PDF A compliance will not be granted when using a PDF template Language English Higher Education w Figure 242 PDF Letter A letter Linked with a Text Template This results in the defined text elements continuous text address being placed over your desired layout Instead of the standard letter you get a letter which contains the corresponding elements text and layout As an example you can see here the PDF letter to Ms Dr Silvia Tomas with the Eva Sys sample template as layout 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 211 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite a L Pa le 1 5 DFA To Co cG c Belmore i tenes as private and confidential BE E WL Result of a survey Dear Mr Belmore Thae email contains evaluation results for Human Resource Management in_
602. tion UOU CJ XC Please follow the examples shown on the left hand side to help optimize the reading results I Figure 189 Questionnaire for Michael Brown example Now the survey can be implemented whereby attention has to be paid to the fact that the person specified on the questionnaire is actually the person who fills it in The subsequently generated PDF report of the survey does not contain any informa tion on the survey participants If these are to be processed this can be effected through the batch export in which you find information in the following two paragraphs paragraph on non anonymous surveys Implementing a Non anonymous Online Survey For online surveys it is possible to use information taken from the survey participant data for the personalization of the emails that are generated for the dispatch of partic ipation codes The placeholders shown in the previous paragraph can also be used for the text tem plates It is advisable to use customized text templates for individual questionnaires and not to modify the standard template for the PSWD dispatch In this example the recipients of the PSWD emails are addressed personally by using the placeholders for first names and surnames of the survey participants Reference Online survey Mail text Dear PARTICPANI FIRSINAME PARTICIPANT LASTNAME H This email entitles you to vote in an online survey Please follow the link and use the PSWD displaye
603. tion Library with VividForms chapter 3 Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys 3 1 Survey Procedures EvaSys supports a number of procedures for processing completed paper question naires as well as online surveys The goal of these procedures is to make processing returns as smooth and anonymous as possible 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 99 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Guedber 3 1 1 Cover Sheet Procedure With the cover sheet procedure cost savings can be achieved through the production of larger quantities of questionnaires in printing shops When using blank question naires it is not possible to determine which course the responses are intended for and so a cover sheet is necessary This includes information on the course and in the lower area the operation number is printed twice Evaluation Sheet CO ID Electric Paper e Hi os about the university in general Ther E Tun Een en pa rg JC kr PT k ini m me SES oO Les ene D Cader than DD OD DEE Date 05 12 2011 at 08 54 54 DOOOO0D OO DO mw di dogacoeaooe ae cf os D More than 11 2 O Applied Inforrnatics C Chemistry Geophys O Logistics Computer Science in Media O Fuchs Phys O Envronmental Geology ca R ce Studas Sek O industrial Enginesning and Man rt Cover Sheet i Dr se Cro oOo ODO EI The eine explain aven compii hopit ma OOo OB ao Oo COM eels wiy The ineiructor handles the techincal
604. tion Suite Status information ready Processed batches Processed pages Stopped batches Created Pages Status Licensed to Trainings Documentation Electric Paper GmbH Figure 212 Scanstation 188 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback The capturing of forms is performed with the help of the software EvaSys Scansta tion The communication with the scanner uses the TWAIN protocol To capture questionnaires put the forms into the feeder of the scanning device and open the Scanstation The scanning process is initialized by clicking the button Scan The further processing is fully automated Via the button Settings the Scanstation can be configured if required Via the button Manual a detailed documentation can be opened For further information on the scanning process as well as on the settings of the scanstation please see the Scanstation Manual which can be opened via the scanstation interface or via the EvaSys menu System Information Manuals 4 1 1 Scanner Settings To allow for a successful processing of forms with EvaSys the scanner has to be con figured in a specific way The following standard settings apply to all models e Image Mode Black and white e Paper Size A4 210 x 297 mm e Resolution 200 DPI e Brightness The threshold value should be slightly darker than average e Skew Correction Deactivated
605. tion graphic you will see to the right a traffic light symbol The following figure shows you a detailed report with scaled questions 0 H 0 1 1 0 The meals in the refectory are always tasty strongly disagree TT lege strongly agree A B im md 4 5 dev 0 7 2 3 H 5 a 0 D 1 d The university is connected to the public strongly disagree strongly agree n 3 gesteet KA LA K ei dew 2 1 3 4 5 e Figure 249 PDF Report Detailed Report of the Scaled Questions 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 215 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Gievey Auncmation Sul This is the main part of the PDF report which can be deactivated in the menu System Settings Report Settings Configuration Analysis of single questions It is possible to remove single questions from the report using the PDF report definitions For scaled questions the following graphical representation styles can be selected in the Vivid Forms Editor Standard Histogram 0 0 0 16 7 83 3 0 Figure 250 Standard Histogram Bar Diagram Figure 251 Bar diagram Line Diagram iw p Strongly dis agree Figure 252 Line Diagram Ring Diagram BOUOUSB M LO d On OD Figure 253 Ring Diagram Pie Diagram Figure 254 Pie Diagram 216 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback Maxi histograms Maxi histograms do not contain except
606. tion has to be single choice multiple choice or a matrix question Subgroups allow you to take advantage of for example automatic filters according to the program of study For each response option to this single choice or matrix question the answers are filtered and the subgroup report is attached to the standard report Please bear in mind that the standard PDF report is only attached to the subgroup reports if you have activated the option Show overall report before subgroup reports This is of course done only for options that have been check marked or that exceed the 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 229 EvaSys V F Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite minimum number of returns System Settings EvaSys Settings Survey Minimum number of returns for reports With the option Show divider for subgroups with information about subgroup in report you activate the use of a separator between the subgroups The following information is shown on the separator e The question to be filtered e The option the subgroup was constructed for e The number of returns for this subgroup Eesen r TE Subgroup For question What is your age Figure 266 PDF Report Definitions Divider for Subgroups With the last configuration option Include open questions in subgroup reports you can define the use of open questions in the subgroups 4 5 3 Individually Designed Reports PDF Report Pl
607. tion report The text of the letter is defined in the text templates but the layout is defined by means of a PDF template with variable fields The layout of the template can be adjusted freely and can thus e g correspond to your corporate design Nevertheless it is of course dependent of the content of the letter and the corresponding fields Please see chapter B 4 5 1 Components of the PDF Report for more information about the layout of the PDF template 3 2 Defining Access Rights In addition to access rules which can be set up by your local computing center Eva Sys allows you to determine access rights for three groups e Administrators e Users activated instructor trainer accounts data entry assistants report creators etc 32 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Start up and Security e Participants in online surveys You can define valid IP address ranges for each of these user groups under System Settings Evasys Settings System Security For this the first and last valid address range is entered respectively Restricted access Activates deactivates the restriction of access When activated the EvaSys Activated server checks the IP address of each inquiring computer for the following IP address domains Begin IP address domain participant online survey 0 D D 0 First permitted IP address for participants in an online survey
608. tion show pagination display block display none displaytblock Sample Text e noblackberry span bige tnders9599 z e noblackberry span biyad i pee A th fumbered label scaled AC oe CFF F r d ree i sye Grease GAPE me eee Figure 148 CSS Editing 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 145 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model In this example a button is defined with a light blue background and dark blue border and text sample of how it will look like on the right of the example image E Advanced Template Editing The way online templates are programmed in EvaSys allows you to modify many aspects such as colors and location but also each detail of how the single elements will be displayed You can for example include flash interaction into your survey cre ate a picture based survey e g displaying pictures as multiple choice options and so on Working at this level of customization requires advanced object oriented PHP programming and extended knowledge of accessibility requirements To access these functionalities start by copying the whole online default template you find in folder C Apache htdocs evasys application modules online templates online default Here are the objects in this folder files and subfolders element A images d partial __ formcentent phtml __ languageselector phtm __ layout phtml login phtml 2 onl
609. tionnaires Automatic with text comparison Manual Include answers to open questions Combine surveys unweighted Please note For this combination the mean values of the single surveys are averaged verity Il Back Figure 320 Report Creator Instructor Profile Selection of Elements 264 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting The window known from other report types opens for the overview of the report that you create Request instructor profile Your choice Instructor Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Compilation name Belmore WS 10 11 Questionnaire train_en train_en_1 Period WS10 11 2010 09 01 to 2011 02 28 No of Surveys 5 No of completed questionnaires 67 The report creation may take a moment Please wait until an acknowledgment has been sent back from the server Which gender do you belong to Which gender do you belong to male female male female F Figure 321 Report Creator Instructor Profile Overview of the Selection made and the Ques tionnaire Here you deactivate the questions that you do not need in the instructor trainer report and click on Create In turn this report also appears in the list vi Prof Development WS10 11 Data available 7 rain en 05 18 2011 J046 choose pdf repot CSV SPHINX HTML ai Economics WS10 11 Data available trainen 05 18 2011
610. tions you can export the captured data from EvaSys For this purpose the CSV format as well as a specific format for import into the statistics pro gram SPSS are available to you The explanations of these export options bring us to the end of the chapter 5 1 Indicators 5 1 1 The Principle of the Indicator In the automatically generated PDF reports you receive an average value for all your scaled questions as an expression of how the respondents replied to this scaled ques tion In this example you see a question referring to the quality of the instructor z r om OO O O 88 9 11 1 The instructor is always well prepared fff um i a A 4 A fi Figure 273 Evaluation of a Scaled Question with Specification of the Average Diagram Type Histogram With regard to the thematic direction and your own requirements you will have divided the questions on your questionnaire into question groups For example one could assign all questions regarding the quality of the course to the question group About the instructor You will then receive an average value for each of the scaled questions If you or for example deans managers department heads etc wish to obtain a quick overview of the results of the survey often not every single question may be of inter est One rather needs summary statements If therefore you do not wish to view all questions separately it is possible to calculate an average for the scaled questions of
611. tly adopts the additional role of report creator in his user profile he also automatically receives the same data access rights as the administrator subunit administrator himself Creating a Report Creator Just like any other user a report creator is a user that is created in a subunit If your report creator is supposed to work only subunit wide you create him in the subunit for which he is to produce summaries If the report creator works globally you can create him in any subunit at all since he has insight into all data anyway For example you can create a subunit System users where you put all users such as the report creator the data entry assistant the verifier etc so as to find them again fast Go to the respective subunit and click on Create New User The input window which opens should be familiar to you from creating instructors trainers and other users In the way you are accustomed enter the data for the person who will act as report creator It is crucial that you choose the user type report cre ator instead of instructor trainer and the like 2 Change the user type Instructor Dean of Studies Dean See utilization statistics for the subunit Module o Report Creator Data Entry Assistant Handwritten comments Verifier Subunit Administrator Cancel lt lt Back oo Next gt gt Figure 290 Creating a Report Creator Step 1 248 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys
612. to the Instructor Trainer The text of the relevant emails can be edited in the menu System Settings Text Tem plates E MAIL Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions activated EMAIL Instruc tor Trainer s Optional Questions reminder and E MAIL Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions deactivated The administrator can edit the surveys where the Instructor Trainer s Optional Ques tions are activated by opening the list of surveys main menu Subunits there Dis play Surveys 3 2 9 Batch Events EvaSys VY Sdcaoon Survey ALE Sumber Questionnaires System Settings System Information Search SSi vV gt Batch Events a Print Cover Sheets Forms Print PDF reports Send Cover Sheets Forms Send PDF reports Archive PDF reports and CSV raw data J Send PDF reports as instructor profiles Send PSWDs to Instructors Hide surveys with documents which have already been sent 1 Subunit i 2 Survey Period l 3 Course Type p d Questionnaire Cues Professional Development WS10M1 Central Evaluation S Tree Structure Ei Generate Surveys i Display Surveys s Kl Delete Surveys _ Select program of study QA instructor s Optional Questions F Display Courses e Print only master versions of Scheduled Tasks 5 Course s cover sheets and Figure 164 Batch Events 158 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw
613. to the library Delete selected question from library Deletes the question from the library Detach library question Detaches the selected question from the library Add selected question group to library Adds the selected question group to the library Delete selected question group from library Deletes the selected question group form the library Detach library group Detaches the selected question group from the library Save form and exit editor Saves changes and exites the VividForms Editor Delete form and exit editor Deletes the questionnaire and exits the VividForms Editor Table 17 Editor Control 2011 Electric Paper GmbH Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor Form Properties d a Line Height Form Properties Layout settings Repair form Enable numbering Edit Pole Template Filter settings Validation Required questions Cross tabulation Change color scheme Picture Library Font Size 11 pt e Size of the answer boxes amp pt F Font Form Properties a Online survey templates EvaSys Onimetemplate e Form Properties Repair form Enable numbering Edit Pole Template Filter settings Validation Required questions Cross tabulation Picture Library Display Complete Question Library x Choose a question from the library Add selected question to library Add selected question group to library Save form and exit editor Delete form and exi
614. tomation Suite Configuration Settings where you have defined the possibility of abstentions each abstention is exported as a Missing Value with value o to SPSS SPSS ignores the Missing Value when com puting the mean value Sphinx path If the path of the local Sphinx application is defined a batch file will be generated dur ing the Sphinx export Running the batch file allows Sphinx to display the report imme diately Raw data export contains only the ID of non anonymous participants If activated the raw data export contains only the ID email address of the participant This option is only available for non anonymous surveys where the participants are known with names in the system If this option is deactivated all available participant data will be exported Char encoding for CSV Export Defines the char encoding for the CSV export Use the option Unicode if non Latin characters are used Options ISO 8859 1 ISO 8859 2 Unicode ISO 8859 1 is a norm which defines the display of the western European font ISO 8859 2 is a norm defining the east European character set Through ISO 8859 2 a CSV file with east European characters can be directly and correctly opened in Excel Unicode is a comprehensive standard for the presentation of characters through a computer which makes numerous characters presentable worldwide for example Chinese fonts The EvaSys server displays its web pages in the unicode font UTF 8 2
615. tor trainer for the assignment to other surveys Editing Displaying Notes The notes function supports the communication between the different user roles in EvaSys A user can link a memo with a survey Notes always refer therefore to a par ticular survey and their history is accessible to all users All notes can be edited or deleted by the authors at any time This function is particularly useful in regard to the QM screens The instructors train ers can thus comment on the determined results Deans managers or department heads can then inspect these notes as well as add their own To add a note to a survey call up the survey details through a click on the survey name Click on Edit Show notes 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 115 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Show PSWDs in browser 1 Receive PSWDs by email 1 Send PSWDs by email to respondents Download PSWDs in CSV File Generate more PSWDs 0 Number of participants for calculating response rate Preview online survey Scheduled Tasks Finish Data Collection Close Survey amp Restore Survey 2 Delete Survey J Edit answers to open questions As lig Figure 105 Survey Details Add Note Then click on Add note All notes of the survey Human Resource Management Figure 106 Add Note An input window appears with which text can also be formatted Add Note Survey Human Reso
616. tors Send all to the following email address Request Figure 172 Batch Events Dispatch PDF Reports as Instructor Trainer Profile The option hide surveys with dispatched documents makes sure that no batch event will be used more than once on the same course 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 165 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model 3 2 10 Non anonymous Surveys Surveys in EvaSys run by default assuming and protecting the anonymity of the sur vey participants Should the identities of the survey participants be required for example for address reasons as well as later for the processing of survey results relevant participant data can be imported and used Please observe the following legal references when using non anonymous Surveys Legal References in Non anonymous Surveys Please note that when conducting non anonymous surveys you are processing the personal data of the participants The processing of personal data is subject to special stipulations of the data protection act as well as possible regulations of other laws e Campus or labor legislation As a rule elements of these regulations state that when surveying by means of ques tionnaires forms survey participants are informed of the data processing in particu lar e of the intended purpose of the data processing e of whether the details are voluntary or an obligation exists together with th
617. train_01 train_en Summary Reports 2010 Compilation name Prof Development WS10 11 Summary Reports 2011 HernandeziBelmore WS 10 11 Economics WS10 11 Summary Reports 2011 Report of Train_en Summary Reports 2011 Prof Dev Economics Overall Report Summary Re Question mapping of different questionnaires Prof Dev Economics W310 11 Summary Reports 2 Automatic with text comparison Hernandez WS 10 11 Summary Reports 2011 Manual Include answers to open questions _ Combine surveys unweighted Please note For this combination the mean values of the single surveys are averaged Figure 335 Report Creator Merge Evaluations Selection of Reports 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 273 EvaSys V Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Since these are combinations too the usual options are available to you question naire comparison inclusion of responses to open questions as well as the unweighted combination Choose the options that you wish here and click on Merge Then a new report is added to your report list the combination of reports you chose HTML 05 18 2011 112 choose pdf report e CSV SPHINX Data 4 Hernandez Belmore WS 10 11 available train en Figure 336 Report Creator Merged Instructor Profiles Belmore and Hernandez of 2010 11 The properties of these merged reports correspond exactly to those of the other exist ing ones H
618. trainers automatically see their surveys from the Central Evalu ation In order to do this simply activate access in System Settings EvaSys Set tings Central Evaluation Passive Instructor Trainer Access to Download Reports After authentification of the instructor trainer he can select the survey period and all the surveys from this period are displayed with type name questionnaire cre ation date and number of returns 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 233 EvaSys iw Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite For each survey the instructor trainer can now download the PDF report if the questionnaire is multilingual then in a number of languages The passive instructor trainer can change his access data by clicking on the menu point My profile EvaSys bw d Professional Development iV Deeg Auden Seek f Requesting central evaluation reports Survey Period s W505 Donna eD vood 5506 ebe emal Evaluation SS Type Survey Status rom Crested a Porm Requed System Setings FvaSys POF rep e a iw Pec Rs P Introduction into EvaSys ij Data available St train WET 05 12 2011 29 es PDF Figure 271 Downloading Reports by Passive Instructors e Active instructors trainers Active instructors trainers have in their menu view a link to the reports of the Cen tral Evaluation To set this up simply activate the link in System Settings EvaSys Settings Central Evaluation Active Instructor T
619. tral Evaluation Version V5 0 Database My SQL localhost Paper surveys Licensed Online Surveys Licensed Handwriting recognition Licensed VividForms Designer Licenses 5 Version 0 5 7 1 Scanstation licenses 4 Se unlimited Campuslicense cee Assign to subunits License key Customer name License key Save VividForms Designer Licenses i Name Last used Not in use yet Not in use yet Not in use yet Not in use yet Not in use yet im amp GA Mi sch Users Please choose License allocation canstation licenses _ Name Version IP address MAC address 1 01 213 252 154 17 00 00 F0 7F C7 11 4 2 01 213 252 154 17 08 00 46 B6 A5 AC 3 01 3 20 192 168 245 129 00 0C 29 63 70 3F 4 4 Not in use yet d Automatically assign a license to next requesting Scanstation Figure 602 License Management 1 8 2 Administration of User Accounts The number of available user accounts for each subunit can be freely determined by the administrator and as such be limited This possibility exists for limited as well as unlimited number of users Via a new button Assign to subunits in the license administration the administrator can display an overview of the existing subunits and limit the number of user accounts per subunit 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 445 EvaSys V System Settings and Management Goen Auncmation Sui amp 9 License Management Product Boss Central Evaluation Version V
620. ty lt a se oe taw ig dE bie bere 20 Account Active instructor account 22 23 178 Use of templates in instructor accounts 421 User account 2 cave anaa 49 Activating indicators Activating the indicators in the configuration 239 Active instructor 178 180 Working with the active instructor s data 186 Active instructor account 22 23 Ad hoc Desktop Sharing 0 4 16 Adding Adding a group to the library 415 Adding a question to the library 413 Adding a question Adding a question from the library 409 Adding pictures to a questionnaire 403 Administrator SEENEN Sts co are ot CS ed ee EE 53 Defining a template by the administrator 420 My Profile 53 Secondary Administrator 4 54 Adress form AN ENEE NEIER E EST NN A 40 Advanced Reporting Aggregated Reports 257 Advanced reporting 236 Analysis of errors 453 Any compilation Tree structure 270 Attachment Email attachments 471 Automatic recognition set management 424 B Backup 24 4 6 0 cb d bid deed dere bade eee 34 Backing up the database 34 Backing up the original image files from scan station Image files of open questions 35 Barcode 191 Basic terminology 24 Batch export nnau KLEER ace ae ag ECKE ws 439 Batch TEE 193 C Central evaluation 22 103 Checkboxe
621. u are What is your age Your Zipoode PC Skills lam able to createfedit a word document lam able to createfedit a presentation know how to zipfunzip a file TI know how to burn CD or save files on a USB stick internet Skals lam compotable using varus browsers 1us email as a frequent means of communicator l know how to search for information on the web using search engines Technical Trainings have already taken part in a technical training 1 swoub like lo take parn in a technical training to improve my PClintemnet skills O maie C 19 29 g 0 53 Fully agree Fully agree Fully agree Fully agree Fuly agree Fully agree Fully agree O ves Fully agree Which kind of technical training s would you like to visit Figure 478 PDF Preview of Questionnaire O 40 49 O Older than 69 Fully disagree Fully disagree Fully disagree Fully disagree Fully disagree Fully disagree Fully disagnes Fully disagree EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite Please note that this preview is not suitable for implementing a survey In order to cre ate a survey on the basis of a new questionnaire you must first create a folder and then create a survey In order to display a preview of the future online survey click on the online symbol 368 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V Survey Aae nallin SU Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor Lu
622. u can also define comparative reports Again in the questionnaire details select in the area Advanced Settings the option Report for comparison and click on Edit In the fol lowing window under Define report for comparison you can define which report should be used for the comparison Define report for comparison Survey Period Subunit EZ i WS05 06 Available reports Seog Belmore WS 10 11 WS06 07 Sen ws09 10 3310 SW Fei H DU Figure 394 Profile Line Comparison Define Report for Comparison in the Details of a Ques tionnaire Administrator Under Available reports you will find all reports which are based on the current ques tionnaire and which you have already created in the Report Creator window In order to display the profile lines of a comparative report in the standard PDF report you must have previously created reports for this questionnaire in the Report Creator 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 305 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Let us assume for example you have created period reports of your individual sub units as report creator for example Prof Development WS10 11 In addition you have perhaps created instructor trainer reports like Belmore WS10 11 or Hernan dez WS10 11 These reports created in the report creator can be defined here as comparative reports for special periods and subunits I
623. uctor trainer accounts The active instructor trainer will find a form import function in the questionnaire administration area Imported forms are subsequently only available to the instructor trainer account owner In the list of personal questionnaires you will see an export function 8 which can create a vfd file A Form Management Actions Abbreviation Title Pages Date Ge Settings Copy Delete Edit Preview Export SE Ss wea wig e Template Sample 2 mecha debt ole 3 EA P RW ON Io D a 3 Form Import Browse F Switch to Edit Mode import Figure 580 Import and Export of Questionnaires for Active Users Active users have limited access to the import and export of secondary data Only the following form attributes can be imported or exported with the questionnaire e Filter settings e Validation e Required questions e Cross Tabulations If the administrator exports a questionnaire with secondary data such as languages text templates norms etc these are automatically filtered out when the questionnaire is imported into an active user account 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 427 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Creating Questionnaires with VividForms 8 Implementation of Specific Design Requirements VividForms Plus 8 1 Implementation of Questionnaires with Vivid Forms Plus The layout of the VividForms Editor allows the user to create questionnaires very quickly and easily To guarantee easy handli
624. ue must be fulfilled indicated by the character in the Operator column Question Operator Value Options Default criteria combination Which gender do you belong to 2 female S Figure 344 Report Creator Criterion Female was Successfully Selected Depending on which question type the selected question is related to you can select a operator or other operators With regard to scaled questions and matrix ques tions as well as the operator the lt gt s and 2 and lt gt unequal are avail able In open questions you can filter by strings contained or not contained as long as the data of the open question is not an image This function then applies to online surveys or paper surveys with data collection and ICR Question Operator Value Options Default criteria combination Please give us your feedback about the instructor as well as suggestions for improvement contains good a Figure 345 Report Creator Filteroptions for open questions You can change the value of a criterion at any time here This means you can choose for example all female interviewees instead of all male ones To do this click on the arrow of the drop down menu for the value of your chosen question Question Operator Value Options Default criteria combination Which gender do you belong to 2 female el amp 1 male 2 female Figure 346 Repo
625. uestion Types Screen background color FFFFCC E Zei This color will be used as the screen e background color Logo background color 6699CC F R This color will be used as the logo s background color Survey header background color erg IIe This color will be used as the survey header s background color Survey header font color 003366 E Ge This color will be used as the survey header s font color Figure 144 Customized Online Survey Template Customize colors e Navigation Different elements such as the page navigation or the progress bar can be shown or hidden here e Question Types Specific settings for different question types can be made here such as for exam ple a remaining characters counter for open questions can be displayed scale questions can be displayed as a slider etc 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 143 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite Whilst customizing the template you can change between the different tabs at any time Once you have completed your editing click on the button Accept The tem plate just created now appears in the overview Customized Online Survey Templates 6 Sample Template EvaSys Onlinetemplate Peter Brown Create new customized online survey template Figure 145 Customized Online Survey Template Overview With a click on
626. uestions 1 Questions about you 2 Questions about the instructor KI SU 4 The instructor is always well prepared u a u aj jE v The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way oooooo a The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc noodoUoo without any problems v Please grade the instructor for this course por O O O OO O ven good 3 Questions about the course The lead time of the course is adequate Stony 5 o aaan Strongly agree dis agree Figure 288 Free Indicators Editing Using the button Set new indicators the indicators can be set up manually After clicking on the button the questionnaire is shown in the overview Again a name for the indicator must first be given and then the individual questions can be selected by activating the checkbox By clicking on Save the new indicator is added to the list of indicators Free indicators are displayed in the PDF report if the calculation of indicators is acti vated in the configuration of the PDF report Overall indicators 1 2 3 4 el av 5 1 Instructor e RS i dev 0 5 1 2 a 4 5 6 EI Course CO dev 0 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 m52 Teaching material BL T dev 0 6 Figure 289 Free Indicators Display in the PDF Report 246 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys v Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting 5 2 Creating Reports and Comparative Profile Lines As soon as
627. ueueaneneens 247 5 2 2 CREATING SUMMARY e EC 257 5 2 3 DISPATCH OF COMPARATIVE PROFILE LINES o ccccceccceseecseeceeuseeceeeseuseueeueeeaeeeeeeneueueens 288 5 2 4 RESULT REPORTS ccccceccccccccsceceuceeecseuceueeeeueaueeueueeueeueeueeeuueaueeueueeueeaeeuaesauuaaeeueeaueeneenes 299 5 2 5 INTEGRATING PROFILE COMPARISON LINES IN THE PDF REPORT c ccecceeseesseeeeeeeees 302 5 3 DATA EXPORT TO EXCEL SPSS SPHINX oo cccccccecccccesceeseeceeeeeeeseeceeaeeeeeeueeeaueueeeaeseeeeueueauenenens 309 5 3 1 POSSIBLE DATA EXPORT FORMATS IN EVASYS uuu cccccccceccecseecceeseucseeseueeuesueseueeeeeeueneaeeens 309 5 4 DEFINITION OF THE EXPORT VALUES AND NAMES FOR VARIABLES cccccesseceeeeeueseeseeeeeueeees 310 5 5 THE EVASYS REPORT MODULE SPHINX PLUS u ccccccccecccecseeececeeeeeeceseceeuueuseueeeueeeueeneneaeeees 312 D PHASE 5 QUALITY MANAGEMENT AAA 314 E INOS EE 314 6 k1 CALCULATION OF NORMS EE 315 6 1 2 DEFINITION OF NORM VALUES FOR QUESTIONNAIRES ccccecceeseecseesseeseuceueeeueeeuseneueueeees 316 6 2 QUALITY GUIDELINES agen re ee EE 320 6 2 1 SETTING QUALITY GUIDELINES ooo cccecccccc cece eccecseecseeseecseeseueeecueaeeeueueuueeaueueueueueueeueeeaesuaes 320 6 2 2 CONVERTING INDICATORS INTO QUALITY GUIDELINES ccccccceccecceecseeeeueseeseueeeeeeeeueaeees 328 6 2 3 CONVERTING NORMS INTO QUALITY GUIDELINES ccccccce ccc ccscecceeceueseeseueeeuueeeueuaeeaeeeaes 332 6 2 4 AUTHORIZING ACCESS R
628. ugins EvaSys generates survey evaluations in the form of standardized PDF reports You can adjust these reports in different ways according to your needs If you require a completely adjusted PDF report you can also include a so called PDF Report Plugin into EvaSys A plugin is normally a small program which is inserted into a larger program and provides additional functionality 230 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 3 Capture and Instant Feedback In this case it is not a software but special report types that you can import into the Evasys system These report types can define the reports for one several or all ques tionnaires available in the system Also an imported PDF report plugin can replace the EvaSys PDF Report that is firmly integrated in EvaSys In order to integrate a PDF report plugin into the EvaSys system you click in the main menu System Settings on Report Settings EvaS 5 v Subunits Questionnaires System information eae EvaSys lV su V Pi 3 Report Settings Peter Brown Description Administrator Configuration Edit Copy Delete Administrator E EvaSys PDF report Peter Brown H a EvaSys POF report Copy Peter Brown wi F E A indvidual Report Peter Brown it 2 LH a Ins iuMments PDF Report Plugins Descnption File name Figure 267 PDF Report Plugin Upload Plugin Via Browse you can choose the PDF report plugin file In the following exa
629. umber Konrad Zuse Allee 13 Administrator e ZIP City 21337 L neburg Phong Fax 04131 7380 0 Email Information System Information In progress ro Evaluated KE Date deleted Wve Figure 600 System Information At first a Summary list of surveys with the following states will display e Ready Active surveys for which no results data have yet been registered e Analyzed Active surveys for which returns have already been registered e Data Entry Active surveys for which returns have been registered however for which the anonymization of handwritten comments has not yet been carried out This is only an option when the anonymization in the subunit properties has been activated You can now choose multiple selection course type survey period and form Click on Apply Course Type Survey Period Form undefined E Sen a sain a Lecture WS10 11 train 02 Seminar 5510 Working Group ws09 10 rancan 1 TTT TTT Others s507 train WB Module General WS06 07 train WB1 Module Trainer S506 VE DemoE WS05 06 VE De moP I Dd S505 zi XL279XWT S Show unused course types at subunits and unused questionnaires in periods Apply Figure 601 Filter for System Information Then tables display for each of the individual subunits which show a list of all the sur veys and form return numbers for the selected parameters 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 443 EvaSys iw Surve
630. uments Information Concerning Activating the Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions Trigger The administrator has activated the instructor trainer s optional questions for a survey Content Personalized text as well as a link to the instructor trainer s optional questions In most email programs clicking the link will lead directly to the instructor trainer s optional questions Reminder for the InstructorTtrainer s Optional Questions Trigger The administrator has initiated a reminder for an activated instructor trainer s optional questions 460 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Configuration Settings Content Personalized text as well as a link to the instructor trainer s optional questions In most email programs clicking the link will lead directly to the instructor trainer s optional questions Regulatory Information Trigger The message to the instructor trainer about which deans of studies program manag ers received a summarized form of the results has been activated self registering pro cedure Content Personalized text with a list of the deans of studies program managers who have been given access to the summarized results of the survey Certificate of Participation for Online Surveys Trigger Certificate of participation has been activated for a questionnaire Option email The PSWD has been sent to the respondents by email The respondent has submit
631. uments e You have already collected data e AsaReport Creator you can manually recall or send documents for the existing data 302 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting e The documents are independent of a specific PDF report and are not integrated as such You also have the possibility of displaying other comparison lines together in addition to the current profile lines in the automatically generated PDF report Whereby the fol lowing comparison lines are possible e Comparison lines from up to five previous periods as well as e A comparison line originating from a report of a report creator If the relevant data is already available in the system the relevant comparison lines will be displayed together with the profile lines of the survey in the profile line of the automatically generated PDF reports You specify which profile lines you would like to see in a PDF report in the details of the questionnaire Main menu System Settings gt questionnaire list gt click on the name of the relevant questionnaire Note You should login under the EvaSys user role which created the questionnaire Administrator Subunit administrator Profile Line Comparison in the PDF Report Add Previous Period In the details of a questionnaire you can define the number of previous periods which should be compared with the current period This means the profile line
632. unny Narrow tP License Professional Developmeri S Samantha Miler Dean LJ Send Emad to Support Prof Or Phiipp Beimore 3 wiem Cleaning Donna Hatwoog e E Sysiem Status SI EvaSys Website OK Lance Documentation Figure 592 Writing an email to users The sender address and the sender name are taken from data in the user profile of the administrator 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 437 EvaSys iw System Settings and Management mav Ainomation Suis Other email types some of which are created automatically receive sender data from EvaSys Settings Email Functions amp Accounts Sender Name for all System Emails 1 3 Delivery Here you will find a table with a list of all report emails that have been sent Deliveries eS There are 113 Log entries available Showatetes Jed eg of data sets to display 15 Starting from data set Ciel Gesten Bat Survey Type Recipient Address may E Cem Organization and Management Report Carlos Hemandez Form train_en Professions Development Course type Seminar herandez example com 1 a available amp Managing and maintaining a healthy psywpto 05 16 2011 lifestyle respondents j doe example com j doe example com ek at 10 21 29 os Form train_en Course type Seminar Figure 593 Delivery details You will find the following information in the table Bat Batch ID of jobs which contain the questionnaires processed for this survey Survey The na
633. urce Management RI ul The room was far too small for all particpants Internet was extremely slow Figure 107 Editing a Note 116 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey dee Suis Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys After a click on Save the entries are saved In the survey overview the symbol D now appears next to the survey name When the mouse is moved over the symbol the most recently entered note appears in a window next to the cursor ssi Human Resource Management Data Con i D 02 P1237 7 aen C1017 85 0512 201 OQ trainen gat wp S r SSI 5 SEN i OD Quest_01 Show Questionnaire el DS a EY The room was far too small for all particpants ws10 11 Internet was extremely slow Ain en Og e Br ASIA T tranen Dit wy BSB SSDR O Ouest DI Showcoversheet sl amp A Man agement gt Managing and lifestyle NA 1 Type 2011 0512 1 21 53 Form Report Export Actions Figure 108 Course with Note In the case of the QM screens two types of symbols can appear next to the survey name i symbol Notes exist ER symbol Notes do not yet exist Editing notes later is only possible for the respective authors Additionally these notes can be displayed in the PDF report To do this activate the option Show notes in the PDF report under System Settings Report Settings Con figuration All notes of the surve Peter Brown 05 12 2011 at 11 21 52 The room
634. ure 73 Online Survey with a Deactivated Survey Header You can also choose to enable the temporary save and print options 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 89 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Design Here you can define whether the questionnaire is displayed in online surveys as one page i e to scroll down option Complete to browse option Per Chapter or according to the page display in the VividForms Editor resp Designer option Per Page With the option Per Chapter each question group is displayed in online sur veys aS one page Note For online surveys the display mode per chapter has been set as default Certificate of Participation If the survey participants need to receive a certificate of participation this option can be activated The options allow the display of a PDF document the submission of an email only available if the PSWDs were sent by email or both The certificates will be generated as soon as a participant has completed a survey The text of the email can be edited via the menu Text Templates option E Mail Certificate of participation for online surveys If you want to display a PDF certificate in the browser directly after the participants have submitted the questionnaire you first have to take the following steps e Create a PDF template resp choose the sample template Certificate for participa tion in onl
635. urity 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 29 EvaSys iw Preparation and General Notes Geen Sues This information is SSL encrypted in its entirety and serves solely technical purposes No personal data or captured data from the system is ever transmitted If you do not agree to the transfer of the above mentioned information this function can be deactivated in the system settings System Settings EvaSys Settings Mainte nance Automatic Update Check Independent of this function you will be informed of available updates through other channels If the administrator uses a secure https connection to the server and if the main server path in EvaSys is also defined for https like https example com evasys and a secure certificate is not installed on the server the update check will not function Depending on the browser being used a warning from the browser appears after log ging in Because the use of non secure certificates causes problems in other areas and browsers generally recommend not connecting to a server with non secure certif icates it is strongly recommended to procure a secure certificate Certificates are rated as non secure if the information of the certificate does not match that of the server if the lifespan of the certificate has expired or if the issuer of the cer tificate is not trustworthy This last point is often the case with self generated certifi cates 3 1 3 Adjustments in EvaSys Settings Texts C
636. urse poor v 38 n i j GEZEI Si H rly gi 3 s Figure 398 Profile Line Comparison Combination of the Various Profile Lines In conclusion it can be held that as an a Subunit administrator you can define com parative profile lines for a particular questionnaire in the details of a questionnaire via the option Report for comparison in the area Advanced Settings You can there e define the number of previous periods to be included in the comparison and e select a comparative report which has already been created by the report creator 308 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting 5 3 Data Export to Excel SPSS Sphinx 5 3 1 Possible Data Export Formats in EvaSys For further reports and evaluation you can export the collected data to three different formats The export function can be used for all of the surveys and reports In the fol lowing you can see a description of the different formats CSV Format CSV stands for Comma Separated Values and provides a free text format that is able to be read by all statistical tools as exchange format One line of a CSV file is equivalent to the content of one questionnaire The values are separated by a separa tor You can define this separator at settings data import and export the default set ting is a comma A line of data contains instructor name course name course additional fields
637. urvey Send PSWDs to Batch emailing of the PSWDs to the Online All respondents by email respondents Hybrid Download PSWDs in Allows the download of a text file containing all Online All CSV file remaining PSWDs for a survey Hybrid Generate more PSWDs Allows the generation of additional PSWDs for Online All an existing online survey Hybrid Number of participants Here the number of participants can be All All to calculate the adapted if required by default using the course response rate information Preview online survey Opens a window with a preview of the online Online All survey Scheduled Tasks Shows the scheduled tasks linked to the Online All survey such as PSWD submission reminder submission or reporting Show cover sheet form Opens the personalized cover sheet or the Paper All in browser questionnaire of the survey as PDF file in the browser Email cover sheet form Sends the personalized cover sheet and or Paper All form to the owner of the survey by email Shows the open ended question answers in a All Data available Edit answers to open questions list allowing the administrator to select and delete if necessary Allows a survey to be assigned to a another All Data user for example to include a substitute existent instructor Assign survey to a substitute instructor Edit display notes Here existing notes on surveys can be viewed All Data or amended existent 11
638. urvey Automation Suite The Basics 3 Questions about the course attend the course check as many as apply because am interested in the topic a because need to earn the credit hours DW because the instructor is really good 1 because it is important for my professional life DW for the preparation of my exam EN for other reasons The lead time of the course is adequate Strongly O e O O Strongly agree disagree Figure 8 High Contrast Online Template When using special online survey templates the accessibility can be limited espe cially when using JavaScript elements For the best possible accessibility we recom mend using our standard template If desired an even higher contrast presentation is possible using a customized online survey template aha EvaSys v e Subunits Questionnaires System Information A lv Ce Sauter ara Sai UY Online Template Management wm fe He TT Peter Brown Amugy 2 Questions about the instructor oi T g al DW ot E KA Ipem gene RE ZS ge er e E Text Templates The instructor is always well prepared CO Documents V Report Settings V The instructor explains even complex topics ina comprehensible way Configuration The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc without any problems ig EvaSys Settings S Defne Tree Structure Please give us your feedback about the instructor as well as suggestions for improve
639. urvey periods and questionnaires If necessary you can also filter according to course type by activating the option Course Type By clicking on the button Show the courses are displayed in the list If required the name of the instructor can be displayed by selecting Show instructors 124 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys V F Goen gc Sui Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys 1 Actions Display Surveys Generate Surveys Delete Surveys ro i TT IO study mi Subunits 3 Filters _ O Engineering m Professional Development Questionnaire Additional filters v A Economics L Course Type v Central Campus Philipp Belmore Carlos Hernandez Media amp information Center Philipp Belmore Carlos Hernandez _ S Engineering Computer Sciences _ Social Sciences _ Psychology _ Data Entry Demo Subunit 62 Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle a Meier Demo Subunit 47 Organization and Management A Paper survey Online 9 Hard Copy Procedure Online Survey Cover Sheet Procedure _ Use Time Control _ survey L Web Verification Figure 121 Tree Structure Generating Surveys By using the mouse and the control key any number of courses can be selected for which a survey is to be generated At the bottom of the window the various types of surveys and their additional options verification timing are available
640. usted color scheme 5 Questions about the studying conditions strongly disagree strongly agree n a The meals in the refectory are always warm aag g E The meals in the refectory are always fresh Ui It Lead U G E The meals in the refectory are always tasty Li DUU ou i The university is connected to the public O O U O Ld CI transportation very well Figure 551 Questionnaire with Adjusted Color Scheme 3 Repair Form When editing large questionnaires it may occur in rare cases that the order of the objects gets confused In such a case click on Repair Form in the Form Properties menu of the Editor control The questionnaire will be rebuilt 4 Use of the Question Library with VividForms You can integrate both question groups and questions from not yet implemented questionnaires as well as protected questionnaires into the question library In the fol lowing the procedure for adding the question groups and questions is described in detail 4 1 Adding a Question from the Library Click on the symbol 7 in order to adopt a question group combination from the ques tion library A dialog will open and you should now select a group With the check field you can select whether the group will be transferred to the questionnaire the marked check box in the screenshot In the next selection the elements of this group will appear 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 409 EvaSys iw Creating Questionnaires with VividFor
641. values V Show the header of the survey V Allow Summary Reports Enable temporary save Show print option Figure 399 Data Export Configuration in the Details of a Questionnaire Note The allocation of names for variables must be carried out for each questionnaire In the window which opens afterwards you have the possibility of defining the names of the different variables 310 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Data export configuration Form ran en Single Choice Which gender do you belong to Older than Single Choice 18 29 1 30 39 2 40 49 3 50 59 4 60 69 5 6916 What is your age oem 9 e n 7 2 3 e D 5 SE Matrix Field What is your age Grade Value What is the grade of your last school graduation Single choice How rany ieme LEE Term um ap ap AR ap mg 7m have you been en 3 Bee 2 3 4 5 8 7 V2 D Grade Figure 400 Define Data Export Configuration The first column shows you the types of questions and the question text the second displays the internal description of the variable In the third column you can rename the variable Please observe the following rules when renaming The name e must begin with a letter reason variables in SPSS must begin with a letter e may only consist of letters numbers and the underscore This means that other special characters also the space bar
642. vidForms Green dog Suite Form Properties Layout settings Repair form Enable numbering Edit Pole Template Filter settings Validation Required questions Cross tabulation Change color scheme ON Picture Library Line Height Font Size 12 pt e 10 pt v size of the answer boxes Spt e Arial e Figure 540 Accommodate Line Height Font Size and Font On the other hand a questionnaire that is not quite filled can be made to look better by increasing the line height The font size affects all question objects with the exception of chapter headings These should not be made too large The following font types are available e Arial e Georgia e Tahoma e Times New Roman e Verdana Please examine the PDF sample issue after changing the font type using the PDF preview to make sure that all texts appear correctly If not you may have to reduce the font size 2 9 6 Filtering of HTML Tags You should be aware of the implications of your changes and always check them Only then you can ensure that your online surveys appear with the desired layout and functions With online surveys in addition to highlighting you have other formatting options with bold and italic fonts and underlining You can use HTML tags for the formatting for online surveys only 402 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys YV Guer Auidmatiin Suite Creating a Questionnaire in the VividForms Editor For this purpose activate in the EvaSys
643. w return rates of paper based surveys the option 2 percentage of responses based on the course participants must be selected 2 5 3 Section Survey Online Highest permitted number of PSWDs per survey in instructor trainer account Defines the maximum number of participants in an online survey This value is theo retically unlimited but should be limited to an acceptable size for the organization Default value is 1000 Default value PSWD number per survey in instructor trainer account This number is recommended in instructor trainer accounts as the number of partici pants for a survey Server address for online evaluations This address is used on the PSWD cards and in the PSWD emails Instruction text for PSWD cards Defines the instruction text on the PSWD cards for online surveys 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 481 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management Default value PSWD per survey central evaluation Online surveys created in central evaluation use as the number of participants the number of students that can be admitted to a particular course If this number is miss ing then the value defined in this constant is used Format PSWD document Different formats are available for the PSWD document 1 3x8 PSWDs per page A4 2 2x7 PSWDs per page A4 3 3x7 PSWDs per page A4 4 3x6 PSWDs per page Letter Design template for online surveys File with design templates
644. was far too small for all particpants Internet was extremely slow Figure 109 All Notes of the Survey in the PDFReport Show recognized form originals as PDF The option Show recognized form originals as PDF in the survey details allows the originally scanned forms to be displayed The forms are displayed as a PDF file and can be opened as a whole or for each single questionnaire 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 117 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite survey data di Survey evaluation statistics tat Results in HTML format Results in PDF format EvaSys PDF repot v z t Raw data in SPHINX format amp Raw data in SPSS format O E Raw data in CSV format Show recognized form originals as PDF Su tw Delete original scanned files of recognized forms Figure 110 Survey Details Show recognized form originals as PDF After selecting whether you view the entirely or only one questionnaire simply click on Show The original scanned forms are displayed Green boxes show which check marks were recognized by the VividForms Reader and therefore provides a quick overview of the recognition process This option is available for paper based surveys 1 Questions about you Which gender do you belong to male female What is your age 18 29 30 39 CT 40 49 LI 50 59 C 60 69 LI Older than 69 Figure 111 Show recognized form originals as PDF Maintenance
645. ways fresh EE EU EE E EE E o The meals in the refectory are always tasty EE EE EE EE EL EI 0 Figure 528 Pole Labels in the PDF Preview Continue adding scaled questions Do not define individual pole labels since the pole label headers perform this function The pole labels are automatically assigned to all scaled questions below This allows them to be displayed in the PDF reports 2 8 2 Vertical Pole Labels Vertical pole labels can be defined as an alternative to the horizontal labels Chose the option HE Extended Pole Labels after creating a new question group Now enter the option texts into the dialog Each text element is limited to 25 characters Dy Extended Pole Labels Extended Pole Labels Option Stronaly Disagree Strongly Agree i T Agree Rather Agree Rather Disagree A Disagree KA strongly Disagree Abstention Degree of inclination 45 e Please notice that the inclination of the answer options will not be shown in the preview of the VividForms Editor due to technical reasons Apply Cancel Figure 529 Enter and Edit of the Vertical Pole Labels Click Apply to close the dialog and create the vertical pole labels on the form Now scaled questions can be added The system will assign the left and right pole labels to each defined scaled question below the vertical pole labels 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 397 EvaSys
646. wer ie Ah Aker E 16 Non anonymous surveyS 67 166 Legal references 00 cee eee aes 166 Norm Norm values for questionnaires 316 Norm profile ines 214 Norming 314 NOMS wee neue eee nena EE Goa h 314 Calculation 0 cee ee 315 Notes of a survey n n annann nannan 206 220 O OMR AE EE TEE EEN 191 Online survey Accessibility EEN 20 Advanced Configuration 05 90 Certificate of Participation 90 Conduction of online surveys 127 DOSa sesorang inn Geo Gee eae e see ees 89 FORWAIdING oa iasau cies a isos Ge mores 90 Management of online surveys 127 Mobile devices 140 Password based 000 102 153 Preview a4ceu ce 6 oe oa a aes a sw oe a 127 PSWD procedure 00000 eee eee 101 Online survey template Access rightS 0 0 0 0 0c eee eee eee 149 EE 141 Online Design 89 Open question Backing up image files of open questions 35 Handwrting recognition 384 Responses to open questions 201 Segmentation 386 Optional question 155 Organization structure Wee cn eea eek ee an nee eer yu eee area 120 P Paper survey nannaa aaan 126 Participant data EGIL TEETE EET TENERENT Bee Ge 66 Editing participant data 170 Participant Number Response Rate 113 503 Participants email addresses Import of course participants email addresses Passing Ed
647. when creating profile line emails If this option is activated the report creator can additionally see and choose the courses of active user accounts Blocking time for pages of forms in the Web Verifier Time in minutes for which a page of the form is blocked by a user During this time no other user can access the form Consider the minimum response for unweighted merged reports If activated those questions which reached an insufficient number of responses are ignored When deactivated every question will be included into the unweighted merged report Force settings of the administrator If activated after the processing of paper surveys the settings of the administrator are used instead of the responsible subunit administrator Automatic verification The automatic verification allows certain cases of a batch to be verified automatically Scan resolution Resolution in DPI This setting influences the scaling of images with handwritten answers in PDF reports The default resolution is 200 DPI 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 487 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management HTML report Relative values The HTML reports show the distribution of the responses to closed questions with rel ative activated or absolute deactivated values HTML report Minimum percentage for display Defines the minimum percentage of response frequency to a question in relation to the total number of returns needed
648. wing graphic the course Management Strategies of Prof Philip Belmore from summer term 2011 was compared with the results of the two previous periods WS10 11 SS10 304 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 4 Advanced Reporting Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Management Strategies Subunit Professional Development Name of the instructor Prof Dr Philipp Belmore Name of the course Management Strategies s Name of the survey Comparative line WS10 11 Management Strategies T Comparative line 510 Management Strategies d m A G H g i wins Ti What is the grade of your last school graduation Grader e 5 to 5 0 o d hs d The instructor is always well prepared SI kk Au Y The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way SI i AM BE aN The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc ll bi without any problems Figure 393 Profile Line Comparison Example of a Profile Line Comparison with two Previous Periods E SJ H 2 3 H HH i ech ct oc to D G G ee ee ee ee ee at e e e Re se ct Ne e st E L vuk lstl eh D I fa EP a Please note that you define these settings per questionnaire as an administrator as well as a subunit administrator Profile Line Comparison in the PDF Report Add Report for Comparison As well as defining previous periods for the profile line comparison yo
649. word 154 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw PE deer Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys Now if desired and as long as the group of participants is known the password can be sent to these Click on the option Send password via email to participants This opens an input window In the field Recipient all email addresses that have been imported for the course are shown If no addresses were imported they can also be deposited manually afterwards Click on Submit to start the sending send password by email to respondents Survey Introduction into Sociology Instructor Dr White Note After diding on send and sending the email please do not use the browser function REFRESH or RELOAD F5 as this results in the submission being repeated Language English e Recipient 5oe doe example com m miller example com s brown example com p bowman example com 5j black example com f hernandez example com h james example com Changa pE Q Preview online survey Number of participants for calculating response 34 rate 9 Accept Finish Data Collection Close Survey Z Delete Survey fa Assign survey to substitute instructor H Edit Show notes ricpaper de Submit Back Figure 160 Sending passwords to participants 3 2 8 Adding Questions Using the Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions The function Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions was developed in order to g
650. written comments has been completed decentral CE The administrator sends the instructor trainer the reports from the survey CE 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 459 EvaSys V F Survey Automation Suite System Settings and Management Content Personalized text accompanying the processed survey The PDF report is normally sent with this text In addition or as an alternative the raw data can be sent as a Excel readable CSV file see EvaSys settings email functions The message of a paper survey after the handwritten comments to open questions have been manually entered by a data entry assistant This is the case for those sub units working with manual data entry Information Concerning Deactivating the Instructor Trainer s Optional Ques tions Trigger The administrator has again deactivated the instructor trainer s optional questions for the relevant survey Content Personalized text with the name of the instructor trainer as well as the course name Form PSWDs to Instructor Trainer Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions Trigger The instructor trainer s optional questions for a survey has been completed by the instructor trainer Now he she or the group address receives an email with the required cover sheet and the questionnaire The function EvaSys Settings Survey Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions activa tion status must be activated Content Personalized text and attached PDF doc
651. y 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 63 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Guetta Sule of the PDF reports Activate the control box Further report recipients secondary instructors trainers in this course in the relevant course and add the individuals from the list Edit course of Dr Richelle White Course name Introduction into Sociology Program of study Course ID 02 P1246 Evaluation period continuous e Course Type Lecture m Location R P 061 Enrollment 80 Participants data Anonymous survey participants Ses Non anonymous survey participants panel Language english Y Further repor recipients secondary instructors lv existing Computer Sciences Donna Harwood Professional Development Donna Harwood Remove SC Figure 46 Definition of Secondary Instructors A Browse Import instructors from CSV mp CSV file contains a column with information whether the course has secondary instructors Figure 47 Activating of Secondary Instructors During the Import Expanding the Course Data with User Specific Fields You can expand the existing course information by a number of fields in order to describe them better These fields can be defined at EvaSys Settings Course User Data Fields Select at Number of additional fields how many information fields you would like to use You may add from 0 zero to 5 64 2011 Electric Pap
652. y Aa Case gt lt Send Email to Support Organization Sender EvaSys Academy Sender name Peter Brown Gender email Administrator w Phone Recipient Information Module nformnation SE General question we Seege S So Search ype rchitecturePrivileges Send Ema Subject aj Uiiization Statistics Your message A System Summary Maintenance Sch License J Se al to Support gt System Cleaning a system stalus Evasys Website Documentation 2 Maas SS Semple Files bw About EvaSys Protocols W Deliveries Attachments Log Boot Browse Add Deletion Con T Web Service Log SG Mai Service Log Next Figure 2 Email to the Support Department This function enables you to send an email to the EvaSys support department Enter your name as well as your email address in the field Sender The selection list Request Type provides you with following options e General question You have a question regarding EvaSys e Support inquiry You have a problem with EvaSys and require assistance e Feature request You have a suggestion for improvement or an idea to develop Evasys Choose one of these query types and then choose the appropriate category under Module In the fields Subject and Your message you can type your message Below the message area you can add up to three attachments click on Browse select one file and click on Add The attachment should not be larger than
653. y Automation Suite System Settings and Management 1 8 License Administration 1 8 1 Overview on the License Administration The license administration gives you an overview of the properties of your EvaSys license Here you can see information about the product version the database and about the activation of the paper and online surveys In case you have licensed the handwriting recognition open questions of VividForms questionnaires can be pro cessed automatically In addition you can see the number of available scanstation and user licenses and if you have the corresponding licenses the administration of VividForms Designer licenses In the license management the license key which has been entered during installa tion is saved In case of a system extension by users or software add ons or in case of a change of name you will receive a new license key which contains the old as well as the new scope of services In this case please overwrite the existing license key and or copy the new one to avoid typing errors and click the button Save Should you have entered an invalid key the old key will not be lost Only a new valid license key will overwrite an existing key Please note The server on which EvaSys is installed has to use a dongle hardware key It must be plugged in a USB port of the server where you want to install EvaSys Otherwise you cannot use the software If you are interested in further copy protection met
654. y Demo Subunit T Public items disabled The subunit sdiminstalo is not able to add public items to the question library Cancer _ lt lt Back Next gt gt Figure 151 Creation of Templates by Subunit Administrators Assignment of Rights Viewing the Results for Online Survey Participants In comparison to paper surveys implementing comprehensive online surveys offers some organizational advantages But the often lower number of returns poses a sig nificant disadvantage which can only be partly compensated for through motivational measures aimed at the survey participants Along with the participants obligation possibly entailing queries regarding the regu latory framework or the quality of resulting data quite often rewarding motivational procedures are also followed These in turn entail organizational effort Evasys therefore offers the alternative of survey participants accessing the survey results Of course access is granted only to those survey participants who have in fact participated in the survey Access to survey results is enabled in the questionnaire details so access is individu ally controlled per questionnaire You will find the area Evaluation for participants in the field Usage details of a questionnaire There you can authorize the viewing of results As in this case only access to results of closed questions is authorized the option Display responses to open questions
655. y directory The PDF file This PDF file is the master for all the other PDF files later created for the surveys As a sample it has an empty barcode Normally the file has a five digit name followed by the character sequence _vfp VividForms Plus e g HEsaC_vfp pdtf The PDF file must be found in the directory EvaSys forms The name of the whole path in your file system is probably C Apache htdocs evasys data forms If there are any ambiguities please consult your system administrator To import the questionnaire log in to EvaSys as an administrator If you open the list of questionnaires in the menu System Settings Questionnaires you can import new questionnaires Because you want to import a VividForms Plus form and this ques 428 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Ge e Implementation of Specific Design Requirements VividForms Plus tionnaire has not been created with the VividForms Editor you have to deactivate the option VividForms Questionnaire import CADocuments and Settings Adr VividF orms Figure 581 Import Form Choose the FBD2 file of the questionnaire and confirm by clicking on OK Bi Available Questionnaires Show all questionnaires of the Subunit Administrators Show deactivated questionnaires at the end of the listing including module questionnaires Date Engine Status Action 05 23 2011 VF Editor 3 Select v 305 General General Questions Copy
656. y education 2 Questions about the instructor RS e oF Ld ornare ster O DD DI D oO Oo nesriactor b ae Ce Ooo oO oo LJ The innus eege E a Sect ena e DD DD DD o viden projecior eic without any probes Piense grade the naruto for his pr OF OF OO O OF rn good O abet Pinas give ue your feedback about the instructor ma well as suggestions bor improvement Opa SSF ih vs s Var zi Page Ta L Me A ll Figure 85 Hard Copy Procedure 3 1 3 _PSWD Based Online Survey The online surveys are done with the so called PSWD procedure When an online survey is created EvaSys generates a number of PSWD codes PSWD codes ensure that a participant takes part in a survey only once as without them it would be impossi ble to prevent an individual from completing a questionnaire more than once No software is necessarry for filling a HTML questionnaire apart from a browser An online survey can appear as either a complete questionnaire or in sections in which case the respondent can navigate back and forth between sections Also in PSWD based surveys participants can save their entries and return to the question naire at a later point in time to complete it 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 101 EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model A print button may be activated in order to print the completed questionnaire The questionnaire must be saved temporarily before printing Another feature is the filter tool which allow
657. y open the general PDF Report to initiate the creation of the PDF Reports for the single module courses In the following chapters the conduction of the single steps will be discussed in detail 7 2 Activating module surveys The module evaluation is activated by default You can change the activation of the module evaluation by logging in as administrator and opening the menu System Set tings EvaSys Settings Now select the area Central Evaluation and scroll down You will find the option Module Evaluation Activate or deactivate the Module Evaluation and save the changes by clicking Save at the bottom of the page Module Evaluation Activated Activates the possibility to evaluate modules Figure 448 Activate Module Evaluation 7 3 Creating Module Questionnaires and Linking Them to Course Types Module questionnaires consist of multiple components which are used to display gen eral questions about the module itself or special questions related to single courses or course elements in the module For each of the building bricks of a module survey individual questionnaires need to be created using the VividForms Editor e g one for general questions one for lec tures one for seminars etc for further information on creating a questionnaire with the VividForms Editor see chapter C of this manual Remember to give the forms short relevant names so that they can later be separated 2011 Electric P
658. y these emails can be sent to the addresses of those responsible for the production of the questionnaires System Settings EvaSys Set tings Survey Instructor s Trainers Optional Questions direct delivery of question naire PSWDs or System Settings EvaSys Settings Email Functions amp Accounts Instructor s Trainer s Optional Optional Questions group address 156 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 2 Implementation of Surveys To configure the Instructor s Optional Questions proceed as follows Open the menu Instructur s Optional Questions in the main menu Subunits Select 1 the subunit 2 the survey period 3 the course type 4 the questionnaire and 5 the course s Select now activate H Activate Remind Deactivate Sending emails to instructors Figure 162 Activate Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions Personalized emails are sent to all instructor trainer accounts for all selected courses These emails contain a link to the webpage of Instructor Trainer s Optional Questions Such an email could read as follows Dear Mr Example The Instructor s Trainer s Optional Questions has been activated for you You can enter questions for the survey or course Time Management by clicking on the link given below Alternatively you can copy the complete link and enter it into the address line of your Internet browser Link http localhost evasy
659. ymous participants via CSV import In the details of a course click on Edit data of participants In the following window choose the CSV import of survey participant data scsv import of survey participant data lrppogt suray participants dala Clbocuments and Setting edn Browne eeng Figure 55 CSV Import of Survey Participants Data Click on Browse and indicate the location of the CSV file File Upload Look irr B Sample Files My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents H My Computer File name Particpants_anonymous cs My Network Files of type All Files Figure 56 Choosing the CSV File Click on Open and then on Import The email addresses of your participants are now linked with the course 70 2011 Electric Paper GmbH EvaSys iw Survey Automation Suite Phase 1 Preparation of a Survey Period Y Information 8 of 8 survey participants imported Administrate participants Participants of Introduction into Sociology Email Delete joe doe example com m miller example com s brown example com p bowman example com j black example com fhernandez example com h james example com b button example com fox example com RERRRRRR ER Add Delete at Figure 57 Import of Email Addresses was Successful As already mentioned you can delete single email addresses by clicking on the red cross next to the relevant email address In addition you can de
660. you have scanned data into EvaSys for a survey and or received data dur ing online surveys a PDF report is generated automatically with this data The more data you scan the more important it is to be able to compare and summarize this data For these purposes there are several aids available in EvaSys One of these are the functionality s of the so called report creator which are presented in the following 5 2 1 The User Role of the Report Creator The report creator is a user created by the EvaSys administrator in order to produce summary reports for the captured data and to send comparative profile lines In prac tice the person in charge of the system s administration often also takes on the func tion of the report creator too Administrator and subunit administrators can therefore also take on the role of Report Creator in their user profile In order to be able to sepa rate the functions there is a separate user role for the report creator in EvaSys Of course multiple report creators can be created in the system Note The reports which the report creator produces are based on the data already cap tured That means that first you must implement and evaluate surveys before you can use the report creator Fundamental Considerations and Settings First of all it is important that you carefully consider what insight the report creator should be permitted to have or must have e ls the report creator supposed to Summarize th
661. you will see a list of the available norm types which cannot be deleted This total norm is generally valid unless you create a special sub norm You can now give the total norm a norm value basis by selecting one of the reports shown in the list in the area Assignment of the norm type total norm It is not possible to limit the total norm to courses or subunits In order to create sub norms enter the name of the sub norm in the list norm types and click on New The assignment area for the new sub norm now appears You can now select all of the course types and subunits as well as the corresponding norm value basis valid for this sub norm 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 319 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Survey Automation Suite 6 2 Quality Guidelines With quality guidelines you can define minimum standards for questions in a question naire that have to be reached by survey responses By using such an overview executives within an organization such as a dean or a manager are able to put together and assess a number of evaluated courses and access detailed reports if desired The subunit administrator sets quality guidelines for a questionnaire by allocating a weight and a threshold value to each question or question group that will subse quently be used in the calculation of a quality index For an evaluated topic or course this quality index can be between 0 and 100 6 2 1 Setting Quality
662. your needs In the following chapters you will get an overview on how change the layout of the sys tem and the relevant documents or where to find the relevant chapters in the man ual 3 1 1 Logging into EvaSys Entry Points The EvaSys server offers users two entry points to login Put a link to the relevant entry point at an appropriate place on your university company website Entry point for Instructors Trainers and Administrators lt EVASYS SERVERADRESSE gt INDEXEVA PHP User name Password OK Figure 13 Entry Point for Instructors Trainers and Administrators Portal for instructors trainers and administrators User names and passwords are required When access Is limited this page can be opened only from computers in the defined IP address domain for users Entry Point for Participants of an Online Survey lt EVASYS SERVERADRESSE gt INDEXSTUD PHP 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 27 EvaSys V Preparation and General Notes Survey Automation Suite Version 5 0 Figure 14 Entry Point for Participants of an Online Survey Portal for voting in online surveys A PSWD is required 3 1 2 Login Security Showing a CAPTCHA Graphic Evasys offers you the possibility of blending in a so called CAPTCHA graphic after a defined number of failed logins from an IP address This function protects EvaSys from automated attacks CAPTCHAs are graphics in which figures numbers or alphabetical characters are display
663. ype Secondary Administrator is already selected Click on Next to input the user data the most important being name email address login name and password In the third step the user can where necessary be assigned additional roles After clicking on Save the user is created and appears in the list of secondary administrators 2 Change the user type Instructor Dean of Studies Dean See utilization statistics Title First name John Subunit Administrator ees Last name Doe Secondary Administrator Se Phone Email john doe example com e Address 2 Edit additional roles Language Login name doe v Report creator New password eeeseeseees Additional roles dl Data Entry Assistant Confirm new password Cancel Figure 36 Creating Secondary Administrators 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 55 EvaSys V Your Evaluation Process The Phase Model Par Setting up a User Account manually Users always belong to a subunit Go to the corresponding subunit to find the func tions for adding new users Questionnaires System Settings System Information Search SI iv GAusers in subunit Professional Development Peter Brown KS Name CO Surveys Created Actions E 1 Et OW i i Administrator y a Prof Dr Philipp Belmore 3 l E 237 23 09062007 4 x EI Donna Harwood 4 6 6 08 72007 A a O S i a Carlos
664. ys are to be greyed out or completely hidden Hereby it is now possible to hide questions in all three display modes for online surveys per chapter per page and complete Display of filtered questions in online surveys 1 0 Filtered questions are deactivated displayed grayed out D e 1 Filtered questions are hidden invisible as such no longer visible for the participant Figure 562 Settings for Filtered Questions 5 3 Validation By defining validations you can test entries to open questions and matrix fields in online surveys with value ranges and regular expressions before a survey participant can send the questionnaire Validation Question to check Range of values Options Add question What is your age Add Figure 563 Validation To create validations select a matrix field or an open question from the list and click on Add Now select which values can be accepted e Numbers only Here you can delimit the value range by storing a minimum and maximum value e Letters only i e no blanks e Letters or numbers only e Date e Pattern simplified syntax By default the following templates are available three digit number word underscore number serial number All three examples are based on the following legend e L Letter e W Word 2011 Electric Paper GmbH 417 EvaSys iw Creating Questionnaires with VividForms Survey
665. z 3 ss11 Name Form Already printed No of Participants Copies v Human Resource Management 02 P1237 Quest_01 n a cover sheet 20 Cover sheet only Leadership Development 02 P1234 train_en 50 150 150 v Select all Pages to print 318 Request Back Figure 167 Batch Events Questionnaire Batch Printing If necessary each course can also be retrospectively deselected or later reselected by activating or deactivating the checkbox in the first column To start creating a PDF file click on the button Request Depending on the number of questionnaires cover sheets to be created the processing of the request can take up to several minutes If you have selected more pages than allowed for in the system settings cf System Settings EvaSys Settings VividForms Maximum amount of pages that can be printed through batch printing of forms a warning appears requesting that the number of copies to be printed be reduced As soon as the PDF file is completed a download window appears in your browser Now save the file to your hard disk or open it directly To print further pages for the same course click on the button Refresh The list is refreshed and you can make a new Selection Send Cover Sheets Forms This function emails the personalized cover sheets or questionnaires to the people who are linked to the respective surveys Both the text of the email message and that of the attached documents can be configu
666. z is selected from the list of courses and as the first comparison line Prof Development WS10 11 the name of the subunit report 5 Courses Reports Prof Dr Philipp Belmore a Management Strategies NA_2 Managing and maintaining a healthy lifestyle NA_1 II Organization and Management 02 P1236 Report Creator train_01 train_en train_en train_en train_en_1 train_en Belmore WS 10 11 train_en ee a ca a ee ee First Comparison Line Prof Development WS10 11 rain en e Second Comparison Line Deactivated Please Choose a Selection e Figure 371 Report Creator Selection of Profile Line and Comparison Line When you download with this selection the batch the following profile line appears Carlos Hernandez Organization and Management Profile Subunit Professional Development T Name of the instructor Carlos Hernandez Name of the course Organization and Management Name of the survey Comparative line Prof Development WS10 11 The instructor is always well prepared At E S E A 01 av e e ave The instructor explains even complex topics in a comprehensible way i 0 av wi 6 av e3 6 The instructor handles the technical equipment video projector etc i ge ed A without any problems av 3 7 Please grade the instructor for this course av 3 5 g i i u poor k very good AE The lead time of the course is adequate Strongly dis P Strongly agree av 3 6 agree

User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents